270 Series - Ohmite - Farnell Element 14 - Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

Branding Farnell element14 (France)

 

Farnell Element 14 :

[TXT]

 Farnell-HIP4081A-Int..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ISL6251-ISL6..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DG411-DG412-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3367-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ICM7228-Inte..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Data-Sheet-K..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Silica-Gel-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TKC2-Dusters..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CRC-HANDCLEA..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-760G-French-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Decapant-KF-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1734-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Araldite-Fus..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-fiche-de-don..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-safety-data-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-A-4-Hardener..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC-Debugger-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MSP430-Hardw..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SmartRF06-Ev..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC2531-USB-H..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BK889B-PONT-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:42  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-User-Guide-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41  2.0M

Miniature

Everything You Need To Know About Arduino

Miniature

Tutorial 01 for Arduino: Getting Acquainted with Arduino

Miniature

The Cube® 3D Printer

Miniature

What's easier- DIY Dentistry or our new our website features?

 

Miniature

Ben Heck's Getting Started with the BeagleBone Black Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Home-Brew Solder Reflow Oven 2.0 Trailer

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 3 - Online with Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Discover Simulink Promo -- Exclusive element14 Webinar

Miniature

Ben Heck's TV Proximity Sensor Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's PlayStation 4 Teardown Trailer

See the trailer for the next exciting episode of The Ben Heck show. Check back on Friday to be among the first to see the exclusive full show on element…

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 4 - Your First Raspberry Pi Project

Connect your Raspberry Pi to a breadboard, download some code and create a push-button audio play project.

Miniature

Ben Heck Anti-Pickpocket Wallet Trailer

Miniature

Molex Earphones - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tripp Lite Surge Protector - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Microchip ChipKIT Pi - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Beagle Bone Black - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M E26, LED Lamps - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M Colored Duct Tape - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tenma Soldering Station - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Duratool Screwdriver Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Cubify 3D Cube - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Bud Boardganizer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Starter Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Fluke 323 True-rms Clamp Meter - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Dymo RHINO 6000 Label Printer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M LED Advanced Lights A-19 - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Innovative LPS Resistor Features Very High Power Dissipation

Miniature

Charge Injection Evaluation Board for DG508B Multiplexer Demo

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 2

Miniature

Introducing element14 TV

Miniature

Ben Heck Time to Meet Your Maker Trailer

Miniature

Détecteur de composants

Miniature

Recherche intégrée

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar Trailer Part 1

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar - Part 2 Trailer

Miniature

PiFace Control and Display Introduction

Miniature

Flashmob Farnell

Miniature

Express Yourself in 3D with Cube 3D Printers from Newark element14

Miniature

Farnell YouTube Channel Move

Miniature

Farnell: Design with the best

Miniature

French Farnell Quest

Miniature

Altera - 3 Ways to Quickly Adapt to Changing Ethernet Protocols

Miniature

Cy-Net3 Network Module

Miniature

MC AT - Professional and Precision Series Thin Film Chip Resistors

Miniature

Solderless LED Connector

Miniature

PSA-T Series Spectrum Analyser: PSA1301T/ PSA2701T

Miniature

3-axis Universal Motion Controller For Stepper Motor Drivers: TMC429

Miniature

Voltage Level Translation

Puce électronique / Microchip :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 2 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 3 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 1 of 3

Sans fil - Wireless :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Wireless Power Solutions - Wurth Electronics, Texas Instruments, CadSoft and element14

Miniature

Analog Devices - Remote Water Quality Monitoring via a Low Power, Wireless Network

Texas instrument :

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Automotive LED Headlights

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Digital Power Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Sensor Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Wireless Pen Input Demo (Mobile World Congress)

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Automation System Components

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x - Industry's first 10-GHz fixed/floating point DSP

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x KeyStone Multicore Architecture

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Interfaces

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Concerto™ MCUs - Connectivity without compromise

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Stellaris Robot Chronos

Miniature

Texas Instruments - DRV8412-C2-KIT, Brushed DC and Stepper Motor Control Kit

Ordinateurs :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Connect Raspberry Pi to Car Computer

Miniature

Ben's Portable Raspberry Pi Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ben's Raspberry Pi Portable Computer Trailer 2

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pocket Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Atari Computer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Using Computer Monitors for External Displays

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Partnership with BBC Computer Literacy Project - Answers from co-founder Eben Upton

Miniature

Installing RaspBMC on your Raspberry Pi with the Farnell element14 Accessory kit

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Served - Joey Hudy

Miniature

Happy Birthday Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Raspberry Pi board B product overview

Logiciels :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Opensource or Free CAD Software

Miniature

Tektronix FPGAView™ software makes debugging of FPGAs faster than ever!

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Open-Source Schematic Capture and PCB Layout Software

Miniature

Introduction to Cadsoft EAGLE PCB Design Software in Chinese

Miniature

Altera - Developing Software for Embedded Systems on FPGAs

Tutoriels :

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 1

Miniature

the knode tutorial - element14

Miniature

Ben's Autodesk 123D Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben's CadSoft EAGLE Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Soldering Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's AVR Dev Board tutorial

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pinball Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Interface Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

First Stage with Python and PiFace Digital

Miniature

Cypress - Getting Started with PSoC® 3 - Part 2

Miniature

Energy Harvesting Challenge

Miniature

New Features of CadSoft EAGLE v6

Autres documentations :

 [TXT] Farnell-SL59830-Inte..> 06-Jul-2014 10:07 1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD7171-16-Bi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:06  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Low-Noise-24..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  938K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-74LCX573-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1N4148WS-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FAN6756-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  850K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  861K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ES1F-ES1J-fi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04  867K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-QRE1113-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  879K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-2N7002DW-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDC2512-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDV301N-Digi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  886K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-S1A-Fairchil..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  896K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BAV99-Fairch..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  896K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-74AC00-74ACT..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03  911K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NaPiOn-Panas..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  911K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LQ-RELAYS-AL..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  924K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ev-relays-ae..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  926K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  931K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Amplifier-In..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  940K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serial-File-..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02  941K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Both-the-Del..> 06-Jul-2014 10:01  948K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Videk-PDF.htm   06-Jul-2014 10:01  948K  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M 

[TXT]

 Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-0430300011-D..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-06-6544-8-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3M-Polyimide..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-3M-VolitionT..> 25-Mar-2014 08:18  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-10BQ060-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 09:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-10TPB47M-End..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-12mm-Size-In..> 14-Jun-2014 09:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-24AA024-24LC..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-50A-High-Pow..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-1907-2006-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-5910-PDF.htm    25-Mar-2014 08:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-6517b-Electr..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-A-True-Syste..> 29-Mar-2014 11:13  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AD524-PDF.htm   20-Mar-2014 17:33  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ADL6507-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ADSP-21362-A..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF1225-12-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:40  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ALF2412-24-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-AN10361-Phil..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARADUR-HY-13..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARALDITE-201..> 21-Mar-2014 08:12  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ARALDITE-CW-..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATmega640-VA..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATtiny20-PDF..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Alimentation..> 01-Apr-2014 07:42  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Amplificateu..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-An-Improved-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Avvertenze-e..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BC846DS-NXP-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BC847DS-NXP-..> 23-Jun-2014 10:24  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BF545A-BF545..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BK2650A-BK26..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BT151-650R-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BTA204-800C-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BUJD203AX-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BYV29F-600-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BZX384-serie..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Battery-GBA-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-C.A-6150-C.A..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-C.A 8332B-C...> 01-Apr-2014 07:40  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CC2560-Bluet..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CD4536B-Type..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CS5532-34-BS..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ceramic-tran..> 14-Jun-2014 18:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cles-electro..> 21-Mar-2014 08:13  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Connectors-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:12  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Construction..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cordless-dri..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Davum-TMC-PD..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-De-la-puissa..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Directive-re..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Documentatio..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Download-dat..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 20-Mar-2014 08:14  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ELMA-PDF.htm    29-Mar-2014 11:13  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EMC1182-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm  11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-F28069-Picco..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm  19-Mar-2014 18:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FDS-ITW-Spra..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fastrack-Sup..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ferric-Chlor..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Fluke-1730-E..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GALVA-A-FROI..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GALVA-MAT-Re..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-GN-RELAYS-AG..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HC49-4H-Crys..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HFE1600-Data..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HI-70300-Sol..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-IP4252CZ16-8..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-KSZ8851SNL-S..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LCW-CQ7P.CC-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LME49725-Pow..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LOCTITE-542-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LOCTITE-3463..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Leaded-Trans..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Loctite3455-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Low-cost-Enc..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Lubrifiant-a..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MC3510-PDF.htm  25-Mar-2014 08:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MCF532x-7x-E..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MPXV7002-Rev..> 20-Mar-2014 17:33  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MX670-MX675-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Microchip-MC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:27  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Midas-Active..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Midas-MCCOG4..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Miniature-Ci..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Mistral-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:12  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-83421-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-COMMER..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Multi-Functi..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Nilfi-sk-E-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Novembre-201..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OXPCIE958-FB..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PDTA143X-ser..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PDTB123TT-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PESD9X5.0L-P..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC18F2455-2..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PIC24FJ256GB..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMBT4403-PNP..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMEG4002EL-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:18  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PMEG4010CEH-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-15..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-EC..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-EZ..> 20-Mar-2014 08:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Id..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Ne..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Ra..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-TS..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Panasonic-Y3..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Pompes-Charg..> 24-Apr-2014 20:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ponts-RLC-po..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Portable-Ana..> 29-Mar-2014 11:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Premier-Farn..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Produit-3430..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Q48-PDF.htm     23-Jun-2014 10:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Radial-Lead-..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Reglement-RE..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Repartiteurs..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-S-TRI-SWT860..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SMBJ-Transil..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SPLC780A1-16..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SSC7102-Micr..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SVPE-series-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:15  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Septembre-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serie-Standa..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-2600B..> 20-Mar-2014 17:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Signal-PCB-R..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Strangkuhlko..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Supercapacit..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TDK-Lambda-H..> 14-Jun-2014 18:21  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Telemetres-l..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Termometros-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-U2270B-PDF.htm  14-Jun-2014 18:15  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-USB-Buccanee..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-V4N-PDF.htm     14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPS-AC-Octop..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-celpac-SUL84..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-china_rohs_o..> 21-Mar-2014 10:04  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ir1150s_fr.p..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-techfirst_se..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-testo-205-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-testo-470-Fo..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Sefram-7866HD.pdf-PD..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  472K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-CAT_ENREGISTR..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  461K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-CAT_MESUREURS..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  435K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  481K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  442K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  422K  

[TXT]

 Sefram-SP270.pdf-PDF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46  464K
1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com 113 270 Series Vitreous Enamel Power Series Wattage Ohms Core Code Voltage Std. Terminal L12 12 0.1-51K D 565 57 L25 25 0.15-100K K 625 40 L50 50 0.38-260K K 1625 40 L100 100 0.23-101K M 2845 40 L175 175 0.13-101K P 3595 46 L225 225 0.16-129K P 4595 46 L500 500 0.38-218K S 4970 45 L1000 1000 0.69-392K S 8900 45 Non-Inductive versions available; Other sizes available; Also available in low cost Centohm or Silicone coating; Consult Ohmite. * Maximum Voltage is based on Ohm’s Law [V=√P*R] as limited by the resistance value of specified product Coating Lead free vitreous enamel. Large models (500 watts and up) are supplied in Silicone Ceramic. Also available in low-cost Centohm coating; Consult factory. Core Tubular ceramic. Terminals Solder coated radial lug. RoHS solder composition is 96% Sn, 3.5% Ag, 0.5% Cu Derating Linearly from 100% @ +25°C to 0% @ +350°C. Tolerance ±5% 1Ω and over (J); ±10% under 1Ω (K) Power rating Based on 25°C free air rating. Overload 10 times rated wattage for 5 seconds. Temperature coefficient 1 to 20Ω: ±400 ppm/°C; Above 20Ω: ±260 ppm/°C Dielectric withstanding voltage 1000 VAC: 12 to 100 watt rating. 3000 VAC: 175 to 225 watt rating (Measured from terminal to mounting bracket) Max. amps use the formula √P/R Power limitations for high resistance values When resistance exceeds the resistance values listed, derate the Power Rating by 25% to improve reliability. No power derating necessary for ratings higher than 100W. Power Resistance rating value 12W 3,900Ω 25W 12,000Ω 50W 35,000Ω 100W 75,000Ω Mounting Hardware see http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/lug-mounting.php Select 270 Type fixed resistors for applications requiring wattage ratings from 12 to 1000 watts. The 270 Type resistors are equipped with lug terminals suitable for soldering or sturdy bolt connection. When secure mounting is required, the hollow core of these resistors permit fastening with spring-type brackets, thru bolts or thru bolts with slotted-steel brackets. Suitable for rugged applications, the 270 Type resistors feature all-welded construction and durable lead free vitreous enamel coating. Mounting brackets not included with resistors. Features • Terminals suitable for soldering or bolt connection • High wattage applications • Rugged lead free vitreous enamel coating • Flame resistant coating • All-welded construction • RoHS compliant available • “Fast on” option – see terminal 538, http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/terminals.pdf SERIES SPECIFICAT IONS characteristics (continued) 114 1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com Standard part numbers for 270 series  = Standard values; check availability using the worldwide inventory search at www.ohmite.com Red outlined values supplied in Silicone-Ceramic coatings instead of vitreous enamel. 0.51  L12JKR51E 1  L12J1R0E 3.3  L12J3R3E 4.7  L12J4R7E 10  L12J10RE 12  L12J12RE 15  L12J15RE 22  L12J22RE 27  L12J27RE 33  L12J33RE 47  L12J47RE 68  L12J68RE 82  L12J82RE 100  L12J100E 150  L12J150E 1 –––1R0E      2 –––2R0E      3 –––3R0E      4 –––4R0E      5 –––5R0E      10 –––10RE      15 –––15RE  25 –––25RE      50 –––50RE      75 –––75RE      100 –––100E      125 –––125E   150 –––150E      200 –––200E   250 –––250E      500 –––500E      750 –––750E     800 –––800E   1,000 –––1K0E      1,500 –––1K5E     2,000 –––2K0E      180  L12J180E 270  L12J270E 330  L12J330E 390  L12J390E 470  L12J470E 560  L12J560E 1000  L12J1K0E 1200  L12J1K2E 1500  L12J1K5E 2200  L12J2K2E 2700  L12J2K7E 4700  L12J4K7E 10000  L12J10KE 18000  L12J18KE 22000  L12J22KE 51000  L12J51KE 2,500 –––2K5E     3,000 –––3K0E      3,500 –––3K5E  4,000 –––4K0E   5,000 –––5K0E      6,000 –––6K0E  7,500 –––7K5E     10,000 –––10KE      12,000 –––12KE  15,000 –––15KE     20,000 –––20KE     25,000 –––25KE    30,000 –––30KE   35,000 –––35KE  40,000 –––40KE   50,000 –––50KE     60,000 –––60KE  75,000 –––75KE    100,000 –––100KE      150,000 –––150KE  200,000 –––200KE  250,000 –––250KE  Ohmic value 12 Watt Ohmic value 12 Watt Ohmic value L25J––– 25 L50J––– 50 L100J––– 100 L175J––– 175 Wattage Part No. Prefix  Suffix L225J––– 225 L500J––– 500 L1000J–––1000  Ohmic value L25J––– 25 L50J––– 50 L100J––– 100 L175J––– 175 Wattage Part No. Prefix  Suffix L225J––– 225 L500J––– 500 L1000J–––1000  Tolerance J = 5% K = 10% Core Diameter See “Core and Terminal Selection” Ohms R500 = 0.500Ω 1R00 = 1Ω 250R = 250Ω 1K00 = 1,000Ω 25K0 = 25,000Ω 25K5 = 25,500Ω RoHS Compliant Coating 270 = Vitreous 470 = Silicone Ceramic Wattage Terminal Type See “Resistor Terminals for Tubular Cores” Non-inductive Blank = Standard N = Non-inductive L 2 5 J 1 0 0 E Tolerance J = 5% K = 10% Ohms 1R0 = 1Ω 250 = 250Ω 1K0 = 1,000Ω 25K = 25,000Ω 25K5 = 25,500Ω RoHS Compliant Series Wattage Coating Blank = Vitreous C = Centohm S = Silicone Non-inductive Blank = Standard N = Non-inductive F = Fast on (optional) See website for custom core and terminal info L D C Series Wattage L D C Core Code* Std. Term.** L12 12 1.75 / 44.4 0.313 / 7.94 0.188 / 4.76 D 57 L25 25 2.0 / 50.8 0.562 / 14.3 0.313 / 7.94 K 40 L50 50 4.0 / 101.6 0.562 / 14.3 0.313 / 7.94 K 40 L100 100 6.5 / 165.1 0.750 / 19.1 0.50 / 12.7 M 40 L175 175 8.5 / 215.9 1.125 / 28.6 0.75 / 19.1 P 46 L225 225 10.5 / 266.7 1.125 / 28.6 0.75 / 19.1 P 46 L500 500 12.0 / 304.8 2.50 / 63.5 1.75 / 44.5 S 45 L1000 1000 20.0 / 508.0 2.50 / 63.5 1.75 / 44.5 S 45 * http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/200-210-270-custom.pdf ** http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/terminals.pdf dimensions in./mm ordering information 270 Series Vitreous Enamel Power Standard Made-to-order 1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com REV 4602 High Power Wirewound Heatsinkable BA Series Aluminum Cased Resistor Overload 5 times rated wattage for 10 sec. Power Rating Free air; greater with heatsink Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 2.5KV, 1 min., 50/60 Hz Insulation Resistance ≥100MΩ Working Voltage ≥800V Surface Temp. Rise 385°C Wire UL listed 3199 Features • Three extrusion forms available • Heatsinkable • Rugged design • Up to 1000 watts • Thermal cut-off available • Scalable, custom lengths available • Custom leads available A p p l i c at i o n s • Dynamic Braking • Motor Starting • Power Control characteristics SERIES SPECIFICATIONS Series Wattage* Resistance range Tolerance Length BA1160 500 0.5Ω - 18KΩ ±10% 160mm BA2320 700 10Ω - 10KΩ ±10% 320mm BA3266 1000 10Ω - 10KΩ ±10% 266mm * Free air rating 1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com REV 4602 High Power Wirewound Heatsinkable DIMENSIONS BA Series Aluminum Cased Resistor ORDERING INFORMATION 10" 254mm 1.18" 30mm L ø0.24" / 6.2mm 4.92" 95mm 2.80" 71mm 3.15 ~ 3.31" 80 ~ 84mm 4.33" 110mm Thermostat (optional) 3.94" 100.0mm L 31.50" 800.1mm 1.18" 30.0mm 5.49" 139.5mm 5.49" 139.5mm 3.43" 87.1mm 17.72" 450.1mm ø 0.23" / 5.8mm Thermostat (optional) Thermostat (optional) 5.00" 127.0mm 2.95" 74.9mm L Wire, 12ga., 600v 5.50" 139.7mm 6.50" 165.1mm 2.13" 54.1mm B A C 1 1 6 0 1 0 0 R K E Series B = block aluminum Length (mm) Termination A = wire leads B = solid terminals Tolerance K = ±10% Resistance RoHS Compliant Thermal switch (optional) Form 1 = extrusion BA1 BA2 BA3 20 www.bulgin.com BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology 900 Series Buccaneer® Terminals Terminals Sealing Gasket O Ring O Ring O Ring Contact Insert Contact Insert Locking Ring Main Body Gland Nut Cable Gland Gland Cage Panel Body Retaining Nut 􀀀 IP68 rating tested at 1.054kg/sq cm (15lb/sq in) 10m depth for 2 weeks 􀀀 IP69K rating tested to DIN 40050-9 􀀀 32A, 600V ac/dc rating 􀀀 2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 10 pole 􀀀 Plug or socket connection in each body style 􀀀 Water and dustproof to IP68 when mated 􀀀 ‘Scoop proof’ contacts 􀀀 Field termination - screw terminations 􀀀 Positive locating keyways - cannot be mis-connected 􀀀 Sealing caps available to maintain IP68 rating of unmated connectors 􀀀 Leading earth contact for 3, 4, 5 and 7 pole versions 􀀀 Trailing Neutral on 5 pole 􀀀 Compact design 􀀀 Easy assembly - no special tools required 􀀀 Single or 3 phase applications 􀀀 Bulkhead moulding available for use with flange mounting body for 45° or 90° mounting (order each separately) 􀀀 Cost effective solution 􀀀 Cable accomodation 7-22mm O/D 􀀀 Two cable connector versions for 15mm and 22mm (maximum) cable diameters 􀀀 Separate strain relief on large cable version 􀀀 UL, CSA and VDE approvals www.bulgin.com 21 BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology 900 Series Buccaneer® PX0911 􀀀 Mates with in-line flex or panel mounting versions 􀀀 Positive, fast acting locking ring - can be turned with a gloved hand 􀀀 Plug or socket versions 􀀀 PX0 Series13-15mm cable dia. as standard, 7-13mm with additional gland pack 􀀀 PXA Series 20-22mm cable dia. as standard, 14-20mm with additional gland pack 􀀀 Strain Relief Clamp (PXA Series only) Standard Cable Large Cable Description Standard Cable Large Cable Description PX0911/02/P PXA911/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0911/02/S PXA911/02/S 2 pole Socket PX0911/03/P PXA911/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0911/03/S PXA911/03/S 3 pole Socket PX0911/04/P PXA911/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0911/04/S PXA911/04/S 4 pole Socket PX0911/05/P PXA911/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0911/05/S PXA911/05/S 5 pole Socket PX0911/07/P PXA911/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0911/07/S PXA911/07/S 7 pole Socket PX0911/10/P PXA911/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0911/10/S PXA911/10/S 10 pole Socket Standard Cable Large Cable Description Standard Cable Large Cable Description PX0921/02/P PXA921/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0921/02/S PXA921/02/S 2 pole Socket PX0921/03/P PXA921/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0921/03/S PXA921/03/S 3 pole Socket PX0921/04/P PXA921/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0921/04/S PXA921/04/S 4 pole Socket PX0921/05/P PXA921/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0921/05/S PXA921/05/S 5 pole Socket PX0921/07/P PXA921/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0921/07/S PXA921/07/S 7 pole Socket PX0921/10/P PXA921/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0921/10/S PXA921/10/S 10 pole Socket PXA911 PX0921 PXA921 􀀀 Mates with either PX0911 or PXA911 connectors 􀀀 Plug or socket versions 􀀀 PX0 Series 13-15mm cable dia. as standard, 7-13mm with additional gland pack 􀀀 PXA Series 20-22mm cable dia. as standard, 14-20mm with additional gland pack 􀀀 Strain Relief Clamp (PXA Series only) FLEX CABLE CONNECTOR IN-LINE FLEX CABLE CONNECTOR 22 www.bulgin.com BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology PX0941 􀀀 Mates with PX0911 and PXA911 connectors 􀀀 Supplied with high grade sealing gasket 􀀀 Supplied with sealing grommets for panel fixing screws (M6 thread recommended) Flange Mounting PX0941/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0941/02/S 2 pole Socket PX0941/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0941/03/S 3 pole Socket PX0941/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0941/04/S 4 pole Socket PX0941/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0941/05/S 5 pole Socket PX0941/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0941/07/S 7 pole Socket PX0941/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0941/10/S 10 pole Socket Panel Mounting PX0931/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0931/02/S 2 pole Socket PX0931/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0931/03/S 3 pole Socket PX0931/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0931/04/S 4 pole Socket PX0931/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0931/05/S 5 pole Socket PX0931/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0931/07/S 7 pole Socket PX0931/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0931/10/S 10 pole Socket PX0931 􀀀 Mates with PX0911 and PXA911 connectors 􀀀 Single hole fixing 􀀀 Anti-rotation key 􀀀 High grade sealing gasket 􀀀 3-7mm panel thickness 900 Series Buccaneer® PANEL MOUNTING CONNECTOR FLANGE MOUNTING CONNECTOR www.bulgin.com 23 Sealing Caps PX0960 Sealing cap for use with PX0911/xx/x and PXA911/xx/x PX0970 Sealing cap for use with all other styles PX0990 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with PX0911/xx/x and PXA911/xx/x PX0991 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with PX0921/xx/x and PXA921/xx/x PX0992 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with PX0931 and PX0941 Gland Packs PX0980 Pack of 3 additional cable glands for PX0911 and PX0921 to suit cable sizes; 11-13mm, 9-11 and 7-9mm dia. PXA980 Pack of 3 additional cable glands for PXA911 and PXA921 to suit cable sizes; 18-20mm, 16-18 and 14-16mm dia. BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology 900 Series Buccaneer® PX0950 PX0950 & PX0941 PX0960, PX0970 􀀀 For use with flange mounting connector PX0941, to give 45° or 90° angle 􀀀 Supplied with high grade sealing gasket 􀀀 Supplied with sealing grommets for panel fixing screws (M6 thread recommended) 􀀀 Sealing caps to maintain IP68 & IP69K rating of unmated connectors, with plastic straps ADDITIONAL BULKHEAD ADAPTOR MOULDING ACCESSORIES PX0990, PX0991, PX0992 􀀀 Heavy duty sealing caps to maintain IP68 & IP69K rating of unmated connectors, with stainless steel straps 24 www.bulgin.com Electrical: No Poles: 2, 3 4, 5 7 10† Current Rating: 32A 32A 32A 10A 30A, CSA 25A, CSA 25A, CSA* Voltage Rating: 600V ac/dc 600V ac/dc 430V ac/dc 250V ac/dc Contact Resistance: <10m (initial) Insulation Resistance: >106M (@ 500V dc) Dielectric strength: 2.2kV ac min AC Breakdown voltage: 6kV Operating Temperature Range: –40°C to +85°C Approvals: UL E214972 CSA 1211899 VDE 40003148 CCC 2011020203500396 – 10 Amp Rated 2011020203500396 – 32 Amp Rated 900 Series Buccaneer® Mechanical: Sealing: IP68, EN60529 :1992 tested @ 1.054kg/sq.cm. (15lb/sq.in.) 10m depth for 2 weeks IP69K, DIN 40050-9 Cable Acceptance: PX0911-PX0921 13 - 15mm O/D standard, 7-13mm with gland pack PXA911-PXA921 20 - 22mm O/D standard, 14 - 20mm with gland pack Contact Accommodation: 2-7 pole - 2.5 to 4mm2 (13 to10AWG) conductor, single or multi stranded 10 pole - 0.75 to 2mm2 (14 to 18AWG) conductor, single or multi stranded Termination: Axial screw terminals Cable Retention force: 22mm dia, 150N 15mm dia, 150N 7mm dia, 80N Gland Nut Torques: PX0 range 13-15mm (Yellow - std.) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 11-13mm (black) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 9-11mm (white) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 7-9mm (dark grey) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) PXA range 20-22mm (Yellow - std.) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 18-20mm (black) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 16-18mm (white) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) 14-16mm (dark grey) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.) Tightening Torques: Panel mount nut 2.25Nm (20 lbf.in.) Flange & Bulkhead fixing screws 0.9Nm (8 lbf.in.) Inserts into Bodies 1.13Nm (10 lbf.in.) to 1.36Nm (12 lbf.in.) Term screws - 2 to 5 poles 1.0Nm (9 lbf.in.) max Term screws - 7 pole 0.4Nm (3.5 lbf.in.) max Term screws - 10 pole 0.25Nm (2.2 lbf.in.) max Rear thread PX0931 series M36 x 2-6g Material: Body Mouldings: Polyamide Flammability Rating: UL94V-0 UV Resistance: To EN50021: 1999 Contacts: Machined Solid Brass, Nickel plated O Rings: Nitrile Panel Sealing Gasket: Silicone Rubber Compliant SPECIFICATION Dimensions: Overall dimensions of connectors when mated together PX0911 + PX0921 230 mm max. PXA911 + PXA921 270 mm max. PX0911 + PX0931 135 mm max. (to panel) PXA911 + PX0931 175 mm max. (to panel) PX0911 + PX0941 145 mm max. (to panel, mid point on flange) PXA911 + PX0941 174 mm max. (to panel, mid point on flange) *with 75ºC min. rated cable †approvals pending for 10 Pole version CONTACT LAYOUT 2 pole 3 pole 4 pole 5 pole 7 pole 10 pole BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology www.bulgin.com 25 900 Series Buccaneer® PXx9 x x / x x / x / x x PART NO SYSTEM Series Designation 09 = Standard Cable Accommodation (7-13mm) A9 = Large Cable Accommodation (14-22mm) Body Styles 1 = Flex, 2 = Flex In-line, 3 = Panel, 4 = Flange Panel Contact Termination 1 = Screw Terminal Number Contacts 02 = 2 pole, 03 = 3 pole, 04 = 4 pole, 05 = 5 pole, 07 = 7 pole, 10 = 10 pole Contact Type P = Plug, S = Socket Cable Acceptance PX0 version: Blank = 13-15mm Yellow cable gland (standard) 03 = 11-13mm Black cable gland 02 = 9-11mm White cable gland 01 = 7-9mm Dark Grey cable gland PXA version: Blank = 20-22mm Yellow cable gland (standard) 09 = 18-20mm Black cable gland 08 = 16-18mm White cable gland 07 = 14-16mm Dark Grey cable gland Example: PX0911/07/P/03 = Flex cable connector with standard cable accommodation body, seven pin contacts, with gland to suit 11-13mm cable. BUCCANEER FOR POWER BUCCANEER POWER bulgin a brand of Elektron Technology High precision instrument gearhead P5 series P5 series instrument gearheads conform to the international ovoid standard. The units have established a reputation for excellent running consistency, strength and reliability & have been engineered to enable a wide range of permanent magnet stepper motors, ac synchronous & instrument dc servo motors to be readily fitted. Typical applications include: • Scientific instrument drives • Medical instruments drives • Laboratory & test equipment drives • Optical equipment drives • Valve actuators • Process control equipment Precision construction with built-in flexibility: P5 series gearheads incorporate precision spur cut brass gears and steel pinions mounted on spindles running in bronze alloy bearings which feature lubrication reservoirs for extended life, control accuracy and high dynamic performance. P5 series units have been designed to readily accept a wide range of motors and offer a comprehensive programme of options including integral torque limiting clutches and freewheels. These, together with three standard shaft options and the ability to offer customised versions make the P5 series gearhead an ideal choice where precision control of a wide variety of mechanisms where high control accuracy is required. Standard gear ratios: Fast-track delivery of a wide range of P5 series gearheads ensures rapid response to customer demand. The wide range of stock ratios are ideal when using permanent magnet stepper motors, ac synchronous motors and high quality dc instrument motors Order Code Ratio Efficiency ( % ) Max Output Torque ( Nm ) Steps per rev @ output using. Stepper motor * Output speed using synchronous motor ( rpm ) # Output speed Using dc motor ( rpm ) ** P5-G01 25:6 80 0.20 200 60 720-1200 P5-G03 25:4 80 0.25 300 40 500-800 P5-G04 25:3 80 0.35 400 30 360-600 P5-G05 10:1 70 0.40 480 25 300-500 P5-G06 25:2 70 0.45 600 20 240-400 P5-G08 50:3 70 0.60 800 15 180-300 P5-G09 20:1 70 0.65 960 12.5 150-250 P5-G11 25:1 70 0.70 1200 10 120-200 P5-G14 100:3 70 0.75 1600 7.5 90-150 P5-G16 125:3 70 0.80 2000 6 72-120 P5-G17 50:1 70 0.80 2400 5 60-100 P5-G19 125:2 65 0.80 3000 4 48-80 P5-G21 250:3 65 0.80 4000 3 36-60 P5-G23 125:1 65 0.80 6000 2 24-40 P5-G27 250:1 65 0.80 12000 1 12-20 P5-G34 500:1 58 0.85 24000 0.5 6-10 P5-G41 1250:1 58 0.90 60000 12 revs/hour 2.4 - 4 P5-G62 15,000:1 43 1.0 720,000 1 rev / hour 0.1-0.3 Notes: * Based on the use of a stepper motor with 7.5 degree step angle # Based on the use of a 250 rpm ac synchronous motor ** Based on the use of instrument dc motors with speed ratings of 3000 & 5000 rpm. Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Construction Precision brass gears 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 Motor Steel Pinion- shaft assembly Precision bearings Issue 001 High precision instrument gearhead P5 series P5 Gearbox Dimensions: mm. Standard output shaft dimensions: mm. L82 shaft with internal clutch & freewheel P5 series gearbox may be specified with optional internal friction clutch or freewheels. The L82C internal clutch is set to a slip torque of 0.6 Nm and is designed to protect the gearhead against damage resulting from excessive torque in a stall condition. The freewheel options provide a maximum torque of 0.4 Nm and provide free rotation in the direction of drive. Typical applications include chart recorder paper feeds. General specification: Max recommended input speed rpm 5000 Max Radial load N 50 ( @ 8 mm from mounting face ) Max Static Axial load N 150 N ( for press fit on shaft ) Ambient temperature range Deg. C -30 to +65 Max Axial shaft play μm 250 Max radial shaft play μm 25 Direction of rotation @ output with respect to input: Ratio Codes Number of stages Direction of rotation P5-G01 to G04 2 Same P5-G05 to G17 3 Opposite P5-G19-G27 4 Same P5-G34-G41 5 Opposite P5-G62 7 Opposite eneral specification: 16.5 Ls 47.6 2.8 ∅ 4 + 0 12 - 0.02 12.7 ∅ 3.2 26.2 typical motor ∅ 8.0 ( see following ) ( options ) R 24.6 1.2 20 ∅ 4.0 2.8 8.0 L81 shaft 12.8 ∅ 4.0 9 3.3 L82 shaft 36.3 12.8 ∅ 4.0 9 ∅ 4.0 3.25 L35 shaft Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 Friction Clutch Option Freewheel Option L82F: clockwise rotation L82C L82R: counter-clockwise rotation Output shaft dimensions as L82 standard shaft 20 20 ∅ 4 ∅ 8 . ∅ 4 . 2.8 L 3396 Shaft Issue 001 Positional Servodrive assembly P5 series The P5 positional servodrive incorporates a potentiometer which is connected to the output shaft to provide an analogue reference signal proportional to output shaft position. A variety of potentiometer options are available to provide the choice of single or multi-turn operation. Although conforming to the standard panel mount design, the feedback potentiometers utilised in P5 positional servodrives have a reinforced internal construction to provide long life in motor driven applications. The feedback potentiometer is coupled directly to the servodrive’s output shaft via a backlash-free coupling which incorporates a friction clutch to protect the potentiometer against an overtravel condition when an option fitted with end stops is specified. P5 series Servodrives may be specified with any of the gear ratios shown on earlier pages to provide a wide choice of speed options. P5 series Positional Servodrive assembly Dimensions: mm Standard Potentiometer options Gearhead ratio code Potentiometer code Description Electrical rotation P5-G01 to G62- L100 Single turn , continuous rotation > 340 degrees L101 Single turn with end stops > 300 degrees L102 Three turn with end stops > 1080 degrees L103 Ten turn with end stops > 3600 degrees 20 33.5 16.5 12.8 47.6 typical typical 9 R 16 Potentiometer coupling 2.8 ∅ 4 + 0 12 - 0.02 12.7 ∅3.2 26.2 motor ∅8 dia. motor ∅ Dm motor length R 24.6 Lm 1.2 Standard shaft with flat ∅ 4 ∅ 38 Flat length: 9 mm 3.3 + 0 - 0.1 Maximum motor diameter ( ∅ Dm ) : 36 mm Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001 High precision instrument gearhead P5 series Motor options A wide range of permanent magnet stepper motors, instrument dc motors and ac synchronous motors may be fitted to the P5 gearhead using standard mounting kits. A wide variety of motors may be factory-fitted to meet a wide range of performance requirements. If alternative motors are to be fitted to the P5 gearhead the following details can be components Standard Motor mounting kits: Motor type 1 dimensions for screw mounting to P5 gearbox 8.2 min 11.4 max 1.8 Max 42 ∅36 max. ∅2 or 3 ∅3.2 ∅ 10 Motor fits directly to gearbox backplate using 2 x M2.5 screws Motor types 2 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox using clip 8.2 min 22 25 11.4 max Motor flange cropped as shown 1.8 Max 49.2 ∅51 max ∅ 42 ∅ 50.8 ∅2 or 3 ∅ 10 Clip type 204CLP00002 Clip type 204CLP00001 Motor types 3 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox via adapter 8.1 min 3.5 12.5 max KIT 3A KIT 3B 3 X M2 on 12 mm PCD 3 x M2 on 17 mm PCD 1.5 Max 3 X M2 X 6 long screws ∅29 max. ∅2 or 3 ∅ 7 ∅ 10 Use adapter 204ADT00006 Use adapter 204ADT00015 Adapter Motor type 4 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox via adapter 3.5 12.5 2 X M3 on 28 mm PCD 1.5 Max ∅40. ∅ 18 ∅ 3 Use adapter 204ADT00007 Adapter This motor must be factory fitted Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001 High precision instrument gearhead P5 series Ordering code Example: P5-G17 L82 Gearbox Code Ratio Code Shaft or Potentiometer code • Specify motor shaft diameter so correct pinion bore is provided • Specify fitting components such as adapter or fixing clip • If in doubt please contact your local sales office • If a special output shaft is required enter details in drawing provided: Fitting the motor to P5 gearheads: The pinion is either fitted to the motor shaft by means of high strength Loctitie 638 adhesive or it is press fitted when the motor rear shaft can be supported. The pinion can be accurately located, in one of two positions, using the pinion fitting tool 204SPC00001 as shown below: Pinion Positions Order Code Ratio Pinion Position Standard Pinion bores ( motor shaft diameters ) Maximum Pinion bore ( max. motor shaft diameter ) P5-G01 25:6 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm P5-G03 25:4 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4 mm P5-G04 25:3 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm P5-G05 10:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G06 25:2 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G08 50:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G09 20:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G11 25:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 5 mm P5-G14 100:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G16 125:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G17 50:1 L 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm P5-G19 125:2 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G21 250:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm P5-G23 125:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 5 mm P5-G27 250:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm P5-G34 500:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 5 mm P5-G41 1250:1 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm P5-G62 15,000:1 L 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm ( 20 max.) ( 20 max ) ∅ ( ∅ 4 max. ) ∅ ( 8 min. ) ∅ 4.0 max 2.8 Special shaft detail Motor mounted directly to gearhead Motor mounted to gearhead via adapter Pinion High (‘H’ ) position Pinion High (‘H’ ) position Pinion Low (‘L’ ) position Pinion Low (‘L’ ) position Spacer 204SPC00001 Spacer 204SPC00001 Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001 High precision instrument gearhead P5 series Complete geared motor assemblies A wide range of complete assemblies with factory fitted motors can be provided, data on which is available on request. When supplied as a complete assembly the motor part number is inserted in the geared motor order code Examples: Dc servo motor 9904 120 18 105 Stepper motor 9904 112 32 101 Geared motor code: P5 18 DC 105-G17 L82 P5 32 ST 101-G17 L82 Typical factory fitted geared motor assemblies Reversible geared ac synchronous motors • Reversible fixed speed operation • Choice of two motor power options • Choice of output speeds from 1 rev/second to 1 rev/ hour • Choice of 24, 110 or 230 Vac – 50 Hz operation P532 & P531 SP series Geared reversible ac synchronous motors Geared permanent magnet stepper motors • High precision 7.5 degree stepper motors Choice of four power options • Choice of 5V or 12 V windings Optional positional feedback potentiometer assembly P531 ST series P532 ST & P535 series P542 series Geared stepper motors Geared stepper motors Geared stepper motors Geared ironless rotor dc servo motors • High precision coreless servo motors Choice of 6 power options from 22 –40 mm diameter • Choice of 6, 12 or 24 Vdc windings Optional dc tachogenerator or encoder feedback • Standard speed options from 1200 – 0.1 rpm Optional positional feedback potentiometer assembly P522 DC series P528 DC Series P518 DC series Geared dc motors Geared dc motors Geared dc motors with position feedback Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001 SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Tektronix Company 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument • Capabilities of analyzers, curve tracers, and I-V systems at a fraction of their cost. • Five-inch, high resolution capacitive touchscreen GUI • 0.012% basic measure accuracy with 6½-digit resolution • Enhanced sensitivity with new 20mV and 10nA source/ measure ranges • Source and sink (4-quadrant) operation • Four “Quickset” modes for fast setup and measurements • Built-in, context-sensitive front panel help • Front panel input banana jacks; rear panel input triaxial connections • 2450 SCPI and TSP® scripting programming modes • Model 2400 SCPI-compatible programming mode • Front panel USB memory port for data/programming/ configuration I/O The Model 2450 is Keithley’s next-generation SourceMeter source measure unit (SMU) Instrument that truly brings Ohm’s law (current, voltage, and resistance) testing right to your fingertips. Its innovative graphical user interface (GUI) and advanced, capacitive touchscreen technology allow intuitive usage and minimize the learning curve to enable engineers and scientists to learn faster, work smarter, and invent easier. The 2450 is the SMU for everyone: a versatile instrument, particularly well-suited for characterizing modern scaled semiconductors, nano-scale devices and materials, organic semiconductors, printed electronics, and other small-geometry and low-power devices. All this combined with Keithley SMU precision and accuracy allow users to Touch, Test, InventTM with the new favorite go-to instrument in the lab for years to come. Learn Faster, Work Smarter, Invent Easier Unlike conventional instruments with dedicated pushbutton technology and small, obscure, limited- character displays, the 2450 features a five-inch, full-color, high resolution touchscreen that facilitates ease of use, learning, and optimizes overall speed and productivity. A simple icon-based menu structure reduces configuration steps by as much as 50 percent and eliminates the cumbersome multi-layer menu structures typically used on soft-key instruments. Built-in, context-sensitive help enables intuitive operation and minimizes the need to review a separate manual. These capabilities combined with its application versatility make the 2450 the SMU instrument inherently easy to use for basic and advanced measurement applications, regardless of your experience level with SMU instruments. 2450 main home screen. View of 2450 menu. Fourth-Generation, All-in-One SMU Instrument The 2450 is the fourth-generation member of Keithley’s award-winning SourceMeter family of SMU instruments and leverages the proven capabilities of the Model 2400 SourceMeter SMU Instrument. It offers a highly flexible, four-quadrant voltage and current source/load coupled with precision voltage and current meters. This all-inone instrument can be used as a: • Precision power supply with V and I readback • True current source • Digital multimeter (DCV, DCI, ohms, and power with 6½-digit resolution). • Precision electronic load • Trigger controller -200V -20V +20V +200V +100mA +1A -100mA -1A Quad. II Quad. I Quad. III Quad. IV 2450 power envelope. Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company Online HELP key USB 2.0 memory I/O Front/rear input selector Rotary navigation/ control knob 5˝ color graphical touchscreen display 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument Ordering Information 2450 200V, 1A, 20W SourceMeter Instrument 2450-NFP 200V, 1A, 20W SourceMeter Instrument, with No Front Panel 2450-RACK 200V, 1A, 20W SourceMeter Instrument, without Handle 2450-NFP-RACK 200V, 1A, 20W SourceMeter Instrument, with No Front Panel and No Handle Accessories Supplied 8608 High Performance Test Leads USB-B-1 USB Cable, Type A to Type B, 1m (3.3 ft) CS-1616-3 Safety Interlock Mating Connector CA-180-3A TSP-Link/Ethernet Cable Documentation CD 2450 QuickStart Guide Test Script Builder Software (supplied on CD) KickStart Startup Software (supplied on CD) LabVIEW and IVI Drivers available at www.keithley.com Model 2400 Model 2450 V-Ranges: 200mV – 200V V-Ranges: 20mV – 200V I-Ranges: 1μA – 1A I-Ranges: 10nA – 1A 0.012% Basic Accuracy 0.012% Basic Accuracy Wideband Noise: 4mVrms Typ. Wideband Noise: 2mVrms Typ. Sweep Types: Linear, Log, Custom, Source-Memory Sweep Types: Linear, Log, Dual Linear, Dual Log, Custom, Source-Memory (SCPI 2400 Mode) 5000 Point Reading Buffer >250,000 Point Reading Buffer >2000 Readings/Sec. >3000 Readings/Sec. SCPI Programming SCPI (2400 + 2450) + TSP Programming GPIB GPIB, USB, Ethernet (LXI) Front/Rear Banana Jacks Front: Banana Jacks, Rear: Triax Comparison of Model 2400 vs Model 2450. Ease of Use Beyond the Touchscreen In addition to its five-inch, color touchscreen, the 2450 front panel has many features that supplement its speed, user-friendliness, and learnability, including a USB 2.0 memory I/O port, a HELP key, a rotary navigation/control knob, a front/rear input selector button, and banana jacks for basic bench applications. The USB 2.0 memory port supports easy data storing, saving instrument configurations, loading test scripts, and system upgrades. Plus, all front panel buttons are backlit to enhance visibility in low-light environments. Model 2450 front panel with high resolution, capacitive touchscreen. Four “Quickset” modes simplify user setup. With one touch, the instrument can be quickly configured for various operating modes without the need to configure the instrument indirectly for this operation. Comprehensive Built-in Connectivity Rear panel access to rear-input triax connectors, remote control interfaces (GPIB, USB 2.0, and LXI/Ethernet), D-sub 9-pin digital I/O port (for internal/external trigger signals and handler control), instrument interlock control, and TSP-Link® jacks enables easy configuration of multiple instrument test solutions and eliminates the need to invest in additional adapter accessories. Quickset modes enable fast setup and time to measurements. Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Tektronix Company 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument Ethernet Triax inputs Digital I/O TSP-Link GPIB Interlock USB Rear panel connections are optimized for signal integrity. Convert Raw Data to Information The 2450 provides a full plotting and sheet view to display sweeps, measurement data, and charting right on the screen. It also supports exporting to a spreadsheet for further analysis, dramatically improving productivity for research, bench-top testing, device qualification, and debugging. Full data display, charting, and export to a spreadsheet lets you convert raw data to useful information. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Ideal for current/voltage characterization and functional test of a wide range of today’s modern electronics and devices, including: • Nanomaterials and Devices ––Graphene ––Carbon nanotubes ––Nanowires ––Low power nanostructures • Semiconductor Structures ––Wafers ––Thin films • Organic Materials and Devices ––E-inks ––Printable electronics • Energy Efficiency and Lighting ––LEDs/AMOLEDs ––Photovoltaics/Solar Cells ––Batteries • Discrete and Passive Components ––Two-leaded: Resistors, diodes, zener diodes, LEDs, disk drive heads, sensors ––Three-leaded: Small signal bipolar junction transistors (BJTs), field effect transistors (FETs), and more • Material Characterization ––Resistivity ––Hall Effect TriggerFlow™ Building Blocks for Instrument Control and Execution The 2450 incorporates Keithley’s new TriggerFlow triggering system that allows user control of instrument execution. Similar to developing a flow chart, TriggerFlow diagrams are created using four fundamental building blocks: • Wait – Waits for an event to occur before the flow continues • Branch – Branches when a condition has been satisfied • Action – Initiates an action in the instrument, for example, measure, source, delay, set digital I/O, etc. • Notify – Notifies other equipment that an event has occurred Side text Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument TriggerFlow building blocks let users create very simple to very complex triggering models. A TriggerFlow model using a combination of these building blocks can be created from the front panel or by sending remote commands. With the TriggerFlow system, users can build triggering models from very simple to complex with up to 255 block levels. The 2450 also includes basic triggering functions, including immediate, timer, and manual triggering. Unmatched System Integration and Programming Flexibility When the 2450 is integrated as part of a multi-channel I-V test system, the Test Script Processor (TSP®) embedded scripting capability allows test scripts to be run by the instrument, enabling the user to create powerful measurement applications with significantly reduced development times. TSP technology also offers channel expansion without a mainframe. Keithley’s TSP-Link® channel expansion bus, which uses a 100 Base T Ethernet cable, connects multiple 2450 instruments and other TSP instruments such as Keithley’s Series 2600B SourceMeter SMU instruments and Series 3700A Switch/Multimeter systems in a master-slave configuration that behaves as one integrated system. The TSP-Link expansion bus supports up to 32 units per GPIB or IP address, making it easy to scale a system to fit an application’s particular requirements. The 2450 also includes a SCPI programming mode that optimizes the instrument’s new features, as well as a SCPI 2400 mode that provides backwards compatibility with the existing Model 2400 SourceMeter instrument. Not only does this preserve your 2400 investment, but it also eliminates re-work normally associated with upgrading to a new instrument with new capabilities. Parallel Test Capability With the TSP technology in the 2450, multiple devices can be tested in parallel to meet the needs of device research, advanced semiconductor lab applications, and even high throughput production test. This parallel testing capability enables each instrument in the system to run its own complete test sequence, creating a fully multi-threaded test environment. The number of tests that can be run in parallel on a 2450 can be as high as the number of instruments in the system. Free Instrument Control Start-up Software and Web Interface KickStart, Keithley’s new instrument control non-programming start-up software, lets users start taking measurements in minutes. In most cases, users merely need to make quick measurements, graph the data, and store the data to disk to perform analysis in software environments such as Excel. KickStart offers the following functionality: • Instrument configuration control to perform I-V characterization • Native X-Y graphing, panning, and zooming • Spreadsheet/tabular viewing of data • Saving and exporting data for further analysis • Saving of test setups • Screenshot capturing of graph • Annotation of tests • Command line dialog for sending and receiving data • HTML help • GPIB, USB 2.0, Ethernet compliant With KickStart start-up software, users are ready to take measurements in minutes. Simplified Programming with Ready-to-Use Instrument Drivers For users who want to create their own customized application software, native National Instruments LabVIEW® drivers, IVI-C, and IVI-COM drivers are available at www.keithley.com. Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Side text SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Tektronix Company 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument Voltage Specifications1,2 Source Measure3 Range Resolution Accuracy (23° ± 5°C) 1 Year ±(% setting + volts) Noise (RMS) (<10Hz) Resolution Input Resistance Accuracy (23° ± 5°C) 1 Year ±(% rdg. + volts) 20.00000 mV 500 nV 0.100% + 200 μV 1 μV 10 nV >10 GW 0.100% + 150 μV 200.0000 mV 5 μV 0.015% + 200 μV 1 μV 100 nV >10 GW 0.012% + 200 μV 2.000000 V 50 μV 0.020% + 300 μV 10 μV 1 μV >10 GW 0.012% + 300 μV 20.00000 V 500 μV 0.015% + 2.4 mV 100 μV 10 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 1 mV 200.0000 V 5 mV 0.015% + 24 mV 1 mV 100 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 10 mV Current Specifications1,2 Source Measure3 Range Resolution Accuracy (23° ±5°C)4 1 Year ±(% setting + amps) Noise (RMS) (<10Hz) Resolution Voltage Burden Accuracy (23° ±5°C) 1 Year ±(% rdg. + amps) 10.00000 nA5 500 fA 0.100% + 100 pA 500 fA 10 fA <100 μV 0.100% + 50 pA 100.0000 nA5 5 pA 0.060% + 150 pA 500 fA 100 fA <100 μV 0.060% + 100 pA 1.000000 μA 50 pA 0.025% + 400 pA 5 pA 1 pA <100 μV 0.025% + 300 pA 10.00000 μA 500 pA 0.025% + 1.5 nA 40 pA 10 pA <100 μV 0.025% + 700 pA 100.0000 μA 5 nA 0.020% + 15 nA 400 pA 100 pA <100 μV 0.020% + 6 nA 1.000000 mA 50 nA 0.020% + 150 nA 5 nA 1 nA <100 μV 0.020% + 60 nA 10.00000 mA 500 nA 0.020% + 1.5 μA 40 nA 10 nA <100 μV 0.020% + 600 nA 100.0000 mA 5 μA 0.025% + 15 μA 100 nA 100 nA <100 μV 0.025% + 6 μA 1.000000 A 50 μA 0.067% + 900 μA 3 μA 1 μA <100 μV 0.030% + 500 μA TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C): ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. 1. Speed = 1 PLC. 2. All specifications are guaranteed with output ON. 3. Accuracies apply to 2- and 4-wire mode when properly zeroed. 4. For sink mode, 1μA to 100mA range accuracy is ±(0.15% + offset × 4). For 1A range, accuracy is ±(1.5% + offset × 8). 5. Rear panel triax connections only. Resistance Measurement Accuracy (Local or Remote Sense)2,3 Range Default Resolution6 Default Test Current Normal Accuracy (23°C ±5°C) 1 Year, ±(% rdg. + ohms) Enhanced Accuracy7 (23°C ±5°C) 1 Year, ±(% rdg. + ohms) <2.000000 W8 1 μW User defined Source IACC + Meas. VACC Meas. IACC + Meas. VACC 20.00000 W 10 μW 100 mA 0.098% + 0.003 W 0.073% + 0.001 W 200.0000 W 100 μW 10 mA 0.077% + 0.03 W 0.053% + 0.01 W 2.000000 kW 1 mW 1 mA 0.066% + 0.3 W 0.045% + 0.1 W 20.00000 kW 10 mW 100 μA 0.063% + 3 W 0.043% + 1 W 200.0000 kW 100 mW 10 μA 0.065% + 30 W 0.046% + 10 W 2.000000 MW 1 W 1 μA 0.110% + 300 W 0.049% + 100 W 20.00000 MW 10 W 1 μA 0.110% + 1 kW 0.052% + 500 W 200.0000 MW 100 W 100 nA 0.655% + 10 kW 0.349% + 5k W >200.0000 MW8 — User defined Source IACC + Meas. VACC Meas. IACC + Meas. VACC TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C): ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. SOURCE CURRENT, MEASURE RESISTANCE MODE: Total uncertainty = Isource accuracy + Vmeasure accuracy (4-wire remote sense). SOURCE VOLTAGE, MEASURE RESISTANCE MODE: Total uncertainty = Vsource accuracy + Imeasure accuracy (4-wire remote sense). GUARD OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 0.5W (DC) in ohms mode. 6. 6.5 digit measure resolution 7. Source readback enabled. Offset compensation ON. 8. Source Current, Measure Resistance or Source Voltage, Measure Resistance only. ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE TEST LEADS AND PROBES 1754 2-wire Universal 10-Piece Test Lead Kit 5804 Kelvin (4-Wire) Universal 10-Piece Test Lead Kit 5805 Kelvin (4-Wire) Spring-Loaded Probes 5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set 5808 Low Cost Single-pin Kelvin Probe Set 5809 Low Cost Kelvin Clip Lead Set 8605 High Performance Modular Test Leads 8606 High Performance Modular Probe Kit 8608 High Performance Clip Lead Set CABLES, CONNECTORS, ADAPTERS 237-ALG-2 3-slot Male Triax Connector to 3 Alligator Clips 237-BAN-3A Triax to Banana Plug 2450-TRX-BAN Triax to Banana Adapter. Converts the 4 Triax adapters on the rear panel to 5 banana jacks 7078-TRX-* 3-slot, Low Noise Triax Cable 7078-TRX-GND 3-slot Male Triax To BNC Adapter (guard removed) 8607 2-wire, 1000V Banana Cables, 1m (3.3 ft) CA-18-1 Shielded Dual Banana Cable, 1.2m (4 ft) CAP-31 Protective Shield/Cap for 3-lug Triax Connectors CS-1546 Triax 3-lug Special Shorting Plug. Shorts center pin to outer shield CS-1616-3 Safety Interlock Mating Connector COMMUNICATION INTERFACES & CABLES KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488 Interface for PCI Bus KUSB-488B IEEE-488 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 7007-1 Shielded GPIB Cable, 1m (3.3 ft) 7007-2 Shielded GPIB Cable, 1m (6.6 ft) CA-180-3A CAT5 Crossover Cable for TSP-Link/Ethernet USB-B-1 USB Cable, Type A to Type B, 1m (3.3 ft) TRIGGERING AND CONTROL 2450-TLINK DB-9 to Trigger Link Connector Adapter. 8501-1 Trigger Link Cable, DIN-to-DIN, 1m (3.3 ft) 8501-2 Trigger Link Cable, DIN-to-DIN, 2m (6.6 ft) RACK MOUNT KITS 4299-8 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit 4299-9 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 4299-10 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit. Mount one 2450 and one Series 26xxB 4299-11 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit. Mount one 2450 and one Series 2400, Series 2000, etc. 2450-BenchKit Ears and Handle for 2450-NFP-RACK and 2450-RACK models TEST FIXTURES 8101-PIV DC Test Fixture SERVICES AVAILABLE 2450-3Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 3 years from date of shipment 2450-5Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 5 years from date of shipment C/2450-3Y-17025 KeithleyCare® 3 Year ISO 17025 Calibration Plan C/2450-3Y-DATA KeithleyCare 3 Year Calibration w/Data Plan C/2450-3Y-STD KeithleyCare 3 Year Std. Calibration Plan C/2450-5Y-17025 KeithleyCare 5 Year ISO 17025 Calibration Plan C/2450-5Y-DATA KeithleyCare 5 Year Calibration w/Data Plan C/2450-5Y-STD KeithleyCare 5 Year Std. Calibration Plan Model 2450 specifications Model 2450 specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS MAX. OUTPUT POWER: 20W, four-quadrant source or sink operation. SOURCE LIMITS: Vsource: ±21V (≤ 1A range), ±210V (≤ 100mA range) Isource: ±1.05A (≤ 20V range), ±105mA (≤ 200V range) OVERRANGE: 105% of range, source and measure. REGULATION: Voltage: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: 0.01% of range + 100µV. Current: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: 0.01% of range + 100pA. SOURCE LIMITS: Voltage Source Current Limit: Bipolar current limit set with single value. Min. 10% of range. Current Source Voltage Limit: Bipolar voltage limit set with single value. Min. 10% of range. V-LIMIT / I-LIMIT ACCURACY: Add 0.3% of setting and ±0.02% of reading to base specification. OVERSHOOT: Voltage Source: <0.1% typical (full scale step, resistive load, 20V range, 10mA I-Limit. Current Source: <0.1% typical (1mA step, RLoad = 10kW, 20V range) RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: Overshoot into a fully resistive 100kW load, 10Hz to 20MHz BW, adjacent ranges: 250mV typical OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach 0.1% of final value, 20V range, 100mA I-Limit: <200µs typical. MAXIMUM SLEW RATE: 0.2V/μs, 200V range, 100mA limit into a 2kW load (typical) OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION: User selectable values, 5% tolerance. Factory default = none. VOLTAGE SOURCE NOISE: 10Hz–1MHz (RMS): 2mV typical into a resistive load. COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 250V DC. COMMON MODE ISOLATION: >1GW, <1000pF. NOISE REJECTION (TYPICAL): LOAD IMPEDANCE: 20nF typical (standard). Stable into 50μF typical (High-C mode). High-C mode valid for ≥100µA ranges, ≥200mV ranges. MAX. VOLTAGE DROP BETWEEN FORCE and SENSE TERMINALS: 5V. MAX. SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE: 1MW for rated accuracy. SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE: >10GW. GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE: <300µV, typical System Measurement Speeds 9 READING RATES (READINGS/SECOND) TYPICAL FOR 60Hz (50Hz): SCRIPT (TSP) Programmed Measure Source-Measure Sweep NPLC/Trigger Origin To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN 0.01 / Internal 3130 (2800) 2830 (2570) 2825 (2600) 2790 (2530) 1710 (1620) 1620 (1540) 1630 (1540) 1620 (1540) 0.01 / External 2170 (2050) 2150 (2030) 2170 (2040) 2160 (1990) 1670 (1590) 1580 (1500) 1590 (1510) 1580 (1510) 0.1 / Internal 540 (460) 530 (450) 530 (450) 530 (450) 470 (410) 460 (400) 470 (400) 470 (400) 0.1 / External 500 (430) 490 (420) 500 (430) 500 (420) 470 (400) 460 (390) 460 (400) 460 (400) 1.00 / Internal 59 (49) 58 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48) 1.00 / External 58 (48) 57 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (48) 57 (47) 57 (48) 57 (48) SCPI Programmed 10 Measure Source-Measure Sweep NPLC/Trigger Origin To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN 0.01 / Internal 3130 (2800) 3060 (2760) 3000 (2790) 3010 (2710) 1710 (1630) 1610 (1600) 1440 (1380) 1690 (1590) 0.01 / External 2350 (2200) 2320 (2170) 2340 (2190) 2320 (2130) 1680 (1590) 1560 (1570) 1410 (1360) 1660 (1560) 0.1 / Internal 540 (460) 540 (450) 540 (460) 540 (450) 470 (410) 470 (410) 450 (390) 470 (410) 0.1 / External 510 (440) 510 (430) 510 (440) 510 (430) 470 (400) 470 (400) 450 (390) 470 (400) 1.00 / Internal 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (48) 58 (48) 1.00 / External 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (47) 58 (48) 9. Reading rates applicable for voltage or current measurements, autozero off, autorange off, filter off, binary reading format, and source readback off. 10. SCPI programming mode. Speeds do not apply to SCPI 2400 mode. 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument NPLC NMRR CMRR 0.01 — 60 dB 0.1 — 60 dB 1 60 dB 100 dB* * Except lowest two current ranges ~90dB. Model 2450 specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS (default mode unless specified) FACTORY DEFAULT STANDARD POWER-UP: SCPI MODE. SOURCE OUTPUT MODES: Fixed DC Level, Memory/Configuration List (mixed function), Stair (linear and log). SOURCE MEMORY LIST: 100 points max. (SCPI 2400 Mode only). MEMORY BUFFER: >250,000 readings. Includes selected measured value(s) and time stamp. REAL-TIME CLOCK: Lithium battery backup (3 yr. + battery life). REMOTE INTERFACES: GPIB: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands and status model topology. USB Device (rear panel, type B): 2.0 Full Speed USBTMC. USB Host (front panel, type A): USB 2.0, support for flash drives, FAT32. Ethernet: RJ-45 (10/100BT) PROGRAMMABILITY: SCPI or TSP command sets. TSP MODE: Embedded Test Script Processor (TSP) accessible from any host interface. IP CONFIGURATION: Static or DHCP EXPANSION INTERFACE: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. LXI COMPLIANCE: 1.4 LXI Core 2011. DISPLAY: 5 inch capacitive touch, color TFT WVGA (800x480) with LED backlight. INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTIONS: Front: Banana. Rear: Triaxial (3-Lug) INTERLOCK: Active High Input DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE: Lines: 6 Input/Output user defined for digital I/O or triggering Connector: 9-pin female D Input Signal Levels: 0.7 V (maximum logic low), 3.7 V (minimum logic high) Input Voltage Limits: -0.25 V (Abs. minimum), +5.25 V (Abs. maximum) Maximum Source Current: +2.0 mA @ >2.7 V (per pin) Maximum Sink Current: -50 mA @ 0.7 V (per pin, solid-state fuse protected) 5 V Power Supply Pin: Limited to 500 mA @ >4V (solid-state fuse protected) Handler: User definable Start of Test, End of Test, 4 category bits COOLING: Forced air, variable speed. OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode. POWER SUPPLY: 100V to 240V RMS, 50–60Hz (automatically detected at power up). VA RATING: 190 volt-amps max. ALTITUDE: Maximum 2000 meters above sea level. EMC: Conforms to European Union EMC Directive. SAFETY: NRTL listed to UL61010-1 and UL61010-2-30. Conforms with European Union Low Voltage Directive. VIBRATION: MIL-PRF-28800F Class 3 Random. WARM-UP: 1 hour to rated accuracies. DIMENSIONS: (With handle and bumpers): 106mm high × 255mm wide × 425mm deep (4.18 in × 10.05 in × 16.75 in). (Without handle and bumpers): 88mm high × 213mm wide × 403mm deep (3.46 in × 8.39 in × 15.87 in). WEIGHT: With bumpers & handle: 4.04 kg (8.9 lbs.). Without bumpers & handle 3.58 kg (7.9 lbs.). ENVIRONMENT: Operating: 0°–50°C, 70% R.H. up to 35°C. Derate 3% R.H./°C, 35°–50°C. Storage: –25°C to 65°C. ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED: Test Leads, USB Cable, Ethernet/TSP Cable, Interlock Adapter, Power Cord, Quick Start Guide, CD User’s Manual. Model 2450 specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS 2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Specifications are subject to change without notice. All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments, Inc. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies. KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC. ■ 28775 AURORA RD. ■ CLEVELAND, OH 44139-1891 ■ 440-248-0400 ■ Fax: 440-248-6168 ■ 1-888-KEITHLEY ■ www.keithley.com A Greater Measure of Confidence BENELUX +31-40-267-5506 www.keithley.nl BRAZIL 55-11-4058-0229 www.keithley.com CHINA 86-10-8447-5556 www.keithley.com.cn FRANCE +33-01-69-86-83-60 www.keithley.fr GERMANY +49-89-84-93-07-40 www.keithley.de INDIA 080-30792600 www.keithley.in ITALY +39-049-762-3950 www.keithley.it JAPAN 81-120-441-046 www.keithley.jp KOREA 82-2-6917-5000 www.keithley.co.kr MALAYSIA 60-4-643-9679 www.keithley.com MEXICO 52-55-5424-7907 www.keithley.com RUSSIA +7-495-664-7564 www.keithley.ru SINGAPORE 01-800-8255-2835 www.keithley.com.sg TAIWAN 886-3-572-9077 www.keithley.com.tw UNITED KINGDOM +44-1344-39-2450 www.keithley.co.ukw For further information on how to purchase or to locate a sales partner please visit www.keithley.com/company/buy © Copyright 2013 Keithley Instruments, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A No. 3219 07.26.13 SN54HC244, SN74HC244 OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1 􀀀 Wide Operating Voltage Range of 2 V to 6 V 􀀀 High-Current Outputs Drive Up To 15 LSTTL Loads 􀀀 3-State Outputs Drive Bus Lines or Buffer Memory Address Registers 􀀀 Low Power Consumption, 80-μA Max ICC 􀀀 Typical tpd = 11 ns 􀀀 ±6-mA Output Drive at 5 V 􀀀 Low Input Current of 1 μA Max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1OE 1A1 2Y4 1A2 2Y3 1A3 2Y2 1A4 2Y1 GND VCC 2OE 1Y1 2A4 1Y2 2A3 1Y3 2A2 1Y4 2A1 SN54HC244 . . . J OR W PACKAGE SN74HC244 . . . DB, DW, N, NS, OR PW PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) 3 2 1 20 19 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 18 17 16 15 14 1Y1 2A4 1Y2 2A3 1Y3 1A2 2Y3 1A3 2Y2 1A4 SN54HC244 . . . FK PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) 2Y4 1A1 1OE 1Y4 2A2 2OE 2Y1 GND 2A1 VCC description/ordering information These octal buffers and line drivers are designed specifically to improve both the performance and density of 3-state memory address drivers, clock drivers, and bus-oriented receivers and transmitters. The ’HC244 devices are organized as two 4-bit buffers/drivers with separate output-enable (OE) inputs. When OE is low, the device passes noninverted data from the A inputs to the Y outputs. When OE is high, the outputs are in the high-impedance state. ORDERING INFORMATION TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE PART NUMBER TOP-SIDE MARKING PDIP – N Tube of 20 SN74HC244N SN74HC244N –40 C to 85 C SOIC – DW Tube of 25 SN74HC244DW HC244 Reel of 2000 SN74HC244DWR 40°85°SOP – NS Reel of 2000 SN74HC244NSR HC244 SSOP – DB Reel of 2000 SN74HC244DBR HC244 Tube of 70 SN74HC244PW TSSOP – PW Reel of 2000 SN74HC244PWR HC244 Reel of 250 SN74HC244PWT 55 125 CDIP – J Tube of 20 SNJ54HC244J SNJ54HC244J –55°C to 125°C CFP – W Tube of 85 SNJ54HC244W SNJ54HC244W LCCC – FK Tube of 55 SNJ54HC244FK SNJ54HC244FK † Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design guidelines are available at www.ti.com/sc/package. Copyright  2003, Texas Instruments Incorporated Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, all parameters are tested unless otherwise noted. On all other products, production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. SN54HC244, SN74HC244 OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003 2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 FUNCTION TABLE (each buffer/driver) INPUTS OUTPUT OE A Y L H H L L L H X Z logic diagram (positive logic) 1 2 4 6 8 19 11 13 15 17 3 5 7 9 12 14 16 18 1Y1 2Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 1OE 2OE 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)† Supply voltage range, VCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to 7 V Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VCC) (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±20 mA Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VCC) (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±20 mA Continuous output current, IO (VO = 0 to VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±35 mA Continuous current through VCC or GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±70 mA Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Note 2): DB package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70°C/W DW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58°C/W N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69°C/W NS package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°C/W PW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83°C/W Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to 150°C † Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. NOTES: 1. The input and output voltage ratings may be exceeded if the input and output current ratings are observed. 2. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7. SN54HC244, SN74HC244 OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3 recommended operating conditions (see Note 3) SN54HC244 SN74HC244 UNIT MIN NOM MAX MIN NOM MAX VCC Supply voltage 2 5 6 2 5 6 V V VCC = 2 V 1.5 1.5 VIH High-level input voltage VCC = 4.5 V 3.15 3.15 V VCC = 6 V 4.2 4.2 V Low-level input voltage VCC = 2 V 0.5 0.5 VIL VCC = 4.5 V 1.35 1.35 V VCC = 6 V 1.8 1.8 VI Input voltage 0 VCC 0 VCC V VO Output voltage 0 VCC 0 VCC V t/ v VCC = 2 V 1000 1000 Δt/Δv Input transition rise/fall time VCC = 4.5 V 500 500 ns VCC = 6 V 400 400 TA Operating free-air temperature –55 125 –40 85 °C NOTE 3: All unused inputs of the device must be held at VCC or GND to ensure proper device operation. Refer to the TI application report, Implications of Slow or Floating CMOS Inputs, literature number SCBA004. electrical characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS VCC TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244 UNIT MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX V V = V or V I = –20 A 2 V 1.9 1.998 1.9 1.9 V IOH μA 4.5 V 4.4 4.499 4.4 4.4 VOH VI VIH VIL OH OH I IH IL 6 V 5.9 5.999 5.9 5.9 IOH = –6 mA 4.5 V 3.98 4.3 3.7 3.84 IOH = –7.8 mA 6 V 5.48 5.8 5.2 5.34 V V = V or V I = 20 A 2 V 0.002 0.1 0.1 0.1 V IOL μA 4.5 V 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.1 VOL VI VIH VIL OL OL I IH IL 6 V 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.1 IOL = 6 mA 4.5 V 0.17 0.26 0.4 0.33 IOL = 7.8 mA 6 V 0.15 0.26 0.4 0.33 II VI = VCC or 0 6 V ±0.1 ±100 ±1000 ±1000 nA IOZ VO = VCC or 0, VI = VIH or VIL 6 V ±0.01 ±0.5 ±10 ±5 μA ICC VI = VCC or 0, IO = 0 6 V 8 160 80 μA Ci 2 V to 6 V 3 10 10 10 pF SN54HC244, SN74HC244 OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003 4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 switching characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range, CL = 50 pF (unless otherwise noted) (see Figure 1) PARAMETER FROM TO VCC TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244 UNIT (INPUT) (OUTPUT) MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX t 2 V 40 115 170 145 tpd A Y 4.5 V 13 23 34 29 ns 6 V 11 20 29 25 t 2 V 75 150 225 190 ten OE Y 4.5 V 15 30 45 38 ns 6 V 13 26 38 32 t 2 V 75 150 225 190 tdis OE Y 4.5 V 15 30 45 38 ns 6 V 13 26 38 32 t 2 V 28 60 90 75 tt Y 4.5 V 8 12 18 15 ns 6 V 6 10 15 13 switching characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range, CL = 150 pF (unless otherwise noted) (see Figure 1) PARAMETER FROM TO VCC TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244 UNIT (INPUT) (OUTPUT) MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX t 2 V 56 165 245 210 tpd A Y 4.5 V 18 33 49 42 ns 6 V 15 28 42 35 t 2 V 100 200 300 250 ten OE Y 4.5 V 20 40 60 50 ns 6 V 17 34 51 43 t Y 2 V 45 210 315 265 tt 4.5 V 17 42 63 53 ns 6 V 13 36 53 45 operating characteristics, TA = 25°C PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS TYP UNIT Cpd Power dissipation capacitance per buffer/driver No load 35 pF SN54HC244, SN74HC244 OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION VOLTAGE WAVEFORM INPUT RISE AND FALL TIMES 50% 50% 10% 10% 90% 90% VCC 0 V tr tf Input VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS PROPAGATION DELAY AND OUTPUT TRANSITION TIMES 50% 50% 50% 10% 10% 90% 90% VCC VOH VOL 0 V tr tf Input In-Phase Output 50% tPLH tPHL 50% 50% 10% 10% 90% 90% VOH VOL tf tr tPHL tPLH Out-of-Phase Output 50% 10% 90% VCC ≈VCC VOL 0 V Output Control (Low-Level Enabling) Output Waveform 1 (See Note B) 50% tPZL tPLZ VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS ENABLE AND DISABLE TIMES FOR 3-STATE OUTPUTS VOH ≈0 V 50% 50% tPZH tPHZ Output Waveform 2 (See Note B) ≈VCC Test From Output Point Under Test CL (see Note A) RL VCC S1 S2 LOAD CIRCUIT PARAMETER CL tPZH tpd or tt tdis ten tPZL tPHZ tPLZ 1 kΩ 1 kΩ 50 pF or 150 pF 50 pF Open Closed RL S1 Closed Open S2 Open Closed Closed Open 50 pF or 150 pF –– Open Open NOTES: A. CL includes probe and test-fixture capacitance. B. Waveform 1 is for an output with internal conditions such that the output is low except when disabled by the output control. Waveform 2 is for an output with internal conditions such that the output is high except when disabled by the output control. C. Phase relationships between waveforms were chosen arbitrarily. All input pulses are supplied by generators having the following characteristics: PRR ≤ 1 MHz, ZO = 50 Ω, tr = 6 ns, tf = 6 ns. D. The outputs are measured one at a time with one input transition per measurement. E. tPLZ and tPHZ are the same as tdis. F. tPZL and tPZH are the same as ten. G. tPLH and tPHL are the same as tpd. Figure 1. Load Circuit and Voltage Waveforms PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples 5962-8409601VRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 5962-8409601VR A SNV54HC244J 5962-8409601VSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 25 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 5962-8409601VS A SNV54HC244W 84096012A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 84096012A SNJ54HC 244FK 8409601RA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601RA SNJ54HC244J 8409601SA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601SA SNJ54HC244W JM38510/65705B2A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705B2A JM38510/65705BRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705BRA JM38510/65705BSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705BSA M38510/65705B2A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705B2A M38510/65705BRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705BRA M38510/65705BSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/ 65705BSA SN54HC244J ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SN54HC244J SN74HC244ADBLE OBSOLETE SSOP DB 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85 SN74HC244APWLE OBSOLETE TSSOP PW 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85 SN74HC244DBLE OBSOLETE SSOP DB 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85 SN74HC244DBR ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DBRE4 ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014 Addendum-Page 2 Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples SN74HC244DBRG4 ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DW ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244DWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244N ACTIVE PDIP N 20 20 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SN74HC244N SN74HC244N3 OBSOLETE PDIP N 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85 SN74HC244NE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 20 20 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SN74HC244N SN74HC244NSR ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244NSRE4 ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244NSRG4 ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PW ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWLE OBSOLETE TSSOP PW 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85 SN74HC244PWR ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWRE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014 Addendum-Page 3 Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples SN74HC244PWRG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWT ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWTE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244PWTG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244 SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM HC244Q SNJ54HC244FK ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 84096012A SNJ54HC 244FK SNJ54HC244J ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601RA SNJ54HC244J SNJ54HC244W ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601SA SNJ54HC244W (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. (4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device. PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014 Addendum-Page 4 (5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device. (6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. OTHER QUALIFIED VERSIONS OF SN54HC244, SN54HC244-SP, SN74HC244 : • Catalog: SN74HC244, SN54HC244 • Automotive: SN74HC244-Q1, SN74HC244-Q1 • Enhanced Product: SN74HC244-EP, SN74HC244-EP • Military: SN54HC244 • Space: SN54HC244-SP NOTE: Qualified Version Definitions: • Catalog - TI's standard catalog product • Automotive - Q100 devices qualified for high-reliability automotive applications targeting zero defects • Enhanced Product - Supports Defense, Aerospace and Medical Applications • Military - QML certified for Military and Defense Applications • Space - Radiation tolerant, ceramic packaging and qualified for use in Space-based application TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant SN74HC244DBR SSOP DB 20 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 7.5 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1 SN74HC244DWR SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1 SN74HC244DWRG4 SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1 SN74HC244NSR SO NS 20 2000 330.0 24.4 8.2 13.0 2.5 12.0 24.0 Q1 SN74HC244PWR TSSOP PW 20 2000 330.0 16.4 6.95 7.1 1.6 8.0 16.0 Q1 SN74HC244PWT TSSOP PW 20 250 330.0 16.4 6.95 7.1 1.6 8.0 16.0 Q1 SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 20-Dec-2013 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) SN74HC244DBR SSOP DB 20 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 SN74HC244DWR SOIC DW 20 2000 600.0 144.0 84.0 SN74HC244DWRG4 SOIC DW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0 SN74HC244NSR SO NS 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0 SN74HC244PWR TSSOP PW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 SN74HC244PWT TSSOP PW 20 250 367.0 367.0 38.0 SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 SOIC DW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 20-Dec-2013 Pack Materials-Page 2 MECHANICAL DATA MSSO002E – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED DECEMBER 2001 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 DB (R-PDSO-G**) PLASTIC SMALL-OUTLINE 4040065 /E 12/01 28 PINS SHOWN Gage Plane 8,20 7,40 0,55 0,95 0,25 38 12,90 12,30 28 10,50 24 8,50 Seating Plane 7,90 9,90 30 10,50 9,90 0,38 5,60 5,00 15 0,22 14 A 28 1 16 20 6,50 6,50 14 0,05 MIN 5,90 5,90 DIM A MAX A MIN PINS ** 2,00 MAX 6,90 7,50 0,65 0,15 M 0°–8° 0,10 0,09 0,25 NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. Body dimensions do not include mold flash or protrusion not to exceed 0,15. D. Falls within JEDEC MO-150 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1  Meets or Exceeds TIA/EIA-232-F and ITU Recommendation V.28  Operates From a Single 5-V Power Supply With 1.0-F Charge-Pump Capacitors  Operates Up To 120 kbit/s  Two Drivers and Two Receivers  ±30-V Input Levels  Low Supply Current . . . 8 mA Typical  ESD Protection Exceeds JESD 22 − 2000-V Human-Body Model (A114-A)  Upgrade With Improved ESD (15-kV HBM) and 0.1-F Charge-Pump Capacitors is Available With the MAX202  Applications − TIA/EIA-232-F, Battery-Powered Systems, Terminals, Modems, and Computers description/ordering information The MAX232 is a dual driver/receiver that includes a capacitive voltage generator to supply TIA/EIA-232-F voltage levels from a single 5-V supply. Each receiver converts TIA/EIA-232-F inputs to 5-V TTL/CMOS levels. These receivers have a typical threshold of 1.3 V, a typical hysteresis of 0.5 V, and can accept ±30-V inputs. Each driver converts TTL/CMOS input levels into TIA/EIA-232-F levels. The driver, receiver, and voltage-generator functions are available as cells in the Texas Instruments LinASIC library. ORDERING INFORMATION TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE PART NUMBER TOP-SIDE MARKING PDIP (N) Tube of 25 MAX232N MAX232N SOIC (D) Tube of 40 MAX232D MAX232 0°C to 70°C Reel of 2500 MAX232DR SOIC (DW) Tube of 40 MAX232DW MAX232 Reel of 2000 MAX232DWR SOP (NS) Reel of 2000 MAX232NSR MAX232 PDIP (N) Tube of 25 MAX232IN MAX232IN SOIC (D) Tube of 40 MAX232ID MAX232I −40°C to 85°C Reel of 2500 MAX232IDR 40 85 SOIC (DW) Tube of 40 MAX232IDW MAX232I Reel of 2000 MAX232IDWR † Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design guidelines are available at www.ti.com/sc/package.      !"#   $"%&! '#( Copyright  2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated '"! !  $#!! $# )# #  #* "# '' +,( '"! $!#- '#  #!#&, !&"'# #-  && $##(  Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. LinASIC is a trademark of Texas Instruments. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 C1+ VS+ C1− C2+ C2− VS− T2OUT R2IN VCC GND T1OUT R1IN R1OUT T1IN T2IN R2OUT MAX232 . . . D, DW, N, OR NS PACKAGE MAX232I . . . D, DW, OR N PACKAGE (TOP VIEW)              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 Function Tables EACH DRIVER INPUT TIN OUTPUT TOUT L H H L H = high level, L = low level EACH RECEIVER INPUT RIN OUTPUT ROUT L H H L H = high level, L = low level logic diagram (positive logic) T1IN T1OUT R1OUT R1IN T2IN T2OUT R2OUT R2IN 11 10 12 9 14 7 13 8              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3 absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)† Input supply voltage range, VCC (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 6 V Positive output supply voltage range, VS+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCC − 0.3 V to 15 V Negative output supply voltage range, VS− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to −15 V Input voltage range, VI: Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to VCC + 0.3 V Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±30 V Output voltage range, VO: T1OUT, T2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS− − 0.3 V to VS+ + 0.3 V R1OUT, R2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to VCC + 0.3 V Short-circuit duration: T1OUT, T2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlimited Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Notes 2 and 3): D package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73°C/W DW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57°C/W N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67°C/W NS package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64°C/W Operating virtual junction temperature, TJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150°C Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65°C to 150°C † Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. NOTES: 1. All voltages are with respect to network GND. 2. Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), θJA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable ambient temperature is PD = (TJ(max) − TA)/θJA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability. 3. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7. recommended operating conditions MIN NOM MAX UNIT VCC Supply voltage 4.5 5 5.5 V VIH High-level input voltage (T1IN,T2IN) 2 V VIL Low-level input voltage (T1IN, T2IN) 0.8 V R1IN, R2IN Receiver input voltage ±30 V TA Operating free-air temperature MAX232 0 70 °C MAX232I −40 85 electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (see Note 4 and Figure 4) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP‡ MAX UNIT ICC Supply current VCC = 5.5 V, TA = 25°C All outputs open, 8 10 mA ‡ All typical values are at VCC = 5 V and TA = 25°C. NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 DRIVER SECTION electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature range (see Note 4) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP† MAX UNIT VOH High-level output voltage T1OUT, T2OUT RL = 3 kΩ to GND 5 7 V VOL Low-level output voltage‡ T1OUT, T2OUT RL = 3 kΩ to GND −7 −5 V ro Output resistance T1OUT, T2OUT VS+ = VS− = 0, VO = ±2 V 300 Ω IOS§ Short-circuit output current T1OUT, T2OUT VCC = 5.5 V, VO = 0 ±10 mA IIS Short-circuit input current T1IN, T2IN VI = 0 200 μA † All typical values are at VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C. ‡ The algebraic convention, in which the least-positive (most negative) value is designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage levels only. § Not more than one output should be shorted at a time. NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V. switching characteristics, VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C (see Note 4) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT SR Driver slew rate RL = 3 kΩ to 7 kΩ, See Figure 2 30 V/μs SR(t) Driver transition region slew rate See Figure 3 3 V/μs Data rate One TOUT switching 120 kbit/s NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V. RECEIVER SECTION electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature range (see Note 4) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP† MAX UNIT VOH High-level output voltage R1OUT, R2OUT IOH = −1 mA 3.5 V VOL Low-level output voltage‡ R1OUT, R2OUT IOL = 3.2 mA 0.4 V VIT+ Receiver positive-going input threshold voltage R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C 1.7 2.4 V VIT− Receiver negative-going input threshold voltage R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C 0.8 1.2 V Vhys Input hysteresis voltage R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V 0.2 0.5 1 V ri Receiver input resistance R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5, TA = 25°C 3 5 7 kΩ † All typical values are at VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C. ‡ The algebraic convention, in which the least-positive (most negative) value is designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage levels only. NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V. switching characteristics, VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C (see Note 4 and Figure 1) PARAMETER TYP UNIT tPLH(R) Receiver propagation delay time, low- to high-level output 500 ns tPHL(R) Receiver propagation delay time, high- to low-level output 500 ns NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION ≤10 ns VCC R1IN or R2IN R1OUT or R2OUT RL = 1.3 kΩ See Note C CL = 50 pF (see Note B) TEST CIRCUIT ≤10 ns Input Output tPHL tPLH 1.5 V VOL VOH 0 V 3 V 10% 90% 50% 500 ns WAVEFORMS 1.5 V 90% 50% 10% NOTES: A. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%. B. CL includes probe and jig capacitance. C. All diodes are 1N3064 or equivalent. Pulse Generator (see Note A) Figure 1. Receiver Test Circuit and Waveforms for tPHL and tPLH Measurements              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION T1IN or T2IN T1OUT or T2OUT CL = 10 pF (see Note B) TEST CIRCUIT ≤10 ns ≤10 ns Input Output tPHL tPLH VOL VOH 0 V 3 V 10% 90% 50% 5 μs WAVEFORMS 90% 50% 10% RL 90% 10% 90% 10% t tTLH THL SR  0.8 (VOH – VOL) tTLH or 0.8 (VOL – VOH) tTHL NOTES: A. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%. B. CL includes probe and jig capacitance. Pulse Generator (see Note A) EIA-232 Output Figure 2. Driver Test Circuit and Waveforms for tPHL and tPLH Measurements (5-μs Input) EIA-232 Output −3 V 3 V −3 V 3 V 3 kΩ 1.5 V 10% 90% WAVEFORMS 20 μs 1.5 V 90% 10% VOH VOL t tTLH THL ≤10 ns ≤10 ns TEST CIRCUIT CL = 2.5 nF Pulse Generator (see Note A) Input Output SR  6 V tTHL or tTLH NOTE A: The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%. Figure 3. Test Circuit and Waveforms for tTHL and tTLH Measurements (20-μs Input)              SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7 APPLICATION INFORMATION 1 μF 1 μF VS+ VS− 2 6 14 7 13 8 C1+ C1− C2+ C2− 1 3 4 5 11 10 12 9 GND 15 0 V VCC 16 5 V EIA-232 Output EIA-232 Output EIA-232 Input EIA-232 Input 1 μF 8.5 V −8.5 V 1 μF From CMOS or TTL To CMOS or TTL CBYPASS = 1 μF C1 C2 C3† C4 † C3 can be connected to VCC or GND. NOTES: A. Resistor values shown are nominal. B. Nonpolarized ceramic capacitors are acceptable. If polarized tantalum or electrolytic capacitors are used, they should be connected as shown. In addition to the 1-μF capacitors shown, the MAX202 can operate with 0.1-μF capacitors. + + − Figure 4. Typical Operating Circuit PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples MAX232D ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DR ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DW ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232DWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232ID ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDR ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013 Addendum-Page 2 Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples MAX232IDRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDW ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IDWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I MAX232IN ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 MAX232IN MAX232INE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 MAX232IN MAX232N ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 MAX232N MAX232NE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 MAX232N MAX232NSR ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232NSRE4 ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 MAX232NSRG4 ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232 (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013 Addendum-Page 3 (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. (4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device. (5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device. (6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.8 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DWR SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232DWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232IDR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232IDWR SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1 MAX232IDWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 5-Oct-2013 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 367.0 367.0 38.0 MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6 MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0 MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6 MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 367.0 367.0 38.0 MAX232DWR SOIC DW 16 2000 366.0 364.0 50.0 MAX232DWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 MAX232IDR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6 MAX232IDWR SOIC DW 16 2000 366.0 364.0 50.0 MAX232IDWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 5-Oct-2013 Pack Materials-Page 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 LM555 Timer Check for Samples: LM555 1FEATURES DESCRIPTION The LM555 is a highly stable device for generating 2• Direct Replacement for SE555/NE555 accurate time delays or oscillation. Additional • Timing from Microseconds through Hours terminals are provided for triggering or resetting if • Operates in Both Astable and Monostable desired. In the time delay mode of operation, the time Modes is precisely controlled by one external resistor and • Adjustable Duty Cycle capacitor. For astable operation as an oscillator, the free running frequency and duty cycle are accurately • Output Can Source or Sink 200 mA controlled with two external resistors and one • Output and Supply TTL Compatible capacitor. The circuit may be triggered and reset on • Temperature Stability Better than 0.005% per falling waveforms, and the output circuit can source °C or sink up to 200mA or drive TTL circuits. • Normally On and Normally Off Output • Available in 8-pin VSSOP Package APPLICATIONS • Precision Timing • Pulse Generation • Sequential Timing • Time Delay Generation • Pulse Width Modulation • Pulse Position Modulation • Linear Ramp Generator Schematic Diagram 1 Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. 2All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com Connection Diagram Top View Figure 1. PDIP, SOIC, and VSSOP Packages These devices have limited built-in ESD protection. The leads should be shorted together or the device placed in conductive foam during storage or handling to prevent electrostatic damage to the MOS gates. Absolute Maximum Ratings(1) (2) Supply Voltage +18V Power Dissipation (3) LM555CM, LM555CN(4) 1180 mW LM555CMM 613 mW Operating Temperature Ranges LM555C 0°C to +70°C Storage Temperature Range −65°C to +150°C Soldering Information PDIP Package Soldering (10 Seconds) 260°C Small Outline Packages (SOIC and VSSOP) Vapor Phase (60 Seconds) 215°C Infrared (15 Seconds) 220°C (1) Absolute Maximum Ratings indicate limits beyond which damage to the device may occur. Operating Ratings indicate conditions for which the device is functional, but do not ensure specific performance limits. Electrical Characteristics state DC and AC electrical specifications under particular test conditions which ensures specific performance limits. This assumes that the device is within the Operating Ratings. Specifications are not ensured for parameters where no limit is given, however, the typical value is a good indication of device performance. (2) If Military/Aerospace specified devices are required, please contact the TI Sales Office/Distributors for availability and specifications. (3) For operating at elevated temperatures the device must be derated above 25°C based on a +150°C maximum junction temperature and a thermal resistance of 106°C/W (PDIP), 170°C/W (S0IC-8), and 204°C/W (VSSOP) junction to ambient. (4) Refer to RETS555X drawing of military LM555H and LM555J versions for specifications. 2 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 Electrical Characteristics (1) (2) (TA = 25°C, VCC = +5V to +15V, unless otherwise specified) Limits Parameter Test Conditions LM555C Units Min Typ Max Supply Voltage 4.5 16 V Supply Current VCC = 5V, RL = ∞ 3 6 VCC = 15V, RL = ∞ 10 15 mA (Low State) (3) Timing Error, Monostable Initial Accuracy 1 % Drift with Temperature RA = 1k to 100kΩ, 50 ppm/°C C = 0.1μF, (4) Accuracy over Temperature 1.5 % Drift with Supply 0.1 %/V Timing Error, Astable Initial Accuracy 2.25 % Drift with Temperature RA, RB = 1k to 100kΩ, 150 ppm/°C C = 0.1μF, (4) Accuracy over Temperature 3.0 % Drift with Supply 0.30 %/V Threshold Voltage 0.667 x VCC Trigger Voltage VCC = 15V 5 V VCC = 5V 1.67 V Trigger Current 0.5 0.9 μA Reset Voltage 0.4 0.5 1 V Reset Current 0.1 0.4 mA Threshold Current (5) 0.1 0.25 μA Control Voltage Level VCC = 15V 9 10 11 V VCC = 5V 2.6 3.33 4 Pin 7 Leakage Output High 1 100 nA Pin 7 Sat (6) Output Low VCC = 15V, I7 = 15mA 180 mV Output Low VCC = 4.5V, I7 = 4.5mA 80 200 mV Output Voltage Drop (Low) VCC = 15V ISINK = 10mA 0.1 0.25 V ISINK = 50mA 0.4 0.75 V ISINK = 100mA 2 2.5 V ISINK = 200mA 2.5 V VCC = 5V ISINK = 8mA V ISINK = 5mA 0.25 0.35 V (1) All voltages are measured with respect to the ground pin, unless otherwise specified. (2) Absolute Maximum Ratings indicate limits beyond which damage to the device may occur. Operating Ratings indicate conditions for which the device is functional, but do not ensure specific performance limits. Electrical Characteristics state DC and AC electrical specifications under particular test conditions which ensures specific performance limits. This assumes that the device is within the Operating Ratings. Specifications are not ensured for parameters where no limit is given, however, the typical value is a good indication of device performance. (3) Supply current when output high typically 1 mA less at VCC = 5V. (4) Tested at VCC = 5V and VCC = 15V. (5) This will determine the maximum value of RA + RB for 15V operation. The maximum total (RA + RB) is 20MΩ. (6) No protection against excessive pin 7 current is necessary providing the package dissipation rating will not be exceeded. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 3 Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com Electrical Characteristics (1) (2) (continued) (TA = 25°C, VCC = +5V to +15V, unless otherwise specified) Limits Parameter Test Conditions LM555C Units Min Typ Max Output Voltage Drop (High) ISOURCE = 200mA, VCC = 15V 12.5 V ISOURCE = 100mA, VCC = 15V 12.75 13.3 V VCC = 5V 2.75 3.3 V Rise Time of Output 100 ns Fall Time of Output 100 ns 4 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 Typical Performance Characteristics Minimum Pulse Width Supply Current vs. Required for Triggering Supply Voltage Figure 2. Figure 3. High Output Voltage vs. Low Output Voltage vs. Output Source Current Output Sink Current Figure 4. Figure 5. Low Output Voltage vs. Low Output Voltage vs. Output Sink Current Output Sink Current Figure 6. Figure 7. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 5 Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com Typical Performance Characteristics (continued) Output Propagation Delay vs. Output Propagation Delay vs. Voltage Level of Trigger Pulse Voltage Level of Trigger Pulse Figure 8. Figure 9. Discharge Transistor (Pin 7) Discharge Transistor (Pin 7) Voltage Voltage vs. vs. Sink Current Sink Current Figure 10. Figure 11. 6 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 APPLICATIONS INFORMATION MONOSTABLE OPERATION In this mode of operation, the timer functions as a one-shot (Figure 12). The external capacitor is initially held discharged by a transistor inside the timer. Upon application of a negative trigger pulse of less than 1/3 VCC to pin 2, the flip-flop is set which both releases the short circuit across the capacitor and drives the output high. Figure 12. Monostable The voltage across the capacitor then increases exponentially for a period of t = 1.1 RA C, at the end of which time the voltage equals 2/3 VCC. The comparator then resets the flip-flop which in turn discharges the capacitor and drives the output to its low state. Figure 13 shows the waveforms generated in this mode of operation. Since the charge and the threshold level of the comparator are both directly proportional to supply voltage, the timing interval is independent of supply. VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 5V/Div. TIME = 0.1 ms/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 5V/Div. RA = 9.1kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 2V/Div. C = 0.01μF Figure 13. Monostable Waveforms During the timing cycle when the output is high, the further application of a trigger pulse will not effect the circuit so long as the trigger input is returned high at least 10μs before the end of the timing interval. However the circuit can be reset during this time by the application of a negative pulse to the reset terminal (pin 4). The output will then remain in the low state until a trigger pulse is again applied. When the reset function is not in use, it is recommended that it be connected to VCC to avoid any possibility of false triggering. Figure 14 is a nomograph for easy determination of R, C values for various time delays. NOTE In monostable operation, the trigger should be driven high before the end of timing cycle. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 7 Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com Figure 14. Time Delay ASTABLE OPERATION If the circuit is connected as shown in Figure 15 (pins 2 and 6 connected) it will trigger itself and free run as a multivibrator. The external capacitor charges through RA + RB and discharges through RB. Thus the duty cycle may be precisely set by the ratio of these two resistors. Figure 15. Astable In this mode of operation, the capacitor charges and discharges between 1/3 VCC and 2/3 VCC. As in the triggered mode, the charge and discharge times, and therefore the frequency are independent of the supply voltage. Figure 16 shows the waveforms generated in this mode of operation. VCC = 5V Top Trace: Output 5V/Div. TIME = 20μs/DIV. Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 1V/Div. RA = 3.9kΩ RB = 3kΩ C = 0.01μF Figure 16. Astable Waveforms 8 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 The charge time (output high) is given by: t1 = 0.693 (RA + RB) C (1) And the discharge time (output low) by: t2 = 0.693 (RB) C (2) Thus the total period is: T = t1 + t2 = 0.693 (RA +2RB) C (3) The frequency of oscillation is: (4) Figure 17 may be used for quick determination of these RC values. The duty cycle is: (5) Figure 17. Free Running Frequency FREQUENCY DIVIDER The monostable circuit of Figure 12 can be used as a frequency divider by adjusting the length of the timing cycle. Figure 18 shows the waveforms generated in a divide by three circuit. VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 4V/Div. TIME = 20μs/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 2V/Div. RA = 9.1kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor 2V/Div. C = 0.01μF Figure 18. Frequency Divider PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR When the timer is connected in the monostable mode and triggered with a continuous pulse train, the output pulse width can be modulated by a signal applied to pin 5. Figure 19 shows the circuit, and in Figure 20 are some waveform examples. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 9 Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com Figure 19. Pulse Width Modulator VCC = 5V Top Trace: Modulation 1V/Div. TIME = 0.2 ms/DIV. Bottom Trace: Output Voltage 2V/Div. RA = 9.1kΩ C = 0.01μF Figure 20. Pulse Width Modulator PULSE POSITION MODULATOR This application uses the timer connected for astable operation, as in Figure 21, with a modulating signal again applied to the control voltage terminal. The pulse position varies with the modulating signal, since the threshold voltage and hence the time delay is varied. Figure 22 shows the waveforms generated for a triangle wave modulation signal. Figure 21. Pulse Position Modulator 10 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 VCC = 5V Top Trace: Modulation Input 1V/Div. TIME = 0.1 ms/DIV. Bottom Trace: Output 2V/Div. RA = 3.9kΩ RB = 3kΩ C = 0.01μF Figure 22. Pulse Position Modulator LINEAR RAMP When the pullup resistor, RA, in the monostable circuit is replaced by a constant current source, a linear ramp is generated. Figure 23 shows a circuit configuration that will perform this function. Figure 23. Figure 24 shows waveforms generated by the linear ramp. The time interval is given by: (6) VBE ≃ 0.6V (7) Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 11 Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 3V/Div. TIME = 20μs/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 5V/Div. R1 = 47kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 1V/Div. R2 = 100kΩ RE = 2.7 kΩ C = 0.01 μF Figure 24. Linear Ramp 50% DUTY CYCLE OSCILLATOR For a 50% duty cycle, the resistors RA and RB may be connected as in Figure 25. The time period for the output high is the same as previous, t1 = 0.693 RA C. For the output low it is t2 = (8) Thus the frequency of oscillation is: (9) Figure 25. 50% Duty Cycle Oscillator Note that this circuit will not oscillate if RB is greater than 1/2 RA because the junction of RA and RB cannot bring pin 2 down to 1/3 VCC and trigger the lower comparator. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Adequate power supply bypassing is necessary to protect associated circuitry. Minimum recommended is 0.1μF in parallel with 1μF electrolytic. Lower comparator storage time can be as long as 10μs when pin 2 is driven fully to ground for triggering. This limits the monostable pulse width to 10μs minimum. Delay time reset to output is 0.47μs typical. Minimum reset pulse width must be 0.3μs, typical. Pin 7 current switches within 30ns of the output (pin 3) voltage. 12 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Links: LM555 LM555 www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 REVISION HISTORY Changes from Revision B (March 2013) to Revision C Page • Changed layout of National Data Sheet to TI format .......................................................................................................... 12 Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 13 Product Folder Links: LM555 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 27-Mar-2014 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples LM555CM NRND SOIC D 8 95 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM 555CM LM555CM/NOPB ACTIVE SOIC D 8 95 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) SN | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM 555CM LM555CMM NRND VSSOP DGK 8 1000 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 Z55 LM555CMM/NOPB ACTIVE VSSOP DGK 8 1000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 Z55 LM555CMMX/NOPB ACTIVE VSSOP DGK 8 3500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 Z55 LM555CMX NRND SOIC D 8 2500 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM 555CM LM555CMX/NOPB ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) SN | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM 555CM LM555CN LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM 555CN LM555CN/NOPB ACTIVE PDIP P 8 40 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU SN Level-1-NA-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM 555CN MC1455P1 LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM 555CN NE555V LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM 555CN (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 27-Mar-2014 Addendum-Page 2 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. (4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device. (5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device. (6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant LM555CMM VSSOP DGK 8 1000 178.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1 LM555CMM/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 1000 178.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1 LM555CMMX/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 3500 330.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1 LM555CMX SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.5 5.4 2.0 8.0 12.0 Q1 LM555CMX/NOPB SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.5 5.4 2.0 8.0 12.0 Q1 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 26-Mar-2013 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) LM555CMM VSSOP DGK 8 1000 210.0 185.0 35.0 LM555CMM/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 1000 210.0 185.0 35.0 LM555CMMX/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 3500 367.0 367.0 35.0 LM555CMX SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 LM555CMX/NOPB SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 26-Mar-2013 Pack Materials-Page 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1  Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D Products Now From Texas Instruments  Wide Supply-Voltage Range: 4.5 V to 36 V  Separate Input-Logic Supply  Internal ESD Protection  Thermal Shutdown  High-Noise-Immunity Inputs  Functionally Similar to SGS L293 and SGS L293D  Output Current 1 A Per Channel (600 mA for L293D)  Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel (1.2 A for L293D)  Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive Transient Suppression (L293D) description/ordering information The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current half-H drivers. The L293 is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages from 4.5 V to 36 V. The L293D is designed to provide bidirectional drive currents of up to 600-mA at voltages from 4.5 V to 36 V. Both devices are designed to drive inductive loads such as relays, solenoids, dc and bipolar stepping motors, as well as other high-current/high-voltage loads in positive-supply applications. All inputs are TTL compatible. Each output is a complete totem-pole drive circuit, with a Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo- Darlington source. Drivers are enabled in pairs, with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 1,2EN and drivers 3 and 4 enabled by 3,4EN. When an enable input is high, the associated drivers are enabled, and their outputs are active and in phase with their inputs. When the enable input is low, those drivers are disabled, and their outputs are off and in the high-impedance state. With the proper data inputs, each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or bridge) reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications. ORDERING INFORMATION TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE PART NUMBER TOP-SIDE MARKING HSOP (DWP) Tube of 20 L293DWP L293DWP 0°C to 70°C PDIP (N) Tube of 25 L293N L293N PDIP (NE) Tube of 25 L293NE L293NE Tube of 25 L293DNE L293DNE † Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design guidelines are available at www.ti.com/sc/package. PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright  2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. HEAT SINK AND GROUND HEAT SINK AND GROUND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1,2EN 1A 1Y 2Y 2A VCC2 VCC1 4A 4Y 3Y 3A 3,4EN L293 . . . N OR NE PACKAGE L293D . . . NE PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 1,2EN 1A 1Y NC NC NC NC NC 2Y 2A VCC2 VCC1 4A 4Y NC NC NC NC NC 3Y 3A 3,4EN L293 . . . DWP PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) HEAT SINK AND GROUND HEAT SINK AND GROUND L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 description/ordering information (continued) On the L293, external high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression. A VCC1 terminal, separate from VCC2, is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device power dissipation. The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0°C to 70°C. block diagram 1 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 16 1 2 0 1 1 0 2 4 3 M M M 1 0 1 0 1 0 VCC2 VCC1 NOTE: Output diodes are internal in L293D. FUNCTION TABLE (each driver) INPUTS† OUTPUT A EN Y H H H L H L X L Z H = high level, L = low level, X = irrelevant, Z = high impedance (off) † In the thermal shutdown mode, the output is in the high-impedance state, regardless of the input levels. L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3 logic diagram ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ 2 1 7 10 9 15 3 6 11 14 1A 1,2EN 2A 3A 3,4EN 4A 1Y 2Y 3Y 4Y schematics of inputs and outputs (L293) Input VCC2 Output GND EQUIVALENT OF EACH INPUT TYPICAL OF ALL OUTPUTS VCC1 Current Source GND L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 schematics of inputs and outputs (L293D) Input VCC2 Output GND EQUIVALENT OF EACH INPUT TYPICAL OF ALL OUTPUTS VCC1 Current Source GND absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)† Supply voltage, VCC1 (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 V Output supply voltage, VCC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 V Input voltage, VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 V Output voltage range, VO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −3 V to VCC2 + 3 V Peak output current, IO (nonrepetitive, t ≤ 5 ms): L293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±2 A Peak output current, IO (nonrepetitive, t ≤ 100 μs): L293D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±1.2 A Continuous output current, IO: L293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±1 A Continuous output current, IO: L293D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±600 mA Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Notes 2 and 3): DWP package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD°C/W N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67°C/W NE package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD°C/W Maximum junction temperature, TJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150°C Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65°C to 150°C † Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. NOTES: 1. All voltage values are with respect to the network ground terminal. 2. Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), JA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable ambient temperature is PD = (TJ(max) − TA)/JA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability. 3. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7. L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5 recommended operating conditions MIN MAX UNIT Supply voltage VCC1 4.5 7 V VCC2 VCC1 36 V High level input voltage VCC1 ≤ 7 V 2.3 VCC1 V VIH High-VCC1 ≥ 7 V 2.3 7 V VIL Low-level output voltage −0.3† 1.5 V TA Operating free-air temperature 0 70 °C † The algebraic convention, in which the least positive (most negative) designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage levels. electrical characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT VOH High-level output voltage L293: IOH = −1 A L293D: IOH = − 0.6 A VCC2 − 1.8 VCC2 − 1.4 V VOL Low-level output voltage L293: IOL = 1 A L293D: IOL = 0.6 A 1.2 1.8 V VOKH High-level output clamp voltage L293D: IOK = − 0.6 A VCC2 + 1.3 V VOKL Low-level output clamp voltage L293D: IOK = 0.6 A 1.3 V I High level input current A V 7 V 0.2 100 IIH High-A EN VI = 0.2 10 μA I Low level input current A V 0 −3 −10 IIL Low-A EN VI = −2 −100 μA All outputs at high level 13 22 ICC1 Logic supply current IO = 0 All outputs at low level 35 60 mA All outputs at high impedance 8 24 All outputs at high level 14 24 ICC2 Output supply current IO = 0 All outputs at low level 2 6 mA All outputs at high impedance 2 4 switching characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS L293NE, L293DNE UNIT MIN TYP MAX tPLH Propagation delay time, low-to-high-level output from A input 800 ns tPHL Propagation delay time, high-to-low-level output from A input C = 30 pF See Figure 1 400 ns tTLH Transition time, low-to-high-level output CL pF, 300 ns tTHL Transition time, high-to-low-level output 300 ns switching characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS L293DWP, L293N L293DN UNIT MIN TYP MAX tPLH Propagation delay time, low-to-high-level output from A input 750 ns tPHL Propagation delay time, high-to-low-level output from A input C = 30 pF See Figure 1 200 ns tTLH Transition time, low-to-high-level output CL pF, 100 ns tTHL Transition time, high-to-low-level output 350 ns L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION Output CL = 30 pF (see Note A) VCC1 Input 3 V TEST CIRCUIT tf tr 3 V 0 tPHL VOH tTHL tTLH VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS tPLH Output Input VOL tw NOTES: A. CL includes probe and jig capacitance. B. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: tr ≤ 10 ns, tf ≤ 10 ns, tw = 10 μs, PRR = 5 kHz, ZO = 50 Ω. Pulse Generator (see Note B) 5 V 24 V VCC2 A EN Y 90% 90% 50% 10% 50% 10% 90% 90% 50% 10% 50% 10% Figure 1. Test Circuit and Voltage Waveforms L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7 APPLICATION INFORMATION 5 V 24 V 10 kΩ VCC1 VCC2 Control A Control B 4, 5, 12, 13 GND Thermal Shutdown Motor 16 8 3 6 11 14 4Y 3Y 2Y 1Y 1,2EN 1A 2A 3,4EN 3A 4A 15 10 9 7 2 1 Figure 2. Two-Phase Motor Driver (L293) L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 8 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 APPLICATION INFORMATION 5 V 24 V 10 kΩ VCC1 VCC2 16 8 1,2EN 1 1A 2 2A 7 3,4EN 9 3A 10 4A 15 Control A Control B 4, 5, 12, 13 GND Thermal Shutdown Motor 1Y 3 2Y 6 3Y 11 4Y 14 Figure 3. Two-Phase Motor Driver (L293D) L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 9 APPLICATION INFORMATION EN 3A M1 4A M2 H H Fast motor stop H Run H L Run L Fast motor stop L X Free-running motor stop X Free-running motor stop L = low, H = high, X = don’t care EN 1A 2A FUNCTION H L H Turn right H H L Turn left H L L Fast motor stop H H H Fast motor stop L X X Fast motor stop L = low, H = high, X = don’t care VCC2 SES5001 1/2 L293 4, 5, 12, 13 10 SES5001 VCC1 EN 11 15 14 16 9 M2 M1 3A 4A 8 Figure 4. DC Motor Controls (connections to ground and to supply voltage) GND 2 × SES5001 1/2 L293 4, 5, 12, 13 7 6 3 8 1 2 16 VCC2 2 × SES5001 2A 1A VCC1 EN M Figure 5. Bidirectional DC Motor Control GND L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 10 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 APPLICATION INFORMATION 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + + + + D7 D8 D4 D3 L2 IL2 C1 D5 D1 D6 D2 VCC1 L293 IL1/IL2 = 300 mA 0.22 μF VCC2 L1 IL1 D1−D8 = SES5001 Figure 6. Bipolar Stepping-Motor Control mounting instructions The Rthj-amp of the L293 can be reduced by soldering the GND pins to a suitable copper area of the printed circuit board or to an external heat sink. Figure 9 shows the maximum package power PTOT and the θJA as a function of the side of two equal square copper areas having a thickness of 35 μm (see Figure 7). In addition, an external heat sink can be used (see Figure 8). During soldering, the pin temperature must not exceed 260°C, and the soldering time must not exceed 12 seconds. The external heatsink or printed circuit copper area must be connected to electrical ground. L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 11 APPLICATION INFORMATION Copper Area 35-μm Thickness Printed Circuit Board Figure 7. Example of Printed Circuit Board Copper Area (used as heat sink) 11.9 mm 17.0 mm 38.0 mm Figure 8. External Heat Sink Mounting Example (θJA = 25°C/W) L293, L293D QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004 12 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 APPLICATION INFORMATION 3 1 0 2 0 10 20 P 4 MAXIMUM POWER AND JUNCTION vs THERMAL RESISTANCE 30 TOT − Power Dissipation − W 60 20 0 40 80 θJA − Thermal Resistance − °C/W 40 Side − mm Figure 9 θJA PTOT (TA = 70°C) 50 5 3 1 0 2 −50 0 50 4 MAXIMUM POWER DISSIPATION vs AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 100 TA − Ambient Temperature − °C With Infinite Heat Sink Free Air Heat Sink With θJA = 25°C/W Figure 10 150 PTOT − Power Dissipation − W PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 26-Jan-2014 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples L293DNE ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293DNE L293DNEE4 ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293DNE L293DWP OBSOLETE SOIC DW 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293DWP L293DWPG4 OBSOLETE SOIC DW 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293DWPTR OBSOLETESO PowerPAD DWP 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293N OBSOLETE PDIP N 16 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293N L293NE ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293NE L293NEE4 ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293NE L293NG4 OBSOLETE PDIP N 16 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. (4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device. PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 26-Jan-2014 Addendum-Page 2 (5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device. (6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 GND TRIG OUT RESET VCC DISCH THRES CONT 3 2 1 20 19 9 10 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 18 17 16 15 14 NC DISCH NC THRES NC NC TRIG NC OUT NC NC GND NC CONT NC VCC NC NC RESET NC NC – No internal connection NA555...D OR P PACKAGE NE555...D, P, PS, OR PW PACKAGE SA555...D OR P PACKAGE SE555...D, JG, OR P PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) SE555...FK PACKAGE (TOP VIEW) NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 PRECISION TIMERS Check for Samples: NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 1FEATURES • Timing From Microseconds to Hours • Adjustable Duty Cycle • Astable or Monostable Operation • TTL-Compatible Output Can Sink or Source up to 200 mA DESCRIPTION/ORDERING INFORMATION These devices are precision timing circuits capable of producing accurate time delays or oscillation. In the time-delay or monostable mode of operation, the timed interval is controlled by a single external resistor and capacitor network. In the astable mode of operation, the frequency and duty cycle can be controlled independently with two external resistors and a single external capacitor. The threshold and trigger levels normally are two-thirds and one-third, respectively, of VCC. These levels can be altered by use of the control-voltage terminal. When the trigger input falls below the trigger level, the flip-flop is set, and the output goes high. If the trigger input is above the trigger level and the threshold input is above the threshold level, the flip-flop is reset and the output is low. The reset (RESET) input can override all other inputs and can be used to initiate a new timing cycle. When RESET goes low, the flip-flop is reset, and the output goes low. When the output is low, a low-impedance path is provided between discharge (DISCH) and ground. The output circuit is capable of sinking or sourcing current up to 200 mA. Operation is specified for supplies of 5 V to 15 V. With a 5-V supply, output levels are compatible with TTL inputs. 1 Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, all parameters are necessarily include testing of all parameters. tested unless otherwise noted. On all other products, production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com ORDERING INFORMATION(1) T VTHRES MAX A V PACKAGE(2) ORDERABLE PART NUMBER TOP-SIDE MARKING CC = 15 V PDIP – P Tube of 50 NE555P NE555P Tube of 75 NE555D SOIC – D NE555 Reel of 2500 NE555DR 0°C to 70°C 11.2 V SOP – PS Reel of 2000 NE555PSR N555 Tube of 150 NE555PW TSSOP – PW N555 Reel of 2000 NE555PWR PDIP – P Tube of 50 SA555P SA555P –40°C to 85°C 11.2 V Tube of 75 SA555D SOIC – D SA555 Reel of 2000 SA555DR PDIP – P Tube of 50 NA555P NA555P –40°C to 105°C 11.2 V Tube of 75 NA555D SOIC – D NA555 Reel of 2000 NA555DR PDIP – P Tube of 50 SE555P SE555P Tube of 75 SE555D SOIC – D SE555D –55°C to 125°C 10.6 Reel of 2500 SE555DR CDIP – JG Tube of 50 SE555JG SE555JG LCCC – FK Tube of 55 SE555FK SE555FK (1) For the most current package and ordering information, see the Package Option Addendum at the end of this document, or see the TI web site at www.ti.com. (2) Package drawings, thermal data, and symbolization are available at www.ti.com/packaging. Table 1. FUNCTION TABLE RESET TRIGGER THRESHOLD OUTPUT DISCHARGE VOLTAGE(1) VOLTAGE(1) SWITCH Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low On High <1/3 VCC Irrelevant High Off High >1/3 VCC >2/3 VCC Low On High >1/3 VCC <2/3 VCC As previously established (1) Voltage levels shown are nominal. 2 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 1 S R R1 TRIG THRES VCC CONT RESET OUT DISCH GND ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ 8 4 5 6 2 1 7 3 NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM A. Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. B. RESET can override TRIG, which can override THRES. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 3 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com Absolute Maximum Ratings(1) over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) MIN MAX UNIT VCC Supply voltage(2) 18 V VI Input voltage CONT, RESET, THRES, TRIG VCC V IO Output current ±225 mA D package 97 P package 85 qJA Package thermal impedance(3) (4) °C/W PS package 95 PW package 149 FK package 5.61 qJC Package thermal impedance(5) (6) °C/W JG package 14.5 TJ Operating virtual junction temperature 150 °C Case temperature for 60 s FK package 260 °C Lead temperature 1, 6 mm (1/16 in) from case for 60 s JG package 300 °C Tstg Storage temperature range –65 150 °C (1) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. (2) All voltage values are with respect to GND. (3) Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), qJA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable ambient temperature is PD = (TJ(max) - TA)/qJA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability. (4) The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7. (5) Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), qJC, and TC. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable case temperature is PD = (TJ(max) - TC)/qJC. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability. (6) The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with MIL-STD-883. Recommended Operating Conditions over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted) MIN MAX UNIT NA555, NE555, SA555 4.5 16 VCC Supply voltage V SE555 4.5 18 VI Input voltage CONT, RESET, THRES, and TRIG VCC V IO Output current ±200 mA NA555 –40 105 NE555 0 70 TA Operating free-air temperature °C SA555 –40 85 SE555 –55 125 4 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 Electrical Characteristics VCC = 5 V to 15 V, TA = 25°C (unless otherwise noted) NA555 SE555 NE555 PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS SA555 UNIT MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX VCC = 15 V 9.4 10 10.6 8.8 10 11.2 THRES voltage level V VCC = 5 V 2.7 3.3 4 2.4 3.3 4.2 THRES current(1) 30 250 30 250 nA 4.8 5 5.2 4.5 5 5.6 VCC = 15 V TA = –55°C to 125°C 3 6 TRIG voltage level V 1.45 1.67 1.9 1.1 1.67 2.2 VCC = 5 V TA = –55°C to 125°C 1.9 TRIG current TRIG at 0 V 0.5 0.9 0.5 2 mA 0.3 0.7 1 0.3 0.7 1 RESET voltage level V TA = –55°C to 125°C 1.1 RESET at VCC 0.1 0.4 0.1 0.4 RESET current mA RESET at 0 V –0.4 –1 –0.4 –1.5 DISCH switch off-state 20 100 20 100 nA current 9.6 10 10.4 9 10 11 VCC = 15 V CONT voltage TA = –55°C to 125°C 9.6 10.4 (open circuit) V 2.9 3.3 3.8 2.6 3.3 4 VCC = 5 V TA = –55°C to 125°C 2.9 3.8 0.1 0.15 0.1 0.25 VCC = 15 V, IOL = 10 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.75 VCC = 15 V, IOL = 50 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 1 2 2.2 2 2.5 VCC = 15 V, IOL = 100 mA Low-level output voltage TA = –55°C to 125°C 2.7 V VCC = 15 V, IOL = 200 mA 2.5 2.5 VCC = 5 V, IOL = 3.5 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.35 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.35 VCC = 5 V, IOL = 5 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.8 VCC = 5 V, IOL = 8 mA 0.15 0.25 0.15 0.4 13 13.3 12.75 13.3 VCC = 15 V, IOL = –100 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 12 High-level output voltage VCC = 15 V, IOH = –200 mA 12.5 12.5 V 3 3.3 2.75 3.3 VCC = 5 V, IOL = –100 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 2 VCC = 15 V 10 12 10 15 Output low, No load VCC = 5 V 3 5 3 6 Supply current mA VCC = 15 V 9 10 9 13 Output high, No load VCC = 5 V 2 4 2 5 (1) This parameter influences the maximum value of the timing resistors RA and RB in the circuit of Figure 12. For example, when VCC = 5 V, the maximum value is R = RA + RB ≉ 3.4 MΩ, and for VCC = 15 V, the maximum value is 10 MΩ. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 5 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com Operating Characteristics VCC = 5 V to 15 V, TA = 25°C (unless otherwise noted) NA555 TEST SE555 NE555 PARAMETER CONDITIONS(1) SA555 UNIT MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX Initial error of timing Each timer, monostable(3) TA = 25°C 0.5 1.5(4) 1 3 interval(2) % Each timer, astable(5) 1.5 2.25 Temperature coefficient of Each timer, monostable(3) TA = MIN to MAX 30 100(4) 50 ppm/ timing interval Each timer, astable(5) 90 150 °C Supply-voltage sensitivity of Each timer, monostable(3) TA = 25°C 0.05 0.2(4) 0.1 0.5 timing interval %/V Each timer, astable(5) 0.15 0.3 Output-pulse rise time CL = 15 pF, 100 200(4) 100 300 ns TA = 25°C Output-pulse fall time CL = 15 pF, 100 200(4) 100 300 ns TA = 25°C (1) For conditions shown as MIN or MAX, use the appropriate value specified under recommended operating conditions. (2) Timing interval error is defined as the difference between the measured value and the average value of a random sample from each process run. (3) Values specified are for a device in a monostable circuit similar to Figure 9, with the following component values: RA = 2 kΩ to 100 kΩ, C = 0.1 mF. (4) On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, this parameter is not production tested. (5) Values specified are for a device in an astable circuit similar to Figure 12, with the following component values: RA = 1 kΩ to 100 kΩ, C = 0.1 mF. 6 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 25°C IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ VCC = 5 V LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = −55°C 0.1 0.04 0.01 1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 0.07 1 0.4 0.7 10 4 7 0.02 0.2 2 VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ VCC = 10 V LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA 0.1 0.04 0.01 1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 0.07 1 0.4 0.7 10 4 7 0.02 0.2 2 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 25°C TA= −55°C TA = 125°C TA = 25°C TA = −55°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ VCC = 15 V LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA 0.1 0.04 0.01 1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 0.07 1 0.4 0.7 10 4 7 0.02 0.2 2 1 0.6 0.2 0 1.4 1.8 2.0 0.4 1.6 0.8 1.2 − IOH − High-Level Output Current − mA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = 25°C 1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ VCC = 5 V to 15 V ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ TA = −55°C (VCC VOH) − Voltage Drop − V DROP BETWEEN SUPPLY VOLTAGE AND OUTPUT vs HIGH-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS Data for temperatures below 0°C and above 70°C are applicable for SE555 circuits only. Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure 3. Figure 4. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 7 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 5 4 2 1 0 9 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 − Supply Current − mA 7 6 8 SUPPLY CURRENT vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE 10 12 13 14 15 TA = 25°C TA = 125°C TA = −55°C Output Low, No Load ICC VCC − Supply Voltage − V 1 0.995 0.990 0.985 0 5 10 1.005 1.010 NORMALIZED OUTPUT PULSE DURATION (MONOSTABLE OPERATION) vs SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1.015 15 20 Pulse Duration Relative to Value at V C C = 10 V VCC − Supply Voltage − V 1 0.995 0.990 0.985 −75 −25 25 1.005 1.010 NORMALIZED OUTPUT PULSE DURATION (MONOSTABLE OPERATION) vs FREE-AIR TEMPERATURE 1.015 75 125 TA − Free-Air Temperature − °C −50 0 50 100 VCC = 10 V Pulse Duration Relative to Value at TA = 25C 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 Lowest Level of Trigger Pulse – ×VCC tPD – Propagation Delay Time – ns TA = 125°C TA = 70°C TA = 25°C TA = 0°C TA = –55°C PROPAGATION DELAY TIME vs LOWEST VOLTAGE LEVEL OF TRIGGER PULSE NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS (continued) Data for temperatures below 0°C and above 70°C are applicable for SE555 circuits only. Figure 5. Figure 6. Figure 7. Figure 8. 8 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 VCC (5 V to 15 V) RA RL Output GND OUT CONT VCC RESET DISCH THRES Input TRIG ÎÎÎ 5 8 4 7 6 2 3 1 Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 APPLICATION INFORMATION Monostable Operation For monostable operation, any of these timers can be connected as shown in Figure 9. If the output is low, application of a negative-going pulse to the trigger (TRIG) sets the flip-flop (Q goes low), drives the output high, and turns off Q1. Capacitor C then is charged through RA until the voltage across the capacitor reaches the threshold voltage of the threshold (THRES) input. If TRIG has returned to a high level, the output of the threshold comparator resets the flip-flop (Q goes high), drives the output low, and discharges C through Q1. Figure 9. Circuit for Monostable Operation Monostable operation is initiated when TRIG voltage falls below the trigger threshold. Once initiated, the sequence ends only if TRIG is high for at least 10 μs before the end of the timing interval. When the trigger is grounded, the comparator storage time can be as long as 10 μs, which limits the minimum monostable pulse width to 10 μs. Because of the threshold level and saturation voltage of Q1, the output pulse duration is approximately tw = 1.1RAC. Figure 11 is a plot of the time constant for various values of RA and C. The threshold levels and charge rates both are directly proportional to the supply voltage, VCC. The timing interval is, therefore, independent of the supply voltage, so long as the supply voltage is constant during the time interval. Applying a negative-going trigger pulse simultaneously to RESET and TRIG during the timing interval discharges C and reinitiates the cycle, commencing on the positive edge of the reset pulse. The output is held low as long as the reset pulse is low. To prevent false triggering, when RESET is not used, it should be connected to VCC. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 9 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 − Output Pulse Duration − s C − Capacitance − mF 10 1 10−1 10−2 10−3 10−4 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 10−5 0.001 tw RA = 10 MW RA = 10 kW RA = 1 kW RA = 100 kW RA = 1 MW Voltage − 2 V/div Time − 0.1 ms/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Capacitor Voltage Output Voltage Input Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ RA = 9.1 kW CL = 0.01 mF RL = 1 kW See Figure 9 Voltage − 1 V/div Time − 0.5 ms/div tH Capacitor Voltage tL Output Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ RA = 5 k RL = 1 k RB = 3 k See Figure 12 C = 0.15 mF GND OUT CONT VCC RESET DISCH THRES TRIG C RB RA Output RL 0.01 mF VCC (5 V to 15 V) (see Note A) ÎÎÎ NOTE A: Decoupling CONT voltage to ground with a capacitor can improve operation. This should be evaluated for individual applications. Open 5 8 4 7 6 2 3 1 Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com Figure 10. Typical Monostable Waveforms Figure 11. Output Pulse Duration vs Capacitance Astable Operation As shown in Figure 12, adding a second resistor, RB, to the circuit of Figure 9 and connecting the trigger input to the threshold input causes the timer to self-trigger and run as a multivibrator. The capacitor C charges through RA and RB and then discharges through RB only. Therefore, the duty cycle is controlled by the values of RA and RB. This astable connection results in capacitor C charging and discharging between the threshold-voltage level (≉0.67 × VCC) and the trigger-voltage level (≉0.33 × VCC). As in the monostable circuit, charge and discharge times (and, therefore, the frequency and duty cycle) are independent of the supply voltage. Figure 12. Circuit for Astable Operation Figure 13. Typical Astable Waveforms 10 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 tH  0.693 (RARB) C tL  0.693 (RB) C Other useful relationships are shown below. period  tHtL  0.693 (RA2RB) C frequency  1.44 (RA2RB) C Output driver duty cycle  tL tHtL  RB RA2RB Output waveform duty cycle  tL tH  RB RARB Low-to-high ratio  tH tHtL  1– RB RA2RB f − Free-Running Frequency − Hz C − Capacitance − mF 100 k 10 k 1 k 100 10 1 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 0.1 0.001 RA + 2 RB = 10 MW RA + 2 RB = 1 MW RA + 2 RB = 100 kW RA + 2 RB = 10 kW RA + 2 RB = 1 kW Time − 0.1 ms/div Voltage − 2 V/div ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ VCC = 5 V RA = 1 kW C = 0.1 mF See Figure 15 Capacitor Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Output Voltage Input Voltage VCC (5 V to 15 V) DISCH OUT RESET VCC RL RA A5T3644 C THRES GND CONT TRIG Input 0.01 mF ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Output 4 8 3 7 6 2 5 1 Pin numbers shown are shown for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 Figure 12 shows typical waveforms generated during astable operation. The output high-level duration tH and low-level duration tL can be calculated as follows: Figure . Figure 14. Free-Running Frequency Missing-Pulse Detector The circuit shown in Figure 15 can be used to detect a missing pulse or abnormally long spacing between consecutive pulses in a train of pulses. The timing interval of the monostable circuit is retriggered continuously by the input pulse train as long as the pulse spacing is less than the timing interval. A longer pulse spacing, missing pulse, or terminated pulse train permits the timing interval to be completed, thereby generating an output pulse as shown in Figure 16. Figure 15. Circuit for Missing-Pulse Detector Figure 16. Completed Timing Waveforms for Missing-Pulse Detector Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 11 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 Voltage − 2 V/div Time − 0.1 ms/div Capacitor Voltage Output Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏInput Voltage VCC = 5 V RA = 1250 W C = 0.02 mF See Figure 9 NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com Frequency Divider By adjusting the length of the timing cycle, the basic circuit of Figure 9 can be made to operate as a frequency divider. Figure 17 shows a divide-by-three circuit that makes use of the fact that retriggering cannot occur during the timing cycle. Figure 17. Divide-by-Three Circuit Waveforms 12 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 THRES GND C RL RA VCC (5 V to 15 V) Output DISCH OUT RESET VCC TRIG CONT Modulation Input (see Note A) Clock Input NOTE A: The modulating signal can be direct or capacitively coupled to CONT. For direct coupling, the effects of modulation source voltage and impedance on the bias of the timer should be considered. 4 8 3 7 6 2 5 Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. 1 Voltage − 2 V/div Time − 0.5 ms/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Capacitor VoltageÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Clock Input Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ RA = 3 kW C = 0.02 mF RL = 1 kW See Figure 18 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Modulation Input Voltage NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 Pulse-Width Modulation The operation of the timer can be modified by modulating the internal threshold and trigger voltages, which is accomplished by applying an external voltage (or current) to CONT. Figure 18 shows a circuit for pulse-width modulation. A continuous input pulse train triggers the monostable circuit, and a control signal modulates the threshold voltage. Figure 19 shows the resulting output pulse-width modulation. While a sine-wave modulation signal is shown, any wave shape could be used. Figure 18. Circuit for Pulse-Width Modulation Figure 19. Pulse-Width-Modulation Waveforms Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 13 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 Voltage − 2 V/div ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ RA = 3 kW RB = 500 W RL = 1 kW See Figure 20 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Capacitor Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Output Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Modulation Input Voltage Time − 0.1 ms/div RB Modulation Input (see Note A) CONT TRIG RESET VCC OUT DISCH VCC (5 V to 15 V) RL RA C GND THRES NOTE A: The modulating signal can be direct or capacitively coupled to CONT. For direct coupling, the effects of modulation source voltage and impedance on the bias of the timer should be considered. Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. 4 8 3 7 6 2 5 Output NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com Pulse-Position Modulation As shown in Figure 20, any of these timers can be used as a pulse-position modulator. This application modulates the threshold voltage and, thereby, the time delay, of a free-running oscillator. Figure 21 shows a triangular-wave modulation signal for such a circuit; however, any wave shape could be used. Figure 20. Circuit for Pulse-Position Modulation Figure 21. Pulse-Position-Modulation Waveforms 14 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 S VCC RESET VCC OUT DISCH GND CONT TRIG 4 8 3 7 6 1 5 2 THRES RC CC 0.01 CC = 14.7 mF RC = 100 kW Output C RESET VCC OUT DISCH GND CONT TRIG 4 8 3 7 6 1 5 2 THRES RB 33 kW 0.001 0.01 mF CB = 4.7 mF RB = 100 kW RA = 100 kW Output A Output B CA = 10 mF mF 0.01 mF 0.001 RA 33 kW THRES 2 5 1 6 7 3 4 8 TRIG CONT GND DISCH OUT RESET VCC mF mF CA CB Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages. NOTE A: S closes momentarily at t = 0. Voltage − 5 V/div t − Time − 1 s/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ See Figure 22 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output A ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output B ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ Output C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ t = 0 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ twC = 1.1 RCCC ÏÏÏÏÏÏ twC ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ twB = 1.1 RBCB ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ twA = 1.1 RACA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ twA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ twB NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555 www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 Sequential Timer Many applications, such as computers, require signals for initializing conditions during start-up. Other applications, such as test equipment, require activation of test signals in sequence. These timing circuits can be connected to provide such sequential control. The timers can be used in various combinations of astable or monostable circuit connections, with or without modulation, for extremely flexible waveform control. Figure 22 shows a sequencer circuit with possible applications in many systems, and Figure 23 shows the output waveforms. Figure 22. Sequential Timer Circuit Figure 23. Sequential Timer Waveforms Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 15 Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 2-May-2014 Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples JM38510/10901BPA ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510 /10901BPA M38510/10901BPA ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510 /10901BPA NA555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555 NA555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555 NA555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555 NA555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555 NA555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 105 NA555P NA555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 105 NA555P NE555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DRG3 PREVIEW SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555 NE555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU | CU SN N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 NE555P NE555PE3 PREVIEW PDIP P 8 50 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 2-May-2014 Addendum-Page 2 Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples NE555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 NE555P NE555PSLE OBSOLETE SO PS 8 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 NE555PSR ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PSRE4 ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PSRG4 ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PW ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PWE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PWG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PWR ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PWRE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555PWRG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555 NE555Y OBSOLETE 0 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 SA555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555 SA555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SA555P PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 2-May-2014 Addendum-Page 3 Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Qty Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish (6) MSL Peak Temp (3) Op Temp (°C) Device Marking (4/5) Samples SA555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SA555P SE555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555 SE555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555 SE555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555 SE555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555 SE555FKB ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555FKB SE555JG ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555JG SE555JGB ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555JGB SE555N OBSOLETE PDIP N 8 TBD Call TI Call TI -55 to 125 SE555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free (RoHS) CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555P (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 2-May-2014 Addendum-Page 4 (4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device. (5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device. (6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width. Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. OTHER QUALIFIED VERSIONS OF SE555, SE555M : • Catalog: SE555 • Military: SE555M • Space: SE555-SP, SE555-SP NOTE: Qualified Version Definitions: • Catalog - TI's standard catalog product • Military - QML certified for Military and Defense Applications • Space - Radiation tolerant, ceramic packaging and qualified for use in Space-based application TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.8 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 NE555PSR SO PS 8 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 6.6 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1 NE555PWR TSSOP PW 8 2000 330.0 12.4 7.0 3.6 1.6 8.0 12.0 Q1 SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.8 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 SA555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 SE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 SE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 15-Oct-2013 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6 NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0 NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6 NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6 NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 NE555PSR SO PS 8 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 NE555PWR TSSOP PW 8 2000 367.0 367.0 35.0 SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6 SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0 SA555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6 SE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 SE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 15-Oct-2013 Pack Materials-Page 2 MECHANICAL DATA MCER001A – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED JANUARY 1997 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 JG (R-GDIP-T8) CERAMIC DUAL-IN-LINE 0.310 (7,87) 0.290 (7,37) 0.014 (0,36) 0.008 (0,20) Seating Plane 4040107/C 08/96 5 4 0.065 (1,65) 0.045 (1,14) 8 1 0.020 (0,51) MIN 0.400 (10,16) 0.355 (9,00) 0.015 (0,38) 0.023 (0,58) 0.063 (1,60) 0.015 (0,38) 0.200 (5,08) MAX 0.130 (3,30) MIN 0.245 (6,22) 0.280 (7,11) 0.100 (2,54) 0°–15° NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in inches (millimeters). B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. This package can be hermetically sealed with a ceramic lid using glass frit. D. Index point is provided on cap for terminal identification. E. Falls within MIL STD 1835 GDIP1-T8 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1 PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright W 1988, Texas Instruments Incorporated Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3 SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5 SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85 SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85 4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7 TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Reel Diameter (mm) Reel Width W1 (mm) A0 (mm) B0 (mm) K0 (mm) P1 (mm) W (mm) Pin1 Quadrant SN74LS85DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1 SN74LS85NSR SO NS 16 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 10.5 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 14-Jul-2012 Pack Materials-Page 1 *All dimensions are nominal Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm) SN74LS85DR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6 SN74LS85NSR SO NS 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0 PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION www.ti.com 14-Jul-2012 Pack Materials-Page 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46C and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48B. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components which meet ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. Components which have not been so designated are neither designed nor intended for automotive use; and TI will not be responsible for any failure of such components to meet such requirements. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Mobile Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit User’s Guide swru209b swru209b 2/28 Table of contents CC2530 ZIGBEE DEVELOPMENT KIT USER’S GUIDE............................................................................. 1 1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................... 3 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL......................................................................................................................... 3 3 ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................................................. 4 4 ZIGBEE DEVELOPMENT KIT CONTENTS ...................................................................................... 5 5 GETTING STARTED .............................................................................................................................. 7 5.1 SETTING UP THE HARDWARE........................................................................................................................ 7 5.2 RUNNING THE PREPROGRAMMED ZIGBEE SENSOR DEMO ........................................................................... 8 5.3 CC2530 PER TEST....................................................................................................................................... 8 5.4 EVALUATE THE CC2530 RADIO USING SMARTRF STUDIO .......................................................................... 8 5.5 DEVELOPING YOUR OWN SOFTWARE WITH THE CC2530............................................................................ 11 5.6 DEVELOPING YOUR OWN HARDWARE WITH THE CC2530 .......................................................................... 11 6 RF TESTING........................................................................................................................................... 12 6.1 TX PARAMETER TESTING BASICS.............................................................................................................. 12 6.2 RX PARAMETER TESTING BASICS.............................................................................................................. 13 7 CC2530EM .............................................................................................................................................. 14 8 CC2531 USB DONGLE.......................................................................................................................... 15 9 SMARTRF05 EVALUATION BOARD................................................................................................ 17 10 SMARTRF05 BATTERY BOARD ....................................................................................................... 18 10.1 JOYSTICK ................................................................................................................................................... 19 10.2 EMCONNECTORS....................................................................................................................................... 19 10.3 EMSELECTION SWITCH............................................................................................................................. 20 10.4 PROBE CONNECTORS.................................................................................................................................. 22 10.5 SOC DEBUG CONNECTOR........................................................................................................................... 22 10.6 CURRENTMEASUREMENT JUMPER ............................................................................................................ 23 11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ................................................................................................ 24 12 REFERENCES........................................................................................................................................ 26 13 DOCUMENT HISTORY........................................................................................................................ 27 APPENDIX A SCHEMATICS.................................................................................................................... 28 swru209b 3/28 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit. The CC2530 is Texas Instrument’s second generation ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4 compliant System-on- Chip with an optimized 8051 MCU core and radio for the 2.4 GHz unlicensed ISM/SRD band. This device enables industrial grade applications by offering state-of-the-art noise immunity, excellent link budget, operation up to 125 degrees and low voltage operation. In addition, the CC2530 provides extensive hardware support for packet handling, data buffering, burst transmissions, data encryption, data authentication, clear channel assessment, link quality indication and packet timing information. Z-Stack™ is TI's ZigBee compliant protocol stack for a growing portfolio of IEEE 802.15.4 products and platforms. Z-Stack support the CC2530 and is compliant with both the ZigBee® 2007 (ZigBee and ZigBee PRO) and ZigBee® 2006 specification. The CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit is well suited for demonstration, evaluation and software development targeting IEEE 802.15.4 and ZigBee compliant applications with the CC2530. The CC2530 product folder on the web [1] has more information, with datasheets, user guides and application notes. For more information about TI’s ZigBee software implementation, refer to the ZStack product folder on the web [7]. This web site also has links for download of Z-stack. 2 About this manual This manual describes all the hardware included in the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit (CC2530ZDK) and points to other useful information resources. Chapter 4 briefly describes the contents of the development kit and chapter 5 gives a quick introduction to how to get started with the kit. In particular, it describes how to install SmartRF Studio to get the required drivers for the evaluation board, how the hardware can be used, and lists the software that is available for the development kit. Chapter 6 explains some simple methods for performing practical RF testing with the development kit. Chapter 7, 8, and 9 describe the hardware in the kit and where to find more information about how to use it. A troubleshooting guide can be found in chapter 11. The CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide [9] has a short tutorial on how to get started with this kit. More information and user manuals for the PC tools SmartRF Studio and SmartRF Flash Programmer can be found on their respective product sites on the web [2] [3]. Please visit the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit [11] web page and CC2530 product page [1] for additional information. Further information can be found on the TI LPRF Online Community [16]. Refer also to the document CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] which gives a detailed description of how to set up the software development environment for the CC2530. This document also lists other available software solutions for CC2530. See chapter 12 for a list of relevant documents and links. swru209b 4/28 3 Acronyms ACM Abstract Control Model BB Battery Board CDC Communications Device Class DK Development Kit EB Evaluation Board EM Evaluation Module HID Human Interface Device IC Integrated Circuit ISM Industrial, Scientific and Medical KB Kilo Byte (1024 byte) LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LPRF Low Power RF MCU Micro Controller NC Not connected PER Packet Error Rate RF Radio Frequency RX Receive SoC System on Chip SPI Serial Peripheral Interface SRD Short Range Device TI Texas Instruments TX Transmit UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit USB Universal Serial Bus ZDK ZigBee Development Kit Z-Stack TI’s ZigBee software implementation swru209b 5/28 4 ZigBee Development Kit contents The CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit (CC2530ZDK) includes hardware and software that allows quick testing of the CC2530 RF performance and offers a complete platform for development of advanced prototype RF systems and ZigBee applications.  Evaluate the CC2530 and ZigBee right out of the box. The kit can be used to demonstrate a small sensor network application using ZigBee and the CC2530.  Use the CC2530ZDK to do software development of your own ZigBee applications using ZStack ™ for CC2530.  Use SmartRF Studio to perform RF measurements. The radio can be easily configured to measure sensitivity, output power and other RF parameters.  Prototype development. All I/O pins from the CC2530 are available on pin connectors on the SmartRF05EB, allowing easy interconnection to peripherals on the EB board or other external sensors and devices. The CC2530ZDK contains the following components  2 x SmartRF05EB (the two large boards)  5 x SmartRF05 Battery Boards  7 x CC2530 Evaluation Modules (with the CC2530 and antenna connector) o 2 of these CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with the SensorDemo Collector application1 o 5 of the CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with the SensorDemo Sensor application  7 x Antennas  1 x CC2531 USB Dongle  Cables  Batteries  Documents Figure 1 - CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit Contents 1 Consult the CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide [9] and the CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide [10] for a description of the software programmed on the CC2530EM’s. swru209b 6/28 SmartRF05EB The SmartRF05EB (evaluation board) is the main board in the kit with a wide range of user interfaces:  3x16 character serial LCD  Full speed USB 2.0 interface  UART  LEDs  Serial Flash  Potentiometer  Joystick  Buttons The EB is the platform for the evaluation modules (EM) and can be connected to the PC via USB to control the EM. CC2530EM The CC2530EM (evaluation module) contains the RF IC and necessary external components and matching filters for getting the most out of the radio. The module can be plugged into the SmartRF05EB. Use the EM as reference design for RF layout. The schematics are included at the end of this document and the layout files can be found on the web [1]. CC2531 USB Dongle The CC2531 USB Dongle is a fully operational USB device that can be plugged into a PC. The dongle has 2 LEDs, two small pushbuttons and connector holes that allow connection of external sensors or devices. The dongle also has a connector for programming and debugging of the CC2531 USB controller. The dongle comes preprogrammed with firmware such that it can be used as a packet sniffer device. SmartRF05BB The SmartRF05 Battery Board can be used as an alternative to the EB, providing a standalone node when the CC2530EM is connected. It is powered with 2 AA batteries in the sockets underneath the board. The board peripherals include 4 LED’s, 2 push buttons and a joystick. The BB also has a SoC debug connector for connection to an external debug/programming tool e.g. the SmartRF05EB. swru209b 7/28 5 Getting started 5.1 Setting up the hardware After opening the kit, make sure you have all components. Please contact your TI Sales Representative or TI Support [17] if anything is missing. Start by connecting the antennas to the SMA connector on the RF evaluation boards. Tighten the antenna’s screw firmly on to the SMA connector. If not properly connected, you might see reduced RF performance. It is also possible to connect the EM board to RF instruments via coax cables. The EM is designed to match a 50 Ohm load at the SMA connector. Figure 2 CC2530ZDK assembled hardware Next, the evaluation modules should be plugged in to the SmartRF05EB’s and to the SmartRF05BB’s. A ZigBee sensor demo application is preprogrammed on the CC2530EM’s included in this kit. The application consists of two different device types; collectors and sensors. 5 of the CC2530EM’s are programmed as the sensor device type. When running the out of the box demonstration the sensor EM’s shall be connected to the BB’s. The two EM’s programmed as collector device shall be connected to the EB’s. When not using the out of the box demonstration (i.e. the preprogrammed application) e.g, for RF evaluation or software development, all of the 7 EM’s can be used equally. The purpose of the SmartRF05EB is to serve as a general I/O board for testing of the various peripherals of the CC2530 microcontroller. The SmartRF05EB is also used for programming and debugging of the CC2530, and has several useful peripheral devices like LCD, LED’s, I/O connectors, push buttons and joystick etc. The evaluation board can be powered from several different sources:  2 x 1.5V AA batteries (included in this kit)  USB (via the USB connector)  DC power (4 to 10 Volt) (not included in this kit) swru209b 8/28  External regulated power source (not included in this kit) The power source can be selected using jumper P11 on the SmartRF05EB. The SmartRF05EB User’s Guide [6] provides more details. The SmartRF05 Battery Boards (BB) can be used as a standalone device when equipped with a CC2530EM. This board is powered by AA batteries. See section 10 in this document for more information about the SmartRF05BB. After assembling the hardware, you now have several options for working with the CC2530:  Run the Sensor Demo ZigBee application that is preprogrammed on the CC2530’s. The CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide document [9] included in this kit describes the necessary steps to run the demonstration.  Running the packet error rate (PER) test software available for CC2530EM. Chapter 5.3 describes this application.  Evaluate and explore the RF capabilities of the CC2530 using SmartRF Studio. Chapter 5.4 provides the details how to do so.  Develop your own software for the CC2530. Install IAR Embedded Workbench for 8051 and set up your first software project. Section 5.5 explains how.  Develop your own hardware with the CC2530. See chapter 5.6. 5.2 Running the Preprogrammed ZigBee Sensor Demo The CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with a Sensor Demo application used to demonstrate a temperature monitoring application in a small ZigBee network. The CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide document [9] included in this kit describes the necessary steps to run the demonstration. A software package with the source code for the Sensor Demo, and Intel HEX files ready to be programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530ZDK web site [11]. A detailed description about the Sensor Demo application is found in the document CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide [10]. 5.3 CC2530 PER test A Packet Error Rate (PER) test application is also available for the CC2530. This application can be used to evaluate the RF performance of CC2530 using either the hardware included in the kit or other boards with a CC2530. More information about the PER test application can be found in the documents CC2530DK Quick Start Guide [12] and CC2530 Software Examples User's Guide [13]. A software package with the source code for the PER test application, and Intel HEX files ready to be programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530DK web site [14]. 5.4 Evaluate the CC2530 Radio using SmartRF Studio SmartRF Studio is a PC application developed for configuration and evaluation of many of the RF-IC products from Texas Instruments, including the CC2530. The application communicates with the CC2530 via the USB controller on the SmartRF05EB board. The USB controller uses the debug interface of the CC2530 to execute commands and to read and write registers. SmartRF Studio lets you explore the radio on the CC2530, as it gives you full overview and access to the radio registers. The tool has a control interface for running basic radio performance tests from the swru209b 9/28 PC. SmartRF Studio also offers a flexible code export function of radio register settings for software developers. Before proceeding, please download and install the latest version of SmartRF Studio from the web [2]. By installing Studio, the USB drivers needed for proper interaction between the PC and the hardware of the CC2530DK will also be installed. In order to use the SmartRF Studio with CC2530, connect the CC2530EM to the SmartRF05EB. Next, connect the SmartRF05EB board to the PC via one of the USB cables included in the kit. If you have installed SmartRF Studio, select automatic installation of driver in the device wizard that appears. The device wizard will only pop up when you turn on the SmartRF05EB and only once for each board. Allow Windows to complete the driver installation before proceeding. With the board connected to the PC, you can start SmartRF Studio. The following window should appear: Figure 3 - CC2530 and SmartRF Studio Make sure you select the tab called “2.4 GHz”. The tab will indicate if there is a board/device connected, and you should see the CC2530 icon highlighted as in the screenshot above. Double click on the CC2530 icon, and a new window will appear. swru209b 10/28 Figure 4 - CC2530 control panel in SmartRF Studio Figure 4 shows the main control panel for the CC2530. It lets you perform a number of operations:  Run TX Test modes for testing of RF output power and spectrum; e.g. by connecting a spectrum analyser or a power meter to the CC2530EM SMA connector to perform RF measurements.  Run Packet TX and RX tests. For this test, you should have two EBs with CC2530EMs connected to the PC. o Double click on both of the devices in the device list in SmartRF Studio (Figure 3), opening two windows, giving control of the two radios at the same time. o Select one device to be the transmitter, by selecting the “Packet TX” tab shown in the lower middle of Figure 4. o On the other device (the receiver), select the “Packet RX” tab. o Set up basic test parameters and press the “Start” button for the receiver. o Now you can start transmission by pressing the “Start” button for the transmitter. o The window will show the number of packets sent on the transmitter side and the number of received packets and signal strength of the last received packet on the receiver side.  Read and/or modify registers and common settings, such as RF frequency (or channel) and output power.  Export RF register values in a user modifiable format by selecting “File  Register Export”. SmartRF Studio offers a lot of possibilities for testing and evaluating the hardware. Download the tool and try it for yourself. swru209b 11/28 5.5 Developing your own software with the CC2530 To develop software and debug an application on the CC2530, it is recommended to use IAR Embedded Workbench. It supports debugging of CC2530 through the SmartRF05EB, so no additional hardware is required. IAR EW8051 is bundled with all the required files for CC2530 to start development:  Register definition header file  Linker command file  Driver and device description file needed for debugging and programming Note that other compilers and linkers can be used, but these tools may have limited debugging capabilities. An evaluation version of IAR Embedded Workbench is included in the ZigBee Development Kit. To install the software, insert the CD and follow the instructions. You will be asked to register on IAR’s web site to get a license key for the product. As the owner of a CC2530 Development Kit, you are entitled to a 60 day evaluation period. The evaluation version in the kit automatically gives you 30 days. Please contact your local IAR sales representative for the additional 30-days evaluation period. For a list of sales offices and distributors in your country, please see this site: http://www.iar.com/contact. Refer also to the CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] which will guide you through the steps of setting up your own IAR project from scratch. The CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] also gives a brief overview of complete software solutions for CC2530 from Texas Instruments. TI’s ZigBee compliant protocol stack Z-Stack™ can be downloaded from the product folder [7]. This software is needed in order to develop ZigBee application for the CC2530. The product folder include downloads of Z-Stack™ for the various TI platforms. Make sure the version for CC2530 is selected. After installation refer to the Z-stack User’s Guide document found in the installation folders of ZStack ™. The default root installation path for Z-Stack is C:\Texas Instruments\. A software package with the source code for the Sensor Demo, and Intel HEX files ready to be programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530ZDK web site [11]. This package also includes the CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide giving information about how to set up the software example in the IAR development environment. 5.6 Developing your own hardware with the CC2530 It is recommended to use the CC2530EM as a reference design when designing new hardware using the CC2530. The CC2530EM reference design files can be downloaded from the CC2530 product folder on the web [1]. swru209b 12/28 6 RF Testing NB! When running RF performance tests, it is recommended to disable all other peripherals on the SmartRF05EB in order to avoid unwanted noise on the on-board voltage. In particular, make sure the RS232 level converter/line driver is disabled. RF testing can be performed by using SmartRF Studio together with the Development Kit. The basic set-up is described in section 5.4. As described in that chapter, SmartRF Studio can be used to set up basic tests and tune RF registers accordingly. Since the CC2530 evaluation board is equipped with an SMA connector, both radiated (via antenna) and conducted (via cable) tests can be performed, and it is easy to hook the EM up to RF measurement equipment. The RF equipment may be connected in two different ways.  To measure radiated performance, connect an appropriate antenna to the spectrum analyzer or power meter and an antenna on the EM board.  To measure conducted performance, connect a 50 Ohm coaxial cable directly from the EM to the RF equipment. Figure 5 - RF Test Set-Up with a Spectrum analyzer By using good-quality RF cabling, the loss in the cabling should be negligible. However make sure that the spectrum analyzer is calibrated. If possible, check it against a calibrated instrument such as an RF signal generator. Uncalibrated spectrum analyzers can display errors of several dBs. 6.1 TX Parameter Testing Basics To investigate the TX performance of the CC2530, you can either use a Spectrum Analyzer or an RF Power Meter. Use the “Simple TX” test mode in SmartRF Studio to set up the device to transmit a signal at the desired frequency. Both a modulated or unmodulated carrier signal can be generated. Use the RF Power Meter to observe the output power or the spectrum analyzer to observe the spectrum and to measure the error vector magnitude (EVM). swru209b 13/28 6.2 RX Parameter Testing Basics To investigate the RX performance of the CC2530, you can use a signal generator or “Packet TX” in SmartRF Studio (with another EB+EM) to generate the packets to receive. The receiver can be configured by using the “Packet RX” test feature in SmartRF Studio. By adding a jammer (a third node that generates either noise on the same channel or a strong signal on an adjacent channel) it is also possible to measure co-channel rejection and selectivity/blocking performance. The PER test application, that was described in section 5.3, can be used for simple sensitivity measurements with the CC2530EM and/or with your own prototype hardware. In this case, connect the unit you want to test to a known good transmitter with coaxial cables and attenuators. Add more attenuators until the PER value is 1%. The signal strength at the receiver side is then the sensitivity limit of the system. For more information regarding sensitivity measurements, refer to “Design Note 2 – Practical Sensitivity Testing” [15]. swru209b 14/28 7 CC2530EM Figure 6 - CC2530 Evaluation Module The CC2530EM is a complete RF module based on one of the recommended reference designs for the CC2530 radio. The module is equipped with a 32 MHz crystal, a 32.768 kHz crystal, external passive components for the balun and antenna match filter, an SMA connector for the antenna or any other RF instrument connection and general IO headers/connectors. The table below shows the pin-out from the CC2530 to the two connectors on the backside of the evaluation module. CC2530 Signal P1 P1 CC2530 Signal CC2530 Signal P2 P2 CC2530 Signal GND 1 2 - - 1 2 - P0.4 3 4 P1.3 - 3 4 - P0.1 5 6 P1.0 - 5 6 - P0.2 7 8 - VDD 7 8 - P0.3 9 10 P2.1 VDD 9 10 - P0.0 11 12 P2.2 - 11 12 - P1.1 13 14 P1.4 - 13 14 - P0.6 15 16 P1.5 RESET 15 16 - P0.7 17 18 P1.6 P1.2 17 18 P0.5 GND 19 20 P1.7 P2.0 19 20 - Table 1 - CC2530EM pin-out The part number of the EM connector is SFM-110-02-SM-D-A-K-TR from Samtec. It mates with the TFM-110-02-SM-D-A-K-TR, also from Samtec. Please refer to the reference design on the web [1] for further details. CC2530F256 32 kHz Crystal 32MHz Crystal SMA antenna connector EM Connector P2 (Bottom side) EM Connector P1 (Bottom side) swru209b 15/28 8 CC2531 USB Dongle Figure 7 - CC2531 USB Dongle The USB dongle that is included in the kit comes preprogrammed such that it can be used together with the SmartRF Packet Sniffer [4] to capture packets going over the air. To use the dongle as a sniffer, just install the Packet Sniffer PC application (available on the web [4]), plug in the USB dongle and start capturing packets. The Packet Sniffer User Manual [5] has more information. The USB dongle can also be used as a general development board for USB and RF software. There is a USB firmware library available from the TI web pages with an implementation of a complete USB framework, including examples showing both HID and CDC ACM. There is a link to this library on the CC2530 DK web pages [14]. Table 2 shows which CC2531 signals are connected to what IO on the dongle. IO Connector CC2531 Dongle User IO CC2531 1 P0.2 Green LED P0.0 2 P0.3 Red LED P1.1 3 P0.4 Button S1 P1.2 4 P0.5 Button S2 P1.3 5 P1.7 6 P1.6 7 P1.5 8 P1.4 Table 2 - CC2531 USB Dongle Pinout In order to debug and program firmware on the CC2531, the CC2531 USB dongle can be connected to the SmartRF05EB as shown in the picture below. The small adapter board and flat cable is included in the development kit. IO Connector Meandred F-antenna CC2531F256 Button S1 Button S2 LEDs Debug connector Voltage regulator swru209b 16/28 Figure 8 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB The debug connector on the CC2531 USB Dongle matches the debug connector on the SmartRF05EB (and the CC Debugger). Note that, by default, the CC2531 dongle is not powered through the debug connector, so an external power source must be used while programming. The easiest solution is to connect it to a USB port on the PC. Alternatively, resistor R2 can be mounted. The table below shows the pin out of the debug connector. Pin # Connection 1 GND 2 VCC 3 CC2531 P2.2 (DC) 4 CC2531 P2.1 (DD) 5 NC 6 NC 7 CC2531 RESET 8 NC 9 Optional external VCC (R2 must be mounted) 10 NC Table 3 – CC2531 USB Dongle Debug Connector Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) for additional details. swru209b 17/28 9 SmartRF05 Evaluation Board The SmartRF05 Evaluation Board is thoroughly described in the SmartRF05EB User’s Guide [6]. That document will describe the hardware features in detail and provide the schematics for the board. swru209b 18/28 10 SmartRF05 Battery Board Figure 9 SmartRF05 Battery Board The SmartRF05 Battery Board is a smaller and simpler board than the SmartRF05EB. The Battery Board can together with an EM be used as a standalone node. Figure 9 shows the SmartRF05 Battery Board. The Battery Board is powered with 2 AA batteries placed in the battery connectors underneath the board. The peripherals that are available include 2 push buttons, a joystick with 5 directions and 4 LED’s of different colours that can be controlled via the EM. There are 2 switches on the SmartRF05 Battery Board:  The Power switch P6 used to switch the board’s power supply on/off.  The EM selection switch. NB: The EM selection switch shall be placed in position SoC/TRX when using a SoC EM such as CC2530EM or a transceiver EM is connected to the Battery Board. The position MSP is used when the CCMSP-EM430F2618 board (not part of this kit) is connected. More information about the EM Selection switch is found in section 10.3. The following sections give the pin out of the different connectors on the SmartRF05 Battery Board. Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) and layout (available on the web) for additional details. 256kB SPI EM Flash Module Connectors Joystick EM Selection Switch LEDs Probe Connectors Push Buttons Power Switch swru209b 19/28 10.1 Joystick The joystick detects five positions (centre, up, down, left, right) and one event (pushed). The two aggregated signals, JOY_MOVE and JOY_LEVEL, are used to detect a joystick event when using a SoC (e.g. the CC2530). JOY_MOVE is high whenever the joystick is moved away from the centre position, including pushing. The other signal, JOY_LEVEL, is a voltage level signal that gives different values depending on the current position of the joystick. The table below shows these values. Note that the voltage levels are relative to the voltage on the board. Joystick position JOY_LEVEL (Volts) Up 0.31 Down 1.16 Left 1.62 Right 1.81 Centre 2.12 Table 4 - Voltage on JOY_LEVEL for different joystick positions (T=25°C, Vdd=3.0V) When the EM selection switch is in position MSP, there are 5 discrete signals in addition to JOY_MOVE and JOY_LEVEL to be used to distinguish which direction the joystick was pressed. These 5 discrete signals are not used with CC2530 - only with the CCMSP-EM430F2618 board (not part of this kit). The discrete signals are routed to the EM connectors. See section 10.2 for details. 10.2 EM connectors The EM connectors P1 and P2 are used to connect an EM to the Battery Board. The pin out for these connectors is shown below. Table 1 in section 7 gives information about how the signals of the EM connectors are connected to the CC2530 on the EM board. Note that some of the signals are shared, e.g. IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUTTON1. This means that the signal is shared between IO’s on the board; in this case both LED 4 when in SoC mode and Button 1. Pressing Button 1 will affect the state of LED 4. Similarly, if a SoC is toggling LED 4, it cannot read from Button 1 at the same time. Function on BB Pin Pin Function on BB GND 1 2 GND Not in use on BB 3 4 FLASH_CS IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUTTON1 5 6 IO_LED1 Not in use on BB 7 8 JOYSTICK_RT Not in use on BB 9 10 SoC Debug P3.4 Not in use on BB 11 12 SoC Debug P3.3 IO_LED2_SOC 13 14 CS & SoC Debug P3.5 JOY_LEVEL 15 16 SCLK & SoC Debug P3.6 Not in use on BB 17 18 MOSI & SoC Debug P3.8 GND 19 20 MISO & SoC Debug P3.10 Table 5 - EM connector P1 pin-out swru209b 20/28 Function on BB Pin Pin Function on BB JOYSTICK_PUSH 1 2 GND NC 3 4 IO_LED2_MSP Not in use on BB 5 6 IO_LED3_MSP VCC_EM 7 8 IO_LED4_MSP VCC_EM 9 10 NC JOYSTICK_UP 11 12 Not in use on BB JOYSTICK_LEFT 13 14 Not in use on BB SoC Debug P3.7 & Flash Reset 15 16 IO_BUTTON2 Not in use on BB 17 18 Not in use on BB JOY_MOVE 19 20 Not in use on BB Table 6 EM connector P2 pin out 10.3 EM Selection Switch The EM selection switch on SmartRF05BB controls a multiplexer on the board that allows either a connected RF SoC EM or an MSP430 add-on board to access all four LEDs on the evaluation board. The limitation was caused by the particular pin-out on the RF evaluation modules that needed to be backwards compatible with other boards and test equipment. Figure 10 - EM Selection Switch (P8) The switch will both affect the operation of the LEDs and Button 1. NB: The EM Selection switch shall be placed in position SoC/TRX when the CC2530EM is used with SmartRF05BB. swru209b 21/28 Figure 11 - Switch P8 effect on LED 1-4 Due to lack of pins, some of the signals are shared. The chip select signal to the EM will also be affected when LED3 is used by the SoC (e.g. CC2530). In most cases, this will not be a problem, since the SoC does not, by default, implement a SPI slave. When LED4 is used by the SoC, the signal from Button 1 might interfere. In short, Button 1 and LED 4 can not be used simultaneously by the SoC. Figure 12 - Switch P8 effect on Button 1 The EM Selection switch will change the polarity of button number 1. In the MSP position, the button is active low, i.e. low voltage when the button is pressed. In the inactive position, the level is high (signal is pulled up by a 10k Ohm resistor). In the SoC position, the button is active high, i.e. high voltage when the button is pressed. In the inactive position, the level is low (signal is pulled down by a 10k Ohm resistor). Note that it is possible to use this feature to determine the position of switch P8 (assuming the button is not pressed). swru209b 22/28 10.4 Probe connectors The probe connectors P4 and P5 bring out all the signals from the EM connectors for probing purposes. The connectors allow easy access to I/O signals and to connect prototyping boards. The pin-out of these connectors are shown below. Function on BB Signal name Pin Pin Signal name Function on BB NC NC 1 2 NC NC Not in use on BB EM_P2_14 3 4 EM_P1_04 FLASH_CS Not in use on BB EM_P2_12 5 6 EM_P1_13 IO_LED2_SOC IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUT TON1 EM_P1_05 7 8 EM_P1_10 SoC Debug P3.4 Not in use on BB EM_P1_07 9 10 EM_P1_12 SoC Debug P3.3 Not in use on BB EM_P1_09 11 12 EM_P1_20 MISO & SoC Debug P3.10 Not in use on BB EM_P1_03 13 14 EM_P1_14 IO_LED3_SOC & SoC Debug P3.5 Not in use on BB EM_P2_18 15 16 EM_P1_16 SCLK & SoC Debug P3.6 Not in use on BB EM_P1_17 17 18 EM_P1_18 MOSI & SoC Debug P3.8 Not in use on BB EM_P2_20 19 20 GND GND Table 7 I/O connector P4 pin out Function on BB Signal name Pin Pin Signal name Function on BB NC NC 1 2 NC NC VCC_EM VCC_EM 3 4 EM_P1_06 IO_LED1 Not in use on BB EM_P2_05 5 6 EM_P2_04 IO_LED2_MSP JOYSTICK_RT EM_P1_08 7 8 EM_P2_06 IO_LED3_MSP JOYSTICK_DN EM_P1_02 9 10 EM_P2_08 IO_LED4_MSP JOYSTICK_UP EM_P2_11 11 12 EM_P1_11 Not in use on BB JOYSTICK_LEFT EM_P2_13 13 14 EM_P2_15 SoC Debug P3.7 & Flash Reset JOYSTICK_PUSH EM_P2_01 15 16 EM_P2_16 IO_BUTTON2 JOY_LEVEL EM_P1_15 17 18 EM_P2_17 Not in use on BB JOY_MOVE EM_P2_19 19 20 GND GND Table 8 I/O connector P5 pin out 10.5 SoC Debug connector The SoC debug connector P3 is used to program and debug the SoC on the connected EM with an external programmer/debug tool. The SmartRF05EB can be used for this purpose by connecting a cable to P3 on the Battery Board as shown in Figure 13 below. swru209b 23/28 Figure 13 Program/debug with SmartRF05EB The pin out of this connector is depicted below. For debugging and programming of the SoC the following signals are used; SoC RESET_N, DD and DC. In addition GND and +3.3V shall be connected. Figure 14 SmartRF05BB SoC Debug Connector As seen on Figure 14 also the SPI signals CS, MISO, MOSI and SCLK can be found on this connector. 10.6 Current Measurement Jumper Jumper P7, also called V_EM, has been added to the board to simplify current consumption measurements. By removing the jumper, an Ampere Meter can easily be connected to the board to perform current consumption measurements. Similarly, a separate, regulated power supply for the EM can be connected. Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) for further details. swru209b 24/28 11 Frequently Asked Questions Q1 When connecting the SmartRF05EB to my PC via USB, the dialog window below appears. Why? What should I do? A1 The SmartRF05EB will be recognized as a USB device by the operating system, and it will ask the user to provide information about which USB driver that should be associated with the device. If you have installed SmartRF Studio, just follow the instructions and select “Automatic installation”. Windows should find the required driver (cebal2.sys), as specified in an .inf file. Both files (.inf and .sys) are included in the SmartRF installation. If you have not installed SmartRF Studio, it is recommended that you do so before proceeding. Both the SmartRF Studio User Manual and SmartRF05EB User’s Guide has more details. Q2 SmartRF05EB with the CC2530EM is not detected by IAR/SmartRF Studio. Why? A2 Make sure you have installed SmartRF Studio as described in section 5.4. Then verify that the device is associated with the correct driver by opening the Device Manager on your PC. When the EB is connected, the “Cebal controlled devices” list contains “SmartRF05EB”. If the board is listed as an unknown device, please follow the steps outlined in the SmartRF05EB User’s Guide. swru209b 25/28 Q3 How can I measure the current consumption of the CC2530? A3 The easiest way to measure current consumption of the chip in various modes is to connect the EM directly to the SmartRF05EB and disconnect everything on the board that consumes power by removing all jumpers. The jumper on header P13 should not be removed. Connect the ampere meter between the two terminals on P15. On P10, the jumper for the EM_RESET signal (connector 35-36) should be mounted. On P1, no jumpers are required, but in order to control the SoC from a debugger, mount a jumper between 19-20 (DBG_DD) and 21-22 (DBG_DD). Make sure the RS232 Enable switch is in the “disable” position. Use SmartRF Studio to set the radio in different modes (RX, TX, etc.), or download an application on the CC2530 setting the device in the preferred state. Q4 Can I use another compiler than IAR to develop software for CC2530? A4 Yes, there are several tools available that can be used for CC2530. Any 8051 compiler (e.g. Keil, GCC, and SDCC) can, in theory, be used. Note that these tools may have limited debugging support for CC2530. When working with the TI Z-Stack (and RemoTI) stack for CC253x, you must use IAR Embedded Workbench for 8051. swru209b 26/28 12 References [1] CC2530 product web site http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/cc2530.html [2] SmartRF Studio product web site http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/smartrftm-studio.html [3] SmartRF Flash Programmer product web site http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/flash-programmer.html [4] SmartRF Packet Sniffer http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/packet-sniffer.html [5] SmartRF Packet Sniffer User Manual http://www.ti.com/lit/swru187 [6] SmartRF05EB User’s Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swru210 [7] Z-Stack http://www.ti.com/z-stack [8] CC2530 Software Examples User’s Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swru137 [9] CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swra274 [10]CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swru225 [11]CC2530ZDK web site http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/cc2530zdk.html [12]CC2530DK Quick Start Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swra273 [13]CC2530DK User’s Guide http://www.ti.com/lit/swru208 [14]CC2530DK web site http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/cc2530dk.html [15]DN002 -- Practical Sensitivity Testing http://www.ti.com/lit/swra097 [16] Texas Instruments Low Power RF Online Community http://www.ti.com/lprf-forum [17] Texas Instruments Support http://support.ti.com swru209b 27/28 13 Document history Revision Date Description/Changes B 2011-04-05 Clarified that IAR EW8051 is required when working with the Z-Stack. Updated screenshots of SmartRF Studio. Include updated schematics. Fixed a few typos. A 2009-08-04 Added SmartRF05 Battery Board schematics - 2009-06-08 First revision. swru209b 28/28 Appendix A Schematics Please refer to the following pages for the schematics for  CC2530 Evaluation Module  CC2531 USB Dongle  SmartRF05 Evaluation Board  SmartRF05 Battery Board The reference design for the CC2530 evaluation module can be found on the CC2530 web page [1]. P0.5 VDD VDD 3 1 X1 X_32.000/10/15/30/16 1 2 C254 C_2P2_0402_NP0_C_50 2 1 L261 L_2N0_0402_S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 P1.5 P1.4 P1.3 P1.1 P1.0 P0.7 P0.6 P0.4 P0.3 P0.2 P0.1 P0.0 Reset P2.2 P2.1 P1.7 P1.6 P0_5 XOSC32M_Q1 P1_5 DVDD RBIAS AVDD2 AVDD5/AVDD_SOC P0_6 P0_7 P0_4 P1_6 P0_2 P1_7 AVDD_DREG P0_0 DVDD_USB DGND_USB USB_M P0_1 P0_3 GND USB_P AVDD4 AVDD3 DCOUPL P1_0 P1_4 AVDD1 AVDD_GUARD RESET_N P2_4 XOSC32M_Q2 P1_1 P1_3 P1_2 RF_P P2_2 P2_3 P2_0 RF_N P2_1 U1 CC2530_TX_REDES 1 2 C251 C_18P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 L1 L_BEAD_102_0402 2 1 C401 C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3 1 2 C271 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 P4 PINROW_1x2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P0.4 P1.3 P0.1 P1.0 P0.2 P0.3 P2.1 P0.0 P2.2 P1.1 P1.4 P0.6 P1.5 P0.7 P1.6 P1.7 P1 SMD_SOCKET_2X10 1 2 3 4 5 P3 SMA_SMD 1 2 C211 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 R301 R_56K_0402_F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P1.2 P2.0 P2 SMD_SOCKET_2X10 1 2 L252 L_2N0_0402_S 1 2 L251 L_0402 1 2 C311 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 C241 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 C101 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 4 1 X2 X_32.768/20/50/40/12 1 2 C221 C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C252 C_1P0_0402_NP0_C_50 1 2 C1 C_2U2_0402_X5R_M_4VDC 1 2 C253 C_0402 1 2 C231 C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C391 C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3 1 2 C272 C_220P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C261 C_18P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C262 C_1P0_0402_NP0_C_50 1 2 C255 C_0402 1 2 C331 C_15P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C321 C_15P_0402_NP0_J_50 FM2 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM1 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM3 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM4 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM5 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM6 FIDUCIAL_MARK A4 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. CONTRACT NO. Texas Instruments 1 (1) NN 1.3.1 CC2530EM Discrete 025104 TIK VOLTAGE REGULATOR SoC periferials RF-SoC PART P1_1/LED P1_2 P0_2 P0_3 PA_DM P0_0 PA_DP P1_4 P1_5 P1_6 P1_7 P2_1 P2_2 RESET_N P0_4 P0_5 P1_0/LED P1_3 P0_0 P0_2 P0_3 P0_4 P0_5 P1_0/LED P1_1/LED P1_2 P1_3 P1_4 P1_5 P1_6 P1_7 P2_1 P2_2 PA_DP PA_DM RESET_N 1 FM2 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm 1 FM3 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm 1 FM1 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm Including PCB antenna CONTRACT NO. SIZE FSCM NO. DRAWN CHECKED ISSUED COMPANY NAME DWG DWG NO. REV. APPROVALS DATE SCALE SHEET A4 1(4) - USB Connector - Buttons - LEDs - SMD sockets Generated voltage: 3.3 V for CC2531 Texas Instruments CC2531 USB dongle 2.4 025104 TIK MAP VCC_EXT 3.3V VBUS Gnd In Out /EN NC VREG U2 TPS76933 1 2 R2 R_0402 1 2 C2 C_4U7_0603_X5R_K_6 1 2 C1 C_1U_0603_X5R_L_6P3 1 2 R1 R_2_0402_F 1 2 R3 R_0_0402 1 2 C3 C_0402 CONTRACT NO. SIZE FSCM NO. DRAWN CHECKED ISSUED COMPANY NAME DWG DWG NO. REV. APPROVALS DATE SCALE SHEET A4 CC2531 USB DONGLE VOLTAGE REGULATOR Not mount: C3, R2 2(4) To CC2531 From PC Texas Instruments 2.4 025104 TIK MAP P0_0 P0_2 P0_3 P0_4 P0_5 P1_0/LED P1_1/LED P1_2 P1_3 P1_4 P1_5 P1_6 P1_7 P2_1 P2_2 PA_DP PA_DM RESET_N VCC 3.3V 1 2 C241 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 C211 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 C5 C_0P5_0402_NP0_B_50 1 2 C311 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 C271 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 1 2 C221 C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C4 C_2U2_0402_X5R_M_4VDC 1 2 C272 C_220P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 C391 C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3 1 2 C201 C_1N_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 R301 R_56K_0402_F 2 1 C401 C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3 1 2 C41 C_10P_0402_NP0_J_50 3 1 X1 X_32.000/10/15/30/16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 P0_5 P1_5 RBIAS AVDD2 P0_6 P0_7 P0_4 P1_6 P0_2 P1_7 P0_0 DVDD_USB DGND_USB P0_1 P0_3 GND AVDD4 AVDD3 DCOUPL P1_0 P1_4 AVDD1 RESET_N P2_4 P1_1 P1_3 P1_2 RF_P P2_2 P2_3 P2_0 RF_N P2_1 DVDD2 DVDD1 AVDD5 AVDD6 XOSC_Q2 XOSC_Q1 USB_M USB_P U1 CC2531 1 2 C231 C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 L1 L_BEAD_102_0402 2 1 A2 ANTENNA_IIFA_1_LEFT 2 R9 R_0_0402 1 3 2 4 5 6 B1 JTI_2450BM15A0002 1 2 R201 R_2K2_0402_G 1 2 C101 C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10 L301 L_6N8_0402_J CONTRACT NO. SIZE FSCM NO. DRAWN CHECKED ISSUED COMPANY NAME DWG DWG NO. REV. APPROVALS DATE SCALE SHEET A4 3(4) Texas Instruments CC2531 USB DONGLE RF-PART 2.4 025104 TIK MAP P1_1/LED P1_2 P0_2 P0_3 PA_DM P0_0 PA_DP P1_4 P1_5 P1_6 P1_7 P2_2 P2_1 RESET_N P0_4 P0_5 P1_0/LED P1_3 3.3V VBUS 3.3V 3.3V VCC_EXT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 IO BL_31_008U_NO_SILK 1 2 3 4 5 6 DVBUS Shield GND D+ Shield P1 USB_A 1 2 R21 R_33_0402_G 1 2 R31 R_33_0402_G 1 2 R91 R_0_0402 1 2 R71 R_270_0402_F 2 1 D2 LED_EL19-21SYGC 1 2 R92 R_0402 1 2 C31 C_47P_0402_NP0_J_50 1 2 R11 R_270_0402_F 1 2 R32 R_1K5_0402_G 1 2 S2 PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK 1 2 S1 PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK 2 1 D1 LED_EL19-21SURC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DEBUG STL21 1 2 C21 C_47P_0402_NP0_J_50 CONTRACT NO. SIZE FSCM NO. DRAWN CHECKED ISSUED COMPANY NAME DWG DWG NO. REV. APPROVALS DATE SCALE SHEET A4 4(4) LED_Green CC2531 USB dongle USB circuitry SoC debug/flash button_P_1_3 Texas Instruments LED_Red button_P_1_2 2.4 025104 USB Interface Not mount: R92, IO TIK Additional testpins MAP Power Supply Joystick RS-232 User Interface USB Interface EM Interface POWER_PS VCC_EM VCC_IO VBUS +3.3V USB JOYSTICK_PUSH JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_RT JOYSTICK_DN JOYSTICK_LT JOY_MOVE JOY_LEVEL EM_UART_TX EM_UART_RTS EM_UART_RX EM_UART_CTS VCC_IO IO_POT_R IO_BUTTON2 IO_LED1 IO_LED2_MSP IO_LED2_SOC IO_LED3_MSP IO_LED3_SOC IO_LED4_MSP IO_BUTTON1/IO_LED4_SOC IO_LCD_MODE IO_LCD_CS IO_FLASH_CS VCC_IO USB_IO_RESET IO_MISO IO_MOSI IO_SCLK USB_EM_RESET IO_EM_RESET USB_EM_RESET USB_SCLK USB_CS USB_MOSI USB_MISO USB_LCD_CS USB_UART_RX USB_UART_TX USB_UART_CTS USB_UART_RTS USB_DBG_DC USB_DBG_DD USB_LCD_MODE +3.3V USB VBUS USB_IO_RESET USB_JOY_MOVE USB_DBG_DD_DIR EM_UART_CTS EM_UART_RTS EM_UART_TX EM_UART_RX EM_SCLK EM_MISO EM_MOSI EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC EM_LCD_CS EM_LCD_MODE EM_FLASH_CS VCC_EM POWER_PS EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC EM_BUTTON2 EM_JOY_LEVEL EM_POT_R EM_LED2_MSP EM_LED3_MSP EM_LED2_SOC EM_LED4_MSP JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_DN JOYSTICK_LT JOYSTICK_RT JOYSTICK_PUSH EM_DBG_DD EM_DBG_DC EM_RESET EM_LED1 EM_JOY_MOVE EM_DBG_DD_DIR EM_SNIFF_CLK EM_SNIFF_DATA EM_SNIFF_SFD EM_SNIFF_MISO FM1 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM2 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM4 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM3 FIDUCIAL_MARK FM6 FIDUCIAL_MARK H1 PCB_FEET_19 H2 PCB_FEET_19 H3 PCB_FEET_19 H4 PCB_FEET_19 FM5 FIDUCIAL_MARK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 P10 PINROW_2X18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 P1 PINROW_2X18 A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. - LCD - Flash - Potmeter - Buttons - LEDs Sheet 7 Sheet 3 1.8.1 Sheet 6 - CC2511 - CC2511 debug - USB port - RS232 driver - RS232 port - On/Off jumper - EM connection - External SoC debug TI Norway, LPW Sheet 2 02587 1(7) IO peripherals jumpers All mount as default CONTRACT NO. - Regulators - Power jumpers - Battery - Joystick (EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC) Sheet 4 USB MCU IO jumpers Default setting: 1-2: open 3-4: open 5-6: mount 7-8: mount 9-10: open 11-12: open 13-14: open 15-16: open 17-18: mount 19-20: mount 21-22: mount 23-24: mount 25-26: mount 27-28: mount 29-30: mount 31-32: mount 33-34: mount 35-36: mount Sheet 5 PEH SmartRF05EB Top Level USB_EM_RESET USB_SCLK USB_CS USB_MOSI USB_MISO USB_LCD_CS USB_UART_RX USB_UART_TX USB_UART_CTS USB_UART_RTS USB_DBG_DC USB_DBG_DD USB_LCD_MODE +3.3V USB VBUS USB_IO_RESET USB_JOY_MOVE USB_DBG_DD_DIR USB_RESET USB_RESET +3.3V USB +3.3V USB +3.3V USB VCC_IO VCC_IO +3.3V USB VCC_IO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P2 PINROW_2X5 1 2 3 4 GND X1 X_48.000/15/18/60/16 1 2 C35 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C37 C_2U2_0603_X5R_K_10 1 2 3 4 56789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 AVDD AVDD AVDD AVDD P2_0 RESET_N RF_N RF_P PADM P2_2 PADP XOSC_Q1 XOSC_Q2 DGUARD P1_7 P2_1 DCOUPL P1_6 P1_4 P1_1/LED P1_0/LED P1_2 P1_3 P1_5 P0_0/ATEST P0_3 P0_1 P0_2 P0_4 P0_5 P2_4/XOSC32_Q2 P2_3/XOSC32_Q1 DVDD DVDD RBIAS GND Exposed AVDD_DREG U3 CC2511 1 2 3 4 5 6 DVBUS Shield GND D+ Shield P12 USB_B 1 2 C17 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C18 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C2 C_47P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 R18 R_0603 1 2 R10 R_0_0603 1 2 R11 R_33_0603_G 1 2 L4 L_BEAD_102_0603 1 2 R9 R_1K5_0603_G 1 2 C3 C_47P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 R42 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 R12 R_33_0603_G 1 2 C6 C_10N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C34 C_220P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 C36 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 R44 R_56K_0603_F 1 2 C20 C_33P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 C19 C_33P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 C33 C_220P_0603_NP0_J_50 1 2 R43 R_270_0603_J 1 2 D6 LED_CL150YCD 1 2 R52 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 R41 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 R60 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 S3 PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK 1 2 S4 PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK 1 2 C16 C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10 A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. USB Interface 1.8.1 TI Norway, LPW Do Not Mount USB LED USB BUTTON 02587 2(7) CONTRACT NO. USB SoC Debug PEH EM_UART_CTS EM_UART_RTS EM_UART_TX EM_UART_RX EM_SCLK EM_MISO EM_MOSI EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC EM_LCD_CS EM_LCD_MODE EM_FLASH_CS VCC_EM EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC POWER_PS EM_JOY_LEVEL EM_BUTTON2 EM_POT_R EM_LED2_MSP EM_LED3_MSP EM_LED2_SOC EM_LED4_MSP JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_DN JOYSTICK_LT JOYSTICK_RT JOYSTICK_PUSH EM_DBG_DD EM_DBG_DC EM_RESET EM_LED1 EM_JOY_MOVE EM_DBG_DD_DIR EM_SNIFF_CLK EM_SNIFF_DATA EM_SNIFF_SFD EM_SNIFF_MISO EM_DBG_DD_DIR EM_UART_RTS EM_DBG_DD EM_DBG_DC EM_MISO EM_UART_CTS JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_LT EM_LCD_CS EM_FLASH_CS EM_POT_R EM_UART_TX EM_JOY_MOVE EM_LED4_MSP EM_LED1 EM_LED3_MSP EM_LCD_MODE EM_RESET EM_BUTTON2 EM_LED2_MSP JOYSTICK_RT POWER_PS JOYSTICK_DN JOYSTICK_PUSH EM_JOY_LEVEL VCC_EM EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC EM_SCLK EM_MOSI EM_UART_RX EM_RESET EM_DBG_DD DUT_DD DUT_VCC DUT_VCC EM_DBG_DC DUT_DD VCC_EM VCC_IO VCC_EM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DUT_VCC DUT_DD P4 PINROW_SMD_2X5_1.27MM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 P3 PINROW_2X5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EM_USB1 EM_USB2 EM_LED2_SOC EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC EM_DBG_DD_DIR P18 PINROW_2X10 1 2 C21 C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10 1 2 C28 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 EM_USB2 EM_USB1 P6 SMD_HEADER_2x10 1 2 R33 R_0603 1 2 C29 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GND VCCA 1A1 1A2 2DIR 2A1 2A2 1B1 2B1 VCCB 2B2 1DIR GND 1B2 U9 SN74AVC4T245 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P5 SMD_HEADER_2x10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P20 PINROW_2X10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P22 SMD_HEADER_2x10 1 2 C27 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C30 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 R30 R_0603 A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. DO NOT MOUNT External SOC Debug R33 DO NOT MOUNT Mount 0 ohm resistor in position R30 to power DUT from +3.3V USB through connector P3 1.8.1 EM Connectors TI Norway, LPW EM Interface 02587 Debug Connectors CONTRACT NO. 3(7) PEH POWER_PS VCC_EM VCC_IO VBUS +3.3V USB 1 2 C9 C_4U7_0805_X5R_K_25 4 5 8 6 7 9 11 3 10 1 2 GND EN FB PGND VIN PPAD L1 VINA L2 VOUT PS/SYNC U4 TPS63030 1 2 R34 R_0_0603 2 L1 1 LPS3015-222ML 1 2 R63 R_6K2_0603_G 2 1 3 6 5 In 4 Gnd Gnd Out ADJ U2 TPS7A4501 A K D8 BAT254 1 P13 2 STRAP_1 1 2 R45 R_1M0_0603_J 2 1 + B1 1xAA_1_5V 1 2 R68 R_1M0_0603_J 1 2 R65 R_0603 123 P11 PINROW_1X3 1 2 C1 C_10U_0805_X5R_L_25 1 2 R35 R_0_0603 1 2 C38 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C8 C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10 1 2 3 6 5 4 P8 Switch_6pin 1 2 R70 R_0603 1 2 C10 C_4U7_0805_X5R_K_25 1 2 R64 R_3K6_0603_G 2 1 + B2 1xAA_1_5V 1P15 2 STRAP_1 1 2 3 P7 DC_JACK_2.5 1 2 C11 C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10 1 2 R2 R_0_0603 A K D5 BAT254 1 2 R29 R_0_0603 1 2 R7 R_0603 1 2 R69 R_180K_0603_G TP2 TESTPOINT_PAD TP3 TP1 TESTPOINT_PAD TESTPOINT_PAD TP4 TESTPOINT_PAD A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. Power supply Power source jumper: 1-2: Battery 2-3: USB/DC (default) Do Not Mount 1.8.1 VCC_EM jumper TI Norway, LPW Current is drawn from input with highest voltage 02587 4(7) 2.2uH Do Not Mount Do Not Mount CONTRACT NO. VCC_IO jumper Power On/Off PEH Battery IO_POT_R IO_BUTTON2 IO_LED1 IO_LED2_MSP IO_LED2_SOC IO_LED3_MSP IO_LED3_SOC IO_LED4_MSP IO_BUTTON1/IO_LED4_SOC IO_LCD_MODE IO_LCD_CS IO_FLASH_CS VCC_IO USB_IO_RESET IO_MOSI IO_MISO IO_SCLK USB_EM_RESET IO_EM_RESET BUTTON1_POWER_MSP BUTTON1_POWER_SOC USB_IO_RESET VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO 12 34 S2 PUSH_BUTTON 1 2 R39 R_270_0603_J 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 C Reset TSL Vcc Q Vss D S U5 M25PEx0 1 2 3 6 5 4 P19 Switch_6pin 1 2 C5 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 12 34 BUTTON1_POWER_SOC S1 PUSH_BUTTON 2 1 R13 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 R37 R_270_0603_J 1 2 R20 R_10K_0603_G 11 10 U11-E SN74ALVC14 1 2 R40 R_1K0_0603_J 13 12 U11-F SN74ALVC14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4B1 S 3B1 2B2 OE VDD GND 4B2 1A 2A 3A 4A 1B1 1B2 2B1 3B2 U10 SN74CBTLV3257PW 12 34 S5 PUSH_BUTTON 2 1 14 U11-A 7 SN74ALVC14 1 2 LED4 LED_CL150DCD 2 1 R15 R_10K_0603_G LCD 7 - not use 8 - not use 12- not use 13- not use 14- not use 15- not use 16- not use 1 - backlight supply - 2 - backlight supply + 3 - logic power supply - 4 - logic power supply + 5 - Reset (active low) 6 - register selection 9 - serial data in 10- serial clock input 11- chip select M1 HMC16311SF-PY 8 9 U11-D SN74ALVC14 1 2 LED1 LED_CL150GCD 1 2 3 CW RT1 R_0-10K_TRIM 1 2 R14 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 R53 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R38 R_270_0603_J 6 5 U11-C SN74ALVC14 1 2 R8 R_0_0603 1 2 C7 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 R36 R_270_0603_J 123456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P9 HMC_CON 2 1 R16 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 LED3 LED_CL150YCD 1 2 C4 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 BUTTON1_POWER_MSP R21 R_10K_0603_G 1 2 LED2 LED_CL150URCD 1 2 C13 C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10 4 3 U11-B SN74ALVC14 A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. Orange 1.8.1 EM RESET FLASH BUTTON 2 TI Norway, LPW Yellow 02587 User Interface POTMETER 5(7) Red LED BUTTON 1 CONTRACT NO. LCD Green PEH EM_UART_TX EM_UART_RTS EM_UART_RX EM_UART_CTS VCC_IO VCC_IO 3 2 1 4 5 6 P14 Switch_6pin 1 2 C15 C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10 1 2 C14 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C22 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C25 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C23 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C24 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P16 DSUB_9F 1 2 R47 R_0_0603 1 2 R49 R_0_0603 1 2 R48 R_0_0603 1 2 R28 R_0_0603 1 2 R46 R_0_0603 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 C1+ 28 R2OUT R1OUT T1IN R3OUT R4OUT V+ VCC GND R2OUTB FORCEON T3IN T2IN T3OUT R5OUT C1- T2OUT T1OUT R5IN R4IN R3IN R2IN R1IN VC2- C2+ U6 SN65C3243DBR A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. PC RS232-port 2-RXD 3-TXD 5-GND 7-RTS 8-CTS 1.8.1 RS-232 Interface 02587 TI Norway, LPW 6(7) CONTRACT NO. PEH JOYSTICK_PUSH JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_RT JOYSTICK_LT JOYSTICK_DN JOY_MOVE JOY_LEVEL UP DN PUSH LT RT UP RT VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO VCC_IO 4 5 6 U7-B SN74HC32 1 2 3 U7-A SN74HC32 1 2 R26 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 3 4 5 6 A COMMON C left CENTRE down up right B D push U1 skrhab_e010 1 2 C32 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 C12 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 1 2 R55 R_10K_0603_G 2 1 R22 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 C31 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50 14 VDD 7 POWER CONN. GND U7-E SN74HC32 1 2 R62 R_0_0603 3 2 1 8 4 V+ V- + - U8-A TLV272 1 2 R56 R_10K_0603_G 5 6 + 7 - U8-B TLV272 1 2 C26 C_100P_0603_NP0_J_50 13 12 11 PUSH U7-D SN74HC32 1 2 DN R17 R_200K_0603_F 1 2 R6 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R59 R_0_0603 1 2 R61 R_0_0603 1 2 R57 R_0_0603 1 2 R23 R_100K_0603_F 2 1 R24 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R51 R_330K_0603_F 1 2 R50 R_330K_0603_F 1 2 R32 R_200K_0603_F LT 1 2 R31 R_200K_0603_F 2 1 R25 R_100K_0603_F 10 9 8 U7-C SN74HC32 1 2 R1 R_220K_0603_F 2 1 R3 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R4 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R5 R_100K_0603_F 1 2 R58 R_0_0603 1 2 R54 R_47K_0603_G A3 SCALE SHEET APPROVALS DATE DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME ISSUED CHECKED DRAWN SIZE FSCM NO. Joystick 1.8.1 02587 TI Norway, LPW 7(7) CONTRACT NO. JOYSTICK PEH IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in such safety-critical applications. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements. Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions: Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DLP® Products www.dlp.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy DSP dsp.ti.com Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Medical www.ti.com/medical Interface interface.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Logic logic.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Power Mgmt power.ti.com Transportation and www.ti.com/automotive Automotive Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com Wireless www.ti.com/wireless-apps RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf TI E2E Community Home Page e2e.ti.com Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.dedicatedmicros.com INSTALLATION MANUAL MANUEL D’INSTALLATION INSTALLATIONSHANDBUCH MANUAL DE INSTALACIÓN MANUALE D'INSTALLAZIONE 2020 1. Introduction Congratulations on choosing the Dedicated Micros Type 2020/300 (300Watt) &/or 2020/500 (500Watt) infra-red illuminators designed to offer a cost effective solution to night surveillance by providing a source of illumination for cameras with spectrol responses that extend into the infra-red region. Clean designs with pressure die cast componentry ensure high quality finishes & fits with a striking & innovative appearance to complement the series 2000 range of products currently offered by Dedicated Micros. The units are weatherproof to BS.EN 60529 Level IP66 2. Index 1. Introduction 1 2. Index 1 3. List of contents 2 4. Mounting instructions 3 5. Wiring instructions 4 6. Bulb replacement 5 7. Optional equipment 6 8. Component spares 7 9. Troubleshooting 7 This product guide will provide all the necessary information to set-up, install and run the Type 2020 illuminator. Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 1 3. List of contents Components supplied Before installation please remove the unit from the packaging and check that all items listed below have been supplied. A. 1 x Type 2020 Infra-red Illuminator B. 1 x Stone Guard ( Optional ) C. 1 x 4mm A/F Hexagonal socket key D. 1 x Fixing bag containing the following: 2 x M10 x 16 Hex. hd. screws 2 x M10 Plain washers 2 x M10 Spring washers In addition to the above components, a type 2020 product guide and a final test procedure are supplied. Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 2 Fig.1 Components supplied B C D A 4. Mounting instruction Mounting configurations. Fig. 2 & 3 show typical positions for I.R. Illuminators when mounted to a remotely controlled pan & tilt head. Mount the Type 2020 Illuminator via the cradle (fig.4 item A) and secure using 2 off M10x16 Hex. hd. machine screws (fig.4 item D), 2 off M10 spring washers (fig.4 item C) and 2 off M10 plain washers (fig.4 item B) supplied with unit. Note: Please ensure the lamp bulb filament is mounted horizontally to receive the required life expectantcy and beam coverage. See bulb replacement (page 5) Bulb filament is factory set to comply with this type of mounting. See page 7 to re-orientate the bulb if mounting in other orientations Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 3 Fig.2 Twin lamp mounting Pan & Tilt (Type 2000) Type 2020 IR.Illuminator B C D A Fig.3 Single lamp mount Fig.4 Mounting fixings 5. Wiring instructions Wiring connections Electrical connections to the Type 2020 I.R. illuminator are made via a terminal block situated inside the rear polycarbonate photo-electric switch enclosure as shown in fig.5. Access to which is achieved by unscrewing the four captive cover fixings and removing the cover as shown in fig.6. Using a suitable 3 core x 0.75mm2 230V.ac rated outdoor cable (Dedicated Micros recommend the use of a silicon covered cable due to the extreme temperatures generated by the illuminator) prepare the cable end for connection and feed the cable through the spare cable gland and terminate as shown in figs 7 & 8. Replace and secure the cover to finish. The cable gland should be tightened sufficiently to ensure that any strain put upon the cable is not transmitted to the terminal connections and that a watertight seal is achieved. It is recommended that the incoming electrical supply is protected by a fuse rated at 2 Amp for a type 2020/300 (300Watt) and 3 Amp for a type 2020/500 (500Watt) illuminator. Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 4 Fig.5 Fig.6 Fig.7 Earth 230V.ac Customer input Fig.8 Live Terminal block Photoelectric Switch To Bulb Neutral 6. Bulb replacement Bulb replacement. HAVING TURNED OFF POWER TO THE UNIT open the casing by releasing the 4 off fastenings (item A, fig.9) a quarter turn anti-clockwise using a No.2 Philips screwdriver. The front assembly can now be removed from the rear and suspended on the safety/earth bond to expose the bulb. Remove the push on spade terminals (item B, fig.10) from the rear of the bulb and release the bulb from its mounting clips by springing one of the 3 clips outward while lifting the bulb free. Note: The bulb filament lies directly in-line between the spade terminals (item C, fig.11) please align by rotating the bulb within its spring clips ensuring the filament is horizontal when mounting the I.R Illuminator. The spade terminal connections can be made to either terminal. Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 5 A B Fig.9 Opening illuminator enclosure Fig.10 Terminals Fig.11 Bulb removal Fig.12 Spring clips C C 7. Optional equipment Optional Stone guard. An optional stone guard (order suffix /SG) is available for the Type 2020 illuminator. Designed to protect the filter from flying objects / vandalism the guard can be fitted in seconds with 4 off fixings supplied. (fig.13) Optional Voltage reducer. The Manufacturers stated life expectancy for the 300W bulb is 2000 hours and 4000 hours for the 500W. This stated life is conditional on the supply being 230V, a 5% increase in voltage will reduce lamp life by 50%. NB. There are some parts of the UK where the standing voltage is over 250V, in a situation such as this Dedicated Micros can supply a Type 621 voltage reduction device which will reduce the incoming supply by 9% to increase the bulbs life. (fig.14) Box dimensions 110W x 130L x 50H for indoor use only. Optional ‘no photoelectric switch’ version A optional version is available without the rear photoelectric switch installed. (order suffix / No PE) Optional White light illuminator. An optional white light version of the Type 2020 can be supplied to any bulb variant. (order suffix /WL) Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 6 Fig.13 Fig.14 8. Component spares 9. Troubleshooting Under normal operating conditions the stated bulb life times should be readily achieved, but there are circumstances under which life expectancy is much reduced. Spikes & surges: Illuminators running from supplies that are subject to spikes & power surges will have reduced life. Orientation: Bulb filaments must be horizontal, a filament positioned vertically will burn out before the stated life time. Operation: When mounted on a pan & tilt head the illuminator will be subject to vibration which, if sufficiently severe, could cause a reduction in life. Although the 500 Watt bulbs have been designed specifically for this use, 300 Watt bulbs are of standard manufacture and as such are more susceptible to damage. The information contained in this document is for guidance only. Specification and availability of goods are subject to change without notice Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 7 Ref. No. F56 F57 F2 F3 F4 F42 H92,a & b 1-2020/13 1-2020/17 F14 F15 F48 1-2020/22 BS152 1-2020/6 Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Description 500W Spot Bulb 500W M/Flood Bulb 300W Spot Bulb 300W M/Flood Bulb 300W W/Flood Bulb Photo-electric switch Cable gland assembly Bulb mounting clips Stone guard Filter assembly 715nm Filter assembly 830nm Filter assembly Dichroic Front ‘O’ ring seal Rear ‘O’ ring seal Quarter-turn fastenings External Safety bond 1. Introduction Nous vous félicitons d’avoir choisi les projecteurs infrarouge Type 2020/300 (300 Watts) et/ou 2020/500 (500 Watts) conçus pour offrir une solution rentable à la surveillance nocturne, qui consiste à assurer aux caméras une source d’éclairage à réponses spectrales s’étendant à la zone infrarouge. Des conceptions nettes avec composants moulés sous pression garantissent des finitions et ajustements de haute qualité, avec un look impressionant et innovateur pour compléter la gamme de produits de la série 2000 actuellement offerts par Dedicated Micros. Les boîtiers sont résistants aux intempéries conformément à la norme BS.EN 60529, indice IP66 2. Index 1. Introduction 8 2. Index 8 3. Sommaire 9 4. Instructions de montage 10 5. Instructions de câblage 11 6. Remplacement de l’ampoule 12 7. Equipement en option 13 8. Pièces de rechange 14 9. Dépannage 14 Ce guide de produit offre toutes les informations nécessaires pour la configuration, l’installation et le fonctionnement du projecteur Type 2020. Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 8 Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 9 3. Sommaire Composants fournis Avant de procéder à l’installation, veuillez sortir le projecteur de l’emballage et vérifier que tous les éléments listés ci-dessous sont inclus. A. 1 projecteur à infrarouge Type 2020 B. 1 grille de protection (en option) C. 1 clé hexagonale de 4 mm D. 1 sachet de fixations contenant: 2 vis à tête hexagonale M10 x 16 2 rondelles lisses M10 2 rondelles élastiques M10 En plus des composants ci-dessus, un guide de produit pour le projecteur Type 2020 et une procédure d’essai final sont fournis. Fig. 1 Composants fournis B C D A Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 10 4. Instructions de montage Configurations de montage Les Fig. 2 et 3 illustrent les positions typiques des projecteurs infrarouge lorsqu’ils sont montés sur une tête panoramique et inclinaison télécommandée. Montez le projecteur Type 2020 en utilisant le support (fig. 4 repère A) et immobilisez-le à l’aide des 2 vis à tête hexagonale M10x16 (fig. 4 repère D), 2 rondelles élastiques M10 (fig. 4 repère C) et 2 rondelles lisses M10 (fig. 4 repère B) fournies avec le projecteur. Remarque: Veillez à ce que le filament de l’ampoule du projecteur soit monté bien à l’horizontale pour une durée de vie utile et une couverture de faisceau optimales. Voir remplacement de l’ampoule (page 12) Le filament de l’ampoule est réglé en usine pour assurer sa conformité avec ce type de montage. Voir la page 14 pour la réorientation de l’ampoule en cas de montage dans d’autres orientations. Fig. 2 Montage à deux projecteurs Panoramique et inclinaison (Type 2000) Projecteur infrarouge Type 2020 B C D A Fig. 4 Fixations de Fig. 3 Montage à un projecteur montage Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 11 5. Instructions de câblage Raccordements de câbles Les raccordements électriques au projecteur infrarouge Type 2020 s’effectuent au moyen d’un bornier situé à l’intérieur du boîtier arrière en polycarbonate du commutateur photoélectrique, comme illustré à la fig. 5. Pour accéder à ce boîtier, dévissez les quatres vis prisonnières du couvercle et retirez le couvercle comme illustré à la fig. 6. A l’aide d’un câble pour extérieur à 3 âmes x 0,75 mm2 de 230 V. c.a. (Dedicated Micros recommande l’utilisation d’un câble siliconé en raison des températures extrêmes générées par le projecteur), préparez l’extrémité du câble pour le raccordement, et passez le câble dans le presse-étoupe libre et terminez-le comme illustré aux figs 7 et 8. Remettez et immobilisez le couvercle pour terminer. Le presseétoupe doit être suffisamment serré pour éviter de transmettre les contraintes exercées sur le câble aux raccordements de bornes et pour produire un joint étanche à l’eau. Il est recommandé de protéger l’entrée de l’alimentation électrique par un fusible de 2 A pour un projecteur type 2020/300 (300 Watts) et de 3 A pour un projecteur type 2020/500 (500 Watts). Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Terre Entrée 230 V c.a. client Fig. 8 Conducteur Bornier Commutateur photoélectrique A l’ampoule Neutre Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 12 6. Remplacement de l’ampoule Remplacement de l’ampoule APRES AVOIR MIS LE PROJECTEUR HORS TENSION ouvrez le boîtier en dévissant les 4 vis de fixation (repère A, fig. 9) d’un quart de tour à l’aide d’un tournevis Philips No. 2. L’ensemble avant peut maintenant être retiré de l’arrière et suspendu à l’élingue pour exposer l’ampoule. Retirez les bornes enfichables (repère B, fig. 10) à l’arrière de l’ampoule et libérez l’ampoule de ses pattes élastiques en poussant l’une des 3 pattes vers l’extérieur tout en soulevant l’ampoule pour la dégager. Remarque: Le filament de l’ampoule est positionné directement en ligne entre les bornes enfichables (repère C, fig. 11), veuillez aligner l’ampoule en la tournant dans ses pattes élastiques pour que le filament soit bien à l’horizontale lors du montage du projecteur infragrouge. Les raccordements de bornes enfichables peuvent être effectués à n’importe quelle borne. A B Fig. 9 Ouverture du boîtier du projecteur Fig. 10 Bornes Fig. 11 Retrait de l’ampoule Fig. 12 Pattes élastiques C C Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 13 7. Equipement en option Grille de protection en option. Une grille de protection (indiquez le suffixe /SG lors de la commande) est disponible en option pour le projecteur Type 2020. Conçu pour protéger le filtre des projectiles / vandalisme, la grille de protection se pose en quelques secondes avec les 4 vis de fixation fournies. (fig. 13) Réducteur de tension en option. La durée de vie indiquée par les fabricants est de 2000 heures pour l’ampoule de 300 W et de 4000 heures pour l’ampoule de 500 W. Cette durée de vie indiquée correspond à une alimentation de 230 V, une augmentation de 5 % de la tension réduit la durée de vie du projecteur de moitié. NB. Dans certaines régions du Royaume-Uni, la tension normale est supérieure à 250 V : dans ce cas, Dedicated Micros peut fournir un dispositif de réduction de tension Type 621 qui réduit l’entrée de l’alimentation de 9 % pour augmenter la durée de vie de l’ampoule. (fig. 14) Dimensions du boîtier 110 l x 130 L x 50 H pour usage intérieur uniquement. Version ‘sans commutateur photoélectrique’ en option Un version en option est disponible sans commutateur photoélectrique arrière. (indiquez le suffixe / No PE lors de la commande) Projecteur blanc en option. Une version à éclairage blanc du projecteur Type 2020 est disponible en option et peut être fournie dans tous les types d’ampoule. (indiquez le suffixe /WL lors de la commande) Fig. 13 Fig. 14 Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 14 8. Pièces de rechange 9. Dépannage Dans les conditions d’utilisation normales, les durées de vie d’ampoule indiquées sont parfaitement possibles, mais dans certains cas, la durée de vie est fortement réduite. Pointes et surtensions : La durée de vie des projecteurs dont l’alimentation électrique est soumise à des pointes et surtensions sera réduite. Orientation : Les filaments des ampoules doivent être posés bien à l’horizontale, un filament posé verticalement grillera avant la fin de sa durée de vie indiquée. Fonctionnement : Monté sur une tête panoramique et inclinaison, le projecteur sera soumis à des vibrations qui, si suffisamment sévères, sont susceptibles d’entraîner une réduction de sa vie utile. Bien que les ampoules de 500 Watts aient été conçues spécialement pour cet usage, les ampoules de 300 Watts sont de fabrication standard et de ce fait plus vulnérables aux dégâts. Les informations figurant dans le présent document sont fournies à titre indicatif uniquement. Les spécifications et la disponibilité des produits peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Réf. F56 F57 F2 F3 F4 F42 H92,a & b 1-2020/13 1-2020/17 F14 F15 F48 1-2020/22 BS152 1-2020/6 Qté. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Désignation Ampoule faisceau concentré (spot) 500 W Ampoule Faisceau moyen 500 W Ampoule faisceau concentré (spot) 300 W Ampoule faisceau moyen 300 W Ampoule faisceau large 300 W Commutateur photoélectrique Ensemble presse-étoupe Pattes élastique de montage d’ampoule Grille de protection Ensemble filtre 715 nm Ensemble filtre 830 nm Ensemble filtre Dichroïque Joint torique avant Joint torique arrière Fixations quart de tour Elingue 1. Einleitung Herzlichen Glückwunsch zur Wahl der Infrarot-Illuminatoren aus der Serie 2020/300 (300 Watt) und/oder 2020/500 (500 Watt) von Dedicated Micros. Diese Serien stellen eine kostengünstige Lösung zur Überwachung bei Nacht dar. Sie bieten eine Lichtquelle für Kameras, deren Spektralempfindlichkeit sich auf den Infrarotbereich erstreckt. Klares Design und druckgegossene Bauteile gewährleisten hochwertige Verarbeitung und Passform. Das beeindruckende und innovative Äußere ergänzt die Produktpallette der Serie 2000 von Dedicated Micros. Die Illuminatoren sind nach Schutzklasse IP66 (BS EN 60529) wettergeschützt. 2. Inhaltsverzeichnis 1. Einleitung 15 2. Inhaltsverzeichnis 15 3. Lieferumfang 16 4. Montageanleitung 17 5. Verkabelungsanleitung 18 6. Auswechseln der Glühlampe 19 7. Optionale Ausstattung 20 8. Ersatzteilliste 21 9. Fehlersuche 21 Dieses Produkthandbuch bietet alle erforderlichen Informationen für die Einrichtung, Installation und den Betrieb der Illuminatoren aus der Serie 2020. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 15 3. Lieferumfang Im Lieferumfang enthaltene Komponenten Entnehmen Sie den Illuminator vor der Installation bitte aus der Verpackung und vergewissern Sie sich, dass alle nachfolgend aufgeführten Artikel vorhanden sind. A. 1 x Infrarot-Illuminator der Serie 2020 B. 1 x Steinschlagschutz ( optional ) C. 1 x 4mm Sechskantschlüssel D. 1 x Befestigungssatz mit folgendem Inhalt: 2 x M10 x 16 Sechskantschrauben 2 x M10 Unterlegscheiben 2 x M10 Federscheiben Neben den oben aufgeführten Bestandteilen ist im Lieferumfang ein Produkthandbuch für die Serie 2020 und ein Abschlusstestverfahren enthalten. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 16 Abb.1 Im Lieferumfang enthaltene Komponenten B C D. A 4. Montageanleitung Montagekonfigurationen Abb. 2 & 3 zeigen typischen Positionen für Infrarot-Illuminatoren, die an einem ferngesteuerten Schwenk- und Neigekopf befestigt sind. Befestigen Sie den Illuminator der Serie 2020 mithilfe der Gabel (Abb. 4 Artikel A) und sichern Sie ihn mit den beiden M10x16 Sechskantschrauben mit Ganzgewinde (Abb. 4 Artikel D), zwei M10 Federscheiben (Abb. 4 Artikel C) und zwei M10 Unterlegscheiben (Abb. 4 Artikel B), die im Lieferumfang enthalten sind. Hinweis: Achten Sie darauf, dass der Glühwendel der Lampe horizontal montiert wird, um maximale Lebensdauer und Reichweite des Lichtstrahls zu gewährleisten. Siehe Auswechseln der Glühlampe (Seite 19) Der Glühwendel ist werkseitig auf diese Art der Montage eingestellt. Auf Seite 21 finden Sie Informationen zur Neuausrichtung der Lampe im Falle einer Montage mit anderer Ausrichtung. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 17 Abb .2 Befestigung einer Doppellampe Schwenk- und Neigekopf (Serie 2000) Infrarot-Illuminator Serie 2020 B C D. A Abb. 4 Befestigungsarmaturen Abb. 3 Befestigung einer Einzellampe 5. Verkabelungsanleitung Leitungsanschlüsse Die Elektroanschlüsse an den Infrarot-Illuminator der Serie 2020 werden über einen Klemmenblock vorgenommen, der sich auf der Rückseite im Polycarbonat-Gehäuse des fotoelektrischen Schalters befindet. Für den Zugang zu diesem Klemmenblock lösen Sie die vier unverlierbaren Schrauben des Gehäuses und nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab, wie in Abb. 6 dargestellt. Verwenden Sie ein geeignetes 3 x 0,75 mm2 Freileitungskabel mit 230 VAC Nennleistung (Dedicated Micros empfiehlt aufgrund der extremen Temperaturen, die vom Illuminator erzeugt werden, die Verwendung eines silikonbeschichteten Kabels). Bereiten Sie das Kabelende für den Anschluss vor, führen Sie das Kabel durch den freien Kabelstutzen und terminieren Sie es, wie in Abb. 7 & 8 dargestellt. Setzen Sie zum Abschluss die Abdeckung wieder auf und befestigen Sie sie. Der Kabelstutzen sollte ausreichend fest angezogen werden, damit eine eventuelle Belastung des Kabels sich nicht auf die Kabelanschlüsse überträgt und damit eine wasserfeste Dichtung entsteht. Wir empfehlen, die Stromzufuhr für Modelle der Serie 2020/300 (300 Watt) mit einer 2 A Sicherung bzw. Modelle der Serie 2020/500 (500 Watt) mit einer 3 A Sicherung abzusichern. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite.18 Abb. 5 Abb. 6 Abb. 7 Erde 230 VAC Kundenseitiger Eingang Abb. 8 Spannungsführend Klemmenblock Fotoelektrischer Schalter Zur Lampe Neutral 6. Auswechseln der Glühlampe Auswechseln der Glühlampe SCHALTEN SIE DIE STROMZUFUHR ZUM GERÄT AUS. Öffnen Sie das Gehäuse, indem Sie die 4 Befestigungen (Artikel A, Abb. 9) eine Vierteldrehung entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn drehen. Verwenden Sie dazu einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher Nr. 2. Jetzt kann der vordere Teil des Illuminators von der hinteren Hälfte gelöst und am Sicherungsseil/Erdungsseil abgehängt werden, um die Glühlampe freizulegen. Nehmen Sie die aufgesetzten Kabelschuhe (Artikel B, Abb. 10) von der Rückseite der Lampe ab und lösen Sie die Lampe aus den Befestigungsklemmen. Drücken Sie dazu eine der 3 Klemmen zurück, während Sie die Glühlampe heraus heben. Hinweis: Der Glühwendel liegt direkt zwischen den Kabelschuhen (Artikel C, Abb. 11). Richten Sie ihn durch Drehen der Lampe in den Federklemmen so aus, dass der Wendel horizontal liegt, wenn der Infrarot-Illuminator montiert wird. Die Kabelschuhe können beliebig an einer der beiden Klemmen angeschlossen werden. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 19 A B Abb. 9 Öffnen des Illuminatorgehäuses Abb. 10 Anschlussklemmen Abb. 11 Ausbau der Glühlampe Abb. 12 Federklemmen C C 7. Optionale Ausstattung Optionaler Steinschlagschutz. Für den Illuminator der Serie 2020 ist ein optionaler Steinschlagschutz (Bestellendung /SG) lieferbar. Er dient dazu, den Filter vor umherfliegenden Objekten / Vandalismus zu schützen und kann innerhalb weniger Sekunden mithilfe der 4 im Lieferumfang enthaltenen Schrauben installiert werden. (Abb.13) Optionaler Spannungswandler Die vom Hersteller angegebenen Lebensdauer liegt für die 300 W Glühlampe bei 2000 Stunden und für die 500 W Lampe bei 4000 Stunden. Die angegebenen Lebensdauer hängt von einer Stromzufuhr bei 230 V ab; eine Steigerung der Spannung um 5% reduziert die Lebensdauer der Lampe um 50%. NB. In einigen Teilen Großbritanniens liegt die Standspannung über 250 V. In einer derartigen Situation kann Dedicated Micros einen Spannungswandler (Typ 621) liefern, der die Eingangsspannung um 9% reduziert, um die Lebensdauer der Glühbirne zu verlängern. (Abb. 14) Kastenmaße 110B x 130L x 50H, nur zur Verwendung im Innenbereich. Optionales Modell ‘ohne fotoelektrischen Schalter’ Wir bieten auch ein Modell ohne fotoelektrischen Schalters an der Rückseite. (Bestellendung / No PE) Optionaler Weißlicht-Illuminator Für jede Glühlampe der Serie 2020 kann eine optionale Weißlichtvariante geliefert werden. (Bestellendung /WL) Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 20 Abb. 13 Abb. 14 8. Ersatzteilliste 9. Fehlersuche Unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen sollte die angegebene Lebensdauer der Glühlampe problemlos erreicht werden. Es gib jedoch einige Umstände, unter denen die Lebensdauer stark reduziert wird. Spannungsstöße und -spitzen: Illuminatoren, die an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, welche Spannungsstößen und -spitzen unterliegt, haben eine verkürzte Lebensdauer. Ausrichtung: Glühwendel müssen horizontal ausgerichtet sein; ein vertikal ausgerichteter Wendel wird vor Ablauf der angegebenen Lebensdauer ausbrennen. Betrieb: Bei der Installation auf einem Schwenk- und Neigekopf ist der Illuminator Schwingungen ausgesetzt, die je nach Schweregrad eine Reduktion der Lebensdauer verursachen könnten. Obwohl die 500 W Glühlampen speziell für diesen Einsatz konzipiert wurden, handelt es sich bei den 300 W Lampen um Standardprodukte, die deshalb wesentlich anfälliger für Schäden sind. Die Informationen in diesem Dokumenten dienen ausschließlich zur Orientierung. Die technischen Details und die Verfügbarkeit der Waren können jederzeit ohne Vorankündigung geändert werden. Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 21 Ref. Nr. F56 F57 F2 F3 F4 F42 H92,a & b 1-2020/13 1-2020/17 F14 F15 F48 1-2020/22 BS152 1-2020/6 Stck. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Beschreibung 500 W Punktlampe 500 W M/Flutlicht 300 W Punktlampe 300 W M/Flutlicht 300 W W/Flutlicht Fotoelektrischer Schalter Kabelstutzen Befestigungsklemmen für Lampe Steinschlagschutz Filtersatz 715 nm Filtersatz 830 nm Dichroitischer Filter Dichtungsring Vorderseite Dichtungsring Rückseite Bajonettverschlüsse Externes Sicherheitsseil Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 22 1. Introducción Felicidades por elegir los proyectores por infrarrojos Dedicated Micros Type 2020/300 (300 vatios) y/o 2020/500 (500 vatios) diseñados para ofrecer una solución económica para la vigilancia nocturna facilitando una fuente de luz para las cámaras con respuesta espectral que cubran la zona de infrarrojos. Su diseño impecable con componentes fundidos a presión garantizan un acabado y montaje de primera calidad con un aspecto sorprendente e innovador que completan la gama de productos de la serie 2000 comercializada actualmente por Dedicated Micros. Las unidades son a prueba de intemperie en cumplimiento de BS.EN 60529 Nivel IP66 2. Índice 1. Introducción 22 2. Índice 22 3. Índice 23 4. Instrucciones de montaje 24 5. Instrucciones de cableado 25 6. Cambio de la lámpara 26 7. Equipamiento opcional 27 8. Repuestos de componentes 28 9. Resolución de problemas 28 La guía de este producto le proporcionara toda la información necesaria para configurar, instalar y utilizar el proyector del type 2020. Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 23 3. Índice Componentes suministrados Antes de proceder a la instalación extraiga la unidad de la caja y asegúrese de que se han suministrado todos los elementos que se indican a continuación. A. 1 x Proyector por infrarrojos Type 2020 B. 1 x Protección contra pedradas (opcional) C. 1 x Llave de enchufe hexagonal A/F de 4mm D. 1 x Bolsa de piezas de fijación que incluye lo siguiente: 2 x M10 x 16 Tornillos con cabeza hex. 2 x Arandelas planas M10 2 x Arandelas elásticas M10 Además de los componentes anteriores, se proporciona una guía de producto del type 2020 y un procedimiento para una prueba final. Fig.1 Componentes suministrados B C D A Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 24 4. Instrucciones de montaje Parámetros de montaje. Las Fig. 2 y 3 muestran las posiciones típicas de los proyectores por infrarrojos cuando se montan en un cabezal de toma panorámica e inclinación controlado de forma remota. Monte el proyector Type 2020 con el soporte (fig.4 elemento A) y asegúrelo con los 2 M10x16 tornillos de cabeza hexagonal (fig.4 elemento D), las 2 arandelas elásticas M10 (fig.4 elemento C) y las 2 arandelas planas M10 (fig.4 elemento B) que se suministran con la unidad. Nota: Asegúrese de que el filamento de la bombilla esté colocado horizontalmente para obtener la expectativa de vida y la cobertura esperada. Consulte cómo reemplazar la bombilla (página 26) El filamento de la bombilla viene preajustado de fábrica para este tipo de montaje. Consulte la página 27 para volver a orientar la bombilla si la coloca en otras posiciones Fig.2 Montaje de lámpara doble Toma panorámica e inclinación (Type 2000) Proyector por infrarrojos Type 2020 B C D A Fig.4 Piezas de fijación del montaje Fig.3 Montaje de lámpara sencilla Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 25 5. Instrucciones de cableado Conexiones de cableado Las conexiones eléctricas del proyector por infrarrojos Type 2020 se realizan con el bloque de terminales situado en el interior de la caja de policarbonato del conmutador fotoeléctrico de la parte posterior, tal y como se muestra en la fig.5. El acceso se logra aflojando las cuatro piezas de fijación imperdibles de la tapa y retirando ésta, tal y como se muestra en la fig.6. Utilice un cable para exteriores adecuado de 3 hilos x 0,75mm2 230V de C.A. (Dedicated Micros recomienda el uso de un cable con cobertura de silicona debido a las temperaturas extremas que genera el proyectos), prepare el extremo del cable para la conexión e introdúzcalo a través del casquillo. Finalice la operación tal y como se muestra en las figuras 7 y 8. Para acabar vuelva a colocar la tapa, y fíjela. El casquillo para cables deberá estar lo suficientemente apretado para que cualquier tirón que sufra el cable no se transmita a las conexiones de los terminales, así como para lograr una estanqueidad al agua. Se aconseja proteger la corriente eléctrica de entrada con un fusible de 2A para el proyector type 2020/300 (300Watt) y uno de 3A para el type 2020/500 (500Watt). Fig.5 Fig.6 Fig.7 Tierra Entrada del cliente de 230V de C.A. Fig.8 Activo Bloque de terminales Conmutador fotoeléctrico A la bombilla Neutro Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 26 6. Cambio de la lámpara Cambio de la lámpara. UNA VEZ APAGADA LA UNIDAD, abra la carcasa soltando las 4 piezas de sujeción (elemento A, fig.9) girándolos un cuarto de vuelta en el sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj con un destornillador Philips Nº2. Ahora podrá separar la plataforma delantera de la trasera y dejarla suspendida de la toma de tierra o anclaje de seguridad para descubrir la bombilla. Retire los terminales de pala (elemento b, fig.10) de la parte posterior de la bombilla y suéltela de sus abrazaderas de montaje accionando hacia afuera una de las tres, mientras libera la bombilla. Nota: El filamento de la bombilla está alineado directamente con los terminales de pala (elemento C, fig.11). Alinéelo girando la bombilla en las abrazaderas y asegúrese de que esté horizontal cuando coloque el proyector por infrarrojos. Las conexiones de los terminales de pala puede realizarse a cada terminal. A B Fig.9 Cómo abrir la carcasa del proyector Fig.10 Terminales Fig.11 Cómo retirar la bombilla Fig.12 Abrazaderas C C Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 27 7. Equipamiento opcional Rejilla de protección opcional. Existe una rejilla de protección opcional (código de pedido /SG) para el proyector Type 2020. Diseñada para proteger el filtro de objetos voladores o vandalismo, la protección puede colocarse en segundos con las cuatro piezas de fijación suministradas. (fig.13) Reductor de tensión opcional. Para el fabricante, la expectativa de vida de la bombilla de 300W es de 2.000 horas y de 4.000 horas para la de 500W. Dicha expectativa está condicionada a una tensión de 230V y un incremento del 5% en el voltaje reducirá dicha expectativa de vida en un 50%. Nota: Hay lugares en el Reino Unido donde la tensión es de 250V. En este tipo de casos, Dedicated Micros puede suministrar un dispositivo reductor Type 621 que reducirá la tensión en un 9% para prolongar la vida de la bombilla. (fig.14) Dimensiones de la caja 110 Ancho x 130 Largo x 50 Alto sólo para usarse en interior. Versión opcional “sin conmutador fotoeléctrico” Existe una versión opcional sin conmutador fotoeléctrico instalado en la parte trasera. (código de pedido / No PE) Proyector de luz blanca opcional. Puede suministrarse una versión opcional de luz blanca del Type 2020 para cualquier variante de bombilla. (código de pedido /WL) Fig.13 Fig.14 Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 28 8. Repuestos de componentes 9. Resolución de problemas En condiciones normales de funcionamiento la expectativa de vida de la bombilla debe alcanzarse facilmente, pero hay circunstancias en las que puede verse seriamente reducida. Picos y sobretensiones: Los proyectores que funcionan con tensiones con picos y sobretensiones tendrán una vida más breve. Orientación: Los filamentos de la bombilla deberá estar horizontal. Un filamento colocado verticalmente se quemará antes de lo previsto. Funcionamiento: Cuando coloque el proyector en un cabezal de toma panorámica e inclinación sufrirá vibraciones que, si son lo bastante fuertes, provocarán una reducción en la vida de la bombilla. Aunque las bombillas de 500 vatios se han diseñado específicamente para este uso, las lámpara de 300 vatios son de fabricación estándar y son más susceptibles de sufrir daños. La información incluida en este documento es meramente orientativa. Las características técnicas y disponibilidad de los materiales está sujetos a cambio sin previo aviso Núm. de ref. F56 F57 F2 F3 F4 F42 H92,a y b 1-2020/13 1-2020/17 F14 F15 F48 1-2020/22 BS152 1-2020/6 Cant. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Descripción Bombilla de haz fino de 500W Bombilla de luz ambiente/M de 500W Bombilla de haz fino de 300W Bombilla de luz ambiente/M de 300W Bombilla de luz ambiente/W de 300W Conmutador fotoeléctrico Plataforma del casquillo de cables Abrazaderas de montaje de la bombilla Protección contra pedradas. Plataforma de filtro de 715nm Plataforma de filtro de 830nm Plataforma de filtro dicroico Junta tórica delantera Junta tórica trasera Sujeciones de cuarto de vuelta Anclaje de seguridad externa Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 29 1. Introduzione Congratulazioni per aver scelto i proiettori a infrarossi Type 2020/300 (300 Watt) e/o Type 2020/500 (500 Watt) di Dedicated Micros, progettati per la sorveglianza notturna e in grado di fornire una fonte di illuminazione per telecamere con tecnologia Spectrol che si estende nell’area degli infrarossi. Il design essenziale con componenti pressofusi garantisce l’alta qualità di finiture e accessori con un aspetto originale e innovativo per completare la gamma di prodotti della serie 2000 offerta da Dedicated Micros. Le unità offrono un livello di protezione dall’acqua IP66 conforme alla normativa BS.EN 60529. 2. Indice 1. Introduzione 29 2. Indice 29 3. Elenco dei contenuti 30 4. Istruzioni per il montaggio 31 5. Istruzioni per il cablaggio 32 6. Sostituzione della lampadina 33 7. Apparecchiatura opzionale 34 8. Componenti di ricambio 35 9. Risoluzione dei problemi 35 Questa guida del prodotto fornirà tutte le informazioni necessarie per la configurazione, l’installazione e l’esecuzione del proiettore Type 2020. Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 30 3. Elenco dei contenuti Componenti forniti Prima di procedere all’installazione, rimuovere l’unità dall’imballaggio e verificare che siano presenti tutti gli elementi elencati di seguito. A. 1 Proiettore a infrarossi Type 2020 B. 1 Griglia di protezione (opzionale) C. 1 chiave esagonale A/F da 4mm D. 1 kit di fissaggio contenente i seguenti elementi: 2 viti a testa esagonale M10 x 16 2 rondelle piane M10 2 rondelle elastiche M10 Oltre ai componenti elencati, vengono fornite una guida del prodotto e una procedura di prova finale del Type 2020. Fig.1 Componenti forniti B C D A Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 31 4. Istruzioni per il montaggio Configurazione di montaggio Le figure 2 e 3 mostrano il posizionamento tipico dei proiettori a infrarossi, quando vengono montati su un gruppo panoramica e illuminazione controllato remotamente. Montare il proiettore Type 2020 tramite il supporto (elemento A. fig. 4) e fissarlo utilizzando 2 viti a testa esagonale (elemento D, fig. 4), 2 rondelle elastiche M10 (elemento C, fig. 4) e 2 rondelle piane M10 (elemento B, fig. 4), in dotazione con l’unità. Nota: verificare che il filamento della lampadina sia montato orizzontalmente per ottenere la durata della lampadina e la copertura del fascio luminoso previste. Consultare le istruzioni per la sostituzione della lampadina (pagina 5) Il filamento della lampadina è adatto per questo tipo di montaggio. Consultare le istruzioni a pagina 7 per riorientare la lampadina se si esegue il montaggio con un orientamento diverso Fig.2 Montaggio a lampada doppia Panoramica e inclinazione (Type 2000) Proiettore a infrarossi Type 2020 B C D A Fig.4 Supporti di fissaggio per il montaggio Fig.2 Montaggio a lampada singola Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 32 5. Istruzioni per il cablaggio Connessioni per il cablaggio Le connessioni elettriche del proiettore a infrarossi Type 2020 vengono effettuate tramite la morsettiera posizionata all’interno dell’alloggiamento in policarbonato dell’interruttore fotoelettrico sul retro, come mostrato nella figura 5. Per accedere all’alloggiamento è necessario rimuovere la copertura svitando le quattro viti di fissaggio della stessa come mostrato nella figura 6. Utilizzare un cavo a tre anime per esterni da 0,75 mm2 e 230 V CA (Dedicated Micros consiglia l’utilizzo di un cavo rivestito in silicone a causa delle temperature estreme generate del proiettore). Preparare l’estremità del cavo per la connessione, inserire il cavo attraverso il pressacavi libero e terminarlo come mostrato nelle figure 7 e 8. Al termine, riposizionare la copertura e fissarla nuovamente. È necessario stringere sufficientemente il pressacavi per assicurare che una eventuale tensione esercitata sul cavo venga trasmessa alle connessioni dei morsetti e per garantire l’impermeabilità. Si consiglia di proteggere l’alimentazione in entrata tramite un fusibile da 2 A per il proiettore Type 2020/300 (300 Watt) e da 3 A per il Type 2020/500 (500 Watt). Fig.5 Fig.6 Fig.7 Terra Ingresso utente 230 V CA Fig.8 Fase Morsettiera Interruttore fotoelettrico Alla lampadina Neutro Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 33 6. Sostituzione della lampadina Sostituzione della lampadina. DOPO AVER SCOLLEGATO L’UNITÀ DALL’ALIMENTAZIONE aprire l’alloggiamento: rilasciare le 4 chiusure (elemento A, fig.9) ruotandole di un quarto di giro in senso antiorario utilizzando un cacciavite a stella No.2. A questo punto sarà possibile rimuovere il gruppo frontale da quello posteriore e lasciarlo sospeso sui cavi della messa a terra per esporre la lampadina. Rimuovere i terminali a forcella (elemento B, fig.10) dal retro della lampadina e rilasciare la lampadina dalle 3 molle d’ancoraggio, spostandone una verso l’esterno e sollevando contemporaneamente la lampadina. Nota: il filamento della lampadina è posizionato direttamente tra i terminali a forcella (elemento C, fig.11). Per allinearlo, ruotare la lampadina all’interno delle molle d’ancoraggio per assicurarsi che il filamento sia in posizione orizzontale durante il montaggio del proiettore a infrarossi. È possibile effettuare le connessioni del terminale a forcella su uno dei due terminali. A B Fig.9 Apertura dell’alloggiamento del proiettore Fig.10 Terminali Fig.11 Rimozione della lampadina Fig.12 Molle d’ancoraggio C C Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 34 7. Apparecchiatura opzionale Griglia di protezione opzionale. Una griglia di protezione opzionale (suffisso ordinazione: /SG) è disponibile per il proiettore Type 2020. Progettata per proteggere il filtro da oggetti in volo e da attacchi vandalici, la protezione può essere montata in pochi secondi, utilizzando i 4 supporti di fissaggio in dotazione (fig.13). Riduttore di tensione opzionale. La durata prevista dichiarata dai produttori è di 2000 ore per la lampadina da 300 W e di 4000 ore per quella da 500W. La durata prevista dichiarata è calcolata sulla base di un’alimentazione a 230 V. In caso di un aumento del 5% del voltaggio, la durata della lampada si ridurrà del 50%. NB. In alcune parti del Regno Unito il voltaggio in vigore è superiore ai 250 V. In questi casi Dedicated Micros può fornire un dispositivo di riduzione del voltaggio Type 621 in grado di ridurre il voltaggio dell’alimentazione del 9% per aumentare la durata della lampadina. (fig.14). Dimensioni del dispositivo, utilizzabile solo in interni: L 110 x P 130 lunghezza x A 50. Versione opzionale “senza interruttore fotoelettrico” È disponibile una versione opzionale priva del selettore fotoelettrico sul retro (suffisso ordinazione: / No PE) Proiettore a luce bianca opzionale Il proiettore Type 2020 è disponibile in una versione opzionale a luce bianca per qualsiasi tipo di lampadina (suffisso ordinazione: /WL) Fig.13 Fig.14 Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 35 8. Componenti di ricambio 9. Risoluzione dei problemi In condizioni di funzionamento normali, la durata della lampadina dovrebbe corrispondere a quella dichiarata. Tuttavia alcune circostanze potrebbero ridurre sensibilmente la durata. Picchi e sovracorrenti: Se l’alimentazione è soggetta a picchi e sovracorrenti, si ridurrà la durata dei proiettori. Orientamento: I filamenti della lampadina devono trovarsi in posizione orizzontale. Un filamento posizionato verticalmente si brucerà prima del tempo previsto. Funzionamento: Se viene montato su un gruppo panoramica e inclinazione, il proiettore sarà soggetto a vibrazioni le quali, se raggiungono un’intensità eccessiva, potrebbero ridurne la durata. Mentre le lampadine da 500 Watt sono progettate specificamente per questo scopo, quelle da 300 W sono progettate per l’utilizzo normale e pertanto non garantiscono le stesse prestazioni. Il presente documento viene fornito soltanto a scopo informativo. Le specifiche e la disponibilità dei prodotti sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso. Numero rif. F56 F57 F2 F3 F4 F42 H92, a e b 1-2020/13 1-2020/17 F14 F15 F48 1-2020/22 BS152 1-2020/6 Quantità 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Descrizione Lampadina spot da 500 W Lampadina a media diffusione da 500 W Lampadina spot da 300 W Lampadina a media diffusione da 300 W Lampadina ad ampia diffusione da 300 W Interruttore fotoelettrico Gruppo pressacavi Molle d’ancoraggio della lampadina Griglia di protezione Gruppo filtro 715 nm Gruppo filtro 830 nm Gruppo filtro dicroico Guarnizione toroidale frontale Guarnizione toroidale posteriore Chiusure a un quarto di giro Fissaggio di sicurezza esterno Issue 1 Doc 74 0009 www.dedicatedmicros.com UK Technical Help Dennard Limited Unit 4, Park Iron Works, Kingsley, Nr Bordon, Hampshire GU35 9LY Tel: +44 (0)1420 485713 Fax: +44 (0)1420 485714 e-mail: sales@dennard-cctv.com European Technical Help Dedicated Micros Europa Neckarstraße 15, 41836 Hückelhoven, Deutschland Tel.: +49 (0) 24 33 52 58 26 Fax: +49 (0) 24 33 52 58 20. E-Mail: eusupport@dmicros.com Dedicated Micros France 9-13 rue du Moulinet, 75013 Paris, France Tél. : +33 1 45 81 99 99, Fax : +33 1 45 81 99 89. e-mail: dmfrance@dmicros.com Dedicated Micros Belgique Joseph Chantraineplantsoen 1, 3070 Kortenberg, Belgique Tél. : +32 2751 3480, Fax : +32 2751 3481 e-mail: dmbenelux@dmicros.com Dedicated Micros Ltd. Slovenija Delavska cesta 26, 4208 Sencur-Slovenija Tel: +386 (4) 279 18 90, Fax: +386 (4) 279 18 91 e-mail: dmslovenia@dmicros.com tesa￿sas 15￿rue￿du￿Bois￿des￿Saints￿Pères FR￿-￿77176￿Savigny￿le￿Temple Tel:￿+33￿(0)1.64.87.82.30 Fax:￿+33￿(0).1.64.87.82.50 contact.france@tesa.com www.tesa.fr Tous￿les￿produits￿tesa®￿sont￿soumis￿à￿des￿contrôles￿rigoureux￿qui￿garantissent￿une￿qualité￿irréprochable.￿Les￿conseils et￿recommandations￿sont￿donnés￿de￿bonne￿foi￿sur￿la￿base￿de￿notre￿expérience.￿Cependant,￿tesa￿SE￿ne￿peut￿donner￿de garanties￿expresses￿ou￿implicites￿de￿qualité￿marchande￿ou￿d'adéquation￿à￿un￿usage￿particulier.￿C'est￿pourquoi￿il￿est￿du devoir￿de￿l'acheteur￿(du￿client)￿de￿tester￿l'adéquation￿des￿produits￿à￿un￿usage￿spécifique￿par￿un￿test￿approprié.￿En￿cas de￿doute,￿notre￿service￿technique￿se￿fera￿un￿plaisir￿de￿vous￿venir￿en￿aide. tesa®pack￿6300￿Dévidoir￿manuel Dévidoir￿économique￿pour￿adhésifs￿d'emballage INFORMATION￿PRODUIT Description￿produit Le￿dévidoir￿manuel￿tesa®￿6300￿est￿d'un￿bon￿rapport￿qualité/prix￿pour￿la￿fermeture￿professionnelle￿et￿reçoit￿tout￿type￿d'adhésif d'emballage￿tesa®.￿Le￿dévidoir￿est￿muni￿d'un￿contrôle￿de￿tension￿permettant￿ainsi￿d'utiliser￿sans￿difficulté￿les￿adhésifs￿tesa®,￿même￿ceux avec￿un￿déroulement￿rapide.￿La￿lame￿est￿protégée￿pour￿éviter￿toute￿blessure. Principale￿application Placez￿le￿dévidoir￿sur￿le￿carton￿et￿tirez￿le￿vers￿vous.￿Le￿rouleau￿en￿caoutchouc￿appuie￿fortement￿sur￿l'adhésif￿pendant￿qu'il￿s'applique. L'adhésif￿est￿ensuite￿coupé￿par￿la￿lame￿dentelée￿en￿inclinant￿le￿dévidoir.￿La￿fin￿de￿l'adhésif￿est￿appliqué￿sur￿le￿carton￿grâce￿à￿la￿plaque d'application￿souple.￿Mise￿en￿place:￿Le￿rouleau￿tesa®￿est￿posé￿sur￿le￿porte-mandrin￿avec￿la￿face￿adhésive￿se￿déroulant￿vers￿la￿poignée. Placer￿la￿fin￿du￿rouleau￿entre￿le￿rouleau￿de￿guidage￿de￿l'adhésif￿et￿la￿plaque￿en￿métal￿jusqu'à￿ce￿que￿le￿ruban￿ne￿fasse￿plus￿de￿plis. Données￿techniques Type￿d'applicateur main Largeur￿maximale￿du￿rouleau 50￿mm Propriétés Objectif￿de￿l'application emballage Longueur 220￿mm Largeur 65￿mm Hauteur 150￿mm Poids 400￿gram Diamètre￿maximum￿du￿rouleau 120￿mm Diamètre￿maximum￿du￿mandrin 3￿pouce Infos￿complémentaires • dévidoir￿manuel￿solide￿grâce￿à￿sa￿structure￿en￿métal • lame￿protégée￿pour￿une￿utilisation￿en￿toute￿sécurité • contrôle￿de￿tension￿réglable￿à￿la￿main Page￿1￿sur￿1￿/￿En￿date￿du￿25.02.2010 Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 1 / 8 Contenu Page Présentation du produit, caractéristiques 2 Gamme et accessoires Téléchargements Guide de prise en main rapide 3 Installation Initialisation unique Questions fréquentes et spécifications 4 Produits compatibles 5 Disposition des claviers 6 Tables des codes – Valeurs par défaut 7 Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 2 / 8 Présentation du produit Ce dispositif autonome est prêt à l'utilisation. Il peut être facilement fixé sur la surface arrière de la plupart des claviers Storm afin d'offrir la connectivité et la communication nécessaires pour des systèmes hôtes compatibles. Configuré en usine pour la saisie de données numériques standard, ce dispositif polyvalent peut aussi être programmé par l'utilisateur pour produire tout code compatible USB. Cette caractéristique fait de l'encodeur Série 450 l'interface idéale pour la plupart des applications. Caractéristiques Périphérique clavier générique (Interface Homme Machine) – Ne nécessite aucun pilote additionnel Configuration usine pour encoder les claviers numériques selon les dispositions téléphone ou calculatrice Table des codes de sortie personnalisable grâce à un utilitaire de configuration Storm Alimentation intégrée pour l'éclairage des claviers La version 450i possède des contrôles additionnels pour l'éclairage des claviers La version 450i comporte un avertisseur sonore piézo-électrique pour la confirmation optionnelle de la frappe ou pour un générer un signal d'état piloté par l'applicatif. Connexion unique par prise USB Mini-B Forme compacte, autonome Compatible avec la plupart des claviers Storm en dispositions 4, 12 et 16 touches (y compris les claviers Storm des séries 700, 720, 1000, 2000, 3000, GFX et PLX) Gamme et accessoires Référence Description 4500-10 450i Encodeur avec buzzer et contrôle d'éclairage 4500-00 450 Encodeur 4500-01 Câble USB 1 mètre - type A vers mini B coudé Note : Pour commander en ligne directement chez Storm Interface, utiliser les références ci-dessus. Les références approvisionnées par les circuits de distribution possèdent un suffixe pour permettre des étiquetages/marquages spécifiques. Exemple : 4500-102 450i Encodeur avec Buzzer Téléchargements 4500-SW01 Utilitaire de configuration USB 450i-LIT-01 Brochure 450-xx-08KT Notice d'installation 450 USB Manual FR Manuel de l'utilisateur ( ce document ) Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 3 / 8 Guide de prise en main rapide Avant de commencer, vérifiez que vous avez : • L'encodeur • Un clavier compatible Storm • Un câble USB avec une prise mini-B entre votre clavier et votre ordinateur • Un panneau déjà découpé aux dimensions de votre clavier • Une copie de l'utilitaire de configuration si vous voulez personnaliser la configuration Installation • Vérifiez que votre ordinateur est sous tension avant de connecter l'encodeur. • Notez que pour la connexion avec le clavier il y a deux connecteurs distincts pour brancher les claviers 4 touches ou les claviers 12/16 touches. Bien s'assurer du connecteur utilisé avant de positionner les plaquettes autocollantes et fixer l'encodeur en place. Connecteur pour clavier 4 touches Connecteur pour claviers 12/16 touches Les plaquettes autocollantes se placent ici (Une seule par emplacement, exception faite pour la Série 700 qui nécessite 2 plaquettes par position) • Pressez l'encodeur sur le clavier et vérifiez que les plaquettes soient bien collées • Connectez la prise mini-B du câble USB sur le côté de l'encodeur Initialisation unique Cette procédure d'initialisation devra être faite à la première mise en service. L'encodeur doit reconnaître le clavier et vous devez choisir la disposition des touches correspondant au type de clavier utilisé. a) APPUYEZ ET MAINTENIR la touche en bas à droite du clavier – ceci indique à l'encodeur quel clavier est connecté b) Branchez le câble de l'encodeur au PC. c) RELACHEZ LA TOUHE SI vous souhaitez une table de codes pour les dispositions 4 touches de fonction et 12/16 touches téléphone ou d) MAINTENEZ LA TOUCHE ENFONCEE 10 SECONDES SI vous souhaitez une table de codes pour les dispositions 4 touches fléchées et 12/16 touches calculatrice Vérifiez maintenant que l'écran affiche les caractères corrects. Si vous avez besoin de reconfigurer l'encodeur, vous pouvez changer la table des codes ou réinitialiser l'unité avec une table pré-chargée au moyen de l'utilitaire de configuration USB disponible sur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 4 / 8 Questions fréquentes Est-ce que cet encodeur a besoin d'un pilote particulier? Non – il est reconnu par le pilote de clavier USB standard Est-ce que l'utilitaire fonctionne sur tout type de PC? Actuellement il ne fonctionne pas ni sous Linux, ni sous Mac OS L'utilitaire nécessite Windows XP ou plus Quelle est la connexion USB? Prise mini-B Est-ce que j'ai besoin d'utiliser les plaquettes auto-collantes? Elles sont inclues pour maintenir l'encodeur en service Quels codes USB personnalisables puis-je assigner? Voir les tables de codes page 11 Que dois-je faire si j'ai mal initialisé l'encodeur? Télécharger et utiliser l'utilitaire de configuration pour réinitialiser les valeurs par défaut Pourquoi la prise du clavier est plus longue que la barrette? Les broches d'extrémité servent à éclairer les claviers Spécifications Température d'utilisation -20ºC à +60ºC Température de stockage -20ºC à +70ºC Humidité 10% à 90% sans condensation Vibrations et chocs ETSI 300 019 5M3 Résistance d'isolement 50 Mohms (minimum) Tension de claquage 500V a.c. (60 secondes) Tension d'utilisation 5V +/- 5% (USB) Consommation 20mA (Le courant nécessaire à éclairer le clavier est en plus) Sécurité EU Directive Basse Tension EMC: Emissions et immunité : FCC part 15 class A EN55022, EN55024 ESD: Décharge dans l'air jusqu'à +/- 15kV, +/- 7.5kV par contact EU RoHS Conforme à la Directive WEEE Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 5 / 8 Produits compatibles 4 touches 12 touches 16 touches Note Série 700    Fixer la Série 700 sous panneau avec les plaquettes autocollantes additionnelles Série 720    Série 1000    Série PLX    Série 2000    GFX    Série 3000    3000 Illuminator L'éclairage n'est supporté que pour les claviers fabriqués à partir de septembre 2013 GFX Illuminator L'éclairage n'est supporté que pour les claviers fabriqués à partir de septembre 2013 Utiliser la prise 7 broches pour les claviers 4 touches Utiliser la prise 10 broches pour les claviers 12/16 touches Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 6 / 8 Dispositions des claviers Dispositions des claviers Dispositions des claviers Table des codes par défaut (US English) Table des codes alternatifs (US English) Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 7 / 8 Tables des codes hexa par défaut (rappel : un hôte paramétré UK English produit £ au lieu de #) Ligne Colonne 4 touches fonction 12 touches téléphone 16 touches téléphone A 1 F1 (3A) 1 (1E) 1 (1E) B 1 F2 (3B) 4 (21) 4 (21) C 1 F3 (3C) 7 (24) 7 (24) D 1 F4 (3D) * (E1, 25) * (E1, 25) A 2 - 2 (1F) 2 (1F) B 2 - 5 (22) 5 (22) C 2 - 8 (25) 8 (25) D 2 - 0 (27) 0 (27) A 3 - 3 (20) 3 (20) B 3 - 6 (23) 6 (23) C 3 - 9 (26) 9 (26) D 3 - # (E1, 20) # (E1, 20) A 4 - - A (04) B 4 - - B (05) C 4 - - C (06) D 4 - - . (37) Tables des codes hexa alternatifs Ligne Colonne 4 touches fléchées 12 touches calculatrice 16 touches calculatrice avec NumLock off A 1 ↑ (52) 7 (5F) 7 (5F) HOME B 1 ← (50) 4 (5C) 4 (5C) ← C 1 → (4F) 1 (59) 1 (59) END D 1 ↓ (51) * (E1, 25) * (E1, 25) * A 2 - 8 (60) 8 (60) ↑ B 2 - 5 (5D) 5 (5D) C 2 - 2 (5A) 2 (5A) ↓ D 2 - 0 (62) 0 (62) A 3 - 9 (61) 9 (61) PgUp B 3 - 6 (5E) 6 (5E) → C 3 - 3 (5B) 3 (5B) PgDn D 3 - # (E1, 20) # (E1, 20) # A 4 - - A (04) A B 4 - - B (05) B C 4 - - C (06) C D 4 - - . (37) . Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel de l'utilisateur www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 8 / 8 Page laissée intentionnellement blanche imagine making the impossible possible 2000 Series controllers Built on our experience of design and applications knowledge spanning more than 40 years, the Eurotherm® 2000 series brings you performance you can rely on and accuracy you can trust. At the same time no other range of controllers makes operation so easy. Menu driven operation provides easy intuitive and consistent access to all the controller functions. www.eurotherm.com/2000 Ultimate performance Simply imagine process excellence… and with Eurotherm you will achieve it. Our ranges of controllers provide world class control and versatility with clear, user friendly, operator interfaces. Add to this, a strong sales team of qualified engineers who understand your process, an absolute commitment to innovation by continuously re-investing in research and development; we can and do imagine making the impossible possible for our customers. Internal timer – A 5 mode timer suitable for simple time based profiling applications Universal input – 9 different thermocouples, PT100, DC linear and a downloadable custom curve Four outputs – up to 4 outputs including 2 modular with many options including DC outputs Communication protocols – Modbus RTU, EI-Bisynch, DeviceNet® Three internal alarms – Configurable as High, Low, Deviation and Deviation High or Low alarms Two outputs – 1 relay and 1 logic (can be used as a relay with an external module) Suitable for • Small ovens • Chillers • Sterilisers • Trace heating • Heat sealing • Dwell timer – simple ramp dwell profile applications Four internal alarms – configurable as High, Low, Deviation, Deviation High, Deviation Low, High and Low current alarms Suitable for • Cold stores • Ovens and furnaces • Plastic extrusion • Packaging machines • Food and brewing applications • www.eurotherm.com/2000 Every 2000 Series controller can be tailored to provide the control solution you need. Modular design and easy, onsite configuration matches application requirements and gives you a temperature and process control solution that’s ready to run the first time you switch it on. The 2000 Series provides control strategies ranging from simple ON/OFF to PID with advanced overshoot protection, providing the best control for the widest range of applications including valve positioning. Within the 2000 Series there is also the 2500 Modular Controller and the 2604/2704 Controllers which, with their enhanced functionality and multiloop capability, offer a powerful addition to the range. Please consult Eurotherm sales for more information on these products. Customisable to your control requirements imagine process excellence... Programming – up to 20, 16 segment programs (4 in the 2416) are available with 8 digital event outputs Four internal alarms – configurable as High, Low, Deviation, Deviation High or Low, high and Low Current alarms high and low output, high and low input 2, High and low setpoint and one Rate of change alarm Modular – up to 4 outputs of which 3 are modular with many different options within the different modules Modules – up to 16 different types of module are available Communication protocols – Modbus RTU, EI-Bisynch, DeviceNet, Profibus DP Suitable for • Single and multi-zone furnaces • Kilns • Environmental chambers • Simple ratio • Humidity • Chemical and pharmaceutical • Applications • Glass furnaces and lehrs • For the full stories and all our successes go to www.eurotherm.com/success Success stories commercial benefits Prompt, accurate flow detection rate and response Case Study 2400 series Feedforward control is excellent for chemical dosing applications Customer Challenge The 2400 process controller is very suitable in the treatment of waste water, petrochemical processes and other additive dosing applications because any possible disturbance to the levels of chemicals added are detected before they can affect the ongoing process. Solution Feedforward is a method for detecting disturbances in the upstream flow and forwarding this information to the controller so that it can change the output before the disturbance affects the downstream ratio. So, in the diagram shown, the upstream flow rate from the flow meter (FT) forces an immediate change to the output of the controller (OP) and so causes an immediate change in the Dosing Pump speed. This Feedforward method is ideal for any process that is subject to upstream disturbances. This type of disturbance is invariably found in either liquid or gas systems. Customer Benefits • Feedforward control can avoid the slowness of integral feedback control because the disturbances are measured and accounted for before they have time to affect • The dosing rate immediately tracks any changes in flow rate and so prevents any possibility of over or under dosing Typical use of technology • Liquid Level - Boiler Drum Level • Chemical Dosing - Paint Mixing, Brewing, • Industrial Distillation – Brewing, Petroleum Refineries, Petrochemical, Chemical Plants, and Natural Gas Processing Plants. Setpoint FF OP Flow Meter FT AT Analytical Sensor PID Loop PV + 2400 Dosing Pump Setpoint Easy to use controllers for greater flexibility Case Study 2100 series 5 Mode Timer feature enables cost effective temperature and process control Customer Challenges faced in the food beverage industry Global market forces are driving the continual evolution of the food and beverage industry. Consolidation, changing consumer preferences and increasing government regulations are dramatically impacting manufacturing and business strategy. In this fiercely competitive marketplace, consistent high quality and cost effectiveness are critical to meet consumer demand. Solution 2100 Controller Eurotherm acknowledge these commercial pressures and our products ensure simple cost effective process control. Even one of our simplest, compact controllers has useful cost effective features. The 5 mode timer in the 2100 temperature process controller may be used to control batch operations, e.g. food production, ovens, sterilisers, fryers. An ideal application would be single dwell at the end of either a controlled ramp rate or natural approach to setpoint without the need for an additional timing device. Available Timer Operation Modes are: • Dwell and Switch Off • Time from Cold and Switch Off • Delayed Switch On Benefits • This maintains a target temperature at the end of a ramp rate without the need for an additional device, thereby simplifying the process • Easy operation with customised interface that presents only the parameters that the operator needs to see. All other parameters can be locked away under password protection. Typical use of technology • Small Ovens, Fryers, Sterilisers, Incubators Time Temperature Setpoint Dwell time Switch off Ramp control Dwell Timer Functionality For the full stories and all our successes go to www.eurotherm.com/success Highly flexible temperature values Case Study 2400 controller 8 segment program, repeatable and simple to change Customer Challenges faced in Autoclave and Environmental Chamber applications Many applications need their process values (i.e. Temperature, Pressure, Flow etc) to be varied with time. Amongst other applications Autoclaves are used for Sterilisation and for Vacuum Forming. In these applications there are invariably a number of ramps, and dwell times required to ensure that the material has been adequately processed. In Environmental Chambers programmed profiles are generally run repeatedly for some time and this is a method that is used to produce accelerated ageing. This process is therefore very useful for determining the likely longevity of a product before it fails. Solution 2400 Controller • The 2400 series process controller offer setpoint programming as an option. The program is stored as a series of segments which can be ramps, dwells, steps etc. • All 2400 programmer/controllers have an 8 segment program as standard, and can optionally have up to 20 off 16 segment programs each with 8 digital events. The digital events are used to control other ancillary equipment at predetermined segments in the program. For instance; it may switch on a vibration table at some stage in the process. • All of these features make the 2400 programmer/controller ideal for Furnaces, Environmental Chambers, and Autoclave applications. Customer Benefits • Minimises the need for extra equipment which becomes costly to install and maintain, time and space saving • Offers high integrity, repeatable processing thus increasing yield consistency and high product quality Typical use of technology • Autoclaves – Steam Sterilization of medical, pharmaceutical and laboratory equipment • Environmental chambers –test the effects of environmental conditions such as accelerated aging on industrial products, materials, biological items and electronic devices • Industrial furnaces – Heat Treatment, Glass Furnaces, and Lehrs Temperature End Type = Dwell Time Holdback at End Type = Off start of dwell www.eurotherm.com/2000 Real-world applications Master Programmer Slave Controllers PDS communications M P g S C In 2000 Series controllers it is possible to use the PDS communication link to send a setpoint from one controller to a network of slave devices - providing the economical creation of multi-zone temperature control solutions. PDS setpoint retransmission Ratiometric Pyrometer Thermocouple Output Switchover between 4-20mA two points mocouple Master Output Slave PDS Retransmission with Feedforward Modbus RTU Modbus Master The 2000 Series uses industry standard protocols such as Modbus RTU, DeviceNet or Profibus DP to communicate with supervisory systems and PLCs over EIA232, EIA485 (2 wire) or EIA422 (4 wire). This carries the information and overall control into the supervisory system while maintaining local access to the local equipment ensuring overall plant integrity in all situations. Communication Sometimes it is desirable to control a process using two separate inputs to derive the PV (process value). This could be based on a highest wins, lowest wins, some function of the two inputs, or switching between the two inputs at some pre-determined point in the process. For example, an application could consist of a thermocouple for measuring up to 800°C and a Ratiometric Pyrometer for measuring the range between 700°C and 1,400°C. Typically when the temperature is below 740°C the thermocouple provides the PV and, when between 740°C and 780°C the controller switches gently from the thermocouple to the Pyrometer which provides the PV up to 1,400°C. Derived inputs Using Eurotherm setpoint retransmission over PDS communications it is possible to use two 2400 controllers as a cascade control system with the output of the first (or master controller) forming the setpoint of the second (or slave controller). Eurotherm advanced algorithms enable the use of either setpoint or PV feedforward to limit the slave setpoint - for example ±10% of the master setpoint or PV. Cascade control From a simple ramp and dwell to a 16 segment program with event outputs, the 2000 Series provides a powerful platform for setpoint profiling. Programs can be edited from the instrument HMI and for the 2400 instruments, using iTools Setpoint Program Editor. iTools configuration software enables you to store and clone controller configurations, as well as commission your process control system. This facility significantly reduces installation and commissioning time while improving the security of the process. The Eurotherm advanced customer sensor linearisation tool also provides for the download of special sensor response characteristics to the controller. Reduced installation and commissioning time Easy setpoint programming From fixed build to modular construction, the Eurotherm flexible 2000 Series offers a truly versatile solution to all your requirements. www.eurotherm.com/2000 Selection guide Features Panel size (DIN) IP Rating Single Loop Display Type Supply Voltage Input Type PV Accuracy Control Types SP Programmer Analogue IP/OP Digital IP/OP Digital Comms Alarm Types PC Configuration 2116 1/32 1/16 IP65 2100 2216e 2208e 1/16 DIN rail 1/8 IP65 2200 2204e 1/4 TC, RTD, mV, mA, V 1 x 4 dig LED TC, RTD, mV, mA, Volts 2 x 4 dig LED <0.25% On/Off. PID none In: 1 Out: 0 In: 1 Out: 2 none none none none none none none none none none none none none List based <0.25% On/Off. PID, VP none none none In: 1 Out: 1 In: 3 Out: 4 Modbus, DeviceNet List based 24V dc/ac 85-264V ac 85-264V ac 2132 Dual input control Hi, Lo, Dev, Sensor break, Event, Heater fail Hi, Lo, Dev, Sensor break, Event, Heater fail Hi, Lo, Dev, Sensor break, 2416 2408 2404 1/16 1/8 1/4 IP65 2400 TC, RTD, mV, mA, Volts 2 x 4 dig LED <0.2% On/Off. PID, VP 20 x 16 segments In: 2 Out: 3 In: 11 Out: 11 List based 24V dc/ac 85-264V ac Modbus, DeviceNet, Profibus Special Features Maths Equation Combinational Logic Timers/Counters/Totals Real Time Clock © Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2011 Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, Eycon, Eyris, EPower, nanodac and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners. All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited. Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document. Part No. HA026587 Issue 5 Printed in England on recycled paper 03.11 Represented by: Eurotherm is also represented in the Eurotherm: following countries: International sales and service www.eurotherm.com Afghanistan Albania Algeria Angola Argentina Armenia Azerbaijan Bahrain Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Bermuda Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Botswana Brazil Brunei Darussalam Bulgaria Cambodia Cameroon Canada Central African Republic Chad Chile Colombia Congo Costa Rica Côte d’Ivoire Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Djibouti Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Fiji Finland Georgia Ghana Greece Greenland Guinea Hungary Iceland Indonesia Iraq Israel Jamaica Japan Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Kyrgyzstan Laos Latvia Lesotho Libya Lithuania Macedonia Madagascar Malaysia Malta Micronesia Moldova Morocco Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nicaragua Niger Nigeria Norway Oman Pakistan Palestinian Territory Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Poland Qatar Romania Russia Rwanda Saudi Arabia Senegal Serbia and Montenegro Sierra Leone Singapore Slovakia Slovenia Somalia South Africa Sri Lanka Sudan Swaziland Syria Tajikistan Tanzania Thailand The Gambia Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates Uruguay Uzbekistan Venezuela Vietnam Yemen Zambia Zimbabwe AUSTRALIA Melbourne Invensys Process Systems Australia Pty. Ltd. T (+61 0) 8562 9800 F (+61 0) 8562 9801 E info.eurotherm.au@invensys.com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH T (+43 1) 7987601 F (+43 1) 7987605 E info.eurotherm.at@invensys.com BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm S.A/N.V. T (+32) 85 274080 F (+32) 85 274081 E info.eurotherm.be@invensys.com BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm Ltda. T (+5519) 3707 5333 F (+5519) 3707 5345 E info.eurotherm.br@invensys.com CHINA Eurotherm China T (+86 21) 61451188 F (+86 21) 61452602 E info.eurotherm.cn@invensys.com Beijing Office T (+86 10) 5909 5700 F (+86 10) 5909 5709/5909 5710 E info.eurotherm.cn@invensys.com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA T (+33 478) 664500 F (+33 478) 352490 E info.eurotherm.fr@invensys.com GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH T (+49 6431) 2980 F (+49 6431) 298119 E info.eurotherm.de@invensys.com INDIA Mumbai Invensys India Pvt. Ltd. T (+91 22) 67579800 F (+91 22) 67579999 E info.eurotherm.in@invensys.com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited T (+353 1) 4691800 F (+353 1) 4691300 E info.eurotherm.ie@invensys.com ITALY Como Eurotherm S.r.l T (+39 031) 975111 F (+39 031) 977512 E info.eurotherm.it@invensys.com KOREA Seoul Invensys Operations Management Korea T (+82 2) 2090 0900 F (+82 2) 2090 0800 E info.eurotherm.kr@invensys.com NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn Eurotherm B.V. T (+31 172) 411752 F (+31 172) 417260 E info.eurotherm.nl@invensys.com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o. T (+48 32) 7839500 F (+48 32) 7843608/7843609 E info.eurotherm.pl@invensys.com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm España SA T (+34 91) 6616001 F (+34 91) 6619093 E info.eurotherm.es@invensys.com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB T (+46 40) 384500 F (+46 40) 384545 E info.eurotherm.se@invensys.com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG T (+41 44) 7871040 F (+41 44) 7871044 E info.eurotherm.ch@invensys.com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited T (+44 1903) 268500 F (+44 1903) 265982 E info.eurotherm.uk@invensys.com U.S.A. Ashburn VA Eurotherm Inc. T (+1 703) 724 7300 F (+1 703) 724 7301 E info.eurotherm.us@invensys.com ED63 2116/2132 PID temperature controllers User Guide Manuel Utilisateur Bedienungsanleitung ENG FRA GER This booklet includes: User Guide (HA026270 Issue 5) Manuel Utilisateur (HA026270FRA Indice 5) Bedienungsanleitung (HA026270GER Ausgabe 5) Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 1 2132 and 2116 PID Temperature Controllers Thank you for choosing the 2132 or 2116 Temperature Controller. Supplied in 1/32 and 1/16 DIN panel sizes they are designed for accurate, stable control of ovens, chillers, sterilisers and other heating and cooling processes. Two outputs are configurable for heating, cooling and alarms. The controller is supplied configured according to the order code given in section 5. Check this on the side labels to determine the configuration of your particular controller. 1. Dimensions and Installation Model 2132 Model 2116 48mm (1.89in) 45 x 45 mm -0.0, + 0.6 1.77 x 1.77in -0.00, +0.02 48mm 24mm Panel cut-out 103mm (4.01in) 45mm -0.0, +0.6 1.77in -0.0, +0.02 Latching ears Panel retaining clips 22mm -0.0, +0.3 0.88in -0.0, +0.10 Panel cut-out 103mm (4.01in) 48mm (1.89in) 2 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 1.1 To Install the Controller Please read the safety information in sections 7 before proceeding. 1. Prepare the panel cut-out to the size shown 2. Insert the controller through the cut-out. 3. Spring the panel retaining clips into place. Secure the controller in position by holding it level and pushing both retaining clips forward. 4. Peel off the protective cover from the display 1.2 Unplugging the Controller The controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching ears outwards and pulling it forward out of the sleeve. When plugging it back into its sleeve, ensure that the latching ears click back into place to maintain the IP65 sealing. 1.3 Recommended Minimum Spacing of Controllers 10mm (0.4 in) 38mm (1.5 in) (Not to scale) Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3 2. Electrical Connections 2.1 Wire Sizes The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm (16 to 22AWG). Hinged covers prevent hands or metal making accidental contact with live wires. The rear terminal screws should be tightened to 0.4Nm (3.5lb in). Output ratings Logic Output: 9Vdc, 12mA (non-isolated from sensor input). Used for: Heating, Cooling or Alarm. Relay Output: 2A, 264V ac resistive. Used for: Heating, Cooling or Alarm. Contact Closure Input (replaces Logic Output). Used for: Alarm Acknowledge or Timer start/reset Model 2116 OR Solid State Relay (SSR) + - Logic I/O Line Neutral Output 2 Relay T/C Pt100 mA Sensor Inputs L N A AB V+ V- 1A 1B 2.49Ω 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 1B 1A Pt100 T/C Output 2 Relay Neutral Line Logic I/O Model 2132 External Relay Module (Operated by the logic output) OR Solid State Relay (SSR) 2.49Ω Sensor Inputs V- V+ AB A N L - + mA 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 1B 1A 20-29 Vac/dc Low voltage supply 24 24 20-29 Vac/dc Low voltage 24 supply 24 4 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 2.2 Typical Wiring Diagram Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state: • A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation • It shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator It shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment * When switching inductive loads such as contactors or solenoid valves, wire the 22nF/100Ω ‘snubber’ supplied across relay terminals AA & AB. This will prolong contact life and reduce interference. ! WARNING Snubbers pass 0.6mA at 110V and 1.2mA at 230Vac, which may be sufficient to hold on high impedance loads. Do not use in these installations. Relay output fuse 2A type T Neutral Controller fuse 2A type T Heater fuse Heater Thermocouple Solid State Relay (e.g. TE10) Snubber* Line + - Model 2132 V+ A 1B V- 1A A L N Cooling or alarm relay Circuit Breaker Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 5 3. Operation Switch on the controller. Following a 3 second selftest sequence, you will see the display shown below. It is called the HOME display. OP1 illuminates when the logic output is ON (normally heating). OP2 illuminates when the relay output is ON (normally cooling or alarm). If OP1 or OP2 are configured as alarm outputs (instead of heating and cooling), they will flash when a new ‘unacknowledged’ alarm occurs and go steady when the alarm is acknowledged but still true. 3.1 To Adjust The Required Temperature (Setpoint) Press and release quickly the or button. The setpoint will be displayed for 2 seconds. 20 Output 1 Output 2 Actual Temperature (or Process Value ‘PV’) OP1 OP2 Press and hold to raise the setpoint Press and hold to lower the setpoint 60 OP1 OP2 􀀪 􀀪 Required temperature (Setpoint) Actual temperature 20 OP1 OP2 6 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.2 To View The Display Units Press and release quickly the or button. The display units will be flashed for 0.5 sec. If you get lost, pressing and together will always return you to the HOME display. If, at any time, no key is pressed within 45 seconds, the display will always return to the HOME display. 3.3 To Acknowledge a New Alarm Press and together. This will also reset any latched alarms that are no longer true. 3.4 Alarm Messages If an alarm occurs a message will be flashed in the display. This alternates with the measured temperature as shown below: Possible messages -fsH Alarm - Full Scale High -FSL Alarm - Full Scale Low -deV Alarm - Deviation -dHi Alarm - Deviation High -dLo Alarm - Deviation Low Sbr Sensor Break Lbr Loop Break Ldf Load Fail End End of Timing In place of the dash the alarm number is shown - Alarm 1 or 2 or 3. Display Units *C Deg Centigrade *F Deg Fahrenheit *K Deg Kelvin Linear inputs - no units displayed 0.5 sec or oC 20 Alarm 1 Full Scale Low Actual temperature 1fsL 20 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 7 3.5 To View The Output Power Do this if you want to see how much heating or cooling energy is being demanded by the controller. Note: This is not a measure of actual power. Warning! In manual standby mode (see ‘To Use The Timer’) the output power can be adjusted by the operator, causing heating or cooling to be permanently applied. To prevent this make the OP parameter read only (see ‘To Hide, Reveal And Promote Parameters’) HOME display 20.0 Press twice quickly OP 100.0 *C Press Controller is demanding 100% heat Press or to view the value 8 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.6 To Select or Change Other Parameters Parameters are settings in the controller which you can change to suit the process. They are found under list headings. Press the button to step through the list headings as shown below. Turn to paragraph 3.8 to see all of the list headings. These lists are used to: • Change alarm setpoints • Tune the controller to the process • Manually select PID values • Change setpoint limits and access the in-built timer • Change input and output limits Keep pressing to select more list headings, eventually returning to the HOME display. This is a continuous loop. HOME display 20.0 aL Atun X2 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 9 3.7 To Adjust The Alarm Setpoints (Trip Levels) Press twice to choose the AL list. There are three Alarms. The setpoint for each alarm is found under the AL list. If an alarm has been disabled, it will not appear in this list. Note: The other parameters listed in section 3.8 are accessed and adjusted in exactly the same way as this example. 0.5 sec 1st press 2nd press *C 20 2 secs Next list Press or displays List indicating a list heading LiSt AL 0 1--- -FSL = Low alarm -FSH = High alarm -dEV = Deviation -dHi = Deviation High -dLo = Deviation Low - = the alarm number 0 2--- 0 3--- Press and together to return to the HOME display. Alarm 1 * Alarm 2 * Alarm 3 * * Press or to change the setpoint. Press 10 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.8 Parameter Lists Shaded boxes are hidden when shipped from the factory. To reveal see ‘’To Hide, Reveal and Promote Parameters” section 3.10 HC.db Hys.C HYS.H Ont.C Ont.H OP.Hi OP.Lo CJCO SPrr SP H SP L AdC Lb t diSP HY m A w.SP Home List Alarm List Autotune List PID List(2) Setpoint List Input List Output List(2) On/Off List Access List 20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS 1---(1) 2---(1) 3---(1) OP tunE Pb ti td rES Lcb Hcb rEL.C OFS.H FiLt mV OFS CAL.P CAL Pnt.L OFS.L Pnt.H CYC.H CYC.C codE Goto Conf tmr dwel StAt tm.OP (2) Either the PID list or the On/Off list will be present depending upon the configuration of the controller. X2 (1) In place of dashes, the last three letters depend on the alarm type. Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 11 3.8.1 Summary 1. Press to step across list headings. 2. Press to step down parameters 3. Press to view the value of a parameter. Keep pressing to decrease the value. 4. Press to view the value of a parameter. Keep pressing to increase the value 12 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.9 Parameter Tables Home List Adjustable Range Default setting Customer setting Op Output Power -100% = max cooling, 100.0% = max heating. w.SP Working Setpoint Only appears when setpoint rate limit enabled Read only Read only m-A Manual/ Auto Select Auto mAn Automatic control selected Manual standby selected Auto disp Home Display Options Std OP NonE PV AL.SP pv.aL Standard - Shows the process value with the setpoint accessed by pressing the and buttons. Displays the output power - for use as a manual station. (Only applies to software version 1.4) Blank Display (only alarm messages flashed) Displays the Process Value only Displays the Alarm 2 Setpoint only Displays the Process Value with Alarm 2 Setpoint accessed by and . Std Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 13 AL Alarm List (See section 3.7) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting 1--- Alarm 1 Setpoint 0 2--- Alarm 2 Setpoint 0 3--- Alarm 3 Setpoint In place of dashes, the last three letters indicate the alarm type: Between low and high setpoint limits 0 -FSL Full Scale Low -FSH Full Scale High -dEv Deviation -dHi Deviation High -dLo Deviation Low HY Alarm Hysteresis 1 to 9999 in display units (This value is common to all alarms) Hysterisis is used to prevent the alarm output ‘chattering’ by setting a difference between the alarm switch ON and switch OFF points 1 Lb t Loop Break Time OFF to 9999 minutes OFF 14 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 Atun Automatic Tuning List (See section 4.3) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting tunE Automatic Tune Enable OFF or on Off Adc Automatic Manual reset calculation (when P+D control) man or caLc man PiD PID List (See section 4.3) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting Pb Proportional Band 1 to 999.9 display units 20 ti Integral Time OFF to 9999 seconds 360 td Derivative Time OFF to 9999 seconds 60 rES Manual Reset Value (only present if ti= OFF) -100 to 100.0 % 0.0 Lcb Low Cutback Auto to 999.9 display units Auto Hcb High Cutback Auto to 999.9 display units Auto rEL.C Relative Cool Gain 0.01 to 10.00 1.00 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 15 SP Setpoint List (See also ‘To Use the Timer’ section 3.11) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting SP L Setpoint Low Limit -1999 to 999.9 As per order SP H Setpoint High Limit -1999 to 999.9 As per order sprr Setpoint Rate Limit 0FF to 999.9 display units per minute Off tm.OP Timer Operating Mode Opt.1 to Opt.5 OPt.1 tmr Time Remaining 0 to 9999 minutes 0 dwEl Dwell Time 0FF to 9999 minutes OFF StAt Timer Status OFF or on OFF 16 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 iP Input List (See also ‘User Calibration’ section 4.2) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting FiLt Input Filter Time Constant 0FF to 999.9 seconds 1.6 CJC* Cold Junction Temperature measured at rear terminals Read only mV Millivolt Input measured at the rear terminals Read only OFS Process value Offset -1999 to 9999 display units 0 CAL.P Calibration Password 0 to 9999 3 CAL User Calibration Enable FACt Re-instates factory calibration USEr Re-instates user calibration FACt Pnt.L Low Calibration Point 0 OFS.L Low Point Calibration Offset 0 Pnt.H High Calibration Point 100 OFS.H High Point Calibration Offset -1999 to 9999 display units 0 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 17 oP Output List Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting OP.Lo Low Output Power Limit -100 to 100.0 % 0 OP.Hi High Output Power Limit -100 to 100.0 % 100.0 CYC.H Heating Output Cycle Time 0.2 to 999.9 seconds 1.0 Lgc 20 Rly CYC.C Cooling Output Cycle Time 0.2 to 999.9 seconds 5.0 Lgc 20 Rly ont.H Heating Output Minimum On Time Auto to 999.9 seconds (Auto = 50ms) Auto ont.C Cooling Output Minimum On Time Auto to 999.9 seconds (Auto = 50ms) auto onOF On Off Output List Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting hYS.H Heating Hysteresis 1 to 9999 display units 1 hYS.C Cooling Hysteresis 1 to 9999 display units 1 HC.db Heat/Cool Deadband 0 to 9999 display units 0 ACCS Access List (See “To Hide, Reveal and Promote” parameters section 3.10) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting codE Access Pass Number 0 to 9999 1 Goto Go To Required Access Level Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr Conf Configuration Pass Number 0 to 9999 2 18 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.10 To Hide, Reveal and Promote Parameters You are now in Edit level. Press and to select a parameter in the normal way. Press to return to the Access list header. ACCS PASS codE Press or to enter the password. The factory default is 1. ‘PASS’ will be displayed when the correct password has been entered. Press Press until the Access List Heading is reached. Press or to select ‘Edit’ level. Other options are: OPEr Operator level - shows selected parameters FuLL Reveals the ‘FULL’ set of parameters ConF Gives access to configuration level. Edit Goto Press ACCS High alarm 2 has been selected. When or is pressed, instead of displaying the parameter value, its availability to in Operator level is shown as follows: ALtr The parameter will be alterable HidE The parameter will be hidden . rEAd The parameter will be read-only Pro The parmeter will be ‘promoted’ into the HOME list (see below). Example: HidE 2FSH Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 19 3.10.1 The Pro (Promote) option Up to twelve commonly used parameters can be ‘promoted’ into the HOME list. This will give the operator quick access to them by simply pressing the button. This feature, used in combination with ‘hide’ and ‘ read only’, allows you to organise the way in which you want your controller formatted. The parameter tmr will now appear in the HOME list. Repeat the procedure for any other parameters you wish to promote. To remove a parameter go to edit level, select the parameter from the relevant list and change the choice from Pro back to ALtr, rEAd or HidE. 3.10.2 Returning to Operator level Repeat the above procedure for all the parameters you wish to hide, promote, or make read-only then return to operator level: Example: Time remaining has been selected. Press or to choose Pro. Pro tmr 1. Press until you reach the ACCS list heading 2. Press until you reach Goto 3. Press or to select Oper 4. Press to return to Operator level OPer Goto 20 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.11 To Use The Timer • Press until you reach the SP list • Press until you reach the tM.OP parameter • Press or to select the timer operating mode, Opt.1 to Opt.5 as follows: 3.11.1 Opt.1 - Mode 1, Dwell and Switch Off In reset In reset, you can switch between automatic control and standby mode, using the parameter m-A in the HOME list. The controller is supplied with the m-A parameter hidden. You must first reveal it. See ‘To Hide, Reveal and Promote Parameters’. Standby mode Temperature Setpoint Reset Timing Running End Waiting to End flashes reach temperature Auto m-A From the HOME display press until the m-A parameter is displayed. Press or to select: Auto Automatic control mAn Standby mode. (the MAN beacon below OP2 will illuminate) Press and together to return to the HOME display Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 21 ‘Automatic control’ means control at setpoint, with heating (and cooling) being applied. ‘Standby mode’ means: the controller is in manual with zero output power. See ‘Warning!’ in section 3.5. During Running The controller will always switch to automatic control. Heating (or cooling) will be applied and the temperature will rise (or cool) to the setpoint. When the temperature is within 1oC of setpoint, the timer will start counting down. During End When the timer times out, the controller will switch to standby mode. The MAN beacon will light and End will be flashed in the main display. The process will cool down. The timer will remain indefinitely in this state until reset. When Reset End will stop flashing. The controller will return to reset in standby mode. It can be returned to automatic control by setting the parameter m-A in the HOME list to Auto. 3.11.2 Opt.2 - Mode 2, Dwell No Switch Off Indefinite dwell at setpoint Temperature Setpoint Reset Timing Running End End flashes Waiting to reach temperature This is the same as mode 1 except that at the end of the timing period the controller will continue indefinitely in automatic control. 22 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.11.3 Opt.3 - Mode 3, Time from Cold and Switch Off This is the same as mode 1 except that the timer will start counting down immediately without waiting for the temperature to reach setpoint. 3.11.4 Opt.4 Mode 4, Time from Cold No Switch Off This is the same as mode 2 except that the timer will start counting down without waiting for the controller to reach setpoint. Standby mode Temperature Setpoint Reset Timing End End flashes Temperature Setpoint Reset Timing End End flashes Indefinite dwell at setpoint Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 23 3.11.5 Opt.5 Mode 5, Delayed Switch On This mode applies a time delay before turning on the heating (or cooling). When the timer is started, the controller will always switch to standby mode and start counting down. When the timer has timed out, the controller will switch into automatic control, apply heating (or cooling) and control indefinitely at the setpoint. 3.11.6 To Program a Ramp-Dwell profile A simple ramp-dwell profile can be programmed using Sprr (setpoint rate limit) in combination with the timer. To use this feature, first reveal Sprr and w.SP (the working setpoint) using the method described in “To Hide, Reveal and Promote” parameters. w.SP will then appear in the HOME list. Set Sprr to the required ramp rate. It is adjustable in 1/10th of the least significant display units per minute. That is if the display is configured 0 to 1000oC, setpoint rate limit can be adjusted between 0.1 and 999.9 oC per minute. When setpoint rate limit has been enabled and the timer is started, the working setpoint, wsp, will first step to the measured temperature and then ramp at the setpoint rate limit, sprr, to the target setpoint. In modes 1 and 2 timing will start when the measured temperature is within 1oC of the target setpoint. In modes 3 and 4 it will start when wsp is within 1oC of the target setpoint. Indefinite dwell at setpoint Temperature Setpoint Reset Timing Reset 24 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3.12 To Start And Reset The Timer There are two methods: Method 1. This is the simplest method to control the timer. • Press until you reach the SP list • Press until you reach the tMr parameter (time remaining). TIP: Promote tmr to the HOME list for quick access, as described in ‘To Hide, Revealing and Promote Parameters. As soon as a value is entered into tmr timing will commence. tmr will count down towards zero. During the timing period tmr can be increased or decreased according to the demands of the process. Setting the value to zero will end the timing period. When tmr reaches zero. ‘end’ will flash in the main display. The timer will remain indefinitely in this state until a new value is entered, when the timer will restart. To reset the timer, press and together. ‘end’ will stop flashing . To restart the timer, enter a new value into tmr. 1234 Tmr Press or to enter the required timing period in minutes. (0 to 9999). Press to return to the HOME display Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 25 Method 2. Use this method if you want to set a fixed time and use the stat parameter to start and stop the timer. The stat parameter can also be switched between Off and run by configuring the logic I/O as a Off/run contact closure input. Open the external contact to select run. This is an edge triggered action. Close the contact to select Off. Off is forced whenever the contact is closed. 1234 dwel run stat sp Press to reach the SP List heading. Press until you reach dwel Dwell time Press or to enter a timing period in minutes (0-9999). Timer Status To start the timer, press or to select run. The dwell time will be loaded into tmr and timing will commence. To reset the timer, select Off. The time remaining tmr will be set to 0. Press and together to return to the HOME display. 26 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4. Configuring the Controller Select configuration level to change: •The type of control •The display units •The input sensor type• The scaling of linear inputs •The alarm configuration • The passwords. 4.1 To select configuration level Press to step across the configuration list headings. Having selected a list heading, press to select a parameter within a particular list. Press and to change the setting. inSt iP AL AA Exit pASS 1A To Instrument Configuration Tables Press Press Press Goto conF Press or to select conf ACCS Press to reach the Access List Heading. codE PASS Press or to enter the password. The factory default is 1. PASS will be displayed when the correct password has been entered. ConF PASS Press or to enter the configuration level password. The factory default is 2. PASS will be displayed when the correct password has been entered. Press to enter configuration level. Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 27 4.1.1 Instrument Configuration inst Instr Conf Options Description *C Centigrade *F Fahrenheit *K Kelvin unit Display units nonE None nnnn None nnn.n One dEC.P Decimal places in display nn.nn Two Pid PID Control On.OF On/off Control CtrL Control type AL Convert to an alarm unit rEv Reverse (normal action for temperature control) Act Control action dir Direct (output decreases as PV falls below SP) Inst Instr Conf Options Description HoLd In Auto holds manual reset value Pd.tr Manual reset tracking (PD control) trAc In Auto tracks output for bumpless A/M transfer 28 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4.1.2 Input Configuration iP Sensor Input Options Meaning j.tc J thermocouple k.tc K thermocouple L.tc L thermocouple r.tc R thermocouple b.tc B thermocouple n.tc N thermocouple t.tc T thermocouple S.tc S thermocouple PL 2 Platinell II rtd 100Ω PRT mV Linear mV inPt Input type C.tc Custom input C=default Auto Automatic 0*C 0°C external ref. 45*C 45°C external ref. CJC (TC only) Cold junction compen sation 50*C 50°C external ref. Linear input scaling (Range -12 to +80mV) InP.L mV input low InP.H mV input high VaL.L Displayed value low VAL.H Displayed value high OFF Off (Linear inputs only) Auto 1.5KΩ Hi 5KΩ ImP Sensor break input impedance HiHi 15KΩ, Inp.L Inp.H VAL.H VAL.L mV Displayed value Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 29 4.1.3 Alarm Configuration The AL list configures the three internal ‘soft’ alarms and causes the appropriate alarm message to be flashed in the HOME display. At this stage the alarm is indication only (known as a ‘soft alarm’). To make the alarms operate the relay or logic outputs, follow the instructions under “Relay and Logic input/output Configuration. AL Alarm Type Meaning OFF The alarm is disabled fsL Full Scale Low alarm fsH Full Scale High alarm dEv Deviation band alarm dHi Deviation high alarm AL 1 Alarm 1 dLo Deviation low alarm AL Alarm Type Meaning no Non-latching YES Latched with automatic* resetting. Ltch Alarm latching mAn Latched with manual** resetting. bLoc Alarm No No blocking blocking YES Blocked until first good The above sequence is repeated for: AL 2 (Alarm 2) and AL 3 (Alarm 3) diS Limited by display range Sp.Li Alarm setpoint limits Con Limited by setpoint limits * Automatic resetting means that, once the alarm has been acknowledged, it will automatically clear when it is no longer true. ** Manual resetting means that the alarm must first clear before it can be reset. 30 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4.1.4 Relay and Logic input/output Configuration The logic I/O can be configured as an output or a contact closure input for alarm acknowledge, keylock, or timer run/reset. Aa Relay 1a Logic I/O Options Meaning id Identity of rELy Relay output LOG Logic diG Digital (alarm) output HEAt Heating output Function COOL Cooling output SSr.1 PDSIO mode 1 Ac.AL Alarm Acknowledge Loc.b Keylock digital input Func These functions only appear for the logic I/O rres Run/reset timer noch No change CLr Clear all alarms 1FSL Alarm 1 (Note 1) diG.F Digital output functions See ‘To 2FSH Alarm 2 (Note 1) Aa Relay 1a Logic I/O Options Meaning 3FSL Alarm 3 (Note 1) NW * New alarm SBR* Sensor break LBR* Loop break LDF* Load fail alarm MAn * Man mode active EnD* End of timing TMG* Timer running Operate the Relay or Logic Output from an Alarm or Digital Function section 4.1.5” TMG* Timer counting down (Note 2) TMG3* Timer running TMG4* Timer counting down SenS Sense of nor Normal (Note 3) the output Inv Inverted (Note 3) * Alarms always non-latching. Process alarms 1, 2 and 3 are configurable as alarm latching or nonlatching, see the ‘AL’ List Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 31 Note 1: The last three letters will correspond to the alarm type configured in the AL list. If the alarm is disabled, AL1 or AL2 or AL3 will be shown. Note 2: If tmg.3 and tmG.4 are selected, they illuminate the logic or relay output beacons, OP1 and OP2, without operating the actual output. They are used to indicate that timing is in progress while leaving the actual outputs to be operated by the other digital functions such as the END condition which can be used to operate an external klaxen. Note 3: Normal is the usual setting for heating or cooling. Inverted is the normal setting for alarms - de-energise in alarm. 4.1.5 To Operate the Relay or Logic output from an alarm or digital function. 1. Press until you reach Func 2. Press or to select Func = diG 3. Press to reach diG.F 4. Press or to select a alarm or digital function 5. Leave for 2 seconds. The display returns to diG.F and connects the selected alarm or digital function to the relay or logic output. 6. Press or again. Two decimal points will appear in the function that has been added to the output. 4.1.6 Multiple Alarms on one Output Any number of alarms or digital functions can be added to the relay or logic output by repeating steps 4, 5 and 6 above. Two decimal points will appear in those functions that has been added to the output. 4.1.7 To Clear Alarms from an Output 1. Press until to reach diG.F 2. Press or to select CLr 3. Leave for 2 seconds. The display returns to diG.F which disconnects all alarms from the relay. 32 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4.1.8 Passwords PASS Passwords Range Default ACC.P Full and Edit level password 0-9999 1 CnF.P Configuration level password 0-9999 2 CAL.P User calibration password 0-9999 3 4.1.9 To leave Configuration level Press to reach the ‘exit’ display Press or to select ‘YES’ After 2 secs the display will blink and return to the HOME display in Operator level. Exit YES Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 33 4.1.10 Diagnostic Alarms In addition to the normal process alarms, the following diagnostics alarm messages are provided. Message Meaning and (Action) EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error: A parameter value has been corrupted. Contact Eurotherm Controls. HW.Er Hardware error: (Return for repair) LLLL Low display range exceeded: (Check input signal) HHHH High display range exceeded: (Check input signal) Err1 Error 1: ROM self-test fail. (Return for repair) Err2 Error 2: RAM self-test fail. (Return for repair) Message Meaning and (Action) Err3 Error 3: Watchdog fail. (Return for repair) Err4 Error 4: Keyboard failure. Stuck button, or a button was pressed during power up. Err5 Error 5: Input circuit failure. (Return for repair) Pwr.F Power failure. The line voltage is too low. TU.Er Tune Error. Appears if auto-tuning exceeds 2 hours. 34 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4.2 User Calibration Your controller has been calibrated for life against known reference sources. User calibration allows you to apply offsets to compensate for sensor and other system errors. The parameter OFS in the IP list applies a fixed offset over the whole display range. You may also apply a 2-point calibration as follows: • Press until you reach the iP list • Press until you reach the CAL.P parameter • Press or to enter the password. The factory default is 3. PASS will be displayed when the correct has been entered. • Press to reach the CAL parameter • Press or , to select User (FAct will restore the factory calibration) • Press to select in turn the four parameters shown in the graph below. Use or to set the desired calibration points and the offsets to be applied at each point. The iP list on section 3.9 describes each of the parameters. Factory calibration Displayed Value Factory calibration Pnt.H OFS.H OFS.L Pnt.L User calibration Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 35 4.3 Automatic Tuning In PID control, the output from the controller is the sum of three terms: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. These three terms deliver just the right amount of power to hold the temperature at setpoint without oscillation. For stable control, the PID values must be ‘tuned’ to the characteristics of the process being controlled. In the 2132 and 2116 this is done automatically using advanced tuning techniques. Automatic tuning is performed by switching the output of the controller On and Off to induce an oscillation in the measured temperature. From the amplitude and period of the oscillation, the PID values, shown in the table below, are calculated. Parameter Display Meaning or Function Proportional band Pb The bandwidth in °C or °f over which the output power is proportioned between minimum and maximum. Integral time ti Determines the time taken by the controller to remove steady-state error signals. Parameter Display Meaning or Function Derivative time td Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate-of-change of temperature. Low cutback Lcb The number of °C or °f below setpoint at which the controller will cutback the output power to prevent overshoot on heat up. High Cutback Hcb The number of °C or °f above setpoint at which the controller will increase the output power to prevent undershoot on cool down. Relative cool gain rEL.C Only present if cooling has been configured. Sets the cooling proportional band by dividing the Pb value by the rEL.C value. 36 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 If the process cannot tolerate 100% heating or cooling during tuning, the power can be restricted by the heating and cooling limits in the Output list. However, the measured value must oscillate to some degree for the tuner to determine values. Tuning is normally performed only once during the initial commissioning of the process. However, if the process under control subsequently becomes unstable (because its characteristics have changed), you can retune again at any time. It is best to tune starting with the process at ambient temperature. This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately. 4.3.1 Heating & Cooling Output Cycle Times Before commencing a tuning cycle, set the values of CYC.H (heating output cycle time) and CYC.C (cooling output cycle time) in the oP (output) list. For a logic heating output (switching a SSR), set CYC.H to 1.0 sec. For a relay output, set CYC.H to 20.0 sec. For a logic cooling output used to control a solenoid valve, set CYC.C to 5.0 sec. 4.3.2 Tuning Procedure 1. Set the setpoint to the value at which you will normally operate the process. 2. In the ‘Atun’ list, select ‘tunE’ and set it to ‘on’ 3. Press the Page and Scroll buttons together to return to the HOME display. The display will flash ‘tunE’ to indicate that tuning is in progress. 4. The controller will induce an oscillation in the temperature by turning the heating on and then off. 5. After two cycles of oscillation the tuning will be completed and the tuner will switch itself off. 6. The controller will then calculate the tuning parameters and resume normal control action. If you want ‘Proportional only’ or ‘P+D’ or ‘P+I’ control, you should set the ‘ti’ or ‘td’ parameters to OFF before commencing the tuning cycle. The tuner will leave them off and will not calculate a value for them. Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 37 4.3.3 Typical automatic tuning cycle 4.3.4 Calculation of the cutback values When low cutback or high cutback is set to ‘AuTo’ their values will be fixed at three times the proportional band, and will not be altered during automatic tuning. If set to any other value, they will be calculated as part of the tuning process. 4.4 Manual Tuning If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, you can manually tune the controller. Proceed as follows: With the process at its normal running temperature: 1. Set the Integral Time ‘ti’ and Derivative Time ‘td’ to OFF. 2. Set High Cutback ‘Hcb’ and Low Cutback ‘Lcb’, to ‘Auto’ 3. Ignore the fact that the temperature may not settle precisely at the setpoint 4. Reduce the proportional band ‘Pb’ until the temperature just starts to oscillate. If the temperature is already oscillating, increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating. Allow enough time between each adjustment for the temperature to stabilise. Make a note of the proportional band value ‘B’ and the period of oscillation ‘T’. 5. Set the PID parameter values according to the formula below: Type of control Proportional band ‘Pb’ Integral time ‘ti’ Derivative time ‘td’ Proportional only 2xB OFF OFF P + I 2.2xB 0.8xT OFF P + I + D 1.7xB 0.5xT 0.12xT Temperature Time 38 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 4.4.1 Setting the cutback values The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up or for large step changes in temperature, then manually set the cutback parameters Lcb and Hcb. Proceed as follows: 1. Set the low and high cutback settings to 3 x the proportional band (that is to say, Lcb = Hcb = 3 x PB). 2. Note the level of overshoot or undershoot that occurs for large temperature changes (see the diagrams below). In example (a) increase Lcb by the overshoot value. In example (b) reduce Lcb by the undershoot value. Example (a) Example (b) When the temperature approaches the setpoint from above, you can set Hcb in a similar manner. 4.4.2 Manual reset When ti = OFF manual reset (rES) appears in the PiD List. This parameter sets the output power when the error signal is zero. It can be manually adjusted to remove steady state error - the function normally performed by the Integral term. Temperature Time Overshoot Temperature Time Undershoot Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 39 5. Ordering Code The controller is supplied configured according to the ordering code shown below. Model number Function Supply voltage Manual Output 1 (Logic) Output 2 (Relay) Function CC PID controller NF On/Off controller TC PID controller + timer TN On/Off controller + timer Supply voltage VH 85-264Vac VL 20 -29Vdc or ac Manual XXX None ENG English FRA French GER German NED Dutch SPA Spanish SWE Swedish ITA Italian Output 2: Relay XX Disabled RH Heating RC Cooling FH High alarm 2 FL Low alarm 2 AL High alarm 2 & low alarm 3 DB Dev band alarm 2 DL Dev. low alarm 2 DH Dev. high alarm 2 NW New alarm Output 1: Logic XX Disabled Logic output LH Heating LC Cooling M1 PDSIO mode 1 FH High alarm 1 FL Low alarm 1 DB Dev band alarm 1 DL Dev. low alarm 1 DH Dev. high alarm 1 NW New alarm Logic input AC Alarm ack/reset KL Keylock TM Timer Run/Reset Model Number 2132 1/16 DIN 2116 1/8 DIN 40 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 Sensor input Setpoint min Setpoint max Units Ext relay module Input adaptor External relay module XX Not fitted R7 Fitted (Operated by the logic output) Units C °C F ° F K Kelvin X Linear I/P Input Adaptor XX None V1 0-10Vdc A1 0-20mA sense resistor (2.49Ω. 0.1%) Sensor input Display range and Setpoint min & max limits Thermocouples °C ° F J Type J -210 to 1200 -340 to 2192 K Type K -200 to 1372 -325 to 2500 T Type T -200 to 400 -325 to 750 L Type L -200 to 900 -325 to 1650 N Type N -200 to 1300 -325 to 2370 R Type R -50 to 1768 58 to 3200 S Type S -50 to 1768 -58 to 3200 B Type B 0 to 1820 32 to 3308 P Platinell II 0 to 1369 32 to 2496 Resistance thermometer Z Pt100 -200 to 850 -325 to 1562 Custom downloaded inputs Range OC Range OF C Type C -W5%Re/W26%Re (default custom sensor) 0 to 2319 32 to 4200 D Type D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 to 2399 32 to 4350 E E thermocouple -200 to 999 -325 to 1830 1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 to 1399 32 to 2550 2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 to 1870 32 to 3398 3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 to 2000 32 to 3632 4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 to 2010 32 to 3650 5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 to 2300 50 to 4172 6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 to 2000 32 to 3632 7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 to 1800 392 to 3272 8 Exegen K80 I.R. Pyrometer -45 to 650 -49 to 1202 Process inputs (linear) Scaleable -999 to 9999 M -9.99 to +80mV Y 0 to 20mA A 4 to 20mA V 0 to 10Vdc (input adapter required) Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 41 6. Technical Specification Panel sealing IP65 (EN 60529), or 4X (NEMA 250) Operating ambient 0 to 55oC. Ensure that the enclosure is adequately ventilated. 5 to 95%RH, non condensing Storage temperature -30oC to +75oC. (Protect from humidity and dust) Atmosphere Not suitable for use above 2000m or in explosive or corrosive atmospheres Power supply High voltage unit: 100 to 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, 5Watts maximum consumption Low voltage unit: 24Vdc/ac +/- 20%. DC to 62Hz, 5Watts maximum consumption Relay rating (isolated) Maximum: 264Vac, 2A resistive. Minimum: 12Vdc, 100mA Mechanical life > 107 operations. Electrical life at 1A, 240vac resistive load > 5 x106 operations Wire sizes Use a minimum of 0.5mm2 or 16awg wire for plant connections. Over current protection Use independent 2A fuses for the supply and relay output. Suitable fuses are EN60127 (type T) Logic I/O rating 9V at 12mA, non-isolated from sensor input Electrical safety Meets EN 61010 (Voltage transients on the power supply must not exceed 2.5kV). Pollution degree 2. Isolation: All isolated inputs and outputs have reinforced insulation to protect against electric shock. (See live sensor note) Cold Junction Compensation >30 to 1 rejection of ambient temperature changes in automatic mode. Uses INSTANT ACCURACY TM sensing technology to reduce warm up drift and respond quickly to ambient temperature changes. Installation Category Category II or CAT II 42 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 7. Safety and EMC Information This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when it will meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC. Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this handbook may impair safety or EMC. The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation. Safety This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC by the application of the safety standard EN 61010. Electromagnetic compatibility It conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, by the application of a Technical Construction file. It satisfies the general requirements of the industrial environment defined in EN 61326. For more information on product compliance refer to the Technical Construction File. GENERAL The information contained in these instructions is subject to change without notice. While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information, Eurotherm shall not be held liable for errors contained herein. Unpacking and storage The packaging should contain an instrument mounted in its sleeve, two mounting brackets for panel installation and an Installation & Operating guide. Certain ranges are supplied with an input adapter. If on receipt, the packaging or the instrument is damaged, do not install the product but contact your supplier. If the instrument is to be stored before use, protect from humidity and dust in an ambient temperature range of -30oC to +75oC. SERVICE AND REPAIR This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact your supplier for repair. Caution: Charged capacitors Before removing the controller from its sleeve, switch off the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge. Failure to observe this Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 43 precaution may damage the indicator or cause some discomfort to the user. Electrostatic discharge precautions When the controller is removed from its sleeve, it is vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller. To avoid this, before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground. Cleaning Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible. Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the product. Safety Symbols The following safety symbols are used on the controller: Caution. Refer to the ! accompanying documents Personnel Installation must only be carried out by qualified personnel in accordance with instructions given in this handbook. Enclosure of live parts The controller must be installed in an enclosure to prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live. Caution: Live sensors The logic input/output is electrically connected to the sensor input (e.g. thermocouple). In some installations the temperature sensor may become live. The controller is designed to operate under these conditions, but you must ensure that this will not damage other equipment connected to the logic input/output and that service personnel do not touch this connection while it is live. With a live sensor, all cables, connectors and switches for connecting the sensor and non-isolated inputs and outputs must be mains rated for use in 240V ac CATII. Wiring Wire the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in these instructions. Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low level inputs or outputs. Only use copper conductors for connections, (except thermocouple). Ensure that the installation complies with local wiring regulations. In the UK use the latest version of the 44 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 IEE wiring regulations (BS7671) and in USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods. Power Isolation The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. This device should be in close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting device for the instrument. Voltage rating The maximum continuous voltage applied between any of the following terminals must not exceed 240Vac: • relay output to logic, dc or sensor connections; • any connection to ground. The controller must not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection. Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 240Vac with respect to ground and the product would not be safe Conductive pollution Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted. For example, carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution. To secure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet. Where condensation is likely, for example at low temperatures, include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet. This product has been designed to conform to BSEN61010 installation category II, pollution degree 2. These are defined as follows:- Installation Category II (CAT II) The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V supply is 2500V. Pollution Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected. Over-temperature protection When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part of the system should fail. In temperature control applications the primary danger is that the heating will remain constantly on. This could damage the product, the machinery being controlled, or even cause a fire. Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 45 Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include: • the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process • thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit; • the controller failing with its heating output constantly on • an external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition • The controller setpoint too high Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend fitting a separate over-temperature protection unit, with an independent temperature sensor, which will isolate the heating circuit. Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failure conditions. Installation requirements for EMC • For general guidance refer to Eurotherm Controls EMC Installation Guide, HA025464. • It may be necessary to fit a filter across the relay output to suppress conducted emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load. For typical applications we recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612. • If the unit is used in table top equipment which is plugged into a standard power socket, then it is likely that compliance to the commercial and light industrial emissions standard is required. In this case to meet the conducted emissions requirement, a suitable mains filter should be installed. We recommend Schaffner types FN321 and FN612. Routing of wires To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the sensor input wiring should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where this is impractical, shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring. Where signal wiring is carrying (or could carry, under fault conditions) hazardous voltages*, double insulation should be used. * A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears under ‘Hazardous Live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under normal operating conditions Hazardous voltage levels are defined as >30V RMS (42.2V peak) or >60V dc. 46 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 8. RoHS Certificate Product group 2100 Table listing restricted substances Chinese 产 2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚 线组X O X O O O 属O O O O O O 显X O O O O O 块X O X O O O O X English Product 2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE PCBA X O X O O O Enclosure O O O O O O Display X O O O O O Modules X O X O O O O X Approval Name: Position: Signature: Date: Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 Toxic and hazardous substances and elements Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. Restricted Materials Table Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) 览 质 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 2116/2132 Régulateurs de Température PID Manuel Utilisateur FRA N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 1 2132 et 2116 Régulateurs de Température PID Merci d'avoir choisi le régulateur de température 2132 ou 2116. Disponibles en formats de panneau 1/32 et 1/16 DIN, ils sont conçus pour une régulation précise et stable des fours, compresseurs frigorifiques, stérilisateurs et autres procédés de chauffage et de refroidissement. Deux sorties sont configurables pour le chauffage, le refroidissement et les alarmes. Ce régulateur est livré configuré selon le code de commande de la paragraphe 5. Regarder sur les étiquettes latérales pour déterminer la configuration du régulateur 1 Dimensions et Installation Modèle 2132 Modèle 2116 48mm 45 x 45 mm -0.0, + 0.6 103mm 48mm Découpe du 24mm panneau 48mm 103mm 45mm -0.0, +0.6 Clips de verrouillage Clips de fixation 22mm -0.0, +0.3 Découpe du panneau 2 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 1.1 Installation du régulateur Il est conseillé de lire les informations relatives à la sécurité, paragraphe 7, avant de continuer. 1. Préparer la découpe du panneau à la taille indiquée. 2. Insérer le régulateur par la découpe du panneau. 3. Mettre en place les clips de fixation. Immobiliser le régulateur en le tenant horizontal et en poussant les deux clips de fixation vers l'avant. 4. Retirer le film de protection de la face avant. 1.2 Retrait du régulateur Il est possible de retirer le régulateur de son manchon en tirant les clips de verrouillage vers l'extérieur et en le sortant du manchon. Lorsqu'on replace le régulateur dans son manchon, il faut veiller à ce que les clips de verrouillage s'encliquètent afin que l'étanchéité IP65 soit assurée. 1.3 Espace minimal recommandé entre régulateurs 10mm 38mm (Cette figure n'est pas à l'échelle) N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3 2 Branchements 2.1 Section des fils Les bornes à vis acceptent des fils de section 0,5 à 1,5 mm². Des caches articulés empêchent tout contact accidental avec les fils sous tension. Les vis des bornes arrière doivent être serrées à 0,4 Nm Caractéristiques nominales des sorties Sortie logique : 9 Vdc, 12 mA (pas isolée de l'entrée capteur). Utilisée pour : le chauffage, le refroidissement ou les alarmes. Sortie relais : 2 A, 264 V ac résistive. Utilisée pour : le chauffage, le refroidissement ou les alarmes. Entrée de fermeture des contacts (remplace la sortie logique). Utilisée pour : l'acquittement des alarmes ou le démarrage et la réinitialisation du timer. Modèle 2116 OU + - Ligne Neutre Sortie 2 Relais T/C Pt100 mA Entrées capteurs L N A AB V+ V- 1A 1B 2,49Ω 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 1B 1A Pt100 T/C Sortie 2 Relais Neutre Ligne E/S Logiques Modèle 2132 Module relais externe (actionné par la sortie logique) OU Contacteur statique (SSR) 2,49Ω Entrées capteurs V- V+ AB A N L - + mA 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 1B 1A Contacteur statique (SSR) - + E/S Logiques + - 20-29 Vac/dc Alimentation 24 basse tension 24 20-29 Vac/dc Alimentation basse tension 24 24 4 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 2.2 Schéma de Câblage Type Conditions de sécurité pour les équipements connectés en permanence : • Un interrupteur ou disjoncteur sera inclus dans l'installation • Il devra être situé à proximité de l'équipement et à portée de l'opérateur. • Il sera clairement identifié comme dispositif de sectionnement de l'équipement * En cas de commutation de charges conductrices comme les contacteurs ou les électrovannes, brancher un RC de 22 nF/100 Ω fourni entre les bornes AA & AB, ce qui prolonge la durée de vie des contacts et diminue les interférences ATTENTION Le RC laisse passer 0,6 mA à 110 V et 1,2 mA à 230 Vac, ce qui peut être suffisant pour maintenir les charges d'impédance élevée. Ne pas utiliser dans ces installations. Fusible de la sortie relais 2A type T Neutre Fusible du régulateuer 2A type T Fusible pour le chauffage Chauffage Thermocouple Contacteur statique (par exemple (e.g. TE10) Circuit RC* Ligne Modèle 2132 V+ A 1B V- 1A A L N Relais de refroidissement ou d'alarme Interrupteur N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 5 3 Utilisation Mettre le régulateur sous tension. Il effectue une suite de tests automatiques pendant environ 3 secondes puis affiche ce qui est représenté ci-dessous. Cet affichage est appelé PAGE DE REPOS. OP1 s'allume lorsque la sortie logique est sur ON (chauffage normalement). OP2 s'allume lorsque la sortie relais est sur ON (refroidissement ou alarme normalement). Si OP1 ou OP2 ou les deux est(sont) configuré(es) comme sortie(s) d'alarme (à la place du chauffage et du refroidissement), elle(s) clignote(nt) si une alarme ‘non acquittée’ se produit et s'allume(nt) à feu fixe lorsque l'alarme est acquittée mais reste vraie. 3.1 Reglage de la temperature souhaitee (consigne) Enfoncer puis relâcher rapidement la touche ou . La consigne est affichée pendant 2 secondes. 20 Sortie 1 Sortie 2 Température mesurée (ou valeur de régulation ‘PV’) OP1 OP2 Maintenir enfoncée pour augmenter la consigne Maintenir enfoncée pour diminuer la consigne 60 OP1 OP2 􀀪 􀀪 Température souhaitée (consigne) Température mesurée 20 OP1 OP2 6 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.2 Visualisation des unites affichees Enfoncer puis relâcher rapidement la touche ou . Les unités affichées clignotent pendant 0,5 sec. Si l'on est "perdu", l'appui simultané sur et provoque le retour systématique à la PAGE DE REPOS. Si aucune touche n'est enfoncée pendant 45 secondes, l'affichage revient toujours à la PAGE DE REPOS. 3.3 Acquittement d'une alarme nouvelle Appuyer simultanément sur et . Cette opération réinitialise également les alarmes mémorisées qui ne sont plus vraies. 3.4 Messages d'alarme Si une alarme se produit, un message clignote sur l'affichage. Ce message apparaît en alternance avec la température mesurée, comme le montre la figure cidessous: Ce tableau montre tous les messages possibles. Messages possibles -fsH Alarme - pleine échelle haute -FSL Alarme - pleine échelle basse -deV Alarme - écart -dHi Alarme - écart haut -dLo Alarme - écart bas Sbr Rupture capteur Lbr Rupture boucle Ldf Défaut de charge End Fin de timing Le numéro de l'alarme est indiqué à la place du tiret : alarme 1, 2 ou 3. Alarme 1 pleine échelle basse Température mesurée 1fsL 20 Unités affichées *C Centigrade *F Fahrenheit *K Kelvin Entrées linéaires - aucune unité n'est affichée 0,5 sec oC 20 ou N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 7 3.5 Visualisation de la Puissance de Sortie On peut effectuer cette opération si l'on souhaite voir la quantité d'énergie de chauffage ou de refroidissement demandée par le régulateur. N.B. : il ne s'agit pas d'une mesure de la puissance effective. ATTENTION En mode manuel attente (standby) (voir Utilisation du timer), l'opérateur peut régler la puissance de sortie, ce qui provoquera une chauffe ou un refroidissement permanent. Pour éviter ceci, mettre le paramètre OP en lecture seulement (Voir Paramètres cachés, visibles personnalisés) Page de repos 20.0 Appuyer deux fois rapidement OP 100.0 *C Appuyer Le régulateur demande 100 % de chauffage Appuyer sur ou pour visualiser la valeur 8 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.6 Selection ou Modification d'autres Parametres Les paramètres sont des valeurs du régulateur que l'on peut modifier pour les adapter au procédé. Ils se trouvent sous les en-têtes de listes. Appuyer sur la touche pour faire défiler les entêtes de listes, comme le montre la figure ci-dessous. Aller à la paragraphe 3.8 pour voir l'ensemble des entêtes de listes. Ces listes servent à : • modifier les consignes d'alarme • adapter le régulateur au procédé • sélectionner manuellement les valeurs PID • modifier les limites de consignes et accéder au timer intégré • modifier les limites des entrées et des sorties Maintenir la touche enfoncée pour sélectionner d'autres en-têtes de listes (retour à la PAGE DE REPOS après le dernier en-tête). La boucle est continue. Page de repos 20.0 aL Atun X2 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 9 3.7 Reglage des consignes d'alarme (niveaux de declenchement) Il existe trois consignes d'alarme. Les consignes d'alarme se trouvent dans la liste AL. Si une alarme a été désactivée, elle n'apparaît pas dans cette liste. Appuyer deux fois sur pour choisir la liste AL. N.B. : les autres paramètres énumérés paragraphe 3.8 sont accessibles et modifiables de la même manière que dans cet exemple 0,5 sec 1er appui 2ème appui *C 20 2 sec Liste suivante L'appui sur ou provoque l'affichage de List pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'un en-tête de liste. LiSt AL 0 1--- -FSL = Alarme basse -FSH = Alarme haute -dEV = Ecart -dHi = Ecart hau -dHL = Ecart bas - = numéro d'alarme 0 2--- 0 3--- * Appuyer sur ou pour modifier la consigne Alarme 1 * Alarme 2 * Alarme 3 * Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS. Appuyer 10 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.8 Listes de Parametres (2) La liste PID ou la liste On/Off est affichée, selon la configuration du Les cases grisées sont normalement cachées lorsque l'appareil sort régulateur. d'usine. Pour les faire apparaître, cf. ‘’Paramètres cachés, visibles et personnalisés”, paragraphe 3.10 HC.db Hys.C HYS.H Ont.C Ont.H OP.Hi OP.Lo CJCO SPrr SP H SP L AdC Lb t diSP HY m A w.SP Page de repos Liste Alarme Liste Autoréglage Liste PID(2) Liste Consigne Liste Entrée Liste Sortie Liste On/Off (2) Liste Accès 20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS 1---(1) 2---(1) 3---(1) OP tunE Pb ti td rES Lcb Hcb rEL.C OFS.H FiLt mV OFS CAL.P CAL Pnt.L OFS.L Pnt.H CYC.H CYC.C codE Goto Conf tmr dwel StAt tm.OP X2 (1) A la place des tirets, les trois dernières lettres dépendent du type d'alarme. Cf. “Réglage des consignes d'alarme paragraphe 3.7. N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 11 3.8.1 Résumé 1. Appuyer sur pour passer d'un en-tête de liste à l'autre. 2. Appuyer sur pour se déplacer dans les paramètres d'une liste donnée. Une fois que la fin de la liste est atteinte, on revient à l'en-tête de la liste. 3. Appuyer sur pour voir la valeur d'un paramètre sélectionné. Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour diminuer la valeur. 4. Appuyer sur pour voir la valeur d'un paramètre sélectionné. Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour augmenter la valeur. 12 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.9 Tableaux des Paramètres Page de repos Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client Op Puissance de sortie demandée -100% = refroidissement maximal, 100,0% = chauffage maximal. w.SP Consigne de travail Apparaît uniquement lorsque la limite de la vitesse de consigne est activée Lecture seule Lecture seule m-A Sélection Auto Régulation automatique sélectionnée Manuel/Auto mAn Attente manuelle sélectionnée Auto Std Standard - Montre la valeur de régulation avec la consigne accessible par appui sur les touches et . OP Affiche la puissance - de sortie pour une utilisation du régulateur en station manuelle (Version 1.4 seulement) NonE Affichage vide (seuls les messages d'alarme clignotent) PV Affiche uniquement la valeur de régulation AL.SP Affiche uniquement la consigne de l'alarme 2 disp Options de la page de repos pv.aL Affiche la valeur de régulation avec la consigne de l'alarme 2 accessible par les touches et Std N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 13 AL Liste Alarmes (cf. para 3.7) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client 1--- Consigne de l'alarme 1 0 2--- Consigne de l'alarme 2 0 3--- Consigne de l'alarme 3 A la place des tirets, les trois dernières lettres indiquent le type de l'alarme Entre les limites haute et basse des consignes 0 -FSL Pleine échelle basse -FSH Pleine échelle haute -dEv Ecart -dHi Ecart haut -dLo Ecart bas HY Hystérésis d'alarme 1 à 9999 en unités affichées (cette valeur est commune à toutes les alarmes). L'hystérésis sert à empêcher la sortie d'alarme de ‘déclencher trop souvent’ en fixant une différence entre les points d’activation et de désactivation de l'alarme 1 Lb t Temps de rupture de boucle OFF à 9999 minutes OFF 14 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 Atun Liste Auto-réglage (cf. paragraphe 4.3) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client tunE Activation du réglage automatique OFF ou on Off Adc Calcul de réinitialisation manuelle automatique (régulation P+D) man ou caLc man PiD Liste PID (cf paragraphe 4.3) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client Pb Bande proportionnelle 1 à 999.9 unités affichées 20 ti Temps d'intégrale OFF à 9999 secondes 360 td Temps de dérivée OFF à 9999 secondes 60 rES Valeur de l'intégrale manuelle (uniquement si ti= OFF) -100 à 100.0 % 0.0 Lcb Cutback bas Auto à 999.9 unités affichées Auto Hcb Cutback haut Auto à 999.9 unités affichées Auto rEL.C Gain relatif de refroidissement 0.01 à 10.00 1.00 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 15 SP Liste Consignes (cf. paragraphe 3.11) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client SP L Limite basse de la consigne -1999 à 999,9 Selon la commande SP H Limite haute de la consigne -1999 à 999,.9 Selon la commande sprr Limite de vitesse de la consigne 0FF à 999,9 unités affichées par minute Off tm.OP Mode de fonctionnement du timer Opt.1 à Opt.5 OPt.1 tmr Temps restant 0 à 9999 minutes 0 dwEl Temps de palier 0FF à 9999 minutes OFF StAt Etat du timer OFF ou on OFF 16 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 iP Liste Entrées (cf. paragraphe 4.2) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client FiLt Constante de temps de filtrage des entrées 0FF to 999.9 seconds 1.6 CJC* Température de soudure froide mesurée aux bornes arrière Lecture seule mV Entrée mV mesurée aux bornes arrière Lecture seule OFS Offset de la valeur de régulation -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0 CAL.P Code d'accès de la calibration 0 à 9999 3 CAL Activation de la Calibration utilisateur FACt Réactive la calibration usine USEr Réactive la calibration utilisateur FACt Pnt.L Point bas de calibration -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0 OFS.L Offset de la calibration du point bas -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0 Pnt.H Point haut de calibration -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 100 OFS.H Offset de la calibration du point haut -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 17 oP Liste Sorties Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client OP.Lo Limite basse de puissance -100 à 100,0 % 0 OP.Hi Limite haute de puissance -100 à 100,0 % 100.0 CYC.H Durée du cycle de chauffage 0,2 à 999,9 secondes CYC.C Durée du cycle de refroidissement 0,2 à 999,9 secondes 1.0 Lgc 20 Rly ont.H Durée minimale de chauffage ont.C Durée minimale de refroidissement Auto à 999,9 secondes (Auto = 50 msec) Auto onOF Liste Sorties On Off Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client hYS.H Hystérésis de chauffage 1 à 9999 unités affichées 1 hYS.C Hystérésis de refroidissement 1 à 9999 unités affichées 1 HC.db Bande morte de chauffage/refroidissement 0 à 9999 unités affichées 0 ACCS Liste Accès (Cf. paramètres “Cachés, Visibles et Personnalisés” paragraphe 3.10) Plage réglable Réglage par défaut Réglage client codE Code d'accès 0 à 9999 1 Goto Niveau d'accès sélectionné Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr Conf Code d'accès de configuration 0 à 9999 2 18 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.10 Parametres Caches, Visibles et Personnalises Exemple: HidE 2FSH L'alarme haute 2 a été sélectionnée. Lors de l'appui sur ou , au lieu d'afficher la valeur du paramètre, sa disponibilité au niveau Opérateur est indiquée de la manière suivante : ALtr Le paramètre est modifiable HidE Le paramètre est caché. rEAd Le paramètre est en lecture seule Pro Le paramètre est ‘personnalisé’ dans a PAGE DE REPOS (voir ci-après). On est maintenant au niveau Modification. Appuyer sur et pour sélectionner normalement un paramètre ACCS PASS codE Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le code d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est 1. ‘PASS’ apparaît lorsque le code d'accès correct a été saisi Appuyer sur jusqu'à l'en-tête de liste Accès. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner le niveau ‘Edit. Autres options : OPEr Niveau Opérateur - montre les paramètres sélectionnés FuLL Montre le jeu de paramètres ‘FULL’ ConF Donne accès au niveau configuration Edit Goto ACCS Appuyer sur cette touche Appuyer sur cette touche Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l'en-tête de liste Accès. N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 19 3.10.1 Option Pro (personnaliser) Il est possible de ‘personnaliser’ un maximum de douze paramètres couramment utilisés dans la PAGE DE REPOS. L'opérateur peut ainsi y accéder rapidement en appuyant simplement sur la touche . Cette fonction, utilisée en association avec ‘caché’ et ‘lecture seule’, permet d'organiser la manière dont on souhaite formater le régulateur. Le paramètre tmr apparaît alors dans la PAGE DE REPOS. Répéter l'opération pour les autres paramètres que l'on souhaite personnaliser. Pour supprimer un paramètre, aller au niveau edit, sélectionner le paramètre dans la liste qui convient et passer de Pro à ALtr, rEAd ou HidE. 3.10.2 Retour au niveau Opérateur Répéter l'opération ci-dessus pour tous les autres paramètres que l'on souhaite cacher, personnaliser ou faire passer en lecture seule, puis revenir au niveau opérateur: Exemple: Le temps restant a été sélectionné. Appuyer sur ou pour choisir Pro Pro tmr OPer Goto 1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à l'en-tête de liste ACCS 2. Appuyer sur jusqu'à Goto 3. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner Oper 4. Appuyer sur pour revenir au niveau Opérateur 20 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.11 Utilisation du Timer • Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste SP • Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre tM.OP • Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner le mode de fonctionnement du timer, Opt.1 à Opt.5, de la manière suivante: 3.11.1 Opt.1 - Mode 1, palier et coupure Lors de la Réinitialisation Lors de la réinitialisation, on peut alterner entre régulation automatique et attente, avec le paramètre m-A dans la PAGE DE REPOS. Le régulateur est livré avec le paramètre m-A caché. Il faut commencer par le faire apparaître. Cf. ‘Paramètres cachés, visibles et personnalisés’. Mode attente (Standby) Température Consigne Réinitialisation Chrono-métrage Exécution Fin End clignote Attente jusqu'à ce que la température soit atteinte Auto m-A Dans la PAGE DE REPOS, appuyer sur jusqu'à ce que le paramètre m-A apparaisse. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner : Auto Régulation automatique mAn Mode attente. (le voyant MAN en-dessous d'OP2 s'éclaire) Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 21 ‘Régulation automatique’ désigne la régulation à la consigne, avec le chauffage (et le refroidissement) en service. ‘Mode attente’(Standby) désigne le régulateur en mode manuel avec une puissance de sortie nulle. (Voir ‘ATTENTION’ paragraphe 3.5) Pendant "Exécution" Le régulateur passe toujours en régulation automatique. Le chauffage (ou le refroidissement) est appliqué et la température augmente (ou diminue) jusqu'à la consigne. Lorsque la température diffère de la consigne de moins d'1oC, le timer commence le compte à rebours. Pendant "Fin" Lorsque le timer est arrivé à la fin de la temporisation, le régulateur passe en mode attente. Le voyant MAN s'allume et End clignote sur l'affichage principal. Le procédé refroidit. Le timer reste indéfiniment dans cet état jusqu'à la réinitialisation. Retour à la réinitialisation End arrête de clignoter. Le régulateur revient en mode attente. Il est possible de le faire revenir en régulation automatique en réglant le paramètre m-A de la PAGE DE REPOS sur Auto. 3.11.2 Opt.2 - Mode 2, sans coupure palier Palier indéfini à la consigne Température Consigne Réinitialisation Chronométrage Ex écution Fin End clignote Attente jusqu'à ce que la température soit atteinte Ce mode est identique au mode 1, avec une différence : à la fin de la période de chronométrage, le régulateur continue indéfiniment en mode de régulation automatique. 22 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.11.3 Opt.3 - Mode 3, durée à partir de la position froide puis coupure Identique au mode 1, sauf que le timer commence immédiatement le compte à rebours sans attendre que la température ait atteint la consigne. 3.11.4 Opt.4 - Mode 4, durée à partir de la position froide sans coupure Identique au mode 2, sauf que le timer commence immédiatement le compte à rebours sans attendre que le régulateur ait atteint la consigne. Mode attente Température Consigne Réinitialisation Chronométrage Fin End clignote Réinitialisation Palier indéfini à la consigne Température Consigne Chronométrage End clignote Réinitialisation N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 23 3.11.5 Opt.5 Mode 5, temporisation de la mise sous tension Ce mode applique une temporisation avant d'activer le chauffage (ou le refroidissement). Lorsque le timer démarre, le régulateur passe toujours en mode attente et commence le compte à rebours. Lorsque le timer a terminé sa tâche, le régulateur passe en mode automatique, applique le chauffage (ou le refroidissement) et régule indéfiniment à la consigne. 3.11.6 Programmation d'un profil rampepalier Il est possible de programmer un profil simple rampepalier à l'aide de Sprr (limite de vitesse de consigne) en combinaison avec le timer. Pour utiliser cette fonction, commencer par faire apparaître Sprr et w.SP (consigne de travail) à l'aide de la méthode décrite dans “Paramètres cachés, visibles et personnalisés”. w.SP apparaît alors dans la PAGE DE REPOS. Positionner Sprr sur la vitesse de rampe souhaitée. Ce paramètre est réglable par pas de 1/10 d’ unités affichées les moins significatives par minute. Cela signifie que, si l'affichage est configuré de 0 à 1000oC, la limite de vitesse de consigne peut être réglée entre 0,1 et 999,9 oC par minute. Lorsque la limite de vitesse de consigne a été activée et que le timer a démarré, la consigne de travail w.sp commence par passer à la température mesurée puis passe en rampe à la limite de vitesse de consigne sprr jusqu'à la consigne cible. Dans les modes 1 et 2, le compte à rebours commence lorsque la température mesurée diffère de la consigne cible de moins d'1oC. Dans les modes 3 et 4, il commence lorsque w.sp diffère de la consigne cible de moins d'1oC. Réinitialisation Palier indéfini à la consigne Température Consigne Chronométrage Fin 24 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3.12 Demarrage et reinitialisation du timer Il existe deux méthodes : Méthode 1. Il s'agit de la méthode la plus simple pour commander le timer. • Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste SP • Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre tMr (temps restant). CONSEIL : personnaliser tmr dans la PAGE DE REPOS pour un accès rapide, comme le décrit la section ‘Paramètres cachés, visibles et personnalisés'. Dès qu'une valeur est saisie dans tmr, le chronométrage commence. tmr effectue le compte à rebours vers zéro. Au cours de la période de chronométrage, tmr peut augmenter ou diminuer en fonction des demandes du procédé. Le positionnement de la valeur sur zéro met fin à la période de chronométrage. Lorsque tmr atteint zéro, ‘end’ clignote sur l'affichage principal. Le timer reste indéfiniment dans cet état jusqu'à ce qu'une nouvelle valeur soit saisie : le timer redémarre alors. Pour réinitialiser le timer, appuyer simultanément sur et . ‘end’ arrête de clignoter. Pour redémarrer le timer, saisir une nouvelle valeur dans tmr. 1234 Tmr Appuyer sur ou pour saisir la période de temporisation souhaitée en minutes. (0 à 9999) Appuyer sur pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 25 Méthode 2. Utiliser cette méthode si l'on souhaite définir une durée fixe et utiliser le paramètre stat pour démarrer et arrêter le timer. Il est également possible de faire alterner le paramètre stat entre Off et run en configurant l'E/S logique comme entrée de fermeture de contact arrêt/marche. Ouvrir le contact externe pour sélectionner run. C'est une action déclenchée par les flancs. Fermer le contact pour sélectionner Off. Off est forcé à chaque fermeture du contact. 1234 dwel run stat sp Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'entête de liste SP. Appuyer sur cette touche jusqu'à dwel Temps de palier Appuyer sur ou pour saisir une période de chronométrage en minutes (0-9999). Etat du timer Pour démarrer le timer, appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner run. Le temps de palier est chargé dans tmr et la temporisation commence. Pour réinitialiser le timer, sélectionner Off. Le temps restant tmr est fixé à 0. Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS. 26 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4 Configuration du Regulateur Sélectionner le niveau configuration pour modifier : •le type de régulation •les unités affichées •le type de capteur d'entrée • la mise à l'échelle des entrées linéaires • la configuration des alarmes • les codes d'accès. 4.1 Sélection du niveau configuration Appuyer sur pour se déplacer dans les en-têtes de listes configuration. Une fois qu'un en-tête de liste a été sélectionné, appuyer sur pour sélectionner un paramètre dans une liste donnée. Appuyer sur et pour modifier le réglage. inSt iP AL AA Exit pASS 1A Configuration de l'appareil Appuyer Appuyer Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner Conf Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'en-tête de liste Accès. Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le code d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est 1. PASS apparaît lorsque le code d'accès correct a été saisi. Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le code d'accès du niveau configuration. La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est 2. PASS apparaît lorsqu'un code d'accès correct a été saisi. Appuyer sur cette touche pour passer au niveau configuration. Goto conF ACCS codE PASS ConF PASS Appuyer N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 27 4.1.1 Configuration de l'appareil inst Configuration de l'appareil Options Signification *C Celsius *F Fahrenheit *K Kelvin unit Unités affichées nonE Pas d'unité nnnn Néant nnn.n Une décimale dEC.P Résolution de l'affichage nn.nn Deux décimales Pid PID On.OF Tout ou rien CtrL Type de régulation AL Convertit le régulateur en unité d'alarme inst Configuration de l'appareil Options Signification rEv Inverse (action normale pour la régulation de la température) Act Action de régulation dir Directe (la sortie diminue lorsque la valeur de régulation passe en-dessous de la consigne) Pd.tr Suivi de l’intégrale manuelle (régulation PD) HoLd En mode Auto, maintient la valeur de l'intégrale manuelle trAc En mode Auto, suit la sortie pour le transfert progressif Auto/Manuel 28 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4.1.2 Configuration des Entrées iP Entrée capteur Options Signification j.tc Thermocouple J k.tc Thermocouple K L.tc Thermocouple L r.tc Thermocouple R b.tc Thermocouple B n.tc Thermocouple N t.tc Thermocouple T S.tc Thermocouple S PL 2 Platinell II rtd Sonde platine 100 Ω mV Millivolt linéaire inPt Type d'entrée C.tc Entrée personnalisée (C = valeur par défaut) Auto Automatique 0*C Référence externe 0°C 45*C Référence externe 45°C CJC (TC seule ment) Compensat ion de soudure froide 50*C Référence externe 50°C Mise à l'échelle des entrées linéaires (plage -12 à +80 mV) InP.L Entrée mV basse InP.H Entrée mV haute VaL.L Valeur affichée basse VAL.H Valeur affichée haute OFF Off (entrées linéaires uniquement) Auto 1.5KΩ Hi 5KΩ ImP Adaptation d'impédance pour rupture capteur HiHi 15KΩ, Inp.L Inp.H VAL.H VAL.L mV Valeur affichée N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 29 4.1.3 Configuration des Alarmes La liste AL configure les trois alarmes internes ‘non bloquantes' et fait clignoter le message d'alarme qui convient sur la PAGE DE REPOS. A ce stade, l'alarme est simplement une indication (‘alarme non bloquante’). Pour provoquer l'activation des sorties relais ou logiques par les alarmes, suivre les instructions de “Configuration des entrées/sorties relais et logiques". AL Alarme Type Signification OFF Alarme désactivée fsL Alarme pleine échelle basse fsH Alarme pleine échelle haute dEv Alarme bande dHi Alarme écart haut AL 1 Alarme 1 dLo Alarme écart bas Ltch Alarme no Non mémorisée mémorisée YES Mémorisée avec réinitisalisation automatique * AL Alarme Type Signification mAn Mémorisée avec réinitialisation manuelle **. bLoc Alarme no Non bloquante bloquante YES Bloquée jusqu'au premier état hors alarme La séquence ci-dessus se répète pour: AL 2 (Alarme 2) et AL 3 (Alarme 3) diS Limité par la plage d'affichage Du capteur Sp.Li Limites de la consigne d'alarme Con Limité par les limites de la consigne * La réinitialisation automatique signifie que, une fois que l'alarme a été acquittée, elle s'efface automatiquement lorsqu'elle n'est plus vraie. ** La réinitialisation manuelle signifie que l'alarme doit être tout d'abord effacée avant de pouvoir être réinitialisée. 30 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4.1.4 Configuration des Entrées/Sorties Relais et Logiques N.B: il est possible de configurer les E/S logiques comme sorties ou comme entrées de fermeture de contact pour l'acquittement des alarmes, le verrouillage du clavier ou la mise en marche/réinitialisation du timer. Aa Sortie relais 1a E/S logiques Options Signification id Identité de la rELy Relais sortie LOG Logique diG Sortie logique (alarme) HEAt Sortie chauffage Fonction COOL Sortie refroidissement SSr.1 Mode PDSIO 1 Ac.AL Acquittement des alarmes Loc.b Entrée logique verrouillage du clavier Func Ces fonctions apparaissent uniquement pour les E/S logiques rres Mise en marche /réinitialisation du Aa Sortie relais 1a E/S logiques Options Signification timer noch Aucun changement CLr Suppression de toutes les alarmes 1FSL Alarme 1 (Cf. remarque 1) 2FSH Alarme 2 (Cf. remarque 1) 3FSL Alarme 3 (Cf. remarque 1) nw * Alarme nouvelle Sbr* Alarme rupture capteur Lbr* Alarme rupture de boucle LdF* Alarme défaut de charge mAn* Mode manuel actif End* Fin du chronométrage tmG1* Timer en marche diG.F Fonctions sorties Numériques Cf. ci-dessous “Utilisation de la sortie relais ou logique à partir d'une fonction logique" Paragraphe 4.1.5. tmG2* Timer en compte N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 31 Aa Sortie relais 1a E/S logiques Options Signification à rebours (Cf. remarque tmG3* Timer en marche 2) tmG4* Timer en compte à rebours nor Normal (sorties chauffage ou refroidissement) SenS Sens de la sortie Inv Inversé (pour les alarmes, se coupe en état d'alarme) *Ces alarmes sont toujours non mémorisées. Les alarmes 1,2 et 3 sur la mesure sont configurables en alarmes mémorisées ou non mémorisées (Voir lisete Al) Les Remarque 1 : les trois dernières lettres correspondent au type d'alarme configuré dans la liste AL. Si l'alarme est désactivée, AL 1 ou AL 2 ou AL 3 est affiché. Remarque 2 : tmg.3 et tmG.4 sont des fonctions spéciales. Si elles sont sélectionnées, elles provoquent l'allumage des voyants de sorties relais ou logiques OP1 et OP2 sans actionner la sortie correspondante. Elles servent à indiquer que le chronométrage est en cours, tout en laissant les autres fonctions logiques activer les sorties effectives (état FIN qui peut servir à faire fonctionner un klaxon externe, par exemple). 4.1.5 Utilisation de la sortie relais ou logique à partir d'une fonction alarme ou logique. 1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à Func 2. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner Func = diG 3. Appuyer sur pour atteindre diG.F 4. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner une fonction alarme ou logique 5. Attendre 2 secondes. L'affichage revient à diG.F et relie la fonction alarme ou logique sélectionnée à la sortie relais ou logique. 6. Appuyer à nouveau sur ou . Deux décimales apparaissent dans la fonction qui a été ajoutée à la sortie. 32 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4.1.6 Alarmes multiples sur une seule sortie Il est possible de réaliser le « ou » d’un nombre quelconque de fonctions alarmes ou logiques à la sortie relais ou logique en répétant les étapes 4, 5 et 6 ci-dessus. Deux décimales apparaissent sur les fonctions qui ont été ajoutées à la sortie. 4.1.7 Suppression des alarmes d'une sortie 1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à diG.F 2. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner CLr 3. Attendre 2 secondes. L'affichage revient à diG.F qui annule toutes les alarmes du relais. 4.1.8 Codes d'accès PASS Codes d'accès Plage Valeur par défaut ACC.P Code d'accès des niveaux Régleur et Modification 0-9999 1 CnF.P Code d'accès du niveau Configuration 0-9999 2 CAL.P Code d'accès de la Calibration utilisateur 0-9999 3 4.1.9 Sortie du niveau Configuration Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'affichage ‘exit’. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner ‘YES’. Après 2 sec, l'affichage clignote et revient à la PAGE DE REPOS au niveau Opérateur. Exit YES N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 33 4.1.10 Alarmes de diagnostic Outre les alarmes de procédé normales, les messages d'alarme de diagnostic suivants sont disponibles. Message Signification et (intervention) EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error (erreur de mémoire effaçable électriquement) : La valeur d'un paramètre a été altérée. Appeler Eurotherm Automation. HW.Er Erreur matérielle : (envoyer le régulateur en réparation) LLLL Plage basse d'affichage dépassée : (vérifier le signal d'entrée) HHHH Plage haute d'affichage dépassée : (vérifier le signal d'entrée) Err1 Erreur 1 : échec du test automatique de la ROM. (envoyer le régulateur en réparation) Err2 Erreur 2 : échec du test automatique de la RAM. (envoyer le régulateur en réparation) Err3 Erreur 3 : échec du chien de garde. (envoyer le régulateur en réparation) Err4 Erreur 4 : défaut du clavier. Touche Message Signification et (intervention) bloquée ou une touche a été enfoncée lors de la mise en route. Err5 Erreur 5 : défaut sur circuit d'entrée. (envoyer le régulateur en réparation) Pwr.F Défaut alimentation. La tension de ligne est trop faible. TU.Er Erreur Réglage. Apparaît si le temps d’auto-reglage dépasse 2 heures. 34 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4.2 Calibration Utilisateur Le régulateur a été calibré à vie par rapport à des sources de référence connues. La calibration utilisateur permet d'appliquer des offsets afin de compenser les erreurs de capteurs et autres erreurs système. Le paramètre OFS de la liste IP applique un offset fixe sur toute la plage d'affichage. Il est également possible d'appliquer une calibration bi-point de la manière suivante : • Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste iP • Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre CAL.P • Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le code d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est 3. PASS apparaît lorsque le code d'accès correct a été saisi. • Appuyer sur pour atteindre le paramètre CAL • Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner User (FAct rétablit la calibration réglée en usine) • Appuyer sur pour sélectionner sucessivement les quatre paramètres représentés sur le graphique ci-dessous. Utiliser ou pour définir les points de calibration souhaités et les offsets à appliquer à chaque point. La liste iP de la page 5 décrit chaque paramètre. Calibration usine Valeur affichée Calibration usine Pnt.H OFS.H OFS.L Pnt.L Calibration utilisateur N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 35 4.3 Réglage Automatique En régulation PID, la sortie du régulateur est la somme de trois termes : Proportionnel, Intégral et Dérivé. Ces trois termes délivrent la quantité de puissance qui est suffisante pour maintenir la température à la consigne sans oscillation. Pour une régulation stable, les valeurs PID doivent être ‘réglées’ pour correspondre aux caractéristiques du procédé régulé. Sur les modèles 2132 et 2116, cela est effectué automatiquement à l'aide de techniques de réglage évoluées. Le réglage automatique consiste à activer et désactiver la sortie du régulateur pour induire une oscillation de la température mesurée. Les valeurs PID, indiquées dans le tableau ci-dessous, sont calculées à partir de l'amplitude et de la période de l'oscillation. Paramètre Affichage Signification ou fonction Bande proportionnelle Pb Largeur de bande, exprimée en °C ou °f sur laquelle la puissance de sortie est proportionnée entre le minimum et le maximum. Temps d'intégrale ti Détermine le temps nécessaire au régulateur pour supprimer l'erreur de statisme en régime Paramètre Affichage Signification ou fonction permanent. Temps de dérivée td Détermine l'ampleur de la réaction du régulateur à la vitesse de variation de la température. Cutback bas Lcb Nombre de °C ou °f endessous de la consigne auquel le régulateur va diminuer la puissance de sortie pour empêcher un dépassement de la consigne lors du chauffage. Cutback haut Hcb Nombre de °C ou °f audessus de la consigne auquel le régulateur va augmenter la puissance de sortie pour empêcher que l'on soit endessous de la consigne lors du refroidissement. Gain relatif de refroidissement rEL.C Uniquement présent si le refroidissement a été configuré. Définit la bande proportionnelle de refroidissement en divisant la valeur Pb par la valeur rEL.C. 36 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 Si le procédé ne peut pas tolérer l'application du chauffage ou du refroidissement total au cours du réglage, il est possible de limiter la puissance en fixant les limites de chauffage et de refroidissement dans la liste Sorties. Toutefois, la valeur mesurée doit osciller pour que le régulateur puisse calculer les valeurs. Le réglage est normalement effectué une seule fois lors de la mise en service initiale du procédé. Toutefois, si le procédé régulé devient ensuite instable (à cause d'un changement de ses caractéristiques), il est possible d'effectuer un nouveau réglage à tout moment. Il est préférable de commencer le réglage avec le procédé à température ambiante. Le régulateur peut ainsi effectuer les calculs de manière plus précise. 4.3.1 Temps de cycle des sorties Chauffage et Refroidissement Avant de commencer un cycle de réglage, définir les valeurs de CYC.H (temps de cycle de la sortie Chauffage) et CYC.C (temps de cycle de la sortie Refroidissement) dans la liste oP (sorties). Pour une sortie logique de chauffage (commutant un contacteur statique), positionner CYC.H sur 1.0 sec. Pour une sortie relais, positionner CYC.H sur 20.0 sec. Pour une sortie logique de refroidissement servant à réguler une électrovanne, positionner CYC.C sur 5.0 sec N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 37 4.3.2 Procédure de réglage • Régler la consigne sur la valeur à laquelle le procédé fonctionnera normalement. • Dans la liste ‘Atun’, sélectionner ‘tunE’ et le régler sur ‘on’ • Appuyer simultanément sur les touches Page et Défilement pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS. L'affichage fait clignoter ‘tunE’ pour indiquer que le réglage est en cours. • Le régulateur induit une oscillation de la température en activant puis en désactivant le chauffage. • Après deux cycles d'oscillation, le réglage est terminé et le régulateur s'arrête de lui-même. • Le régulateur calcule ensuite les paramètres de réglage et reprend son action normale de régulation. Si l'on souhaite une régulation ‘Proportionnelle uniquement’ ou ‘P+D’ ou ‘P+I’, il faut positionner les paramètres ‘ti’ ou ‘td’ sur OFF avant de commencer le cycle de réglage. Le régulateur les laissera sur la position off (désactivée) et ne calculera aucune valeur pour ces paramètres. 4.3.3 Cycle type de réglage automatique 4.3.4 Calcul des valeurs de cutback Lorsque le cutback bas ou haut est positionné sur ‘AuTo’, les valeurs sont fixées à trois fois la bande proportionnelle et ne seront pas modifiées au cours du réglage automatique. Si le cutback est positionné sur une autre valeur, il sera calculé comme faisant partie du réglage. Temps Température 38 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 4.4 Réglage Manuel Si, pour une raison quelconque, le réglage automatique ne donne pas des résultats satisfaisants, il est possible de régler manuellement le régulateur. Procéder de la manière suivante : Le procédé étant à sa température normale de fonctionnement : • Positionner le temps d'intégrale ‘ti’et le temps de dérivée ‘td’ sur OFF. • Positionner Cutback haut ‘Hcb’ et Cutback bas ‘Lcb’ sur ‘Auto’ • Ne pas tenir compte du fait que la température peut ne pas se stabiliser avec précision à la consigne • Réduire la bande proportionnelle ‘Pb’ jusqu'à ce que la température commence à osciller. Si la température oscille déjà, augmenter la bande proportionnelle jusqu'à ce qu'elle arrête d'osciller. Laisser suffisamment de temps entre chaque réglage pour que la température se stabilise. Noter la valeur de la bande proportionnelle ‘B’ et la période d'oscillation ‘T’. • Fixer les valeurs des paramètres PID selon la formule ci-dessous: Type de régulation ‘Pb’ ‘ti’ ‘td’ Proportionnelle uniquement 2xB OFF OFF P + I 2,2xB 0,8xT OFF P + I + D 1,7xB 0,5xT 0,12xT N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 39 4.4.1 Configuration des valeurs de cutback La procédure ci-dessus indique comment configurer les paramètres pour une régulation optimale en régime permanent. Si, au cours du démarrage ou des variations importantes de la température, on atteint des niveaux inacceptables de dépassement ou de mesures en-dessous de la consigne, il faut configurer manuellement les paramètres de cutback Lcb et Hcb. Procéder de la manière suivante : 1. Configurer les valeurs de cutback haut et bas au triple de la largeur de la bande proportionnelle (c'est-à-dire Lcb = Hcb = 3 x PB). 2. Noter le niveau de dépassement ou de mesure endessous de la consigne pour les changements importants de la température (cf. les courbes cidessous). Dans l'exemple (a), augmenter Lcb de la valeur du dépassement. Dans l'exemple (b), diminuer Lcb de la valeur des mesures en-dessous de la consigne. Exemple (a) Exemple (b) Lorsque la température se rapproche de la consigne par le haut, il est possible de configurer Hcb de la même manière. 4.4.2 Réinitialisation manuelle Lorsque ti = OFF réinitialisation manuelle (rES) apparaît dans PiD List. Ce paramètre règle la puissance de sortie lorsque le signal d'erreur est égal à zéro. Il est possible de le corriger manuellement afin d'éliminer l'erreur en régime permanent (fonction normalement exécutée par le terme intégral). Température Temps Dépassement Température Temps Mesures en-dessous de la consigne 40 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 5 Code de Commande Le régulateur est livré configuré selon le code de commande indiqué ci-dessous. Numéro du modèle Fonction Tension d’alimentation Manuel Sortie 1 (logique) Sortie 2 (relais) Fonction CC RégulateurPID NF Régulateur Tout ou rien TC Régulateur PID + timer TN Régulateur Tout ou rien + timer Tension d’alimetation VH 85-264Vac VL 20 -29Vdc ou ac Manuel XXX Pas de manuel ENG Anglais FRA Français GER Allemand NED Néerlandais SPA Espagnol SWE Suédois ITA Italien Sortie 2 (relais) XX Désactivé RH Chauffage RC Refroidissement FH Alarme haute 2 FL Alarme basse 2 AL Alarme haute 2 & alarme basse 3 DB Alarme de bande 2 DL Alarme 2 écart bas DH Alarme 2 écart haut NW Nouvelle alarme Sortie 1 (logique) XX Désactivé Sortie logique LH Chauffage LC Refroidissement M1 Mode PDSIO 1 FH Alarme haute 1 FL Alarme basse1 DB Alarme de bande 1 DL Alarme 1 écart bas DH Alarme 1 écart haut NW Nouvelle alarme Entrée logique AC Alarme acquit./réinit. KL Verrouillage clavier TM Timer Marche/Réinit. Numéro du modèle 2132 1/16 DIN 2116 1/8 DIN N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 41 Entrée capteur Consigne mini Consigne maxi Unités Module relais externe Adaptateur d'entrée Module relais externe XX Pas installé R7 Installé (actionné par la sortie logique) Unités C °C F ° F K Kelvin X Entrée linéaire Adaptateur d'entrée XX Néant V1 0-10 Vdc A1 Résistance 0- 20mA (2,49 Ω. 0,1 %) Entrée capteur Plage d'affichage et limites mini & maxi de consigne Thermocouples °C ° F J Type J -210 à 1200 -340 à 2192 K Type K -200 à 1372 -325 à 2500 T Type T -200 à 400 -325 à 750 L Type L -200 à 900 -325 à 1650 N Type N -200 à 1300 -325 à 2370 R Type R -50 à 1768 58 à 3200 S Type S -50 à 1768 -58 à 3200 B Type B 0 à 1820 32 à 3308 P Platinell II 0 à 1369 32 à 2496 Sonde Z Pt100 -200 à 850 -325 à 1562 Entrées personnalisées OC OF C Type C -W5%Re/W26%Re (capteur personnalisé par défaut) 0 à 2319 32 à 4200 D Type D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 à 2399 32 à 4350 E Thermocouple E -200 à 999 -325 à 1830 1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 à 1399 32 à 2550 2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 à 1870 32 à 3398 3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 à 2000 32 à 3632 4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 à 2010 32 à 3650 5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 à 2300 50 à 4172 6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 à 2000 32 à 3632 7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 à 1800 392 à 3272 8 Pyromètre Exegen K80 I.R. -45 à 650 -49 à 1202 Entrées de procédé (linéaires) M -9,99 mV à +80mV Y 0 à 20mA A 4 à 20mA V 0 à 10Vdc (adaptateur d'entrée nécessaire) 42 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 5.1 Specification Technique Etanchéité de la face avant IP65 (EN 60529), ou 4X (NEMA 250) Conditions ambiantes de fonctionnement 0 à 55oC. Vérifier que l'armoire est correctement ventilée. Humidité relative 5 à 95%, sans condensation Température de stockage -30oC à +75oC. (Protéger contre l'humidité et la poussière) Atmosphère L'appareil ne doit être utilisé ni à une altitude supérieure à 2000 m ni en atmosphère explosive ou corrosive Alimentation Unité haute tension : 100 à 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, puissance consommée 5 Watts maximum Unité basse tension : 24Vdc/ac +/- 20%. DC à 62Hz, puissance consommée 5 Watts maximum Relais (isolé) Maximum: 264Vac, charge résistive 2A. Minimum: 12Vdc, 100mA Longévité mécanique > 107 opérations. Longévité électrique sous une charge résistive de 1 A, 240 vac > 5 x106 opérations Sections des fils Utiliser un fil de section minimale de 0,5mm2 (16awg) pour les branchements de l'installation. Protection contre Utiliser des fusibles indépendants 2A pour l'alimentation de l'indicateur et les sorties N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 43 les surintensités relais. Les fusibles à utiliser sont de type EN60127 (type T) Entrées/sorties logiques 9V à 12mA, pas isolées de l'entrée capteur Sécurité électrique EN 61010 (Les surtensions transitoires ne doivent pas dépasser 2,5 kV). Degré de pollution 2. Isolation: L'ensemble des entrées et sorties isolées ont une isolation renforcée qui assure une protection contre l'électrocution (cf. la remarque sur les capteurs sous tension). Compensation de soudure froide Taux de réjection 30:1 pour une variation de température ambiante en mode automatique. Utilisation d'un procédé de mesure ultra-précis INSTANT ACCURACY TM qui vise à éliminer les dérives en température lors de la mise en chauffe et à répondre très rapidement à toute variation de température ambiante. Catégorie d'installation Catégorie II ou CAT II 44 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 6 Sécurité compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) Ce régulateur a été fabriqué au Royaume-Uni par Eurotherm Ltd. Veuillez lire attentivement ce paragraphe avant d'installer le régulateur Ce régulateur est conçu pour les applications industrielles de régulation de procédés et de température. Il satisfait aux exigences des directives européennes en matière de sécurité et de compatibilité électromagnétique. Son utilisation dans le cadre d'autres applications ou le non-respect des consignes d'installation contenues dans ce manuel pourrait affecter la sécurité ou la compatibilité électromagnétique de cet instrument. Il incombe à l'installateur de veiller à la sécurité et à la compatibilité électromagnétique de chaque installation. 1.1 GENERALITES Les informations contenues dans ce manuel sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. Bien que tous les efforts aient été consentis pour assurer l'exactitude des informations, votre fournisseur décline toute responsabilité pour les erreurs contenues dans ce manuel 6.1.1 Sécurité Ce régulateur est conforme à la directive européenne sur les basses tensions 73/23/EEC et à la norme de sécurité EN 61010. 6.1.2 Compatibilité électromagnétique Ce régulateur est conforme aux exigences de protection essentielles de la directive EMC 89/336/EEC, sur la base d'un dossier technique de construction. Cet instrument satisfait aux exigences générales en matière de milieu industriel définies par la norme EN 61326. Pour de plus amples informations sur la conformité de ce produit, veuillez consulter le dossier de construction technique. N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 45 6.1.3 Conditionnement et stockage L'emballage contient un instrument monté sur son manchon, deux clips de fixation pour l'installation sur panneau ainsi qu'un guide d'installation et d'utilisation. Certaines gammes sont fournies avec un adaptateur d'entrée. Si l'emballage ou l'instrument est endommagé à la livraison, n'installez pas le produit et contactez votre fournisseur. Si l'instrument doit être stocké avant utilisation, protégez-le contre l'humidité et la poussière à une température ambiante comprise entre -10oC et +70oC. 1.2 Entretien et réparation Ce régulateur ne contient aucune pièce réparable par l'utilisateur. Contactez votre fournisseur pour les réparations. 6.1.4 Attention : Condensateurs chargés Avant de retirer un instrument de son manchon, débranchez l'alimentation et attendez au moins deux minutes pour permettre aux condensateurs de se décharger. Il peut s'avérer plus pratique de retirer partiellement l'instrument de son manchon et de marquer ensuite une pause avant de le sortir complètement. Dans tous les cas, évitez de toucher aux composants électroniques de l'instrument lors de son retrait du manchon. Le non-respect de ces consignes pourra endommager les composants de l'instrument et exposer l'utilisateur à des risques. 6.1.5 Précautions en matière de décharges électrostatiques Une fois le régulateur retiré de son manchon, certains de ses composants électroniques exposés pourront être endommagés par les décharges électrostatiques accumulées dans le corps. Pour prévenir tout risque, déchargez-vous de cette énergie en touchant régulièrement un objet métallique relié à la terre, avant de manipuler le régulateur débranché. 6.1.6 Nettoyage N'utilisez pas d'eau ni de produits à base d'eau pour nettoyer les étiquettes car elles deviendraient alors illisibles. Utilisez de l'alcool isopropylique pour le nettoyage des étiquettes. Utilisez une solution savonneuse douce pour nettoyer les autres surfaces extérieures du produit. 46 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 1.3 Consignes de sécurité lors de l'installation 6.1.7 Symboles de sécurité Cet instrument utilise divers symboles ayant les significations suivantes : ! Attention (renvoie aux documents d'accompagnement) 6.1.8 Personnel L'installation doit être uniquement confiée à du personnel adéquatement qualifié. 6.1.9 Protection des composants sous tension Afin d'éviter que les mains ou les outils en métal n'entrent au contact de composants sous tension, le régulateur devra être installé dans une armoire. 6.1.10 Attention : Capteurs sous tension Ce régulateur est conçu pour fonctionner avec le capteur de température directement relié à un élément de chauffage électrique. Veillez à ce que le personnel d'entretien ne touche pas ces connexions lorsqu'elles sont sous tension. Tous les câbles, connecteurs et commutateurs de connexion d'un capteur sous tension devront être dimensionnés pour la tension du secteur. L’E/S logique n’est pas isolée des entrées PV, et tous les câbles, connecteurs et interrupteurs de connexion du capteur doivent être dimensionnés pour la tension du secteur. 6.1.11 Raccordement Il est important de connecter le régulateur conformément aux informations de câblage figurant dans ce guide. Veillez tout particulièrement à ne pas connecter les alimentations alternatives à l'entrée basse tension du capteur ou à d'autres entrées et sorties de bas niveau. Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre pour les connexions (à l'exception des entrées de thermocouple) et assurez-vous que le câblage des installations est conforme à toutes les réglementations N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 47 locales en vigueur. Au Royaume-Uni, utilisez la version la plus récente des réglementations de câblage IEE (BS7671). Aux Etats-Unis, utilisez les méthodes de câblage NEC Classe 1. 6.1.12 Isolation de l'alimentation L'installation doit être équipée d'un sectionneur ou d'un disjoncteur. Ce dispositif devra être monté à proximité immédiate du régulateur, être facilement accessible pour l'opérateur et être clairement désigné comme appareil de coupure et de déconnexion de l'instrument. 6.1.13 Protection de surintensité L'alimentation du système doit être dotée de fusibles de capacité suffisante pour protéger le câblage des unités. 6.1.14 Tension nominale La tension maximale permanente appliquée entre les bornes suivantes ne doit pas dépasser 264 Vac: • sortie de relais à connexions logiques dc ou de capteur ; • toute connexion à la terre. Le régulateur ne doit pas être relié à une alimentation triphasée par une connexion en étoile non mise à la terre. En cas de défaillance, une telle alimentation pourrait excéder 264 Vac par rapport à la terre et le produit présenterait alors des dangers. 6.1.15 Pollution conductrice L'armoire dans laquelle le régulateur est monté doit être exempte de toute pollution électriquement conductrice. La poussière de carbone est une forme de pollution électriquement conductrice. Pour assurer une atmosphère convenable, installez un filtre à air sur l'entrée d'air de l'armoire. Si des risques de condensation sont probables, par exemple à des températures basses, montez un chauffage à commande thermostatique dans l'armoire. Ce produit a été conçu pour satisfaire aux exigences de la norme BSEN61010, catégorie d'installation II, degré de pollution 2, telles qu'elles sont définies ci-après : 48 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 6.1.16 Catégorie d'installation II La tension de choc nominale pour un équipement ayant une alimentation de 230 V nominale est de 2500 V. 6.1.16.1 Degré de pollution 2 Dans des conditions d'utilisation normales, seule une pollution non conductrice peut se produire. Une conductivité temporaire due à la condensation pourra cependant se produire dans certaines circonstances. 6.1.17 Mise à la terre du blindage du capteur de température Certaines installations prévoient généralement le remplacement du capteur de température, alors que le régulateur est toujours sous tension. Dans ces circonstances et afin de renforcer la protection contre les chocs électriques, il est recommandé de mettre le blindage du capteur de température à la terre. La mise à la terre du châssis de la machine n'est pas suffisante. 6.1.18 Protection contre les températures excessives Lors de la conception de tout système de commande, il est essentiel d'examiner les conséquences d'une défaillance de chaque composant du système. Dans les applications de régulation de la température, le principal danger vient d'un chauffage qui resterait constamment activé. Outre les dommages subis par le produit, une telle défaillance pourrait endommager les machines contrôlées ou même provoquer un incendie. Le chauffage pourra rester constamment activé pour plusieurs raisons : • Le capteur de température s'est détaché ; • Il y a un court-circuit dans le câblage du thermocouple ; • Il y a une défaillance du régulateur alors que la sortie de chauffage est constamment activée ; • Une vanne ou un contacteur externe est bloqué en position de chauffage ; • Le point de consigne du régulateur est trop élevé. Pour prévenir les risques de dommages ou d'accidents, il est recommandé d'installer une unité séparée de protection contre les températures excessives, munie N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 49 d'un capteur de température indépendant qui isolera le circuit de chauffage. Attention : Les relais d'alarme du régulateur n'assurent pas une protection totale pour toutes les conditions de panne. 1.4 Exigences d'installation en matière de compatibilité électromagnétique Afin d'assurer la conformité à la directive EMC européenne, les précautions d'installation suivantes devront être prises : • Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez-vous reporter au guide d'installation CEM, HA025464FRA. • Lors de l'utilisation des sorties de relais, il pourra s'avérer nécessaire de monter un filtre afin de supprimer les émissions conduites. Les caractéristiques du filtre dépendront du type de charge. Pour les applications typiques, l'utilisation du modèle Schaffner FN321 ou FN612 est préconisée. • Si l'unité doit être utilisée avec un matériel sur table, branché sur une prise d'alimentation standard, la conformité aux normes d'émissions commerciales et de l'industrie légère devra être observée. Dans un tel cas et afin de satisfaire aux exigences en matière d'émissions conduites, un filtre secteur adéquat devra être installé. Nous recommandons des filtres Schaffner de type FN321 et FN612. 6.1.19 Cheminement des câbles Pour réduire les bruits électriques, les connexions dc basse tension et le câblage d'entrée du capteur devront être acheminés à l'écart des câbles d'alimentation haute tension. Si cela est impossible, utilisez des câbles blindés en prenant soin de relier le câblage à la terre aux deux extrémités. Il est préférable de réduire au minimum la longueur des câbles. Lorsque le signal est une tension dangereuse * (ou pourrait le devenir sous des conditions anormales de fonctionnement), une double isolation est nécessaire. * Une définition plus complète de ‘tensions dangereuse’ est donnée dans le paragraphe ‘Tension dangereuse’ dans la BS EN61010. En résumé, dans des conditions normales de fonctionnement des niveaux de tension dangereuse sont définis comme étant >30V RMS (42,2 V crête) ou >60Vdc. 50 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 7 RoHS Product group 2100 Table listing restricted substances Chinese 产 2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚 线组X O X O O O 属O O O O O O 显X O O O O O 块X O X O O O O X English Product 2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE PCBA X O X O O O Enclosure O O O O O O Display X O O O O O Modules X O X O O O O X Approval Name: Position: Signature: Date: Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 Toxic and hazardous substances and elements Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. Restricted Materials Table Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) 览 质 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 2116/2132 PID Temperature oder Ein/Aus Regler GER Bedienungsanleitung HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 1 PID Temperatur- oder EIN/AUS- Regler Typ 2132 und 2116 Die Reglermodelle 2132 und 2116 sind kompakte PID-Temperatur oder EIN/AUS-Regler im Format 48x24 (2132) bzw. 48x48 (2116) mit Selbstoptimierung. Den Eingang können Sie für Widerstandsthermometer, Thermoelement oder als Lineareingang konfigurieren. Die Regler bieten Ihnen Relais- und einen Logikausgang zur Ansteuerung eines Solid-State-Relais. Beide Ausgänge können Sie für Heizen. Kühlen oder Alarm konfigurieren. Das Gerät wird im Werk nach Ihrer Bestellung konfiguriert. Bitte überprüfen Sie mit Hilfe des Geräteaufklebers auf der Regler-seite, ob die Konfiguration Ihren Anwendungen entspricht. Die Regler entsprechen den Anforderungen an Sicherheit und elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit. 1. Abmessungen und Installation Abmessungen 2132 Abmessungen 2116 48mm 45mm -0.0, + 0.6 48mm Schalttafel- 24mm ausschnitt 103mm 45mm -0.0, +0.6 Außenklammern Haltelammen 22mm -0.0, +0.3 Schalttafelausschnitt 103mm 48mm 45mm -0.0, +0.6 2 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 1.1 Installation Lesen Sie bitte zuerst die Sicherheitsinformationen auf den Seiten 15. Bauen Sie das Gerät nach den folgenden Angaben ein: 1. Bereiten Sie den Ausschnitt nach den angegebenen Maßen vor. 2. Stecken Sie das Gerät in den Ausschnitt (ohne Halteklammern). 3. Bringen Sie die Halteklammern an ihren Platz. Zum Sichern des Reglers halten Sie das Gerät in Position und schieben Sie beide Klammern gegen den Schalttafelausschnitt . 4. Entfernen Sie die Schutzfolie vom Display. Anmerkung : Die Halteklammern können Sie einfach mit den Fingern oder einem Schraubendreher entfernen. 1.2 Gerätewechsel Durch Auseinanderziehen der Außenklammern und nach vorne ziehen des Reglers können Sie das Gerät aus dem Gehäuse entnehmen. Wenn Sie das Gerät zurück in das Gehäuse stecken, versichern Sie sich, daß die Außenklammern einrasten. Ansonsten kann die Schutzart IP65 nicht garantiert werden. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 3 2. Elektrische Installation 3.22.1 Kabelgrößen Verwenden Sie Kabel mit Querschnitten zwischen 0,5 und 1,5 mm2. Die Klemmen sind durch eine Kunststoffabdeckung gesichert. Halten Sie bei den rückseitigen Klemmen einen Drehmoment von 0,4Nm ein. Ausgänge Logik: 9Vdc, 12mA (nicht isoliert). Anwendung Heizen, Kühlen oder Alarm. Relais: 2A, 264V ac ohm’sch. Anwendung Heizen, Kühlen oder Alarm. Schließkontakteingang (an Stelle des Logikausgangs). Anwendung: Alarmquitterung oder Timersart/-stop. Anschlüsse 2116 + - Phase Null Alarm 2 Relaisausgang T/C Pt100 mA Eingang L N A AB V+ V- 1A 1B 2.49Ω 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 1B 1A Pt100 T/C Relais Null Phase Logikein/-ausgang Anschlüsse 2132 Alarm 1 externes Relais oder Alarmquittierung/Rücksetzen 2.49Ω Eingang V- V+ AB A N L - + mA 85-264Vac 50/60Hz 24 24 20-29 Vac/dc 20-29 Vac/dc 24 24 - + Logikein/-ausgang oder Alarm 1 externes Relais Alarmquittierung/ Rücksetzen + - 4 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 2.2 Beispiel Anschlussdiagramm Sicherheitsanforderungen für permanent angeschlossene Anlagenbauteile: • Die Schaltschrankinstallation muss einen Schalter oder Unterbrechungskontakt beinhalten. • Dieses Bauteil sollte in der Nähe der Anlage und in direkter Reichweite des Bedieners sein. • Kennzeichnen Sie dieses Bauteil als trennende Einheit. Anmerkung: Sie können einen Schalter oder Trennkontakt für mehrere Geräte verwenden. * Schalten Sie induktive Lasten (Schütze), verbinden Sie die Klemmen AA und AB mit einem 22nF/100Ω RCGlied. Dieser erhöht die Lebensdauer des Kontaktes und unterdrückt Störspitzen bei schalten den Induktivitäten. ! WARNUNG Bei geöffnetem Relaiskontakt fließen über den RC-Kreis 0,6mA bei 110Vac und 1,2mA bei 240Vac. Achten Sie darauf, daß durch diesen Strom keine niedrigen Lasten angezogen werden. Relaisausgang Sicherung 2A typ T N Regler Sicherung 2A typ T Heiz-element Sicherung Heizelement T/C Solid State Relais (e.g. TE10) RC-Glied * L + - Model 2132 V+ A 1B V- 1A A L N Küh-Relais HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 5 3. Anzeige und Tastenfunktionen Nachdem Sie den Regler eingeschaltet haben, durchläuft dieser für ca. 3. Sekunden einen Selbsttest, bei dem die Softwareversion angezeigt wird. Danach zeigt das Gerät die Hauptanzeige. Haben Sie einen der Ausgänge als Alarm konfiguriert, wechselt die Alarmmeldung mit dem Prozeßwert, wenn ein neuer, noch nicht bestätigter Alarm ansteht. Steht die Alarmbedingung nach der Bestätigung noch an, erlischt die Alarmmeldung. Der Alarmkontakt bleibt geschaltet. 3.1 Erklärung der Anzeige und der Tastenfunktionen Taste/ Anzeige Name Erklärung Bild Taste Auswahl eines anderen Parametermenüs Parameter Taste Auswahl eines Parameters innerhalb eines Menüs Mehr Taste Ein Parameterwert kann vergroßert werden. Weniger Taste Ein Parameterwert kann verkleinert werden. OP1 Ausgang 1 Zeigt an, wenn der Logikausgang aktiv ist. OP2 Ausgang 2 Zeigt an, wenn der Relaisausgang aktiv ist MAN Handbetrieb Zeigt an, wenn sich der Regler im Handbetrieb befindet. 20 Ausgang 1 Ausgang 2 Prozeßwert ‘PV’) OP1 OP2 6 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Beispiel der Tastenfunktionen: EIN/AUS Regler für Heizen/Kühlen Anmerkung: In diesem Beispiel sind nur die Parameter gezeigt, die nach der entsprechenden Konfiguration tatsächlich im Regler vorhanden sind. Die Erklärung der einzelnen Parameter sowie ein vollständiges Parameterdiagramm finden Sie in Kapitel 6. FiLt CJC mV OFS CAL.P CAL Pnt.L OFS.L Pnt.H OFS.H 20.0 AL SP iP oP On.Of ACCS X2 & & & & & & oC OP w.SP3 m-A disp 1---(1) 2---(1) 3---(1) HY Lbt spL SPH SPrr (2) CYC.H CYC.C Ont.H Ont.C (2) HYS.H HYS.C HC.db codE Goto Conf (2) Abhängig von der eingestellten Regelart wird entweder das PID- oder das EIN/AUS- Menü angezeit (1) Die letzten 3 Ziffern bezeichnen den Alarmtyp HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 7 4. Zugriffsebenen Der Regler bietet Ihnen zwei Bedien-, eine Editier- und eine Konfigurationsebene. Nach dem Selbsttest arbeitet der Regler automatisch in der Bedienebene. Der nachstehenden Tabelle können Sie die Möglichkeiten, die Sie in den einzelnen Ebenen haben, entnehmen. Zugriffsebenen Anzeige Möglichkeiten Paßwortschutz Bedienebene Oper In dieser Ebene können Sie die freigegebenen Parameter auslesen bzw. ändern. Die Freigabe erfolgt in der Edit- Ebene. (Kapitel 5) Nein Full-Ebene Ful Alle im Regler vorhandenen Parameter können von Ihnen ausgelesen und geändert werden. (Kapitel 6) Ja Edit-Ebene Edit In dieser Ebene können Sie den Bedienerzugriff auf Parameter und Menüs festelgen. (Kapitel 7) Wählen Sie zwischen: - Änderbar (ALtr) - Nur lesbar (read) - Versteckt (Hide) oder - Promote (Pro) (Laden des Parameters in die Bedienebene, siehe Abschnitt 7.3) Ja Konfigurationsebene Conf Diese spezielle Ebene erlaubt es Ihnen, die grundlegende Charakteristik des Reglers zu ändern. (Kapitel 8) Ja Bedienbene Oper Ful Edit Conf Bedien-und Editereben, erreichbar über Accs Code, paßwortgeschützt. Konfigurationsebene erreichbar über Accs Code, paßwortgeschützt. 8 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 4.1 Auswahl einer Zugriffsebene Zugriffs-Menü Drücken Sie die -Taste, bis Sie in das Zugriffs-Menü (accs) gelangen. Mit der -Taste kommen Sie in die code Anzeige. Paßwort Drücken Sie einmal oder , um zur Paßworteingabe zu gelangen. Pass zeigt an, daß kein Paßwort für den weiteren Zugriff benötigt wird. ‘0’ zeigt an, daß Sie sich in der Bedienebene befinden und ein Paßwort erwartet wird. Mit Hilfe der und der Taste können Sie das Paßwort eingeben. 2s nach Eingabeende zeigt die Anzeige PASS und springt in die Code Anzeige zurück. Mit oder , können Sie testen, ob Sie das richtige Paßwort eingegeben haben. Wird nicht Pass angezeigt, müssen Sie das Paßwort erneut eingeben. Anmerkung: Das Paßwort für die Parameterebenen wird vom Werk auf ‘1’ eingestellt. Die Freigabe der Ebenen bleibt solange bestehen, bis Sie entweder den Regler neu starten oder erneut im Zugriffs-Menü ein anderes falsches) Paßwort eingeben. Wie Sie das Paßwort ändern können, erfahren Sie in Kapitel 8, ‘Konfiguration’. Wählen Sie ‘0’ als Paßwort, sind die unteren Ebenen nicht gesperrt. Mit Hilfe der -Taste kommen Sie in die GOTO Anzeige (Siehe nächste Seite). Accs code 1 pass oder HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 9 Zurück zur Bedienebene Nachdem Sie die Arbeit in einer der unteren Ebenen beendet haben, sollten Sie zurück in die Bedienebene (oper) gehen. Aus der ful- oder der Edit-Ebene kommen Sie in die Bedienebene zurück, indem Sie im Zugriffs-Menü wie vorne beschrieben ein “falsches” Paßwort eingeben. Wählen Sie nur oper, ohne das Paßwort zu ändern, bleibt der Zugriff auf die weiteren Ebenen frei. Aus der Edit-Ebene geht der Regler nach 45s ohne Tastendruck in die Bedienebene zurück Ebenenauswahl Wähleischen Sie den mit folgenden Ebenen: Oper; Bedienebene edit: Edit-Ebene Ful: Full-Ebene conf: Konfigurationsebene 2s nach Eingabeende springt die Anzeige in die goto Anzeige zurück Zugriffs-Menü Haben Sie oper, ful oder edit gewählt, befinden Sie sich nun in der gewählten Ebene. Mit den Tasten und können Sie die gewünschten Parameter erreichen. Paßwort Haben Sie conf gewählt, müssen Sie an dieser Stelle erneut ein Paßwort eingeben. Führen Sie dafür die oben beschriebenen Schritte durch. Anmerkung: Das Paßwort für die Konfigurationsebene ist werksseitig auf ‘2’ gesetzt. Wie Sie das Paßwort ändern können, erfahren Sie in Kapitel 8, ‘Konfiguration’. Konfigurationsebene Die erste Anzeige der Konfigurationsebene erscheint. Informationen über die einzelnen Parameter bekommen Sie in Kapitel 8 ‘Konfiguration’. Dort wird auch beschrieben, wie Sie die Konfigurationsebene wieder verlassen können. goto Oper Ful edit conf pass goto Conf accs 2 inst bzw. 10 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 5. Bedienung 5.1 Oper-Ebene Die Oper-Ebene enthält nur die für die Bedienung wichtigen Parameter. Möchtien Sie Parameter freigeben oder sperren oder nur den Schreibzugriff verweigern, müssen Sie diese Einstellungen in der Edit-Ebene vornehmen (Kapital 7). 5.2 Einstellen des Sollwertes Damit der Sollwert angzeigt wird, drücken Sie kurz auf die Taste oder . Der Sollwert wird für 2 Sekunden angezeigt. Den Sollwert ändern können Sie auch durch Drücken von oder . 5.3 Anzeigeeinheiten Möchten Sie die anzeigeeinheiten sehen, drücken Sie kurz die Taste oder . Die Einheit wird für 0,5 Sekunden angezeigt. Anmerkung: Durch gleichzeitiges Drücken der Tasten und kommen Sie jederzeit in die Hauptanzeige zurück. Außerdem erscheint die Hauptanzeige, wenn für 45s keine Taste betätigt wird. OC 200.0 􀀪 􀀪 Dr ücken einer der beiden Tasten Anzeigeeinheiten *C Grad Cenlsius *F Grad Fahrenheit *K Grad Kelvin Keine Anzeige - Linear 0,5s Sollwert 220.0 200.0 􀀪 􀀪 Istwert Drücken, um den Sollwert zu ändern 2s HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 11 5.4 Ausgangsleistung Um die Ausgangsleistung ansehen zu können, müssen Sie zweimal hintereinander die Taste drücken. Es erscheint der Parameter OP. Drücken Sie oder , wird der Wert der Ausgangsleistung angezeigt. Diesen Wert können Sie nicht ändern. Achtung: Im manuellen Standby-Modus (siehe auch “Verwendung des Timers”) können Sie die Ausgangsleistung auf einen Wert einstellen, das heißt, der Heiz-oder Kühlausgang ist permanent aktiviert. Damit der Wert für die Ausgangsleistung nicht ungewollt verstellt wird, können Sie den Parameter OP in der Edit-Ebene auf “read only” setzen (siehe auch “Parameterzugriff ändern”). 20.0 Kurz drücken OP 100.0 *C Der Regler hat einen100% Heizausgang Drücken Sie oder um den Wert zu sehen. 12 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 5.5 Auswahl eines Parameters Die Einstellung der Parameter bestimmt die Arbeitsweise Ihres Reglers. Damit Sie einfach auf Parameter zugreifen können, sind diese in verschiedene Menüs eingeteilt. Mit der Taste können Sie nacheinander alle Menüüberschriften aufrufen. Auf Kapitel 6 finden Sie alle vorhandenen Listen aufgeführt. Einen Parameter innerhalb der Liste können Sie mit aufrufen. In der Anzeige erscheint der Parametername. Den Wert des Parameters rufen Sie mit oder auf. Mit diesen Tasten können Sie den Parameterwert (wenn in der Edit-Ebene freigegben, sonst in die Full-Ebene wechseln) auch ändern. Ca. 2s nach der Änderung blinkt der Parameter kurz auf und der Regler übernimmt den neuen Wert. Den nächsten Parameter in der Liste erreichen Sie wieder durch Drücken von . Die Parameter der Liste werden der Reihenfoge nach aufgerufen. Nach dem letzten Parameter der Liste erscheint wieder die Menüüberschrift. Mit den Parametern in den einzelnen Listen können Sie: • die Alarmsollwerte einstellen • den Regler optimieren • die PID Werte manuell einstellen • die sollwertgrenzen ändern und auf den Timer zugreifen • die Eingangs- und Ausgangsgrenzen ändern Drücken Sie die Taste weiter, werden nacheinander alle Menüüberschriften angezeigt. Nach der letzten Überschrift kommen Sie zurück zur Hauptanzeige. 20.0 aL Atun X2 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 13 5.6 Ändern der Alarmsollwerte Im erstem Menü (AL) können Sie die Alarmsollwerte einstellen. Die Alarme finden Sie in Kapital 9 beschrieben. Ein nicht konfigurierter Alarm erscheint nicht in dem Menü. Anmerkung: Sie können auf alle Parameter in den einzelnen Menüs mit dem hier beschriebenen Vorgehen zugreifen 4. 0.5 s *C 200.0 Nächst liste Drücken Sie oder wird List angezeight LiSt AL 0 1--- -FSL = Minimalalarm -FSH = Maximalalarm -dEV = Abweichungsbandalarm -dHi = Abweichungsalarm Übersollwert -dLo = Abweichungsalarm Untersollwert - = Alarmnummer 0 2--- 0 3--- Weiteres Drücken der Taste zeigt alle Menüs. Am Ende springt der Anzeiger in die Hauptanzeiger zurück. Alarm 1 * Alarm 2 * Alarm 3 * * Mit oder sollwert ändern. 14 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 6. Parameterübersicht In der Full-Ebene sehen Sie alle in Ihrem Regler vorhandenen Bedienparameter. Diese können Sie wie unter 4.1 beschrieben, aufrufen und/oder ändern. Die Einstellungen der Edit-Ebene haben hier keine Bedeutung. Deshalb ist die Full -Ebene durch ein Paßwort (1) geschützt. In der folgenden Übersicht sind alle möglichen Parameter dargestellt. Die Anzahl und die Reihenfolge der Parameter, die in Ihrem Gerät erscheinen, ist abhängig von der Konfiguration. Den Zugriff auf Parameter sperren oder freigeben können Sie in der Edit-Ebene, Kapital 7. Die grau hinterlegten Felder bezeichnen die Parameter und Menüs, die in der Oper-Ebene standardmäßig nicht sichtbar sind. 3. W.sP erscheint nur, wenn die Sollwertrampe aktiv ist. Hauptanzeige Alarm Menü Selbstoptimierungs Menü PID(2) Menü Sollwert Menü Eingangs Menü Ausgangs Menü EIN/AUS(2) Menü Zugriffs Menü 20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS X2 oC OP w.SP3 m-A disp 1---(1) 2---(1) 3---(1) HY Lbt Tune adc Pb Ti Td Res Lcb Hcb reL.C spL SPH SPrr Tm.Op Tmr Dwel stat fiLt CJCo MV OFS CAL.P CAL Pnt.L OFS.L Pnt.H OFS.H OP.Lo OP.Hi CYC.H CYC.C ont.H ont.C HYS.H HYS.C HC.db code Goto Conf (2) Abhängig von der eingestellten Regelart wird entweder das PID- oder das EIN/AUS- Menü angezeit (1) Die letzten 3 Ziffern bezeichnen den Alarmtyp. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 15 6.1 Parameterlisten Hauptmenü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung Op Ausgangsleistung -100% bis 0.0% = Kühlen; 0.0% bis 100.0% = Heizen. w.SP Arbeitssollwert Erscheint, wenn Sollwertrampe aktiviert ist. Nur-Lessen Nur-Lessen m-A Automatik-Hand Auto Automatikbetrieb gewählt Umschaltung mAn Handbetrieb gewählt Auto Std Standard – zeight den Istwert und nach Drücken der Mehr- /Weniger-Taste den sollwert OP Zeigt die Ausgangleistung an – für die Benutzung als Handstation NonE Keine Anzeige, nur Alarme erscheinen blinkend PV Zeigt nur den Istwert AL.SP Zeigt nur den Alarm 2 Sollwert disp Hauptanzeige- Optionen pv.aL Zeigt Istwert und Alarm 2 Sollwert nach Drücken der Mehr- /Weniger-Taste Std Plus zusätzliche Promote-Parameter (Abschnitt 7.3) 16 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 AL Alarm-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung 1--- Sollwert für Alarm 1 0 2--- Sollwert für Alarm 2 0 3--- Sollwert für Alarm 3 0 Es erscheinen nur die konfigurieten Alarme. Die letzten 3 Ziffern zeigen den Alarmtyp. Die Werte sind innerhalb der Sollwertgrenzen einstellbar. -FSL Vollbereichsminimalalarm -FSH Vollbereichsmaximalalarm -dEv Regelabweichungsbandalarm -dLo Regelabweichungsalarm Untersollwert -dHi Regelabweichungsalarm Übersollwert HY Alarmhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten. Dieser Wert bezieht sich auf alle Alarme. Die Hysterese verhindert ein ‘Springen’ des Alarms, wenn der Wert um den Alarmwert schwankt. 1 Lb t Regelkreis-überwachungszeit OFF bis 9999 Minuten OFF HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 17 Atun Selbstoptimierungs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung tunE Selbstoptimierung OFF oder on Off Adc Automatische Arbeitspunktorrektur (bei PD Regelung) mAn oder caLc mAn PiD PID-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung Pb Proportionalband 1 bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten 20 ti Nachstellzeit OFF bis 9999 Sekunden 360 td Vorhaltzeit OFF bis 9999 Sekunden 60 rES Maueller Reset Nur, wenn ti = OFF; -100 bis 100.0% 0.0 Lcb Cutback Low Auto bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten Auto Hcb Cutback High Auto bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten Auto rEL.C Relative Kühlverstärkung 0.01 bis 10.00 1.00 18 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 SP Sollwert-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung SP L Sollwert, untere Grenze -1999 bis 999.9, je nach Meßbereich It. Bestellg. SP H Sollwert, obere Grenze -1999 bis 999.9, je nach Meßbereich It. Bestellg. sprr Sollwertrampe 0FF bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten pro Minute Off tm.OP Timer Betriebsart Opt.1 bis Opt.5 OPt.1 tmr Verbleibende Timerzeit 0 bis 9999 minuten 0 dwEl Haltzeit 0FF bis 9999 minuten OFF StAt Timer Status OFF oder on Ab Softwareversion 1.43 OFF HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 19 iP Eingangs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung FiLt Zeitkonstante des Eingangsfilters 0FF bis 999.9 Sekunden 1.6 CJC* Vergleichsstellentemperatur an den Klemmen Nur Lesen mV Millivolt-Eingang, gemessen an den Klemmen Nur Lesen OFS Istwert Offset -1999 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 0 CAL.P Anpassung Paßwort 0 bis 9999 3 Die folgenden Parameter erscheinen nur, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort für die Anpassung eingegeben haben. FACt Stellt die Werkseinstellung wieder her CAL Anpassungsart FACt USEr Benutzerdefinierte Anpassung Pnt.L Unterer Anpassungspunkt 0 OFS.L Offset am unteren Punkt 0 Pnt.H Oberer Anpassungspunkt 100 OFS.H Offset am oberen Punkt -1999 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 0 20 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 oP Ausgangsleistungs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung OP.Lo Ausgangsleistungs untere Grenze -100 bis 100.0% 0 OP.Hi Ausgangsleistungs obere Grenze -100 bis 100.0% 100.0 CYC.H Zykluszeit Heizen 0.2 bis 999.9 Sekunden 1.0 Lgk 20 Rls CYC.C Zykluszeit Kühlen 0.2 bis 999.9 Sekunden 5.0 Lgk 20 Rls ont.H min. EIN-Zeit für Heizausgang Auto bis 999.9 Sekunden (Auto = 50ms) Auto ont.C min. EIN-Zeit für Kühlausgang Auto bis 999.9 Sekunden (Auto = 50ms) auto onOF EIN/AUS-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung hYS.H Heizhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 1 hYS.C Kühlhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 1 HC.db Todband Heizen/Kühlen 0 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 0 ACCS Zugriffs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung codE Zugriffs-Paßwort 0 bis 9999 1 Goto Auswahl der Parameterebene Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr Conf Konfigurations-Paßwort 0 bis 9999 2 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 21 7. Edit-Ebene In der Edit-Ebene können Sie die Menüs der Bedienebene (Oper) gestalten. Sie haben die Möglichkeit, Parameter für den normalen Bediener in der Oper-Ebene auszublenden oder mit einem Schreibschutz zu versehen. Mit der Promote-Funktion können Sie Parameter in das Hauptmenü kopieren und so eine benutzerspezifische Parameterliste erstellen. Dies gilt nur für Parameter, die standardmäßig nicht in der Hauptanzeige vorhanden sind. In der Edit-Ebene sehen Sie nicht die Parameterwerte, sondern die Zugriffsmöglichkeit auf den Parameter. 7.1 Ändern des Parameterzugriffs Sie haben vier Möglichkeiten für den Zugriff auf einen Parameter oder ein Menü: • ALtr Parameterwert läßt sich in der Bedienebene ändern. • read Parameter oder Menü kann in der Bedienebene nur gelesen werden. • Hide Parameter oder Menü erscheinen nicht in der Bedienebene. • Pro Kopiert einen Parameter in die Hauptanzeige (s. Abschnitt 7.3). Gehen Sie bei der Zugriffsauswahl wie folgt vor: - Wahlen Sie wie zuvor beschrieben die Edit-Ebene. - Suchen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten und den gewünschten Parameter oder das gewünschte Menü. - Mit den Tasten und können Sie den Parameterzugriff ändern. Beispeil: Haben Sie z. B. Alarm 2 (2FSH) gewählt, erscheint nach Drücken der Taste oder der Zugriffsmodus des Parameters. Mit den gleichen Tasten können Sie einen neuen Zugriffsmodus auswählen. 22 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 7.2 Ausblenden eines Menüs Bei der Zugriffsänderung auf ein ganzes Menü haben Sie nur die Auswahl zwischen read und Hide. Blenden Sie ein ganzes Menü aus, werden alle zugehörigen Parameter ausgeblendet. Das Zugriffs- Menü (ACCS) läßt sich nicht ausblenden. 7.3 Promote Sie haben die Möglichkeit, dem Hauptmenü bis zu 12 Parameter hinzuzufügen: - Gehen Sie in die Edit-Ebene - Wählen Sie den gewünschten Parameter - Versehen Sie ihn mit dem Kürsel Pro. Der Parameter wird an das Ende des Hauptmenüs kopiert. Sie haben somit im Hauptmenü und im Originalmenü Zugriff auf diesen Parameter. Diese Parameter können Sie nicht mit einem Schreibschutz versehen. Beispeil: Haben Sie z. B. den Parameter tmr (verbleibende Timerzeit) gewählt, können Sie mit oder Pro wählen. Der Parameter tmr erscheint nun im Hauptmenü. Wiederholen Sie diesen Vorgang mit den gewünschten Parametern. Möchten Sie einen Parameter aus dem Hauptmenü entfernen, gehen Sie in die Edit-Ebene und wählen Sie ALtr, read oder Hide. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 23 8. Konfiguration In der Konfigurationsebene können Sie die Anzeigeeinheiten, den Sensortyp, die Skalierung, die Alarmkonfiguration und die Paßworter ändern. 8.1 Auswahl der Konfigurationsebene In der Konfigurationsebene können Sie mit Hilfe der Taste die einzelnen Konfigurations-Menüs aufrufen. Innerhalb der Menüs werden die Parameter mit der Taste aufgerufen. Sie können die Einstellungen der Parameter mit den Tasten und ändern. inSt iP AL AA Exit pASS 1A Geräte-Konfiguration Goto conF Wählen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten oder die Konfigurationsebene conf ACCS Drücken Sie die Taste bis Sie das ACCSMenü erreichen. codE PASS Geben Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten oder das Paßwort ein. Werksseitig eingesteltes Paßwort ist 1. PASS erscheint, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort eingegeben haben. ConF PASS Geben Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten oder das Paßwort ein. Paßwort Vorgabe ist 2. PASS erscheint, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort eingegeben haben. 24 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Geräte-Konfiguration inst Geräte- Konfiguration Wert Bedeutung *C Celsius *F Fahrenheit *K Kelvin unit Anzeigeeinheiten nonE Keine Einheit (Linear) nnnn Keine nnn.n Eine dEC.P Dezimalstelle nn.nn Zwei Pid PID On.OF EIN/AUS CtrL Regelverhalten AL Gerät als Alarmeinheit Act Ausgangskennlinie rEv Revers dir Direkt HoLd Keine Stoßfreie Umschaltung Pd.tr Stoßfreie Automatik/ Hand Umschaltung bei PD-Regelung trAc Stoßfreie Umschaltung HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 25 Eingangs-Konfiguration iP Eingangs- Konfiguration Wert Bedeutung j.tc Thermoelement J k.tc Thermoelement K L.tc Thermoelement L r.tc Thermoelement R b.tc Thermoelement B n.tc Thermoelement N t.tc Thermoelement T S.tc Thermoelement S PL 2 Platinell II rtd PT 100 mV Linear mV inPt Eingangstyp C.tc Thermoelement C * Linerisierung Off Nur bei Lineareingang Auto Automatisch 0*C 0°C ext. Referenz 45*C 45°C ext. Referenz CJC (nur T/C) Vergleichsstellentempuratur 50*C 50°C ext. Referenz Folgende Parameter erscheinen nur bei Linereingang (-12 bis +80mV) InP.L mV–Eingang min InP.H mV–Eingang max VaL.L Angezeigter Wert min VAL.H Angezeigter Wert max OFF Aus (nur Lineareing) Auto 1,5KΩ Hi 5KΩ ImP HiHi 15KΩ, * Thermoelement C kann durch eine alternative kundenspezifische Linearisierung ersetzt werden. Inp.L Inp.H VAL.H VAL.L mV Anzeigewert 26 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Alarm-Konfiguration In der Alarm-Konfiguration können Sie bis zu drei Soft-alarme konfigurieren. Soft-alarme werden nur angezeigt. Möchten Sie, daß ein Alarm auf einen Ausgang gelegt wird, müssen Sie diesen Alarm in der Relais- /Logikein-/ausgangs-Konfiguration einem Ausgang zuweisen. AL Alarmsollwert -Konfig. Wert Bedeutung OFF Kein alarm fsL Vollbereichsminimalalarm fsH Vollbereichsmaximalalarm dEv Abweichungsbandalalarm dHi Abweichungsalarm Übersollwert AL 1 Alarm 1 dLo Abweichungsalarm Untersollwert AL Alarmsollwert -Konfig. Wert Bedeutung no Nicht speichern YES Gespeichert (Auto) * Ltch Alarm speichern mAn Gespeichert (Hand) ** bLoc Alarm no Keine Unterdrückung Unterdrücken YES Alarmunterdrückung Für die Alarme 2 und 3 (AL 2 und AL 3) erscheinen die gleichen Parameter. Sp.Li Alarmsollwert diS Anzeigebereich -grenzen Con Eingestellte Grenzen *D. h., wurde der Alarm bestätigt, wird der Alarm automatisch zurückgesetzt, sobald die Alarmbedingung erlischt. ** D. h., der Alarm kann erst zurückgesetzt werden, wenn die Alarmbedingung nicht mehr ansteht. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 27 Relaisausgangs-Konfiguration Aa Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung id Art des Ausgangs rELy Relais diG Digitalausgang (Alarm) HEAt Heizausgang Func Funktion COOL Kühlausgang noch Kein Wechsel CLr Löschen aller Alarme 1FSL Alarm 1 * 2FSH Alarm 2 * 3FSL Alarm 3 * NW Neuer alarm SBR Fühlerbruch LBR Regelkeisüberwachung LDF Lastfehler MAn Handbetrieb EnD Ende des Timers TMG1 Timer läuft TMG2 Timer zählt abwärts diG.F Funktion des Digitalausgangs (erscheint nicht bei HEAt und COOL) Siehe unten, “Ansteuern eines Relais-oder Logikausgangs über eine Digitalfunktion” Die Parameter tmg1 bis tmg4 erscheinen nur bei einem Regler mit Timer. TMG3 Timer läuft ** Aa Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung TMG4 Timer zählt abwärts ** nor Normal (im Alarmfall stromführend) SenS Kennlinie des Ausgangs Inv Invertiert (im Alarmfall stromlos) * Die letzen drei Ziffern entsprechen den konfigurierten Alarmen. Haben Sie keinen Alarm konfiguriert, erscheint AL1, AL2, und AL3. ** tmg3 und tmg4 sind Spezialfunktionen. Haben Sie diese gewählt, leuchten die Anzeigen OP1 und OP2, ohne daß ein Ausgang aktiv ist. Mit dieser Funktion kann angezeit werden, ob der Timer noch läuft, während die Ausgänge über andere Digitalfunktionen, z. B. Ende des Timers, angesteuert werden. 28 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Logikeingangs-Konfiguration Wählen Sie bei Logik zwischen einem Ausgang oder einen Eingang zur Alarmquittierung, Tastensperre oder Timerstart/-stop. 1a Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung id Art des Ausgangs Log Logik diG Digitalausgang HEAt Heizausgang COOL Kühlausgang Funktion (Ausgang) Ssr.1 PDSIO Mode 1 Ac.aL Alarmquittierung Loc.d Tastensperre Digitaleingang Func Funktion (Eingang) rres Timerstart/-stop noch Kein Wechsel CLr Löschen aller Alarme 1FSL Alarm 1 * 2FSH Alarm 2 * 3FSL Alarm 3 * NW Neuer alarm SBR Fühlerbruch diG.F Funktion des Digitalausgangs (erscheint nicht bei HEAt und COOL) Siehe unten, “Ansteuern eines Relais-oder Logikausgangs LBR Regelkeisüberwachung 1a Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung LDF Lastfehler MAN Handbetrieb END Ende des Timers TMG1 Timer läuft TMG2 Timer zählt abwärts TMG3 Timer läuft ** über eine Digitalfunktion” Die Parameter tmg1 bis tmg4 erscheinen nur bei einem Regler mit Timer. TMG4 Timer zählt abwärts ** nor Normal (im Alarmfall stromführend) SenS Kennlinie des Ausgangs Inv Invertiert (im Alarmfall stromlos) * Die letzen drei Ziffern entsprechen den konfigurierten Alarmen. Haben Sie keinen Alarm konfiguriert, erscheint AL1, AL2, und AL3. ** tmg3 und tmg4 sind Spezialfunktionen. Haben Sie diese gewählt, leuchten die Anzeigen OP1 und OP2, ohne daß ein Ausgang aktiv ist. Mit dieser Funktion kann angezeigt werden, ob der Timer noch läuft, während die Ausgänge über andere Digitalfunktionen, z. B. Ende des Timers, angesteuert werden. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 29 Ansteuern eine Relais- oder Logikausgangs über eine Digitalfunktion 1. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Func erscheint. 2. Wählen Sie mit Hilfe von oder dig. 3. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis dig.f erscheint. 4. Mit Hilfe der Tasten oder können Sie eine Digitalfunktion wählen 5. Nach 2s springt die Anzeige zurück auf dig.F. Die gewählte Digitalfunktion ist nun mit dem Ausgang verbunden. 6. Drücken Sie erneut die Tasten oder . Die ausgewählte Funktion erscheint mit zwei Dezimalpukten (z. B. L. b. r.) 7. Möchten Sie keine Veränderung mehr vornehmen, gehen Sie mit oder auf noch. Mehrere Digitalfunktionen auf einem Ausgang Sie haben die Möglichkeit, mehrere oder auch alle Digitalfunktionen auf einem Ausgang zu kombinieren, indem Sie die Schritte 4-6 für jede Funktion wiederholen. Löschen von zugeordneten Digitalfunktionen 1. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis dig.f erscheint. 2. Mit Hilfe der Tasten oder können Sie CLr wählen 3. Nach 2s springt die Anzeige zurück auf dig.F. Alle Verknüpfungen sind gelöscht. Paßwort-Konfiguration PASS Paßwort-Konfiguration Wert Vorgabe ACC.P Paßwort für Ful und Edit 0-9999 1 Cnf.P Paßwort für Konfiguration 0-9999 2 CAL.P Paßwort für Anpassung 0-9999 3 8.2 Verlassen der Konfigurationsebene Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie Exit erreichen. Wahlen Sie mit oder YES. Nach 2s blinkt die Anzeige und kehrt in die Bedienebene zurück. Exit YES 30 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 9. Alarme Die Regler der Serie 2100 können Ihnen zwei verschiedenen Arten von Alarmmeldungen anzeigen: 1. Regelkreisalarme (z. B. Vollbereichsalarme, Abweichungsalarme) 2. Diagnosealarme (z. B. Fühlerbruch) Regelkreisalarme können Sie selbst konfigurieren, einem Ausgang zuweisen und speichern. Diese gespeicherten Alarm müssen Sie dann bestätigen. 9.1 Alarmmeldungen Steht ein Alarm an, wird in der Anzeige eine Alarmmeldung dargestellt. Die Alarmmeldung wechselt mit dem aktuellen Prozeßwert. Folgende Alarmmeldungen können in der Anzeige erscheinen: Kürzel Erklärung Regelkreisalarme -fsh Vollbereichsmaximalalarm -fsL Vollbereichsminimalalarm -deV Abweichungsbandalarm -dHi Abweichungsalarm Übersollwert -dLo Abweichungsalarm Untersollwert Diese Alarme können gespeichert und bestätigt werden. Diagnosealarme Sbr Fühlerbruch Lbr Regelkreisfehler Ldf Lastfehler End Ende des Timers An Stelle des Striches erscheint bei einem Regelkreisalarm die Alarmnummer (1, 2 oder 3), z. B. 1FSH (Alarm 1, Vollbereichsmaximalalarm). Alarm1 Vollbereichsminimalalarm 1FSL 200.0 Atueller Prozeßwert HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 31 9.2 Alarmbestätigung Zur Alarmbestätigung müssen Sie die Tasten und gemeinsam drücken. Es werden neben den aktuellen dann auch noch gespeicherte, nicht mehr anstehende Alarm bestätigt. Nicht gespeichterte Alarme müssen Sie nicht bestätigen. 9.3 Diagnosealarme Zusätzlich zu den Prozeßalarmen bietet Ihnen der Regler die folgenden Diagnosealarme Kürzel Erklärung EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error: Der wert eines Bedien-oder Konfigurationsparameters wurde zerstört. Wenden Sie sich an Eurotherm. HW.Er Hardware-Fehler: Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur. LLLL Unterhalb des Anzeigebereichs: Überprüfen Sie den Eingang. HHHH Oberhalb des Anzeigebereichs: Überprüfen Sie den Eingang. Err1 Error 1: ROM Selbsttest Fehlerhaft: Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur. Kürzel Erklärung Err2 Error 2: RAM Selbsttest Fehlerhaft: Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur. Err3 Error 3: Watchdog Fehler: Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur. Err4 Error 4: Tastatur-Fehler: Fehlende Taste oder Taste während des Starts gedrückt. Err5 Error 5:. Fehler in der Eingangsschaltung: Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur. Pwr.F Versorgungsfehler. Die Versorgungsspannung ist zu niedrig. Überprüfen Sie, daß die Spannung innerhalb der Grenzen ist. TU.Er Selbstoptimierungsfehler: Erscheint wenn der Optimierungsprozeß über 2 Stunden dauert. Kontrollieren Sie Ihren Regelkreis. Bestätigung wie vorher beschrieben. Sbr Fühlerbruch: Überprüfen Sie den Fühler. Lbr Regelkreisfehler: Die Rückführung ist ohne Signal. Überprüfen Sie die gesamte Regelstreke. Ldf Lastfehler: Fehler in Heizkreis oder Solid State Relais (SSR). Überprüfen Sie den Heizkreis und das SSR. End Ende des Timers: Siehe Kapitel 10. 32 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 10. Timer Der Timer gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, die Regelung zeitlich zu steuern. Die für den Timer wichtigen Parameter finden Sie im Sollwert-Menü: Tm.OP Auswahl der Betriebsart des Timers Tmr Verbleibende Timerzeit in Minuten Dwel Eingestelle Timerzeit in Minuten Stat Status des Timers 10.1 Auswahl der Betreibsart • Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie Sollwert- Menü erreichen. • Rufen Sie mit Hilfe der Taste den Parameter tm.OP auf • Mit den Tasten oder können Sie die Betriebsart des Timers wählen (Opt.1 bis Opt.5) 10.1.1 Opt.1 - Betriebsart 1, Haltezeit und Ausschalten Reset Ist der Timer zurückgesetzt, arbeitet der Regler in der von Ihnen konfigurierten Regelart. Mit dem Parameter m-A können Sie zwischen Automatikbetrieb (Auto) und Handbetrieb (MAN) umschalten. Den Parameter finden Sie im Hauptmenü. Im Automatikbetrieb wird der Istwert auf den Sollwert ausgeregelt. Im Stanby-Mode befindet sich der Regler im Handbetrieb. Die Ausgangsleistung ist an allen Ausgängen Null. (Siehe Warnung auf Seite 11). Bei der Auslieferung ist der Parameter m-A in der Bedienebene gesperrt. Sie müssen den Parameter erst in der Edit-Ebene freigeben. Standby Temperatur Sollwert Reset Timing Timer Laufzeit Ende End blinkt auf der Aufwärmzeit Anzeige HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 33 Während der Timerlaufzeit Startet der Timer, springt der Regler in den Automatikbetrieb. Der Istwert wird an den Sollwert herangefürt (Aufwärmzeit). Befindet sich der Istwert ca. 1oC entfernt vom Sollwert, beginnt der Timer zu zählen (Timing in Minuten). Ende Am Ende der Zeit (Timing) schaltet der Regler in den Standby-Mode um. Die Ausgänge werden auf Null gesetzt. MAN leuchtet und in der Regleranzeige erscheint blinkend End. Das bedeutet, daß Ihr Prozeß abkühlt. Der Timer bleibt in diesem Zustand, bis er erneut mit und zurückgesetzt wird. Neuer Reset Haben Sie den Timer zurückgesetzt ( und gleichzeitig drücken), erlischt End auf der Anzeige. Der Regler befindet sich weiterhin in Standby-Mode. Möchten Sie zum normalen Reglerbetreib wechseln, setzen Sie den Parameter m-A in Haupt-Menü auf Auto. 10.1.2 Opt.2 - Betriebsart 2, Haltezeit und nicht Ausschalten Diese Betriebsart entspricht der Betriebsart 1, nur daß nach Ablauf der Zeit (Timing) der Regler im Automatikbetrieb bleibt. Unendliche Haltezeit auf Sollwerttemperatur Temperatur Sollwert Reset Timing Timer Laufzeit Ende End blinkt auf der Anzeige Aufwärmzeit Auto m-A Drücken Sie solange , bis der Parameter m-A erscheint. Wählen Sie mit oder Auto Automatikbetreib mAn Standby (Hand - MAN leuchet) Drücken Sie gleichzeitig und , um in die Hauptanzeige zurückzukehren. 34 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 10.1.3 Opt.3 (Betriebsart 3), Aufheizen, Haltezeit und Ausschalten Auch die Betriebsart 3 entspricht der Betriebsart 1. Der einzige Unterschied ist, daß die Zeit sofort bei Start des Timers losläuft, d. h. die Aufwärmzeit entfällt. Somit ist die Zeit bis zum Erreichen des Sollwerts Teil des Timings. 10.1.4 Opt.4 (Betriebsart 4), Aufheizen, Haltezeit und nicht Ausschalten Die Betriebsart 4 arbeitet entsprechend der Betriebsart 2, nur daß auch hier die Zeit bis zum Erreichen des Sollwerts Teil des Timings ist. Standby Temperatur Sollwert Reset Timing Ende End blinkt auf der Anzeige Reset Unendliche Haltezeit auf Sollwerttempuratur Sollwert Timing Ende End blinkt auf der Anzeige Temperatur HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 35 10.1.5 Opt.5 (Betriebsart 5) - Einschaltverzögerung Haben Sie die Betriebsart 5 gewählt, wird das Einschalten des Reglers um die Timerzeit verzögert. Sobald Sie den Timer starten, schaltet das Gerät in den Stanby-Modus und startet das Timing. Am Ende der Zeit schaltet der Regler in den Automatikbetrieb. 10.1.6 Rampe/Haltezeit Profil Sie haben die Möglichkeit, mit Hilfe der Sollwertrampe (Sprr) und des Timers ein einfaches Rampe/Haltezeit Profil zu programmieren. Um die Programmierung zu vereinfachen, kopieren Sie zuerst die Parameter Sprr und w.SP in die Bedienebene (Abschnitt 7.3, Promote). Geben Sie für den Parameter eine gewünschte Rampensteigung ein. Sie können den Wert in Schritten von 1/10 des eingestellten Anzeigebereichs wählen. Das heißt, haben Sie einen Anzeigebereich, von 1 bis 1000oC können Sie für die Rampensteigung einen Wert zwischen 0,01 und 999,9 oC pro Minute wählen. Haben Sie die Rampensteigung eingestellt und den Timer gestartet, springt der Arbeitssollwert w.sp, zur aktuellen Temperatur und läuft dann mit der eingestellten Rampensteigung bis zum Zielsollwert. Haben Sie für den Timer Betriebsart 1 oder 2 gewählt, startet die Zeit (Timing), wenn Istwert und Sollwert eine Differenz von 1oC haben. In den Betriebarten 3 und 4 startet der Timer, wenn der Arbeitsollwert w.sp noch 1oC vom Zielsollwert entfernt ist. Unendliche Haltezeit auf Sollwerttemperatur Temperatur Sollwert Reset Timing Reset Standby 36 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 10.2 Starten und Rücksetzen des Timers Es stehen Inhen zwei Metoden zur Verfügung: Methode 1. Dies ist die einfachste Methode, um den Timer zu überwachen. • Drücken Sie , bis Sie das Sollwert-Menü erreichen. • Drücken Sie , bis Sie den Parameter tMr aufrufen. Anmerkung: Um diesen Vorgang zu vereinfachen, können Sie den Parameter tmr in die Hauptanzeige kopieren (s. Abschnitt 7.3, Promote). Sobald Sie den Wert für die verbleibende Zeit (tmr) geändert haben, startet der Timer mit der angegebenen Zeit. Tmr zählt abwärts bis Null. Sie können auch während der Laufzeit des Timers die verbleibende Zeit verändern, um den Timer den Erfordernissen Ihres Prozesses anzupassen. Setzen Sie tmr auf Null, wird der Timer gestoppt. Anmerkung: Bei dieser Methode werden die Parameter dwel und stat nicht geändert, d. h. Status und Gesamtlaufzeit des Timers werden nicht übernommen. Ist der Timer abgelaufen, erscheint die blinkende Meldung End auf der Anzeige. Diese bleibt solange bestehen, bis Sie einen neuen Wert für tmr eingeben und so den Timer neu starten. Den Timer können Sie zurücksetzen, indem Sie die Tasten und gleichzeitig drücken. ‘end’ erlischt. Stellen Sie in dem Parameter tmr einen neuen Wert ein, startet der Timer erneut. 1234 Tmr Betätigen Sie die Tasten oder , um die verbleibende Zeit (0 bis 9999 Minuten) einzustellen. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 37 Methode 2. Mit dieser Methode können Sie einen festen Wert für den Timer vorgeben und ihn über den Parameter stat starten und stoppen. Wenn Sie den Logikein-/-ausgang als EIN/AUSSchließkontakteingang kongfigurieren, können Sie den Parameter stat über diesen Eingang umschalten. Öffnen Sie den Kontakt (flankengetriggert), wird der Parameter auf run gesetzt, schließen Sie den Kontakt, steht der Parameter auf Off. Der Parameter wird immer auf OFF gesetzt (tmr = 0), wenn der Kontakt geschlossen ist. 1234 dwel run stat sp Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie das sollwert-Menü erreichen. Wählen Sie dann mit Hilfe der Taste den Parameter dwel Haltezeit Wählen Sie mit den Tasten oder die Timerzeit (0 bis 9999 Minuten). Timer Status Möchten Sie den Timer starten, wählen Sie mit den Tasten oder run. Die eingegebene Haltzeit wird in den Parameter tmr kopiert und der Timer läuft. Möchten Sie den Timer rücksetzen, wählen Sie Off. tmr wird sofort auf Null gesetzt. 38 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 11. Anpassung Die Werkskalibrierung ist hochgenau. Zur Kompensation von Sensor-oder Systemfehlern können Sie der Kalibrierung einen Offset hinzufügen. Möchten Sie über den gesamten Anzeigerbereich einen festen Offset einstellen, wählen Sie im Eingangs-Menü (iP) den Parameter OFS und geben Sie den Wert ein. Sie können auch die Kurve an zwei Punkten ausrichten. Gehen Sie bei der Zwei-Punkt-Anpassung wie folgt vor: • Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie das Eingangs- Menü erreichen. • Wählen Sie mit Hilfe der Taste den Parameter CAL.P • Geben Sie mit den Tasten oder das Paßwort ein. Vorgabe ist 3. Pass wird angezeigt, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort eingegeben haben. • Wählen Sie mit der Taste den Parameter CAL. • Wählen Sie mit oder User (Fact ist die Werkseinstellung) • Mit der Taste können Sie nacheinander die vier Anpassungsparameter aufrufen (s. unten). Stellen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten oder den gewünschten Punkt der Anpassung und den entsprechenden Offset ein. Die Parameter pnt.H und OFS.H erscheinen nur, wenn Sie ersten zwei Parameter eingestellt haben. Eingang Anzeigewert Werkskalibrierung Pnt.H OFS.H OFS.L Pnt.L Angepaßter Wert Oberer Anpassungspunkt Unterer Anpassungspunkt Angepaßter Wert Anpassung HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 39 12. Selbstoptimierung Bei einer PID Regelung wird der Ausgang durch die Proportional-Integral- und Differentialanteile bestimmt. Sind diese Komponenten richtig dimensioniert, kann der Regler den Ausgang so regeln, daß der Istwert dem Sollwert entspricht und keine Schwingungen auftreten. Die Einstellung der Werte ist abhängig von Ihrem Prozeß. Die Reglermodelle 2132 und 2116 arbeiten mit einem ‘One-shot’-Tuner. Der Regelausgang wird an- und ausgeschaltet und simuliert somit ein Oszillation der Stellgröße. Der Regler errechnet die Parameterwerte aus Amplitude und Schwingungsdauer der Oszillation. Parameter Kürzel Funktion Proportionalband Pb Die Bandbreite in Anzeigeeinheiten, über welche die Ausgangsleistung zwischen min und max proportional verstellt wird. Nachstellzeit ti Die Zeitspanne, welche bei der Sprungantwort benötigt wird, um aufgrund einer I-Wirkung eine gleich große Parameter Kürzel Funktion Stellgrößenänderung zu erzielen, wie sie infolge des PAnteils entsteht. Vorhaltzeit td Die Zeitspanne, um welche die Anstiegsantwort eines PDReglers einen bestimmten Wert der Stellgröße früher erreicht als er ihn infolge seines PAnteils allein erreichen würde. High Cutback Hcb Die Anzahl der Anzeigeeinheiten oberhalb des Sollwertes, bei denen der Regler die Ausgangsleistung erhöht, um Unterschwinger zu vermeiden. Low cutback Lcb Die Anzahl der Anzeigeeinheiten unterhalb des Sollwertes, bei denen der Regler die Ausgangsleistung vermindert, um Überschwinger zu vermeiden. Relative Kühlverstärkung rEL.C Ermittelt das Proportionalband für die Kühlung, indem es Pb durch rEL dividiert 40 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Besteht bei voller Heiz- oder Kühlleistung Gefahr für Ihren Prozeß, können Sie die Grenzen dieser Leistungen verändern. Passen Sie die Parameter für die Grenzen der Ausgangsleistung Ihrem Prozeß an (siehe op-Menü) Aktivieren Sie die Selbstoptimierung einmal bei Inbetriebnahme eines Prozesses. Sollte die Regelung instabil werden, können Sie jederzeit eine neue Selbstoptimierung starten. Starten Sie die Selbstoptimierung bei Umgebungstemperatur des Prozesses, damit der Tuner die Cutbackwerte bestimmen kann. Einstellen der Zykluszeiten Stellen Sie vor der Selbstoptimierung die Parameter CYC.H (Zykluszeit Heizen) und CYC.C (Zykluszeit Kühlen) im Ausgangsleistungs-Menü ein. Setzen Sie die Werte für einen Logikheizausgang auf CYC.H = 1s, für einen Relaisausgang auf CYC.H = 20s und für einen Logikkühlausgang auf CYC.C = 5,0s. 12.1 Aktivierung der Selbstoptimierung Die Selbstoptimierung ist nur bei ausgeschalteter Sollwertrampe möglich (sprr = OFF) 1. Geben Sie den Arbeitssollwert ein. 2. Setzen Sie den Parameter ‘tunE’ im Atun- Menü auf ‘on’ 3. Drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Tasten und , damit Sie in die Hauptanzeige zurückkehren. Die Anzeige tune gibt an, daß die Selbstoptimierung gestartet ist (tune wechselt mit Istwert). 4. Der Regler induziert eine Oszillation in der Temperatur, indem er die Heizung erst ein- dann wieder ausschaltet. 5. Nach Beenden der Selbstoptimierung (2 Zyklen) berechnet der Regler die Parameter und geht zum normalen Regelbetrieb über. Arbeiten Sie mit P, PD oder PI – Regelung, setzen Sie die nicht benötigten Parameter td bzw. ti auf OFF bevor Sie die Selbstoptimierung starten. Der Tuner berechnet dann keine Werte für diese Parameter. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 41 12.1.1 Berechnung der Cutbackwerte Mit Hilfe der Parameter Low und High Cutback werden Über- bzw. Unterschwinger bei großen Temperaturänderungen vermieden. Haben Sie die Parameter auf Auto gesetzt, werden sie auf das Dreifache des Proportionalbandes eingestellt. Diese Werte werden dann während der Selbstopmierung nicht mehr geändert. 12.2 Manuelle Optimierung Sie können den Regler manuell optimieren. In diesem Abschnitt wird die Optimierung nach dem Ziegler- Nichols- Verfahren beschrieben. Der prozeß befindet sich auf Arbeitstemperatur. 1. Setzen Sie die Parameter ti und td auf OFF. 2. Stellen Sie die Parameter Hcb und Lcb, auf Auto. 3. Der Istwert weicht vom Sollwert ab (PAbweichung). 4. Sobald sich die Temperatur stabilisiert hat, reduzieren Sie den Wert des Proportionalbandes Pb, bis die Temperatur anfängt zu schwingen. Erhöhen Sie den Wert des Proportionalbandes wieder soweit, daß die Temperatur gerade aufhört zu schwingen. Nehmen Sie sich für diese Einstellung viel Zeit. Notieren Sie sich den Wert des Proportionalbandes B und die Periodendauer T. 5. Berechnen Sie die Werte für ti, td und Pb nach der folgenden Tabelle. Stellen Sie die berechneten Werte im Regler ein. Regelart Pb ti td Proportional 2xB OFF OFF P + I 2,2xB 0,8xT OFF P + I + D 1,7xB 0,5xT 0,12xT Prozeßgröße Optimierungssollwert Fiktiver sollwert Geräte mit Heizund Kühlausgang Zeit Optimierung beendet (Heizund Kühlausgang) Optimierung beendet nur (Heizausgang) Ausgang 0% -100% 100% 42 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 12.2.1 Einstellen der Cutbackwerte Haben Sie die Parameter wie vorher beschrieben eingestellt, ist der Regler für eine Geradeausregelung optimiert. Treten während der Startphase oder bei größeren Temperatursprüngen unakzeptable Über- oder Unterschwinger auf, sollten Sie die Parameter Lcb und Hcb einstellen. 1. Setzen Sie Lcb = Hcb = 3 x PB. 2. Notieren Sie sich die werte der Über- bzw. Unterschwinger für einen großen Temperatursprung (siehe unten). 3. Beispiel a) Erhöhen Sie den Parameter Lcb um den Wert des Überschwingers. Beispiel b) Verringern Sie den Parameter Lcb um den wert des Unterschwingers. Beispiel (a) Beispiel (b) Nähert sich der Iswert dem Sollwert von oben, können Sie Hcb nach dem gleichen Verfahren berechnen. 12.2.2 Manual Reset Arbeiten Sie mit einem PD-Regler, ist der Parameter ti auf OFF gesetzt und es bleibt eine Abweichung zwischen Soll- und Iswert. In diesem Fall erscheint im PID-Menü der parameter für den Manual reset (res). Mit diesem Parameter wird der Ausgangsleistung ein Offset aufgeschatet, um die Abweichung auszuregeln. Geben Sie diesen Parameterwert manuell ein, um eine bleibende Abweichung zu vermeiden. Prozeßgröße Unterschwingen Zeit Sollwert Prozeßgröße Zeit Sollwert Uberschwingen HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 43 13. Bestellcodierung Codieren Sie den gewünschten Regler nach dem vorliegenden Schema. Modell Funktion Versorgung Anleitung Logikein/ausgang Relais Funktion CC PID Regler NF EIN/AUS Regler TC PID + Timer TN EIN/AUS + Timer Versorgung VH 85-264V AC VL 20 -29V AC/DC Anleitung XXX Keine Anleitung ENG Englisch FRA Französisch GER Deutsch NED Holländisch SPA Spanisch SWE Schwedisch ITA Italienisch Relais XX Keine Ausgang RH Heizen RC Kühlen FH Max Alarm 2 FL Min Alarm 2 AL Max Alarm 2 & Min Alarm 3 DB Abweichungsband DL Abw. Untersollwert DH Abw. Übersollwert NW Neuer Alarm Logikein/ausgang XX Keine Logikausgang Logikausgang LH Heizen LC Kühlen M1 PDSIO mode 1 FH Max alarm 1 FL Min alarm 1 DB Abweichungsband DL Abw. Untersollwert DH Abw. Übersollwert NW Neuer alarm Logikeingang AC Alarmquittierung KL Tastensperre TM Timer Start/Stop Modell 2132 1/16 DIN 2116 1/8 DIN 44 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 Sensor Bereich min Bereich max Einheit Externes relais Eingangsadapter Externes relais XX Kein Relais R7 Relais (über Logikausgang) Einheit C °C F ° F K Kelvin X Linear Adapter (0-10V) XX Kein Adapter V1 0-10Vdc A1 0-20mA Widerstand (2,49Ω. 0,1%) Sensor Bereich min & max Thermoelement °C J Typ J -210 bis 1200 K Typ K -200 bis 1372 T Typ T -200 bis 400 L Typ L -200 bis 900 N Typ N -200 bis 1300 R Typ R -50 bis 1768 S Typ S -50 bis 1768 B Typ B 0 bis 1820 P Platinell II 0 bis 1369 Widerstandsthermometer Z Pt100 -200 bis 850 Kundenspezifische Eingänge (kein Standard) OC C Typ C -W5%Re/W26%Re (Vorgabe) 0 bis 2319 D Typ D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 bis 2399 E Typ E -200 bis 999 1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 bis 1399 2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 bis 1870 3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 bis 2000 4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 bis 2010 5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 bis 2300 6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 bis 2000 7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 bis 1800 8 Exegen K80 I.R. Pyrometer -45 bis 650 Linear M -9.99 bis +80mV Y 0 bis 20mA A 4 bis 20mA V 0 bis 10Vdc -1999 bis 9999 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 45 14. Technische Daten Schutzart IP65 (EN 60529), oder 4X (NEMA 250) Umgebungstemperatur Betrieb: 0 bis 55oC. Sorgen Sie für genügend Luftzirkulation; Lagerung: -30oC bis +75oC. Relative Feuchte 5 bis 95%, nicht kondensierend Umgebung Die Geräte sind nicht geeignet für den Gebrauch in explosiver oder korrosiver Umgebung; alle Angaben beziehen sich auf Einsatzbereich unter 2000m NN Elektrische Voraussetzungen Netzspannung 100 bis 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, 5Watts max Kleinspannung 24VDC/AC + 20%. DC bis 62Hz, 5Watts Relaisausgang (isoliert) Max: 264VAC, 2A ohm’sch;. Min: 12VDC, 100mA Lebensdauer: Mech: 107 Schaltungen: Elektr: 5 x106 Schaltungen Verdrahtung Der Kabelquerschnitt darf 0,5mm2 (16AWG) nicht unterschreiten. Überstromschutz Verwenden Sie unabhängige 2A Sicherungen für Versorgung und Relais, z. B. EN60127 (typ T) Logikein-und-ausgang 9V bei 12mA, nicht isoliert; der Digitaleingang ist nicht vom Sensoreingang getrennt Elektrische Sicherheit (nach EN 61010) Überspannungstransienten Überspannungstransienten der Netzspannung an allen Spannungsversorgungen zum Gerät maximal 2,5kV Verschmutzungsgrad 2 Leitend Verschmutzungen dürfen nicht in das Gerät gelangen Isolation Alle isolierten Ein- und Ausgänge sind durch eine verstärkte Isolierung galvanisch getrennt Vergleichsstelle >30 bis 1, interne Vergleichsstelle. Überspannungskategorie Kategorie II oder CAT II 46 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 15. Informationen zu Sicherheit und EMV Dieser Regler wurde in Großbritannien von Eurotherm Ltd hergestellt. Bitte lesen Sie dieses Kapitel, bevor Sie den Regler installieren. Der Regler ist für industrielle Anwendungen im Bereich der Temperaturregelung vorgesehen und entspricht den Europäischen Richtlinien für Sicherheit und EMV. Andere Anwendungen oder Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung kann die Sicherheit des Reglers beeinträchtigen. Es liegt in der Verantwortlichkeit des Inbetriebnehmers, diese Richtlinien bei der Installation des Geräts einzuhalten. 15.1 Allgemein Die Informationen in dieser Anleitung können ohne besondere Hinweise geändert werden. Trotz aller Bemühungen für die Richtigkeit der Angaben kann der Lieferant nicht für in der Anleitung enthaltene Fehler verantwortlich gemacht werden. 15.1.1 Sicherheit Dieses Gerät entspricht der Europäischen Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG, ergänzt durch 93/68/EWG, unter Anwendung des Sicherheitsstandards EN 61010. 15.1.2 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Dieser Regler ist konform zu der EMV Richtlinie 89/336/EWG und den erforderlichen Schutzanforderungen. Die Konformität ist durch eine Drittstelle geprüft und die technischen Unterlagen sind dort abgelegt. Das Gerät ist für Anwendungen im Industriebereich nach EN 61326 vorgesehen. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 47 15.1.3 Auspacken und Lagerung Die Verpackung sollte ein Gerät in einem Gehäuse, zwei Halteklammern und eine Bedienungsanleitung enthalten. Geräte für bestimmte Bereiche benötigen zusätzlich einen Eingangsadapter. Ist die Verpackung beschädigt, sollten Sie das Gerät nicht einbauen und Kontakt mit der nächsten Eurotherm Niederlassung aufnehmen. Möchten Sie das Gerät vor der Benutzung lagern, schützen Sie es vor Feuchtigkeit und Verschmutzungen und halten Sie die Lagertemperaturen von –10 oC bis +70 oC ein. 15.2 Service und Reparatur Dieses Gerät ist wartungsfrei. Sollte das Gerät einen Fehler aufweisen, kontaktieren Sie bitte die nächste Eurotherm Niederlassung. 15.2.1 Achtung: Geladene Kondensatoren Bevor Sie den Regler aus dem Gehäuse entfernen, nehmen Sie das Gerät vom Netz und warten Sie etwa 2 Minuten, damit sich Kondensatoren entladen können. Es ist sinnvoll, den Regler zum Teil aus dem Gehäuse zu ziehen und dann zu warten, bis Sie ihn ganz aus dem Gehäuse entfernen. Halten Sie diese Zeit nicht ein, können Kondensatoren mit gefährlicher Spannung geladen sein. Vermeiden Sie auf jeden Fall jede Berührung der Elektronik, wenn Sie das Gerät aus dem Gehäuse entfernen. 15.2.2 Elektrostatische Entladung Haben Sie den Regler aus dem Gehäuse entfernt, können einige der freiliegenden Bauteile durch elektrostatische Entladungen beschädigt werden. Beachten Sie deshalb alle Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bezüglich statischer Entladungen. 15.2.3 Reinigung Verwenden Sie für die Reinigung der Geräteaufkleber kein Wasser oder auf Wasser basierende Reinigungsmittel sondern Isopropyl Alkohol. Die Oberfläche der Geräte können Sie mit einer milden Seifenlösung reinigen. 48 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 15.3 Installation Sicherheitshinweise 15.3.1 Sicherheits Symbole Folgende Symbole können am Gerät angebracht sein: ! Achtung (siehe Dokumentation) 15.3.2 Personal Lassen Sie die Installation dieses Geräts nur von qualifiziertem Personal durchführen. 15.3.3 Berührung Bauen Sie das System zum Schutz vor Berührung in ein Gehäuse ein. 15.3.4 Achtung: Fühler unter Spannung Der Regler ist so konstruiert, dass der Temperaturfühler direkt mit einem elektrischen Heizelement verbunden werden kann. Es liegt in Ihrer Verantwortung dafür zu sorgen, dass Servicepersonal nicht an unter Spannung stehende Elemente gelangen kann. Ist der Fühler mit dem Heizelement verbunden, müssen alle Leitungen, Anschlüsse und Schalter, die mit dem Fühler verbunden sind, für 240 V AC CATII ausgestattet sein. Der Logik EA ist nicht von den PV Eingängen isoliert. 15.3.5 Verdrahtung Die Verdrahtung muss korrekt, entsprechend den Angaben in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und den jeweils gültigen Vorschriften, erfolgen. Achten Sie besonders darauf, dass die AC Spannungsversorgung nicht mit dem Sensoreingang oder anderen Niederspannungsein- oder -ausgängen verbunden wird. Verwenden Sie Kupferleitung (außer für Thermoelementanschluss) und achten Sie darauf, dass alle Zuleitungen und Anschlussklemmen für die entsprechende Stromstärke dimensioniert sind. Weiterhin sind alle Anschlüsse nach den gültigen VDE-Vorschriften bzw. den jeweiligen Landesvorschriften vorzunehmen. 15.3.6 Isolation Die Installation muss einen Trennschalter oder einen Leistungsschalter beinhalten. Bauen Sie diesen Schalter in der Nähe des Systems und gut erreichbar für den Bediener ein. Kennzeichnen Sie den Schalter als trennende Einheit. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 49 15.3.7 Überstromschutz Sichern Sie die DC Spannungsversorgung des Reglers mit einer Sicherung. Das schützt die Regler-Platinen vor Überstrom. 15.3.8 Maximalspannungen Die maximal anliegende Spannung der folgenden Klemmen muss weniger als 264 V AC betragen: • Relaisausgang zu Logik-, DC oder Fühlerverbindungen; • jede Verbindung gegen Erde. Schließen Sie den Regler nicht an Drehstromnetze ohne geerdeten Mittelpunkt an. Im Falle eines Fehlers kann es bei dieser Versorgung zu Spannungen über 264 V AC kommen. Das Gerät kann dadurch zerstört werden. 15.3.9 Umgebung Leitende Verschmutzungen dürfen nicht in den Schaltschrank gelangen. Um eine geeignete Umgebungsluft zu erreichen, bauen Sie einen Luftfilter in den Lufteintritt des Schaltschranks ein. Sollte der Regler in kondensierender Umgebung stehen (niedrige Temperaturen), bauen Sie eine thermostatgeregelte Heizung in den Schaltschrank ein. Dieses Produkt entspricht der Norm BS EN61010 Überspannungskategorie II, Verschmutzungsgrad 2. Diese sind wie folgt definiert: 15.3.10 Überspannungskategorie II Nennspannung: 230 V. Vorzugswerte von Steh- Stoßspannungen für Überspannungskategorie 2: 2500 V 15.3.10.1 Verschmutzungsgrad 2 Übliche, nicht leitfähige Verschmutzung; gelegentlich muss mit vorübergehender Leitfähigkeit durch Betauung gerechnet werden. 15.3.11 Erdung des Fühlerschirms In manchen Anwendungen wird der Sensor bei laufendem System gewechselt. In diesem Fall sollten Sie als zusätzlichen Schutz vor Stromschlag den Schirm des Temperatursensors erden. Verbinden Sie den Schirm nicht mit dem Maschinengehäuse. 50 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 15.3.12 Anlagen- und Personensicherheit Beim Entwurf eines Regelsystems sollten Sie sich auch über die Folgen bei Fehlfunktionen Gedanken machen. Bei einem Temperatur-Regelsystem besteht die Gefahr einer ständig laufenden Heizung. Das kann zu Personen- und Anlagenschäden führen. Gründe für eine fehlerhafte Heizung können sein: • Beschädigung des Sensors durch den Prozess • Die Verdrahtung des Thermoelementes wird kurzgeschlossen • Reglerausfall in der Heizperiode • Eine externe Klappe oder Schütz ist in Heizposition blockiert • Der Reglersollwert ist zu hoch. Schützen Sie sich und die Anlage durch eine zusätzliche Temperatur-Schutzeinheit. Diese sollte einen unabhängigen Temperaturfühler und ein Schütz besitzen, der den Heizkreis abschalten kann. Anmerkung: Das Alarmrelais im Regler dient nicht zum Schutz der Anlage, sondern nur zum Erkennen und Anzeigen der Alarme. 15.4 EMV Installationshinweise Um sicherzustellen, dass die EMV-Anforderungen eingehalten werden, treffen Sie folgende Maßnahmen: • Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Installation gemäß den "Eurotherm EMV-Installationshinweisen", Bestellnummer HA025464, durchgeführt wird. • Bei Relaisausgängen müssen Sie eventuell einen geeigneten Filter einsetzen, um die Störaussendung zu unterdrücken. Bei typischen Anwendungen empfehlen wir Schaffner FN321 oder FN612. Bitte beachten Sie, dass die Anforderungen an die Filter jedoch von der verwendeten Lastart abhängen. • Verwenden Sie den Regler in einem Tischgehäuse, sind unter Umständen die Anforderungen der Fachgrundnorm EN 50081-1 (Wohn-, Geschäft- und Gewerbebereich) gültig. Bauen Sie in diesem Fall einen passenden Filter in das Gehäuse ein. Wir empfehlen Schaffner FN321 und FN612. HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 51 15.4.1 Leitungsführung Um die Aufnahme von elektrischem Rauschen zu minimieren, verlegen Sie die Leitungen von Logikund Stetigausgang und Sensoreingang weitab von Netzspannungsleitungen. Ist dies nicht möglich, verwenden Sie bitte abgeschirmte Kabel. Die Abschirmung muss an einem Ende geerdet sein. Achten Sie darauf, die Leitungslänge so kurz wie möglich zu halten. Führt die Signalverdrahtung gefährliche Spannungswerte (oder kann unter Fehlerbedingungen gefährliche Spannungswerte führen), ist eine doppelte Isolierung notwendig. * Eine vollständige Erklärung der 'gefährlichen Spannung' finden Sie unter 'Hazardous Live' in der Norm BS EN61010. Zusammengefasst besagt diese, dass im Normabetrieb Spannungswerte über 30 Veff (42,2 V Spitze) oder über 60 V DC als gefährlich eingestuft werden. 52 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 16. RoHS Product group 2100 Table listing restricted substances Chinese 产 2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚 线组X O X O O O 属O O O O O O 显X O O O O O 块X O X O O O O X English Product 2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE PCBA X O X O O O Enclosure O O O O O O Display X O O O O O Modules X O X O O O O X Approval Name: Position: Signature: Date: Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07 Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 Toxic and hazardous substances and elements Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. Restricted Materials Table Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) 览 质 该质该质SJ/T11363-2006 标规 AUSTRALIA Sydney Eurotherm Pty. Ltd. Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099 Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288 E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone (+43 1) 7987601 Fax (+43 1) 7987605 E-mail info.at@eurotherm.com BELGIUM & LUXEMBURG Moha Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm Ltda. Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com DENMARK Copenhagen Eurotherm Danmark AS Telephone (+45 70) 234670 Fax (+45 70) 234660 E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com FINLAND Abo Eurotherm Finland Telephone (+358) 22506030 Fax (+358) 22503201 E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone (+33 478) 664500 Fax (+33 478) 352490 E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Fax (+49 6431) 298119 E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com HONG KONG & CHINA Eurotherm Limited North Point Telephone (+85 2) 28733826 Fax (+85 2) 28700148 E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com Guangzhou Office Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5099 Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831 E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Beijing Office Telephone (+86 10) 6567 8506 Fax (+86 10) 6567 8509 E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Shanghai Office Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188 Fax (+86 21) 6145 1187 E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com International Sales and Service http://www.eurotherm.co.uk HA026270EFG/5 CN23704 INDIA Chennai Eurotherm India Limited Telephone (+9144) 24961129 Fax (+9144) 24961831 E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800 Fax (+353 1) 469 1300 E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com ITALY Como Eurotherm S.r.l Telephone (+39 31) 975111 Fax (+39 31) 977512 E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Korea Limited Telephone (+82 31) 273 8507 Fax (+82 31) 273 8508 E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn Eurotherm B.V. Telephone (+31 172) 411752 Fax (+31 172) 417260 E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com NORWAY Oslo Eurotherm A/S Telephone (+47 67) 592170 Fax (+47 67) 118301 E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com POLAND Katowice Eurotherm A/S Telephone (+48 32) 2185100 Fax (+48 32) 2177171 E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm España SA Telephone (+34 91) 6616001 Fax (+34 91) 6619093 E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone (+46 40) 384500 Fax (+46 40) 384545 E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040 Fax (+41 44) 787 1044 E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited Telephone (+44 1903) 268500 Fax (+44 1903) 265982 E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com U.S.A Leesburg VA Eurotherm Inc. Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000 Fax (+1 703) 669 1300 E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com ED52 © Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2007 All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited. Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document. BK889B PONT DE MESURE RLC DE TABLE AVEC INTERFACE USB MANUEL D’UTILISATION RÉSUMÉ DES RÈGLES DE SÉCURITÉ GÉNÉRALITÉS – Les informations générales de sécurité données ici sont valables à la fois pour le personnel qui utilise l’appareil et pour le personnel de maintenance. TERMES – Dans ce manuel, l’indication ATTENTION identifie les conditions ou pratiques qui peuvent occasionner des dommages à l’équipement ou autres biens, et l’indication DANGER identifie les conditions ou pratiques qui peuvent occasionner des blessures ou présenter un risque vital pour le personnel. Ne pas passer outre les indications ATTENTION et DANGER avant d’avoir bien compris et rempli les conditions indiquées. FONCTIONNEMENT – Avant la mise sous tension, respecter les instructions d’installation et d’utilisation. MISE À LA TERRE – Cet appareil est mis à la terre par le conducteur de terre du câble d’alimentation. Ne pas détériorer cette connexion. En cas d’absence de protection par mise à la terre, toutes les parties conductrices accessibles (y compris les boutons et commandes) peuvent provoquer un choc électrique. ADDITIONNELLEMENT – Toute opération de réglage, maintenance ou réparation ne doit être effectuée que par un personnel qualifié. – Pour éviter les risques de dommages corporels, ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec le couvercle ou les panneaux démontés. – Utiliser uniquement des fusibles du type spécifié dans la liste des composants. Ne jamais utiliser des fusibles réparés ni court-circuiter les porte fusibles. – N’effectuer aucune modification non-autorisée de l’instrument. – Ne pas utiliser l’instrument en présence de gaz inflammables ou en atmosphère explosive. – Déconnecter le câble d’alimentation avant de démonter les panneaux de protection, de souder ou de remplacer des composants. – Ne pas entreprendre de manipulations ou réglages internes hors de la présence d’une personne capable de porter les premiers secours et de pratiquer une réanimation. Sommaire SOMMAIRE......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 1.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 1.2 PARAMÈTRES D’IMPÉDANCE .................................................................................................................................................................................................4 1.3 SPÉCIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 1.4 ACCESSOIRES .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................12 2. UTILISATION.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13 2.1 DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................................................................................................13 2.2 MESURES..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.1 Calibration ouverte/fermée ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.2 Mode Relatif..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.3 Range Hold (maintien de la gamme) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.4 Mesure de la résistance continue.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14 2.2.5 Mesure de l’impédance AC...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15 2.2.6 Mesure de la capacité ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15 2.2.7 Mesure de l’inductance.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15 3. MODES................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 3.1 SYNTAXE DE LA COMMANDE DU MODE REMOTE MODE....................................................................................................................................................19 3.2 COMMANDES DU MODE REMOTE........................................................................................................................................................................................19 4. APPLICATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25 4.1 CONNEXION DES FILS DE MESURE .......................................................................................................................................................................................25 4.2 COMPENSATION OUVERTE/FERMÉE.....................................................................................................................................................................................27 4.3 CHOIX DU MODE SÉRIE OU PARALLÈLE ...............................................................................................................................................................................28 3 1. Introduction 1.1Général Le pont de mesure RLC de table avec interface USB BK889B est un instrument très précis utilisé pour mesurer les inductances, capacités et résistances avec une précision de base de 0.1%. Grâce à ses fonctions intégrées de mesures de tension/courant AC/DC et de vérifications de la continuité et de test diode, le BK889B ne permet pas seulement de comprendre les caractéristiques des composants électroniques, c’est aussi un outil essentiel pour tout usage en laboratoire. Le BK889B est par défaut en mode gammes automatiques. Cependant, il peut aussi être utilisé en gammes automatiques et manuelles en appuyant sur la touche Range Hold. Lorsque le mode mesure LCR est sélectionné, l’une des fréquences de test (100Hz, 120Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz, 100KHz ou 200KHz) peut être sélectionnée sur toutes les gammes applicables. L’une des tensions de test (50mVeff, 0.25Veff, 1Veff ou 1VDC) (DCR uniquement) peut aussi être sélectionnée sur toutes les gammes applicables. Le double affichage permet d’effectuer des mesures en simultané. Lorsque le mode mesure tension/courant DC/AC ou le mode Vérification de la continuité de la diode/audible est sélectionné, seul l’affichage secondaire sera utilisé pour afficher la mesure. Le BK889B peut effectuer virtuellement toutes les fonctions des ponts RLC de table. Grâce à sa précision de base de 0.1%, l’instrument économique peut remplacer un pont plus cher dans divers cas. De plus, avec une précision de base de 0.4% dans les mesures de tension et de courant, le BK889B possède les mêmes fonctions qu’un multimètre numérique, vous disposez ainsi de plusieurs instruments en un. Le BK889B peut servir à vérifier les valeurs ESR des condensateurs, régler et/ou sélectionner des composants, mesurer des composants banalisés et inconnus, puis mesurer la capacité, l’inductance ou la résistance des câbles, des commutateurs, des circuits imprimés, etc. Les caractéristiques principales sont les suivantes : 1. Mesures de la tension : · AC : True RMS, jusqu’à 600Veff @ 40~1 kHz · DC : jusqu’à 600V · Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm 2. Mesures du courant : · AC : True RMS, jusqu’à 2Aeff @ 40~1 kHz · DC : jusqu’à 2A · Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm@>20mA ; 10Ohm @<20mA 3. Vérifications continuité Diode/Audible : · Tension en circuit ouvert : 5Vdc · Courant de court-circuit : 2.5mA · Buzzer activé : < 25 · Buzzer désactivé : > 50 4. Mesures LCR : · Conditions de test · Fréquence : 100Hz/120Hz/ 1KHz/ 100KHz / 200KHz · Niveau : 1Veff/0.25Veff/50mVeff/1VDC (DCR uniquement) · Paramètres de mesure : Z, Ls, Lp, Cs, Cp, DCR, ESR, D, Q et θ · Précision de base : 0.1% · Double affichage LCD · Gamme automatique ou gamme Hold · Interface USB · Calibration ouverte/fermée · Affichage principal des paramètres : · Z : Impédance alternative · DCR : Résistance continue · Ls : Inductance série · Lp : Inductance parallèle · Cs : Capacité série · Cp : Capacité parallèle · Affichage secondaire · θ: Angle de phase · ESR : Résistance série équivalente · D : Facteur de dissipation · Q : Facteur de qualité · Combinaisons d’affichage : · Mode Série : Z-θ, Cs – Q, Cs – ESR, Ls – D, Ls – Q, Ls – ESR Mode Parallèle : Cp – D, Cp – Q, Lp – D, Lp – Q 4 1.2 Paramètres d’impédance A cause des différents signaux de test sur l’instrument de mesure d’impédance, il y a l’impédance DC et l’impédance AC. Le multimètre numérique classique peut uniquement mesurer l'impédance DC mais le BK889B peut mesurer les deux. Il est très important de comprendre les paramètres d’impédance des composants électroniques. Lorsque nous analysons l’impédance avec le plan de mesure d’impédance (figure 1.1), elle peut être visualisée par un élément réel sur l’axe X et un élément imaginaire sur l’axe Y. Le plan de mesure d’impédance peut aussi être perçu comme des coordonnées polaires. Le Z représente la magnitude et le θ est la phase de l’impédance. ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (Ohm ) Reactance Resistance Impedance W = = = = = = - = = + = + = Ð W         S S X R Z Rs X s X s Z Sin Tan Rs Z Cos Z Rs X s Z Rs jX s Z 1 2 2 q q q q Il existe deux types de réactance : Inductive (XL) et Capacitive (XC) pouvant être définies de la manière suivante : Il y a aussi le facteur de Qualité (Q) et le facteur de Dissipation (D) qui doivent être traités. Le facteur Qualité sert de mesure de la pureté de la réactance pour le composant. En réalité, il y a toujours une résistance associée qui dissipe la puissance en augmentant la quantité d’énergie qui peut être récupérée. Le facteur Qualité peut être défini comme le rapport énergie stockée (réactance)/énergie dissipée (résistance). Q sert généralement pour les inductances et D pour les condensateurs. X s R s Z (R s , X s ) Z q Axe imaginaire Axe réel Figure 1.1 C fC XC X L L fL w p w p 2 1 1 2 = = = = C p R p L p R p X p R p G B Rs C s Rs Ls Rs X s D Q w w w w d = = = = = = = = = 1 tan 1 1 L = Inductance (H) C = Capacité (F) f = Fréquence (Hz) 5 Il existe deux types de circuits : le mode série et le mode parallèle. Regarder la figure 1.2 pour découvrir la relation des modes série et parallèle. 1.3 Spécifications  Gamme de mesure: Paramètre Gamme Z 0.000 W à 500.0 MW L 0.030 μH à 9999 H C 0.003 pF à 80.00 mF DCR 0.000 W à 500.0 MW ESR 0.000 W à 9999 W D 0.000 à 9999 Q 0.000 à 9999 θ -180.0 ° à 180.0 ° Mesure de tension/courant V 0.0 mV à +/- 600 V A 0.000 mA à +/- 2 A  Précision (Ae): 1. Mesure de la tension continue : Gamme : 2V, 20V, 200V et 600V Résolution : 1mV, 10mV, 100mV et 1V Précision :+/- (0.4% + 3 digits) Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm 2. Mesure de la tension alternative (True RMS) Gamme : 2V, 20V, 200V et 600V Résolution : 1mV, 10mV, 100mV et 1V Précision :+/- (0.8% + 5 digits) Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm 3. Mesure du courant continu : Gamme : 2mA, 20mA, 200mA et 2000mA Résolution : 1μA, 10μA, 100μA et 1μA Précision :+/- (0.4% + 3 digits) Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm @ >20mA, 10 Ohm @ £20mA 4. Mesure du courant alternatif (True RMS) Gamme : 2mA, 20mA, 200mA et 2000mA Résolution : 1μA, 10μA, 100μA et 1μA Précision :+/- (0.8% + 5 digits) Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm @ >20mA, 10 Ohm @ £20mA Figure 1.2 Les composants réels et imaginaires sont en série Z = Rs + jXs Rs jXs Les composants réels et imaginaires sont en parallèle G=1/Rp jB=1/jXp Y =G+ jB jXp Rp jXP 1 RP 1 Y = + 6 Note : La précision des mesures de tension/courant DC/AC s’applique uniquement sur 5%-10% de la gamme 5. Mesure LCR: Précision Z (Ae) : |Zx| Freq. 20M ~ 10M (W) 10M ~ 1M (W) 1M ~ 100K (W) 100K ~ 10K (W) 10K ~ 1K (W) 1K ~ 100 (W) 100 ~ 1 (W) 1 ~ 0.1 (W) DCR 0.1% ±1 0.2% ±1 100Hz 120Hz 1KHz 2% ±1  1% ±1 10KHz 5% ±1  2% ±1 0.5% ±1 0.2% ±1 0.5% ±1 1% ±1  100KHz 200KHz  NA 5% ±1 2% ±1 1% ±1 0.4% ±1 1% ±1 2% ±1 5% ±1 Note: 1. La précision s’applique lorsque le niveau de test est à 1Veff 2. Ae multiplie 1,25 lorsque le niveau de test est à 250mVeff 3. Ae multiplie 1,50 lorsque le niveau de test est à 50mVeff 4. Lorsque l’on mesure L et C, multiplier Ae par 1+Dx2 si Dx>0.1  : Ae s’applique uniquement lorsque le niveau de test est à 1Vrms. Précision C : 79.57pF | 159.1pF 159.1pF | 1.591nF 1.591nF | 15.91nF 15.91nF | 159.1uF 159.1nF | 1.591uF 1.591uF | 15.91uF 15.91uF | 1591uF 1591uF | 100Hz 15.91mF 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  66.31pF | 132.6pF 132.6pF | 1.326nF 1.326nF | 13.26nF 13.26nF | 132.6nF 132.6nF | 1.326uF 1.326uF | 13.26uF 13.26uF | 1326uF 1326uF | 120Hz 13.26mF 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  7.957pF | 15.91pF 15.91pF | 159.1pF 159.1pF | 1.591nF 1.591nF | 15.91nF 15.91nF | 159.1nF 159.1nF | 1.591uF 1.591uF | 159.1uF 159.1uF | 1KHz 1.591mF 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  10KHz 0.795pF | 1.591pF 1.591pF | 15.91pF 15.91pF | 159.1pF 159.1pF | 1.591nF 1.591nF | 15.91nF 15.91nF | 159.1nF 159.1nF | 15.91uF 15.91uF | 159.1uF 7 5% ± 1  2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  NA 0.159pF | 1.591pF 1.591pF | 15.91pF 15.91pF | 159.1pF 159.1pF | 1.591nF 1.591nF | 15.91nF 15.91nF | 1.591uF 1.591uF | 15.91uF 100KHz  NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1%± 1 0.4%± 1 1%± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1 NA 0.079pF | 0.795pF 0.795pF | 7.957pF 7.957pF | 79.57pF 79.57pF | 795.7pF 795.7pF | 7.957nF 7.957nF | 795.7nF 795.7nF | 7.957uF 200KHz  NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1%± 1 0.4%± 1 1%± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1 Précision L: 31.83KH | 15.91KH 15.91KH | 1591H 1591H | 159.1H 159.1H | 15.91H 15.91H | 1.591H 1.591H | 159.1mH 159.1mH | 1.591mH 1.591mH | 100Hz 159.1uH 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  26.52KH | 13.26KH 13.26KH | 1326H 1326H | 132.6H 132.6H | 13.26H 13.26H | 1.326H 1.326H | 132.6mH 132.6mH | 1.326mH 1.326mH | 120Hz 132.6uH 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  3.183KH | 1.591KH 1.591KH | 159.1H 159.1H | 15.91H 15.91H | 1.591H 1.591H | 159.1mH 159.1mH | 15.91mH 15.91mH | 159.1uH 159.1uH | 1KHz 15.91uH 2% ± 1  1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  318.3H | 159.1H 159.1H | 15.91H 15.91H | 1.591H 1.591H | 159.1mH 159.1mH | 15.91mH 15.91mH | 1.591mH 1.591mH | 15.91uH 15.91uH | 10KHz 1.591uH 5% ± 1  2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1  31.83H | 15.91H 15.91H | 1.591H 1.591H | 159.1mH 159.1mH | 15.91mH 15.91mH | 1.591mH 1.591mH | 159.1uH 159.1uH | 1.591uH 1.591uH | 0.159uH 100KHz  NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1% ± 1 0.4% ± 1 1% ± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1 15.91H | 7.957H 7.957H | 795.7mH 795.7mH | 79.57mH 79.57mH | 7.957mH 7.957mH | 795.7uH 795.7uH | 79.57uH 79.57uH | 0.795uH 0.795uH | 0.079uH 200KHz  NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1% ± 1 0.4% ± 1 1% ± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1 Précision D: 8 |Zx| Freq. 20M ~ 10M (W) 10M ~ 1M (W) 1M ~ 100K (W) 100K ~ 10K (W) 10K ~ 1K (W) 1K ~ 100 (W) 100 ~ 1 (W) 1 ~ 0.1 (W) 100Hz ±0.002 ±0.002 120Hz 1KHz ±0.020  ±0.010 10KHz ±0.050  ±0.020 ±0.005 ±0.002 ±0.005 ±0.010  100KHz 200KHz  NA ±0.050 ±0.020 ±0.010 ±0.004 ±0.010 ±0.020 ±0.050 Précision q: |Zx| Freq. 20M ~ 10M (W) 10M ~ 1M (W) 1M ~ 100K (W) 100K ~ 10K (W) 10K ~ 1K (W) 1K ~ 100 (W) 100 ~ 1 (W) 1 ~ 0.1 (W) 100Hz ±0.105 ±0.105 120Hz 1KHz ±1.046  ±0.523 10KHz ±2.615  ±1.046 ±0.261 ±0.105 ±0.261 ±0.523  100KHz 200KHz  NA ±2.615 ±1.046 ±0.409 ±0.209 ±0.409 ±1.046 ±2.615 Précision Z: Voir tableau 1. Précision C: f Cx Zx × × × = 2 p 1 CAe = Ae of C f : Fréquence de test (Hz) Cx : Valeur de capacité mesurée (F) |Zx| : Valeur d’impédance mesurée () La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) < 0.1 Lorsque Dx>0.1, multiplier CAe par 1 + Dx2 Exemple : Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 100nF Donc 9 - = W × × × × = × × × = 1590 2 103 100 10 9 1 2 1 p p f Cx Zx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir CAe=±0.1% Précision L: Zx = 2 ×p × f × Lx LAe = Ae of L f : Fréquence de test (Hz) Lx : Valeur d’inductance mesurée (F) |Zx| : Valeur d’impédance mesurée () La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) < 0.1 Lorsque Dx>0.1, multiplier LAe par 1 + Dx2 Exemple : Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 1mH Donc = × × × - = W = × × × 2 10 3 10 3 6.283 2 p Zx p f Lx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir LAe = ±0.5% Précision ESR: 100 Ae ESRAe = ±Xx × f Cx Xx f Lx × × × = × × × = p p 2 1 2 ESRAe = Ae de ESR f :Fréquence de test (Hz) Xx :Valeur de réactance mesurée () Lx :Valeur d’inductance mesurée (H) Cx : Valeur de capacité mesurée (F) La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) £ 0.1 Exemple: Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 100nF Donc - = W × × × × = × × × = 1590 2 10 3 100 10 9 1 2 1 p p f Cx Zx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir CAe=±0.1%, 10 = ± × = ±1.59W 100 Ae ESR Ae Xx Précision D: 100 Ae D Ae = ± DAe = Ae de D La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) £ 0.1 Lorsque Dx > 0.1, multiplier Dx par (1+Dx) Exemple : Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 100nF Donc - = W × × × × = × × × = 1590 2 10 3 100 10 9 1 2 1 p p f Cx Zx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir CAe=±0.1%, 0.002 100 = ± × = ± Ae D Ae Précision Q: Qx De Qx De Ae Q × = ± × 1 m 2 QAe = Ae de Q Qx : Valeur du facteur Qualité mesuré De : Valeur de précision relative La précision s’applique lorsque Qx × De < 1 Exemple : Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 1mH Donc = × × × - = W = × × × 2 10 3 10 3 6.283 2 p Zx p f Lx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir LAe=±0.5%, 0.005 100 = ± × = ± Ae De Si Qx = 20 Donc 11 1 0.1 2 1 2 m m = ± × = ± × Qx De Qx De Q Ae Précision θ: 100 Ae π 180 = × Ae q Exemple : Condition de test : Fréquence : 1KHz Niveau : 1Veff DUT : 100nF Donc - = W × × × × = × × × = 1590 2 10 3 100 10 9 1 2 1 p p f Cx Zx Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir ZAe=±0.1%, 0 .057 deg 100 180 0 .1 100 180 = ± × = ± = ± × p p q Ae Ae  Signal de test : Précision du niveau : + 10% Précision de la fréquence : 0.1%  Impédance de sortie : 100W ± 5%  Température : 0°C à 40°C (Utilisation) -20°C à 70°C (Stockage) Humidité relative : Jusqu’à 85% Puissance AC : 110/220V, 60/50Hz Dimensions : 300mm x 220mm x 150mm Masse : 4500g Attention Lorsque le mode de mesure RLC est sélectionné, les facteurs suivants doivent être pris en compte. Fréquence de test : elle peut être choisie et modifiée par l’utilisateur. En général, un signal de test de 1KHz ou plus élevé sert à mesurer les condensateurs qui sont de 0.01μF ou moins, et un signal de test de 120Hz sert pour les condensateurs de 10 μF ou plus. Un signal de test de 1KHz ou plus sert à mesurer les inductances utilisés dans les circuits audio et RF (fréquence radio). C’est parce que ces types d’inductances fonctionnent à de hautes fréquences et exigent d’être mesurés à haute fréquence. En général, les inductances inférieures à 2mH devraient être mesurées à la fréquence de test de 1KHz ou plus, et les inductances supérieures à 200H devraient être mesurées à 120Hz ou moins. Il est recommandé de vérifier la feuille des données du composant pour déterminer la meilleure fréquence de test. Condensateurs chargés : Toujours décharger un condensateur avant d’effectuer des mesures car cela pourrait endommager l’instrument. 12 Effet de D sur la précision A: diminuer la mesure D (Facteur de dissipation) est désirable. Les condensateurs électrolytiques possèdent un facteur de dissipation élevé dû à leur perte normalement élevée. Si D (facteur de dissipation) est trop élevé, la précision de la mesure de capacité peut se dégrader. Il est recommandé de vérifier la feuille des données du composant pour déterminer la valeur D souhaitable du composant. Capacité de mesure des câbles, commutateurs ou autres éléments : mesurer la capacité des câbles coaxiaux est très utile pour déterminer la longueur du câble. La majorité des spécifications donnant la capacité/unité de longueur de câble, c’est pour cela que la longueur du câble peut être déterminée en mesurant la capacité de ce câble. Par exemple : les spécifications exigent un certain câble pour avoir une capacité de 10pF par pied. Après avoir mesuré le câble, la valeur de capacité qui s’affiche est 1.000nF. Diviser 1000pF (1.000nF) par 10pF par pied donne une longueur du câble d’environ 100 pieds. Même si les spécifications sont inconnues, la capacité d’une longueur mesuré du câble (comme 10 pieds) peut être utilisée pour déterminer la capacité/pied. Ne pas utiliser une longueur trop courte car toute erreur sur les calculs de la longueur totale est proportionnelle. Mesures série ou Parallèle (pour inductances) : le mode série affiche la mesure la plus précise dans tous les cas. Le mode série équivalent est essentiel pour obtenir une mesure Q précise de faibles inductances. Là où le risque de pertes sont plus importantes, le mode série équivalent est préférable. Cependant, il existe des cas où le mode parallèle équivalent est le plus approprié. Pour le fonctionnement des inductances en fer (hautes fréquences) où l’hystérésis et les courants de Foucault deviennent important, la mesure en mode parallèle équivalent est préférable. 1.4Accessoires · Un manuel d’utilisation · Un cordon d’alimentation AC · Une pince Kelvin · Un câble de mesure pour multimètre numérique 13 2. Utilisation 2.1 Description 1. Affichage du paramètre primaire 2. Affichage du paramètre secondaire 3. Touche Fonction L/C/Z/DCR 4. Touche Fonction DCA/ACA 5. Touche Fréquence de mesure 6. Borne LCUR 7. Touche Niveau de mesure 8. Touche Range Hold (maintenir la gamme) 9. Référence du modèle 10. Borne LPOT 11. Touche Fonction D/Q/θ/ESR 12. Borne HPOT 13. Touche Calibration ouverte 14. Touche Fonction DCV/ACV 15. Touche Relatif 16. Borne HCUR 17. Touche Calibration 18. Touche Fonction Diode/Continuité 19. Touche Fonction à distance 21. Marche/Arrêt 23. Puissance AC 25. Borne A 20. Borne COM 22. Borne V/Diode/Continuité 24. Port USB 26. Fusible 2A 14 2.2 Mesures 2.2.1 Calibration circuit ouvert/court-circuit Le BK889B effectue des calibrations circuit ouvert/court-circuit qui permettent à l’utilisateur d’obtenir plus de précision pour mesurer une impédance haute ou basse. Nous vous recommandons d’effectuer ce type de calibration si le niveau ou la fréquence de test a été modifiée.  Calibration en circuit ouvert Les bornes de mesure étant à l’état circuit ouvert, appuyer sur la touche Open puis l’écran suivant apparaît: Cette calibration dure environ 15 secondes. Une fois la calibration terminée, le BK889B émettra un bip pour indiquer la fin de la calibration.  Calibration en court-circuit Pour effectuer une calibration en court-circuit, insérer un court-circuit sur les bornes de mesure. Appuyer sur Short puis l’écran suivant s’affiche: Cette calibration dure environ 15 secondes. Une fois la calibration terminée, le BK889B émettra un bip pour indiquer la fin de la calibration. 2.2.2 Mode Relatif Le mode relatif permet de trier rapidement les composants. Insérer le composant de la valeur de référence pour lire la valeur standard. (Environ 5 secondes pour une lecture stable.) Puis appuyer sur Relative , l’affichage principal se remettra à zéro. Retirer le composant de la valeur de référence et insérer un composant inconnu, l’écran indiquera la valeur qui représente la différence entre la valeur de référence et la valeur inconnue. 2.2.3 Range Hold (maintien de la gamme) Pour mettre l’appareil sur Range Hold, insérer un composant de référence sur cette gamme de mesure. (Environ 5 secondes pour une lecture stable.) Puis appuyer sur Range Hold , cela maintiendra la gamme de 0.5 à 2 fois la gamme de mesure du courant. Lorsque l’on appuie sur Range Hold , l’écran suivant s’affiche: 2.2.4 Mesure de la résistance continue La mesure de la résistance continue permet de mesurer la résistance d’un composant inconnu sous 1VDC. Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner la mesure DCR. L’écran affiche: 15 2.2.5 Mesure de l’impédance AC (Z) La mesure de l‘impédance AC permet de mesurer le Z d’un appareil inconnu. Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner la mesure Z. L’écran affiche: Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq. 2.2.6 Mesure de la capacité Pour mesurer la capacité d’un composant, appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner le mode de mesure Cs (Mode Série) ou Cp (Mode Parallèle). Si le mode série (Cs) est sélectionné, le D, Q et ESR s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Si le mode Parallèle (Cp) est sélectionné, seuls le D et Q s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Voici des exemples de mesures de capacité : Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq. 2.2.7 Mesure de l’inductance Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner le mode Ls ou Lp pour mesurer l’inductance en mode série ou en mode parallèle. Si le mode série (Ls) est sélectionné, le D, Q et ESR s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Si le mode Parallèle (Lp) est sélectionné, seuls le D et Q s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Voici des exemples de mesures d’inductance : Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq. 3. Modes Le BK889B possède quatre modes de fonctionnement : Normal, Binning , Remote et Remote Binning. En appuyant sur Remote , l’utilisateur peut sélectionner l’un des 4 modes ci-dessus.  Mode Normal: 16 Le mode Normal est le mode par défaut. C’est un mode local qui fait que le BK889B est piloté par le clavier et les résultats seront envoyés à l’afficheur et au PC équipé d’un port USB.  Mode Binning: Le mode Binning est réservé au prochain usage (comme GPIB). Il est réglé pour fonctionner de la même façon que le mode Normal qui reçoit des commandes depuis le clavier et qui envoie les résultats à l’afficheur et au PC équipé d’un port USB.  Mode Remote Binning: En mode Remote Binning, le “RMT Bin” sur l’écran s’allumera, le fonctionnement du BK889B est piloté par un PC équipé d’un port USB ou par une borne, les résultats seront envoyés à l’afficheur local et au poste de travail via le port USB. Dans ce mode, toutes les touches sauf Remote sont verrouillées. Le mode Remote Binning permet une meilleure et plus rapide utilisation les programmes d’application. L’utilisateur peut créer un serveur ou un pilote (n’importe quel composant de logiciel peut effectuer la tâche d’un serveur) avec l’interface Graphic, le modèle de réseau OSI, et le puissant interprète intégré à l’afficheur Graphique du support, la connectivité du réseau, les interprétations de la commande de structure (SCPI, IEEE488 etc.) et fera un pont entre le programme d’application de haut niveau comme VB, VISUAL C++, EXCEL, ACCESS etc. et le BK889B. Voir la figure suivante : Le protocole de communication entre le BK889B et un PC équipé d’un port USB se décrit de la manière suivante : 1. Les commandes qui seront envoyées d’un PC à distance à un BK889B sont utilisées pour paramétrer la machine sur un mode de mesure sélectionné. La syntaxe de la commande est: MOD current-state-code Elle commence toujours par MOD suivi par un espace puis par le code d’état actuel. Le code d’état actuel qui est défini dans le tableau ci-dessous fait 3 octets (24 bits), bit-23, 22, 21… bit-0, où bit-23 est le MSB et bit-0 est le LSB. Position du bit LCR DC/AC V/A Bit 2 – Bit 0 (freq test) Réservé 000 100 Hz 001 120 Hz 010 1K Hz 011 10K Hz 100 100K Hz Modèle BK889B Serveur: COM, DCOM, ATL, CONTROL, AUTOMATION EXE Intégrés: Graphic interface, Réseau OSI, et/ou puissant Interprète ou Analyseur VB, VISUAL C++, EXCEL, ACCESS etc. 17 101 200K Hz 110 Réservé 111 Réservé Bit 4 – Bit 3 (niveau test) Réservé 00 50 mVeff 01 250 mVeff 10 1 Veff 11 Réservé Bit 5 Réservé 0 Défaut Défaut 1 Réservé Réservé Bit 6 0 Relatif Relatif 1 Normal Normal Bit 7 0 Calibration Calibration 1 Normal Normal Bit 10 – Bit 8 Réservé 000 Lp 001 Ls 010 Cp 011 Cs 100 Z 101 DCR 110 Réservé 111 Réservé Bit 12 – Bit 11 Réservé 00 D 01 Q 10 DEG 11 ESR Bit 16 – Bit 13 0000 RH nH Réservé 0001 RH uH RH mV, mA 0010 RH mH RH V, A 0011 RH H Réservé 0100 RH pF 0101 RH nF 0110 RH uF 0111 RH mF 1000 RH F 1001 RH Ohm 1010 RH K-Ohm 1011 RH M-Ohm 1100 Réservé 1101 1110 1111 Gamme automatique Gamme automatique Bit 17 0 Calibration court-circuit Calibration court-circuit 1 Calibration circuit ouvert Réservé 18 Bit 21 – Bit 18 Modes de mesure 0000 Réservé 0001 LCR 0010 DCV 0011 ACV 0100 Diode 0101 Continuité 0110 DCA 0111 ACA Autres Réservé Bit 23 – Bit 22 Réservé 00 01 10 11 Par exemple : si la fonction LCR, Cp en mode mesure D est sélectionné en gamme automatique en calibration relative ouverte/fermée sont désactivés et le signal du test est à 1 Veff dans 1KHz, la commande est la suivante : MOD 000001111110001011010010 2. Les résultats qui seront envoyés du BK889B au PC à distance seront empaquetés dans un format de 7 octets ou de 11 octets. Lorsque les données doubles (comme Cp avec D) seront envoyées, les données seront empaquetées dans un format de 11 octets comme indiqué ci-dessous: Lead_code1 : 02 Lead_code2 : 09 Data_code : mesure 8 octets; deux formats de nombre de points instables de 32 bits ; les 4 premiers octets sont la mesure principale (Cp) et la deuxième série de 4 octets représentent la mesure secondaire (D) Checksum : -((02+09+data_code) && 0x00FF) 02 09 M-B0 M-B1 M-B2 M-B3 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 CS Où M-Bx et S-Bx sont la mesure principale et secondaire. Lorsque seule la mesure principale (comme DCR) est envoyée, les données sont empaquetées dans un format de 7 octets décrits ci-dessous: Lead_code1 : 02 Lead_code2 : 03 Data_code : mesure 4 octets Checksum : -((02+03+data_code) && 0x00FF) 02 03 M-B0 M-B1 M-B2 M-B3 CS Lorsque seule la mesure secondaire (comme DCV) est envoyée, les données sont empaquetées dans un format de 11 octets décrits ci-dessous: Lead_code1 : 02 Lead_code2 : 09 Data_code : mesure 8 octets Checksum : -((02+09+data_code) && 0x00FF) 02 09 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 CS 19  Mode Remote: En mode Remote, le “RMT” sur l’écran s’allumera et le BK889B pourra communiquer avec le PC équipé d’une interface USB ou une borne via le port USB. Voici le paramétrage de la connexion : Mode Transmission : Semi-duplex Vitesse de transmission : 9600 Parité : Aucune Bits de données : 8 Stop : 1 Liaison : Aucune Dans ce mode, l’écran et toutes les touches sauf Remote seront verrouillés. Le programme externe pilote le BK889B via le port USB. 3.1 Syntaxe de la commande du Mode Remote La syntaxe de la commande est la suivante: COMMAND(?) (PARAMETER) Le format de COMMAND et PARAMETER est le suivant: 1. Il y a au moins un espace entre COMMAND et PARAMETER. 2. Le PARAMETER doit uniquement utiliser la chaîne ASCII pas le code numérique. 3. Le paramètre de la valeur peut être un entier, instable ou exposant avec l’unité. Par exemple : 50mV 0.05V 5.0e1mV 4. Le point d’interrogation (?) à la fin de COMMAND représente une demande ou une commande de mesure. Par exemple : “CpD” fixe le mode de mesure sur Cp et D. “CpD?” fixe le mode de mesure sur Cp et D, mesure les valeurs et les renvoie. 5. COMMAND et PARAMETER peuvent être soit en majuscule soit en minuscule. Mais pour décrire la valeur dans le PARAMETER, il devrait y avoir une différence entre milli (m) et méga (M). Par exemple: 1mV équivaut à 0.001V. 1MV équivaut à 1000000V. 6. Le caractère à la “fin de la commande” doit être placé à la fin: ASCII CR (0DH) ou ASCII LF (0AH) 3.2 Commandes du Mode Remote Commande de paramétrage (ou de demande) de la mesure Le paramétrage suivant et les commandes de demande sont pris en charge par le BK889B. Lorsque la commande de paramétrage du mode de mesure est entrée, le BK889B renvoie “OK” lorsque le paramétrage est terminé. Lorsque la commande de demande est entrée, le BK889B revoie les valeurs de mesure.  DCR(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance continue.  CpRp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et de la résistance parallèle.  CpQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et du facteur de qualité.  CpD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et du facteur de dissipation.  CsRs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et de la 20 résistance série.  CsQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et du facteur de qualité.  CsD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et du facteur de dissipation.  LpRp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance parallèle et de l’inductance parallèle.  LpQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance parallèle et du facteur de qualité.  LpD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance parallèle et du facteur de dissipation.  LsRs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et la résistance série.  LsQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et le facteur de qualité.  LsD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et du facteur de dissipation.  RsXs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et la réactance série.  RpXp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance parallèle et de la réactance parallèle.  ZTD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’impédance et de l’angle (Deg).  ZTR(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’impédance et de l’angle (Rad).  DCV(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la tension continue.  ACV(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la tension alternative.  DCA(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure du courant continu.  ACA(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure du courant alternatif. Exemple: CPD (sur Cp- mode D) OK CPD? 0.22724 0.12840 (retour des valeurs) DCR? 5.1029 (retour de la valeur) *IDN? Demande l’identité du BK889B. Cette commande sert à identifier les informations de base du BK889B. La valeur retournée a quatre champs séparés par une virgule (,). La longueur totale n’est pas supérieure à 100 caractères. Les quatre champs sont: 1. Nom du fabricant 2. Numéro du modèle 3. Numéro de série 4. Numéro de la version du logiciel Exemple: *IDN? B&K PRECISION CORP. MODEL889B,123456789,4.096 21 *RST Remet le BK889B dans son état par défaut. L’état par défaut est : 1KHz 1Vrms CpD uF Une fois le BK889B remis à zéro, il retournera la chaîne d’identité. ASC Définit le format de la valeur de retour. Cette commande fixe le retour de la chaîne ASCII ou du code numérique. PARAMETER: ON chaîne ASCII OFF code numérique Exemple: ASC ON OK (retour) FREQ? 1KHz (retour) ASC OFF OK (retour) FREQ? 2 (retour) CORR OPEN Effectue la calibration circuit ouvert. CORR SHORT Effectue la calibration court-circuit. FREQ(?) PARAMETER Définit (demande) la fréquence de mesure.  FREQ PARAMETER Définit la fréquence de mesure en fonction du paramètre. Lorsque la commande de paramétrage est entrée, le BK889B retourne “OK” à la fin du paramétrage. PARAMETER: Chaîne ASCII Code numérique 100Hz 0 120Hz 1 1KHz 2 10KHz 3 100KHz 4 200KHz 5 Exemple: FREQ 100KHz OK (retour)  FREQ? Retourne le paramètre de fréquence de la mesure. Exemple: ASC ON OK FREQ? 1KHz (valeur de retour) ASC OFF OK 22 FREQ? 2 (valeur de retour) LEV(?) PARAMETER Définit (demande) le niveau de mesure.  LEV PARAMETER Définit le niveau de mesure en fonction du paramètre. Lorsque le paramétrage est terminé, le BK889B retourne “OK”. PARAMETER: Chaîne ASCII Code numérique 1VDC 0 1Vrms 1 250mVrms 2 50mVrms 3 Exemple: LEV 1V OK  LEV? Retourne le paramètre du niveau de mesure. Exemple: ASC ON OK LEV? 1Vrms (valeur de retour) ASC OFF OK LEV? 1 (valeur de retour) MODE? Demande du mode de mesure. Si en mode LCR, six champs doivent être retournés. 1. Fréquence 2. Niveau 3. Mode de mesure 4. Unité de l’affichage principal 5. Unité de l’affichage secondaire L’existence du champ 5 dépend du mode de mesure. Par exemple, il n’y a pas de champ 5 si le mode de mesure est le mode DCR. Les champs sont séparés par un espace (ASCII 20H). Exemple: ASC ON OK CPD OK MODE? 1KHz 1Vrms CpD uF (valeur de retour) ASC ON OK CPRP OK MODE? 1KHz 1Vrms CpRp uF Ohm (valeur de retour) 23 Si en mode de mesure de la tension, les trois champs sont retournés. 1. Mode de mesure 2. Unité de l’affichage principal Exemple: ASC ON OK DCV OK MODE? DCV V (valeur de retour) RANG mV OK MODE? DCV mV (valeur de retour) RANG(?) PARAMETER Définit (demande) l’unité de mesure.  RANG PARAMETER Définit l’unité de mesure en fonction du paramètre. L’instrument retourne “OK” à la fin du paramétrage. PARAMETER: ASCII Code numérique pF 0 nF 1 uF 2 mF 3 F 4 nH 8 uH 9 mH 10 H 11 KH 12 mOhm 17 Ohm 18 KOhm 19 MOhm 20 mV 21 V 22 mA 23 A 24 Exemple: RANG pF OK  RANG? Retourne le paramètre de l’unité de mesure du courant. Exemple: ASC ON OK RANG? pF (valeur de retour) 24 ASC OFF OK RANG? 0 (valeur de retour) READ? Retourne la valeur de mesure. Cette commande mesurera en fonction du mode de mesure en cours et retournera la valeur mesurée. Exemple: CPD OK READ? 0.22724 0.12840 (valeur de retour) DCR OK READ? 5.1029 (valeur de retour) Les mesures “DCR”, “DCV”, and “ACV” n’enverront qu’une seule valeur mesurée. Les autres modes de mesure enverront deux valeurs mesurées séparées par un espace (ASCII 20H). 25 4.Application 4.1 Connexion des fils de mesure Un pont d’équilibre automatique possède 4 bornes (HCUR, HPOT, LCUR and LPOT) à connecter sur l’appareil à tester (DUT). Il faut comprendre quelle méthode de connexion affectera la précision de la mesure.  Borne 2 (2T) – Mesure 2 fils La Borne 2 est la manière la plus simple de connecter le DUT, mais elle contient de nombreuses erreurs qui sont l’inductance et la résistance ainsi que la capacité parasite des câbles de mesure (Figure 4.1).A cause de ces erreurs, la gamme de mesure d’impédance efficace sera limitée de 100W à 10KW. R HCUR HPOT DUT (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM V DUT A Co o Lo Ro Lo (a) CONNECTION (c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[) 2T 1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M LPOT LCUR Figure 4.1  Borne 3 (3T) – Mesure 3 fils La borne 3 utilise la câble coaxial pour réduire l’effet du condensateur parasite (Figure 4.2). Le blindage du câble coaxial doit être relié au boîtier de l’instrument pour augmenter la gamme de mesure jusqu’à 10MW. DUT V A (d) 2T CONNECTION WITH SHILDING HCUR HPOT DUT (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM V DUT A Co Ro Lo Ro Lo Co doesn't effect measurement result (a) CONNECTION (c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[) 3T 1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M LPOT LCUR Figure 4.2  Borne 4 (4T) – Mesure 4 fils La connexion de la borne 4 réduit l’effet de la résistance du fil de mesure (Figure 4.3). Cette connexion peut améliorer la gamme de mesure jusqu’à 10mW min. Cependant, l’effet de l’inductance du fil de mesure ne peut être éliminée. 26 HCUR HPOT DUT (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM V DUT A (a) CONNECTION (c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE (£[) 4T 1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M LPOT LCUR Figure 4.3  Borne 5 (5T) La connexion de la borne 5 est une combinaison de 3T et 4T (Figure 4.4). Elle possède 4 câbles coaxiaux. Grâce à son avantage de 3T et 4T, cette connexion permet une gamme de mesure de10mW à 10MW. (d) WRONG 4T CONNECTION HPOT DUT (a) CONNECTION (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM (c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE (£[) 5T 1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M HCUR V DUT A V DUT A LPOT LCUR Figure 4.4  Chemin borne 4 (4TP) Cette connexion résout le problème causé par l’inductance du câble de mesure. Le 4TP utilise quatre câbles coaxiaux pour isoler le chemin actuel et le câble de prise de tension (Figure 4.5). Le courant de retour circulera dans le câble coaxial ainsi que dans le blindage. Le flux magnétique généré par le conducteur interne neutralisera donc le flux magnétique généré par le conducteur externe (blindage). La connexion du 4TP augmente la gamme de mesure de 1mW à 10MW. 27 (a) CONNECTION (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM DUT V A (c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[) 4T 1m 10m100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M HPOT DUT HCUR LCUR LPOT HPOT DUT HCUR LCUR LPOT (d) 4T CONNECTION WITH SHILDING Figure 4.5  Elimination de l’effet du condensateur parasite Lorsqu’un composant d’impédance élevée est mesuré (i.e. condensateur de faible valeur), le condensateur parasite devient un problème important (Figure 4.6). Sur la figure 4.6(a), le condensateur parasite Cd est mis en parallèle avec le DUT ainsi que le Ci et le Ch. Pour corriger ce problème, ajouter une protection (Figure 4.6(b)) entre les bornes H et L pour freiner le Cd. Si la protection est connecté à la garde de l’instrument, l’effet de Ci et Ch sera supprimé. (a) Parastic Effect HCUR HPOT LPOT LCUR Cd Connection Point DUT Ch Cl Ground (b) Guard Plant reduces Parastic Effect HCUR HPOT LPOT LCUR Guard Plant Figure 4.6 4.2 Compensation circuit ouvert/court circuit Pour ces instruments de mesure d’impédance de précision, la compensation circuit ouvert/court-circuit doit être utilisée afin de réduire l ‘effet parasite de l’installation de mesure. L’effet parasite de l’installation de mesure peut être traité comme les composants passifs simples sur la figure 4.7(a). Lorsque le DUT est ouvert, l’instrument a une conductance Yp = Gp + jwCp (Figure 4.7(b)). Lorsque le DUT est fermé, l’instrument a une impédance Zs = Rs + jwLs (Figure 4.7(c)). Après la compensation ouverte et fermée, Yp et Zs peuvent donc être utilisés pour le vrai calcul Zdut (Figure 4.7(d)). 28 HCUR HPOT LCUR LPOT Co Zdut Rs Ls Zm Go Redundant Impedance (Zs) Parastic Conductance (Yo) Parastic of the Test Fixture (a) Parastic Effect of the Test Fixture HCUR HPOT LCUR LPOT Co Rs Ls Go (b) OPEN Measurement Yo OPEN Yo = Go + j£sCo 1 (Rs + j£s<< ) Go+j£sCo HCUR HPOT LCUR LPOT Co Rs Ls Go (c) SHORT Measurement Zs SHORT Zs = Rs + j£sLs Zm Yo Zdut Zm - Zs Zdut = 1-(Zm-Zs)Yo (d) Compensation Equation Zs Figure 4.7 4.3 Choix du mode série ou parallèle En fonction du besoin de mesure différent, il existe des modes série et parallèle pour décrire les résultats de mesure. Le choix du mode dépend de la valeur élevée ou basse de l’impédance.  Condensateur L’impédance et la capacité dans le condensateur sont inversement proportionnelles. La capacité la plus élevée signifie donc l’impédance la plus basse, la capacité la plus petite signifie l’impédance la plus élevée. La figure 4.8 indique le circuit équivalent du condensateur. Si la capacité est petite, le Rp est plus important que le Rs. Si la capacité est grande, le Rs ne doit pas être évitée. Il est donc préférable d‘utiliser le mode parallèle pour une mesure de capacité basse et le mode série pour une mesure de capacité élevée. CIRCUIT OUVERT COURT-CIRCUIT 29  Inductance L’impédance et l’inductance sont directement proportionnelles lorsque la fréquence test est fixée. C’est pour cela que l’inductance plus élevée équivaut à l’impédance la plus élevée et vice versa. La figure 4.9 indique le circuit équivalent de l’inductance. Lorsque l’inductance est faible, le Rs devient plus important que le Rp. Lorsque l’inductance est importante, le Rp doit être prix en considération. Il est donc convenable d’utiliser le mode série pour mesurer une inductance basse et le mode parallèle pour mesurer une inductance élevée. Small capacitor (High impedance) C RP RS Effect No Effect Large capacitor (Low impedance) C RP RS Effect No Effect Figure 4.9 Small inductor (Low impedance) L RP RS Large inductor (High impedance) Effect No Effect L RP RS No Effect Effect 30 DECLARATION OF CE CONFORMITY according to EEC directives and NF EN 45014 norm DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE CE suivant directives CEE et norme NF EN 45014 SEFRAM INSTRUMENTS & SYSTEMES 32, rue Edouard MARTEL 42100 SAINT-ETIENNE ( FRANCE) Declares, that the below mentionned product complies with : Déclare que le produit désigné ci-après est conforme à : The European low voltage directive 2006/95/EEC : La directive Européenne basse tension 2006/95/CE NF EN 61010-031 Safety requirements for electrical equipement for measurement, control and laboratory use. Règles de sécurité pour les appareils électriques de mesurage, de régulation et de laboratoire. The European EMC directive 2004/108/EEC : Emission standard EN 50081-1. Immunity standard EN 50082-1. La directive Européenne CEM 2004/108/CE : En émission selon NF EN 50081-1. En immunité selon NF EN 50082-1. Pollution degree Degré de pollution : 2 Product name Désignation : LCR/ESR meter RLC mètre Model Type : BK889B Compliance was demonstrated in listed laboratory and record in test report number La conformité à été démontrée dans un laboratoire reconnu et enregistrée dans le rapport numéro RC BK889B SAINT-ETIENNE the : Name/Position : Tuesday, April 28, 2009 T. TAGLIARINO / Quality Manager 31 SEFRAM 32, rue E. Martel – BP55 F42009 – Saint-Etienne Cedex 2 France Tel : 0825.56.50.50 (0,15€TTC/mn) Fax : 04.77.57.23.23 Web : www.sefram.fr E-mails : Service commercial : sales@sefram.fr Support technique : support@sefram.fr Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation Alimentation à découpage BK1550 Manuel d’utilisation Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation SOMMAIRE TERMES ET SYMBOLES DE SÉCURITÉ.............................................................................................. 1 CONDITIONS D’UTILISATION............................................................................................................... 2 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................ 2 UTILISER L’ALIMENTATION À DÉCOUPAGE 1550 ......................................................................................... 2 UTILISER LE PORT USB............................................................................................................................... 3 COMMANDES ET INDICATEURS.......................................................................................................... 4 MISE EN OEUVRE....................................................................................................................................... 5 CONNEXION À LA TERRE ............................................................................................................................. 5 MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT....................................................................................................................... 5 TENSION CONSTANTE (CV), TRANSITION AUTOMATIQUE ET COURANT CONSTANT (CC) ............................ 6 PRÉRÉGLAGE DE LA VALEUR LIMITE DU COURANT (CC) ............................................................................. 6 PROCÉDURE DE CONNEXION ET DE MISE EN ROUTE ..................................................................................... 6 PROTECTION DE LA SORTIE CONTRE LA SURTENSION (OVP) ...................................................................... 7 PROTECTION CONTRE LA SURCHAUFFE........................................................................................................ 7 SPÉCIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 1 Termes et symboles de sécurité Les termes suivants peuvent être utilisés dans ce manuel ou sur l’instrument : Attention. Se référer au manuel DANGER ! Haute tension – Risque de chocs électriques Terre de protection (Terre) Conducteur de terre Terre (châssis) Prescriptions de sécurité : • L’utilisateur doit être informé des risques liés aux chocs électriques et prendre les précautions nécessaires. • Le raccordement au secteur doit impérativement se faire avec une prise de terre • Toute intervention interne sur le produit (réglages ou réparation) doit se faire par du personnel qualifié Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 2 Conditions d’utilisation • Humidité relative 10 à 80% • Humidité relative maximum de 80% pour une température maximum de 31°C (dégression linéaire pour 50% d’humidité relative à 40°C). • Altitude maximum de fonctionnement: 2000m • Catégorie d’installation : CAT 2 • Degré de pollution: 2 • Fluctuation de la tension du secteur jusqu’à ±10% de la tension normale. Introduction Utiliser l’alimentation à découpage 1550 Cette alimentation est pilotée par microcontrôleur qui assiste la gestion de la tension et du courant de sortie avec une capacité d’alimentation totale de 100W. Le contrôle de l’alimentation est réalisé par un système de commande originale associé à un affichage digital, ainsi vous pouvez facilement configurer la tension et le courant de sortie. C’est une alimentation faible bruit et ondulation et silencieuse, idéale pour le travail en laboratoire, en atelier ou dans l’éducation ou l’espace de travail est limité. Le 1550 a une borne USB, un fonctionnement en courant constant, une protection contre les surtensions, les sorties sont isolées, touche activation/désactivation de la sortie, facteur de formes faibles. Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 3 Utiliser le port USB La sortie USB est destinée à une alimentation USB standard (5VDC et 0.4A). Vous pouvez mettre en marche ou charger vos portables (I-Pod, lecteur MP3 ou téléphone cellulaire*) possédant des connecteurs d’alimentation USB pour obtenir un courant continu de l’ordinateur. * Remarques Tous les téléphones cellulaires ne peuvent pas être rechargés par USB. Certains nouveaux modèles requièrent une tension plus élevée que 5V. Veuillez vous référez à la documentation de l’appareil pour les problèmes de compatibilité. Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 4 Commandes et indicateurs 1. Interrupteur marche/arrêt : Allumer ou éteindre l’alimentation, lorsqu’elle est mise en marche l’écran s’allume. 2. Prise secteur avec fusible 3. Boîtier fusible masqué ( ôter le cache pour avoir accès au fusible) 4. V: Touche de réglage de la tension de sortie 5. A: Touche de réglage du courant de sortie 6. “+” appuyer sur cette touche pour augmenter les valeurs numériques Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 5 7. “-” appuyer sur cette touche pour diminuer les valeurs numériques 8. Bouton Output On/Off (activer/désactiver la sortie) 9. Prise USB Norme USB courant continu 5V, 400mA Pour charger ou mettre en marche des ordinateurs portables et téléphones cellulaires 10. Borne de sortie polarité positive (rouge) 11. Borne de terre (:) verte Borne de mise à la masse, normalement elle doit être court-circuitée avec les bornes (+) ou (-) 12. Borne de sortie polarité négative (noir) 13. Ecran LCD affichant: La tension et le courant sur 3 digits, l’indication (CV) mode tension constante, l’indication (CC) mode courant constant, l’état de la borne de sortie (activée/désactivée) Mise en oeuvre Connexion à la terre Suivant l’application, les bornes de sortie de l’alimentation peuvent être mises à la terre dans n’importe laquelle des conditions suivantes : La borne – ou la borne + peuvent être réunies à la borne terre GND (verte). Mode de fonctionnement Cette alimentation a été conçue pour fonctionner comme source de tension constante ou comme source de courant constant. Passage automatique à l’un de ces deux modes, lorsque la condition de charge varie d’une des manières suivantes: Configuration de la valeur de tension: tout d’abord, appuyer sur le clavier (4), puis ajuster la valeur de tension comme désiré en utilisant le clavier (6) et (7). Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 6 Configuration de la valeur du courant: Appuyer sur le clavier (5), puis ajuster la valeur du courant comme désiré en utilisant le clavier (6) et (7). Tension constante (CV), Transition automatique et courant constant (CC) L’alimentation fonctionne comme source de tension constante (CV) aussi longtemps que la charge du courant est inférieure à la valeur prédéfinie de limitation du courant. Lorsque la charge du courant est égale ou supérieure à cette valeur de limitation du courant, l’alimentation passe automatiquement en mode courant constant, la tension baisse, (CC) apparaît à l’écran et l’unité fonctionne en source de courant constant. Lorsque le charge de courant repasse en dessous de la valeur prédéfinie de limitation de courant, l’alimentation repasse en mode de tension constante (CV). Préréglage de la valeur limite du courant (CC) Allumer l’alimentation, régler la tension de sortie sur 3V, désactiver la borne de sortie en appuyant sur la touche (8), l’icône devient . Court-circuiter les bornes de sortie rouge et noire et activer la borne de sortie en appuyant sur la touche (8), l’icône devient , régler la valeur de limitation du courant à la limite désirée en utilisant les touches incrémenter et décrémenter. Désactiver la borne de sortie et enlever le courtcircuit des bornes. La limite de courant de l’alimentation a été réglée à x Amp pour toute la gamme de tension de sortie. Procédure de connexion et de mise en route 1. Après avoir contrôlé les références brancher l’alimentation au secteur 2. Mettre en marche l’alimentation, l’écran LCD doit s’allumer en même temps. 3. L’icône (CV) doit apparaître à l’écran. Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 7 4. Régler la valeur de courant au maximum en appuyant sur la touche (6) si vous n’avez besoin d’aucune valeur de limitation de courant plus basse, sinon effectuer la procédure de limitation (CC). 5. Régler la tension de sortie à la valeur désirée puis désactiver la borne de sortie en appuyant sur la touche (8). 6. Connecter le point chaud de votre charge avec la borne positive et le point froid de votre charge avec la borne négative. 7. Activer de nouveau la borne de sortie et vérifier que l’écran affiche (CV). 8. Si l’écran affiche (CC), soit votre valeur prédéfinie de limitation de courant est trop basse soit votre charge requière plus de tension et de courant. Vous devez ré-ajuster la tension et le courant de la charge ou augmenter la tension ou le courant jusqu’à ce que (CV) apparaisse. Protection de la sortie contre la surtension (OVP) Ceci sert à protéger la charge connectée dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement du circuit de contrôle de la tension de sortie, la tension de sortie maximum n’excèdera pas 40% de la valeur de tension ajustée au moment de l’opération. Protection contre la surchauffe Lorsque la température à l’intérieur de l’alimentation devient plus élevée que la valeur prédéterminée, la tension et le courant de sortie de l’alimentation diminuera automatiquement à zéro pour prévenir tout risques de dommages de l’appareil. Lorsque la température à l’intérieur de l’alimentation retombe à 65°C, l’appareil se remet automatiquement en fonction. Spécifications Tension d’entrée 200 – 240Vac (50~60Hz) Pleine charge du courant d’entrée 120Vac 0.95A (+10%) Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 8 Principale sortie: Gamme d’ajustement de tension de sortie 1.0 – 36VDC Gamme d’ajustement du courant de sortie 0 – 3A Régulation de tension pour une variation de charge de 10% à 100% < 50mV de secteur < 20mV d’ondulation (mV eff.) < 5mV de bruit (Crête-à-crête) < 50mV Régulation de courant pour une variation de charge de 10% à 100% < 20mA de secteur < 20mA Fréquence de découpage 80KHz à 120KHz Rendement 83% (+10%) Affichage voltmètre et ampèremètre 3 Digit Précision du voltmètre +1% + 5rdg. Précision de l’ampèremètre +1% + 5rdg. SORTIE USB: Tension de sortie 5V (+10%) Courant de sortie 400mA (+10%) Régulation tension de charge < 80mV (+10%) Ondulation et Bruit (sans charge) < 8mV (+10%) Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation 9 Voyants à l’écran CC, CV, Amp, Volt, Output ON-OFF Protection Court-circuit, Surcharge, Echauffement Système de refroidissement Convection naturelle Dimensions (lxLxP) 2.8 x 6.0 x 9.8 (70 x 150 x 250mm) Masse 4.4lbs. (2Kgs) Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation SEFRAM Instruments et Systèmes 32, Rue Edouard MARTEL F42100 – SAINT-ETIENNE Tel : 0825 56 50 50 (0,15€TTC/mn) Fax: +33 (0)4 77 57 23 23 Site WEB : www.sefram.fr e-mail : sales@sefram.fr CC2531 USB Hardware User’s Guide swru221a swru221a 2/14 Table of Contents 1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................3 2 About this Manual ........................................................................................................................3 3 Acronyms .....................................................................................................................................4 4 Definitions.....................................................................................................................................5 5 Getting Started .............................................................................................................................7 6 Using SmartRF05EB as an In-Circuit Emulator (ICE)..................................................................9 6.1 The Debug Interface................................................................................................................9 7 USB Dongle Hardware Description............................................................................................10 7.1 User Interface........................................................................................................................10 7.2 Debug Connector ..................................................................................................................10 7.3 RF Performance of Antenna ..................................................................................................11 8 USB Dongle Reference Design and Schematics.......................................................................12 9 References..................................................................................................................................13 10 General Information ...................................................................................................................14 10.1 Document History ..............................................................................................................14 swru221a 3/14 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing a CC2530 Development Kit. The CC2530 is Texas Instrument’s second generation ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4 compliant System-on- Chip with an optimized 8051 MCU core and radio for the 2.4 GHz unlicensed ISM/SRD band. This device enables industrial grade applications by offering state-of-the-art noise immunity, excellent link budget, operation up to 125 degrees and low voltage operation. In addition, the CC2530 provides extensive hardware support for packet handling, data buffering, burst transmissions, data encryption, data authentication, clear channel assessment, link quality indication and packet timing information. The CC2530 product folder on the web [10] has more information, with datasheets, user guides and application notes. The CC2531 is identical to CC2530, with the addition of a built in full speed USB 2.0 compliant interface. The CC2530 Development Kit includes all the necessary hardware to properly evaluate, demonstrate, prototype and develop software targeting not only IEEE802.15.4 or ZigBee compliant applications, but also proprietary applications for which a DSSS radio is required or wanted. 2 About this Manual This manual covers the CC2531 USB dongle found in the CC2530 Development Kit and the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit. The manual covers the CC2531 USB Dongle hardware component of a USB development framework. Please refer to [3] for a description of the accompanying USB Firmware Library and application examples. swru221a 4/14 3 Acronyms CDC Communications Device Class DK Development Kit EB Evaluation Board EM Evaluation Module EMK Evaluation Module Kit HID Human Interface Device IC Integrated Circuit ICE In Circuit Emulator KB Kilo Byte (1024 byte) LED Light Emitting Diode LPRF Low Power RF MCU Micro Controller NC Not connected RF Radio Frequency RX Receive SoC System on Chip TI Texas Instruments TX Transmit UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit USB Universal Serial Bus swru221a 5/14 4 Definitions SmartRF05EB The SmartRF05EB (evaluation board) is the main board in the kit with a wide range of user interfaces:  3x16 character serial LCD  Full speed USB 2.0 interface  UART  LEDs  Serial Flash  Potentiometer  Joystick  Buttons The EB is the platform for the evaluation modules (EM) and can be connected to the PC via USB to control the EM. CC2530EM The CC2530EM (evaluation module) contains the RF IC and necessary external components and matching filters for getting the most out of the radio. The module can be plugged into the SmartRF05EB. Use the EM as reference design for RF layout. The schematics are included at the end of this document and the layout files can be found on the web CC2530 Product Page [10]. CC2531 USB Dongle The CC2531 USB Dongle is a fully operational USB device that can be plugged into a PC. The dongle has 2 LEDs, two small push-buttons and connector holes that allow connection of external sensors or devices. The dongle also has a connector for programming and debugging of the CC2531 USB controller. The dongle comes preprogrammed with firmware such that it can be used as a packet sniffer device. Antenna 2.4 GHz antenna Titanis from Antenova. swru221a 6/14 SoC System on Chip. A collective term used to refer to Texas Instruments ICs with on-chip MCU and RF transceiver. Used in this document to reference the CC2530 and 2531. ICE In Circuit Emulator. ICE functionality is built into the SmartRF05EB and the CC Debugger USB software application examples Application examples using the CC2531 USB Dongle together with a CC2530EM. USB Firmware Library A library of low level USB firmware which is used by all the USB software examples. swru221a 7/14 5 Getting Started Make sure to install SmartRF Studio before connecting the SmartRF05EB to a PC. By installing it, the required Windows drivers will be provided when connecting the SmartRF05EB. SmartRF Studio [4] is a PC application for Windows that helps you find and adjust the radio register settings. Please see [4] for instructions on downloading and installation. The dongle comes preprogrammed with firmware such that it can be used as a packet sniffer device. For programming the device with other firmware an external ICE is needed. The SmartRF05EB1 can be used to program the USB dongle. The CC2531 has a 2 wire debug interface that is used for chip programming and debugging. When connecting this interface to the SmartRF05EB, the CC2531 can be programmed from the SmartRF Flash Programmer software [2] and debugged from IAR Embedded Workbench. To connect the CC2531 USB Dongle to the SmartRF05EB, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the SmartRF05EB power by moving the power switch shown in Figure 2 to the left position. 2. Remove any evaluation modules (EMs) attached to the SmartRF05EB. 3. Connect the SmartRF05EB to a PC with the supplied USB cable. 4. Connect the USB Dongle to the ExtSoC Debug header (P3) on SmartRF05EB with the supplied 10 pin cable and adapter board (see Figure 1). Make sure pin 1 on the dongle is connected to pin 1 on P3. This cable connects the debug interface and GND between the two devices; however the USB Dongle is not powered through this cable. 5. Power the CC2531 USB Dongle. To power the dongle there are two options:  Powered with a USB Cable Use the supplied USB extension cable to connect the USB Dongle to the PC (see Figure 1).  Powered from the SmartRF05EB Mount resistor R2 on the CC2531 USB Dongle and resistor R30 on the SmartRF05EB. The CC2531 USB Dongle should only be powered by one of the two sources at a time. Do not connect the USB cable to the USB Dongle while it is powered from the SmartRF05EB. 6. Turn on the power on the SmartRF05EB (see Figure 2). 1 It is also possible to use the SmartRF04EB or the CC Debugger to program the device. swru221a 8/14 Figure 1 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB Figure 2 - SmartRF05EB power switch, power on. The CC2531 can now be programmed with the SmartRF Flash Programmer software. The firmware on the CC2531 can also be debugged using the IAR Embedded Workbench debugger. Please see the “SmartRF Flash Programmer User’s Manual” for more details [2]. Please see the “CC2530 Development Kit User Manual” [1] for more information on the SmartRF05EB and how to use the CC2530EM. swru221a 9/14 6 Using SmartRF05EB as an In-Circuit Emulator (ICE) The debug interface on the SmartRF05EB is controlled by the USB MCU. This allows both programming and an emulator interface over USB, which makes the SmartRF05EB usable as an ICE for the CC2531 dongle. To use the SmartRF05EB as ICE, the IAR Embedded Workbench software for 8051 architecture (EW8051) must be installed. The Embedded Workbench is an integrated development environment with a complete tool-chain such as C Compiler, Simulator, and ICE debugger. Please see [1] for instructions on how to set up the ICE debugger for use as an ICE. When the SmartRF05EB with a SoC is connected to a PC with the USB port, the debugger in IAR EW8051 will connect to it when started. If several SmartRF05EBs are connected to USB ports simultaneously, a selection window will display the connected evaluation boards, and the user can select which device to load. 6.1 The Debug Interface For custom PCB’s with the CC2531 SoC, it is recommended to include a pin header or test points to allow in-circuit emulation or programming using a SmartRF05EB or other 3rd party programming tools. The USB Dongle can be used as a reference. VDD note: The SmartRF05EB includes a voltage converter to support programming and debugging of external systems with different voltage than the SmartRF05EB. When using SmartRF05EB as emulator for external target debugging any evaluation module (EM) must be removed. Figure 3 shows the required signal for a minimum connector layout on external target. Figure 3 - Minimum Debug Connector Pinout (top view) swru221a 10/14 7 USB Dongle Hardware Description Figure 4 - CC2531 USB Dongle 7.1 User Interface The CC2531 USB Dongle has two buttons and two LEDs that can be used to interact with the user. Table 1 shows which CC2531 signals are connected to what IO on the dongle. IO Connector CC2531 Dongle User IO CC2531 1 P0.2 Green LED P0.0 2 P0.3 Red LED P1.1 3 P0.4 Button S1 P1.2 4 P0.5 Button S2 P1.3 5 P1.7 6 P1.6 7 P1.5 8 P1.4 Table 1 - CC2531 USB Dongle Pinout 7.2 Debug Connector The CC2531 USB dongle can be connected to a SmartRF Evaluation Board for debugging and programming. IO Connector Meandred F-antenna CC2531F256 Button S1 Button S2 LEDs Debug connector Voltage regulator swru221a 11/14 Figure 5 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB The debug connector on the CC2531 USB Dongle matches the debug connector on the SmartRF05EB (and the CC Debugger). Note that, by default, the CC2531 dongle is not powered through the debug connector, so an external power source must be used while programming. The easiest solution is to connect it to a USB port on the PC. Alternatively, resistor R2 can be mounted. The table below shows the pin out of the debug connector. Pin # Connection 1 GND 2 VCC 3 CC2531 P2.2 (DC) 4 CC2531 P2.1 (DD) 5 NC 6 NC 7 CC2531 RESET 8 NC 9 Optional external VCC (R2 must be mounted) 10 NC Table 2 - CC2531 USB Dongle Debug Connector 7.3 RF Performance of Antenna While the CC2531 USB Dongle has a PCB antenna designed as a meandered inverted F antenna. The performance of the PCB antenna on the USB Dongle will be affected by its nearby surroundings. Therefore, when plugged into different computers or a USB extension cable differences in the RF performance must be expected. Also, if the USB Dongle is put inside a casing, the material and design of the enclosure will influence the antenna’s performance. For the CC2531 USB Dongle the maximum antenna gain measured is 5.3 dBi. This means that duty cycling or reduction of output power might be needed to ensure compliance with regulatory limits. Please see [8] for more information about SRD regulations in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. The performance of the antenna of the CC2531 USB Dongle is further described in [9]. swru221a 12/14 8 USB Dongle Reference Design and Schematics Refer to [1] for the schematics of the CC2531 USB Dongle. swru221a 13/14 9 References [1] CC2530 DK Development Kit User Manual (swru208) [2] SmartRF Flash Programmer (swrc044) [3] SmartRF Packet Sniffer (swrc045) [4] SmartRF Studio (swrc046) [5] CC USB Firmware Library and Examples (swrc088) [6] CC USB Software Examples User’s Guide (swru222) [7] SmartRF05EB User’s Guide (swru210) [8] AN032 – SRD Regulation for License-Free Transceiver Operation in the 2.4 GHz Band (swra060) [9] AN043 – Small Size 2.4 GHz PCB Antenna (swra117) [10] CC2530 Product Web Site (http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/cc2530.html) swru221a 14/14 10 General Information 10.1 Document History Revision Date Description/Changes SWRU221A 2009.07.31 Updated info about how to connect dongle to SmartRF05EB. Corrected typos. SWRU221 2009.05.08 Initial release IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in such safety-critical applications. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements. Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions: Products Applications Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Audio www.ti.com/audio Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Automotive www.ti.com/automotive DLP® Products www.dlp.com Broadband www.ti.com/broadband DSP dsp.ti.com Digital Control www.ti.com/digitalcontrol Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Medical www.ti.com/medical Interface interface.ti.com Military www.ti.com/military Logic logic.ti.com Optical Networking www.ti.com/opticalnetwork Power Mgmt power.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Telephony www.ti.com/telephony RFID www.ti-rfid.com Video & Imaging www.ti.com/video RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf Wireless www.ti.com/wireless Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2009, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP430 Hardware Tools User's Guide Literature Number: SLAU278Q May 2009–Revised February 2014 Contents Preface ....................................................................................................................................... 7 1 Get Started Now! ............................................................................................................... 10 1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview .................................................................................. 11 1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF .......................................................................................... 12 1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013 .............................................................................................. 12 1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012 .............................................................................................. 12 1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500 ............................................................................................ 12 1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T ........................................................................................... 12 1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH ...................................................................................... 12 1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx ....................................................................................... 13 1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF .......................................................................................... 13 1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx ............................................................................................ 13 1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 ..................................................................................... 14 1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ............................................................................................. 14 1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 ....................................................................................... 16 1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................... 16 1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................... 17 1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSP-EXP430F5529 ......... 17 1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900, EM430Fx137RF900 ...... 17 1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web ........................................................................... 18 2 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming ............................................................... 19 2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging ................................................... 20 2.2 External Power ............................................................................................................. 24 2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL) .................................................................................................. 24 A Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues ................................................................... 25 A.1 Hardware FAQs ............................................................................................................ 26 A.2 Known Issues .............................................................................................................. 28 B Hardware .......................................................................................................................... 29 B.1 MSP-TS430D8 ............................................................................................................. 31 B.2 MSP-TS430PW14 ......................................................................................................... 34 B.3 MSP-TS430L092 .......................................................................................................... 37 B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable .......................................................................................... 40 B.5 MSP-TS430PW24 ......................................................................................................... 43 B.6 MSP-TS430DW28 ......................................................................................................... 46 B.7 MSP-TS430PW28 ......................................................................................................... 49 B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A ....................................................................................................... 52 B.9 MSP-TS430DA38 .......................................................................................................... 55 B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0 ..................................................................................................... 58 B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40 ........................................................................................................ 61 B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A ...................................................................................................... 64 B.13 MSP-TS430DL48 .......................................................................................................... 67 B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B ...................................................................................................... 70 B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C ...................................................................................................... 73 B.16 MSP-TS430PM64 ......................................................................................................... 76 2 Contents SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A ....................................................................................................... 79 B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B ..................................................................................................... 82 B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C ..................................................................................................... 85 B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB .................................................................................................. 89 B.21 MSP-TS430PN80 .......................................................................................................... 93 B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A ........................................................................................................ 96 B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB .................................................................................................... 99 B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100 ....................................................................................................... 103 B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A ..................................................................................................... 106 B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B ..................................................................................................... 109 B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C ..................................................................................................... 112 B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100 .................................................................................................... 115 B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB ................................................................................................. 118 B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128 ..................................................................................................... 122 B.31 EM430F5137RF900 ..................................................................................................... 125 B.32 EM430F6137RF900 ..................................................................................................... 129 B.33 EM430F6147RF900 ..................................................................................................... 133 B.34 MSP-FET430PIF ......................................................................................................... 137 B.35 MSP-FET430UIF ......................................................................................................... 139 B.35.1 MSP-FET430UIF Revision History .......................................................................... 144 C Hardware Installation Guide .............................................................................................. 145 C.1 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................... 146 Document Revision History ........................................................................................................ 151 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Contents 3 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com List of Figures 2-1. Signal Connections for 4-Wire JTAG Communication................................................................ 21 2-2. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F2xx, MSP430G2xx, and MSP430F4xx Devices............................................................................. 22 2-3. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F5xx and MSP430F6xx Devices .................................................................................................... 23 B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................... 31 B-2. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, PCB .......................................................................... 32 B-3. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 34 B-4. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 35 B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................................. 37 B-6. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, PCB........................................................................ 38 B-7. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................. 40 B-8. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, PCB........................................................ 41 B-9. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 43 B-10. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 44 B-11. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 46 B-12. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 47 B-13. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 49 B-14. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 50 B-15. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, Schematic.............................................................. 52 B-16. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, PCB (Red) ............................................................. 53 B-17. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 55 B-18. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 56 B-19. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 58 B-20. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 59 B-21. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 61 B-22. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 62 B-23. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 64 B-24. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 65 B-25. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 67 B-26. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 68 B-27. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 70 B-28. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 71 B-29. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 73 B-30. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 74 B-31. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................................ 76 B-32. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, PCB....................................................................... 77 B-33. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 79 B-34. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 80 B-35. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 82 B-36. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 83 B-37. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 86 B-38. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 87 B-39. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................ 89 B-40. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, PCB ............................................................... 90 B-41. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 93 B-42. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 94 B-43. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 96 4 List of Figures SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com B-44. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 97 B-45. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, Schematic .......................................................... 99 B-46. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................ 100 B-47. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................. 103 B-48. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................... 104 B-49. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 106 B-50. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 107 B-51. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 109 B-52. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 110 B-53. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 112 B-54. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 113 B-55. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, Schematic .......................................................... 115 B-56. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, PCB.................................................................. 116 B-57. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, Schematic........................................................ 118 B-58. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, PCB............................................................... 119 B-59. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 122 B-60. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 123 B-61. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, Schematic....................................................................... 125 B-62. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, PCB.............................................................................. 126 B-63. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, Schematic....................................................................... 129 B-64. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, PCB.............................................................................. 130 B-65. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, Schematic ...................................................................... 133 B-66. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, PCB ............................................................................. 134 B-67. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, Schematic ................................................................ 137 B-68. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, PCB....................................................................... 138 B-69. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (1 of 4) ............................................................... 139 B-70. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (2 of 4) ............................................................... 140 B-71. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (3 of 4) ............................................................... 141 B-72. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (4 of 4) ............................................................... 142 B-73. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, PCB ................................................................................ 143 C-1. Windows XP Hardware Wizard ........................................................................................ 146 C-2. Windows XP Driver Location Selection Folder....................................................................... 147 C-3. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface using VID/PID 0x2047/0x0010................................... 148 C-4. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF430 .................................... 149 C-5. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF432 .................................... 150 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 List of Figures 5 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com List of Tables 1-1. Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Features and Device Compatibility.................................................... 11 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ................................................................................. 14 B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Bill of Materials.......................................................................................... 33 B-2. MSP-TS430PW14 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 36 B-3. MSP-TS430L092 Bill of Materials ....................................................................................... 39 B-4. MSP-TS430L092 JP1 Settings .......................................................................................... 41 B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Bill of Materials ....................................................................... 42 B-6. MSP-TS430PW24 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 45 B-7. MSP-TS430DW28 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 48 B-8. MSP-TS430PW28 Bill of Materials ..................................................................................... 51 B-9. MSP-TS430PW28A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 54 B-10. MSP-TS430DA38 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 57 B-11. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 60 B-12. MSP-TS430RSB40 Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 63 B-13. MSP-TS430RHA40A Bill of Materials................................................................................... 66 B-14. MSP-TS430DL48 Bill of Materials....................................................................................... 69 B-15. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Bill of Materials................................................................................... 72 B-16. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Revision History ................................................................................. 74 B-17. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 75 B-18. MSP-TS430PM64 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 78 B-19. MSP-TS430PM64A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 81 B-20. MSP-TS430RGC64B Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 84 B-21. MSP-TS430RGC64C Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 88 B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials............................................................................... 91 B-23. MSP-TS430PN80 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 95 B-24. MSP-TS430PN80A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 98 B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials ............................................................................... 101 B-26. MSP-TS430PZ100 Bill of Materials.................................................................................... 105 B-27. MSP-TS430PZ100A Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 108 B-28. MSP-TS430PZ100B Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 111 B-29. MSP-TS430PZ100C Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 114 B-30. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Bill of Materials................................................................................. 117 B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials .............................................................................. 120 B-32. MSP-TS430PEU128 Bill of Materials ................................................................................. 124 B-33. EM430F5137RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 127 B-34. EM430F6137RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 131 B-35. EM430F6147RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 135 C-1. USB VIDs and PIDs Used in MSP430 Tools......................................................................... 146 6 List of Tables SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Preface SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Read This First About This Manual This manual describes the hardware of the Texas Instruments MSP-FET430 Flash Emulation Tool (FET). The FET is the program development tool for the MSP430™ ultra-low-power microcontroller. Both available interface types, the parallel port interface and the USB interface, are described. How to Use This Manual Read and follow the instructions in Chapter 1. This chapter lists the contents of the FET, provides instructions on installing the hardware and according software drivers. After you see how quick and easy it is to use the development tools, TI recommends that you read all of this manual. This manual describes the setup and operation of the FET but does not fully describe the MSP430™ microcontrollers or the development software systems. For details of these items, see the appropriate TI documents listed in Section 1.18. This manual applies to the following tools (and devices): • MSP-FET430PIF (debug interface with parallel port connection, for all MSP430 flash-based devices) • MSP-FET430UIF (debug interface with USB connection, for all MSP430 flash-based devices) • eZ430-F2013 (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2013 target, for all MSP430F20xx, MSP430G2x01, MSP430G2x11, MSP430G2x21, and MSP430G2x31 devices) • eZ430-T2012 (three MSP430F2012 based target boards) • eZ430-RF2500 (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target, for all MSP430F20xx, MSP430F21x2, MSP430F22xx, MSP430G2x01, MSP430G2x11, MSP430G2x21, and MSP430G2x31 devices) • eZ430-RF2500T (one MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target board including battery pack) • eZ430-RF2500-SEH (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target and solar energy harvesting module) • eZ430-Chronos-xxx (USB stick form factor interface with CC430F6137 based development system contained in a watch. Includes <1 GHz RF USB access point) Stand-alone target-socket modules (without debug interface) named as MSP-TS430TSxx. Tools named as MSP-FET430Uxx contain the USB debug interface (MSP-FET430UIF) and the respective target socket module MSP-TS430TSxx, where 'xx' is the same for both names. Following tools contain also the USB debug interface (MSP-FET430UIF): • FET430F5137RF900 (for CC430F513x devices in 48-pin RGZ packages) (green PCB) • FET430F6137RF900 (for CC430F612x and CC430F613x devices in 64-pin RGC packages) (green PCB) These tools contain the most up-to-date materials available at the time of packaging. For the latest materials (data sheets, user's guides, software, application information, and so on), visit the TI MSP430 web site at www.ti.com/msp430 or contact your local TI sales office. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Read This First 7 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Information About Cautions and Warnings www.ti.com Information About Cautions and Warnings This document may contain cautions and warnings. CAUTION This is an example of a caution statement. A caution statement describes a situation that could potentially damage your software or equipment. WARNING This is an example of a warning statement. A warning statement describes a situation that could potentially cause harm to you. The information in a caution or a warning is provided for your protection. Read each caution and warning carefully. Related Documentation From Texas Instruments MSP430 development tools documentation: Code Composer Studio v5.4 for MSP430 User's Guide (literature number SLAU157) Code Composer Studio v5.x Core Edition (CCS Mediawiki) IAR Embedded Workbench Version 3+ for MSP430(tm) User's Guide (literature number SLAU138) IAR Embedded Workbench KickStart installer (literature number SLAC050) eZ430-F2013 Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU176) eZ430-RF2480 Demonstration Kit User's Guide (literature number SWRU151) eZ430-RF2500 Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU227) eZ430-RF2500-SEH Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU273) eZ430-Chronos Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU292) Spectrum Analyzer (MSP-SA430-SUB1GHZ) User's Guide (literature number SLAU371) MSP-EXP430F5529 Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU330) MSP-EXP430F5438 Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU263) MSP-EXP430G2 LaunchPad Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU318) MSP Gang Programmer (MSP-GANG) User's Guide (literature number SLAU358) MSP430 Gang Programmer (MSP-GANG430) User's Guide (literature number SLAU101) MSP430 device user's guides: MSP430x1xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU049) MSP430x2xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU144) MSP430x3xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU012) MSP430x4xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU056) MSP430x5xx and MSP430x6xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU208) CC430 Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU259) 8 Read This First SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com If You Need Assistance MSP430FR57xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU272) MSP430FR58xx and MSP430FR59xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU367) If You Need Assistance Support for the MSP430 devices and the FET development tools is provided by the Texas Instruments Product Information Center (PIC). Contact information for the PIC can be found on the TI web site at www.ti.com/support. The Texas Instruments E2E Community support forums for the MSP430 provide open interaction with peer engineers, TI engineers, and other experts. Additional device-specific information can be found on the MSP430 web site. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Read This First 9 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 1 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! This chapter lists the contents of the FET and provides instruction on installing the hardware. Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page 1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview .................................................................. 11 1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................. 12 1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013 .................................................................................. 12 1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012 .................................................................................. 12 1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500 ................................................................................ 12 1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T .............................................................................. 12 1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH ........................................................................ 12 1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx ........................................................................ 13 1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................. 13 1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx .............................................................................. 13 1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 ........................................................................ 14 1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ................................................................................ 14 1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 ......................................................................... 16 1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF ................................................................ 16 1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF ................................................................ 17 1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSPEXP430F5529 .................................................................................................... 17 1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900, EM430Fx137RF900 ............................................................................................ 17 1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web ........................................................... 18 10 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview 1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview TI offers several flash emulation tools according to different requirements. Table 1-1. Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Features and Device Compatibility(1) eZ430-F2013 eZ430-RF2500 eZ430-RF2480 eZ430-RF2560 MSP-WDSxx Metawatch eZ430-Chronos MSP-FET430PIF MSP-FET430UIF LaunchPad (MSP-EXP430G2) MSP-EXP430FR5739 MSP-EXP430F5529 Supports all programmable MSP430 and CC430 devices (F1xx, F2xx, F4xx, F5xx, F6xx, G2xx, L092, FR57xx, FR59xx, x x MSP430TCH5E) Supports only F20xx, G2x01, G2x11, x G2x21, G2x31 Supports MSP430F20xx, F21x2, F22xx, x G2x01, G2x11, G2x21, G2x31, G2x53 Supports MSP430F20xx, F21x2, F22xx, x x G2x01, G2x11, G2x21, G2x31 Supports F5438, F5438A x Supports BT5190, F5438A x Supports only F552x x Supports FR57xx, F5638, F6638 x Supports only CC430F613x x Allows fuse blow x Adjustable target supply voltage x Fixed 2.8-V target supply voltage x Fixed 3.6-V target supply voltage x x x x x x x x x 4-wire JTAG x x 2-wire JTAG(2) x x x x x x x x x x Application UART x x x x x x x x Supported by CCS for Windows x x x x x x x x x x x Supported by CCS for Linux x Supported by IAR x x x x x x x x x x x (1) The MSP-FET430PIF is for legacy device support only. This emulation tool will not support any new devices released after 2011. (2) The 2-wire JTAG debug interface is also referred to as Spy-Bi-Wire (SBW) interface. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 11 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF www.ti.com 1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF • One READ ME FIRST document • One MSP-FET430PIF interface module • One 25-conductor cable • One 14-conductor cable NOTE: This part is obsolete and is not recommended to use in new design. 1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013 • One QUICK START GUIDE document • One eZ430-F2013 development tool including one MSP430F2013 target board 1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012 • Three MSP430F2012-based target boards 1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500 • One QUICK START GUIDE document • One eZ430-RF2500 CD-ROM • One eZ430-RF2500 development tool including one MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target board • One eZ430-RF2500T target board • One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included) 1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T • One eZ430-RF2500T target board • One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included) 1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH • One MSP430 development tool CD containing documentation and development software • One eZ430-RF USB debugging interface • Two eZ430-RF2500T wireless target boards • One SEH-01 solar energy harvester board • One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included) 12 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx 1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx '433, '868, '915 • One QUICK START GUIDE document • One ez430-Chronos emulator • One screwdriver • Two spare screws eZ430-Chronos-433: – One 433-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included) – One 433-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point eZ430-Chronos-868: – One 868-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included) – One 868-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point eZ430-Chronos-915: – One 915-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included) – One 915-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point 1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF • One READ ME FIRST document • One MSP-FET430UIF interface module • One USB cable • One 14-conductor cable 1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx • One READ ME FIRST document • One MSP-FET430UIF USB interface module. This is the unit that has a USB B-connector on one end of the case, and a 2×7-pin male connector on the other end of the case. • One USB cable • One 32.768-kHz crystal from Micro Crystal, if the board has an option to use the quartz. • A 2×7-pin male JTAG connector is also present on the PCB (see different setup for L092) • One 14-Pin JTAG conductor cable • One small box containing two MSP430 device samples (See table for Sample Type) • One target socket module. To determine the devices used for each board and a summary of the board, see Table 1-2. The name of MSP-TS430xx board can be derived from the name of the MSP-FET430xx kit; for example, the MSP-FET430U28A kit contains the MSP-TS430PW28A board. Refer to the device data sheets for device specifications. Device errata can be found in the respective device product folder on the web provided as a PDF document. Depending on the device, errata may also be found in the device bug database at www.ti.com/sc/cgi-bin/buglist.cgi. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 13 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 www.ti.com 1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 • One READ ME FIRST document • One legal notice • One MSP-FET430UIF interface module • Two EM430F6137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which is soldered a CC430F6137 device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present on the PCB. • Two CC430EM battery packs • Four AAA batteries • Two 868-MHz or 915-MHz antennas • Two 32.768-kHz crystals • 18 PCB 2x4-pin headers • One USB cable • One 14-pin JTAG conductor cable 1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx • One READ ME FIRST document • One 32.768-kHz crystal from Micro Crystal (except MSP-TS430PW24) • One target socket module • A 2×7-pin male JTAG connector is also present on the PCB (see different setup for L092) • MSP430 Device samples (see Table 1-2 for sample type) Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment MSP-TS430D8 8-pin D MSP430G2210, 1 x MSP430G2210 and Two PCB 1×4-pin headers (two male and (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2230 1 x MSP430G2230 two female) MSP430F20xx, MSP-TS430PW14 14-pin PW MSP430G2x01, Four PCB 1×7-pin headers (two male and (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2x11, 2 x MSP430F2013IPW two female) MSP430G2x21, MSP430G2x31 Four PCB 1×7-pin headers (two male and two female). A "Micro-MaTch" 10-pin MSP-TS430L092 14-pin PW female connector is also present on the (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP-TS430L092 2 x MSP430L092IPW PCB which connects the kit with an 'Active Cable' PCB; this 'Active Cable' PCB is connected by 14-pin JTAG cable with the FET430UIF MSP-TS430PW24 24-pin PW MSP430AFE2xx 2 x MSP430AFE253IPW Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and two female) MSP430F11x1, MSP430F11x2, MSP-TS430DW28 28-pin DW MSP430F12x, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (SSOP ZIF) MSP430F12x2, 2 x MSP430F123IDW and two female) MSP430F21xx Supports devices in 20- and 28-pin DA packages MSP430F11x1, MSP-TS430PW28 28-pin PW MSP430F11x2, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430F12x, 2 x MSP430F2132IPW and two female) MSP430F12x2, MSP430F21xx MSP430F20xx, MSP-TS430PW28A 28-pin PW MSP430G2xxx in 14-, 20-, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (red PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and 28-pin PW packages, 2 x MSP430G2452IPW20 and two female) MSP430TCH5E in PW package MSP-TS430DA38 38-pin DA MSP430F22xx, 2 x MSP430F2274IDA Four PCB 1×19-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2x44, 2 x MSP430G2744IDA and two female) MSP430G2x55 2 x MSP430G2955IDA MSP-TS430QFN23x0 40-pin RHA MSP430F23x0 2 x MSP430F2370IRHA Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female) 14 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx (continued) Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment MSP-TS430RSB40 40-pin RSB MSP430F51x1, 2 x MSP430F5172IRSB Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F51x2 and four female) MSP-TS430RHA40A 40-pin RHA MSP430FR572x, 2 x MSP430FR5739IRHA Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430FR573x and four female) MSP-TS430DL48 48-pin DL MSP430F42x0 2 x MSP430F4270IDL Four PCB 2×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and two female) MSP-TS430RGZ48B 48-pin RGZ MSP430F534x 2 x MSP430F5342IRGZ Eight PCB 1×12-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female) MSP-TS430RGZ48C 48-pin RGZ MSP430FR58xx and 2 x MSP430FR5969IRGZ Eight PCB 1×12-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430FR59xx and four female) MSP430F13x, MSP430F14x, MSP430F14x1, MSP430F15x, MSP430F16x, MSP430F16x1, MSP430F23x, TS Kit: MSP-TS430PM64 64-pin PM MSP430F24x, 2 x MSP430F2618IPM; Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F24xx, FET Kit: and four female) MSP430F261x, 2 x MSP430F417IPM and MSP430F41x, 2 x MSP430F169IPM MSP430F42x, MSP430F42xA, MSP430FE42x, MSP430FE42xA, MSP430FE42x2, MSP430FW42x MSP-TS430PM64A 64-pin PM MSP430F41x2 2 x MSP430F4152IPM Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female) MSP-TS430RGC64B 64-pin RGC MSP430F530x 2 x MSP430F5310IRGC Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female) MSP430F522x, MSP-TS430RGC64C 64-pin RGC MSP430F521x , Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F523x, 2 x MSP430F5229IRGC and four female) MSP430F524x, MSP430F525x MSP-TS430RGC64USB 64-pin RGC MSP430F550x, 2 x MSP430F5510IRGC or Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F551x, 2 x MSP430F5528IRGC and four female) MSP430F552x MSP430F241x, MSP430F261x, MSP-TS430PN80 80-pin PN MSP430F43x, Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F43x1, 2 x MSP430FG439IPN and four female) MSP430FG43x, MSP430F47x, MSP430FG47x MSP-TS430PN80A 80-pin PN MSP430F532x 2 x MSP430F5329IPN Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female) MSP-TS430PN80USB 80-pin PN MSP430F552x, 2 x MSP430F5529IPN Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F551x and four female) MSP430F43x, MSP-TS430PZ100 100-pin PZ MSP430F43x1, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F44x, 2 x MSP430FG4619IPZ and four female) MSP430FG461x, MSP430 F47xx MSP-TS430PZ100A 100-pin PZ MSP430F471xx 2 x MSP430F47197IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female) MSP-TS430PZ100B 100-pin PZ MSP430F67xx 2 x MSP430F6733IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female) MSP430F645x, MSP-TS430PZ100C 100-pin PZ MSP430F643x, 2 x MSP430F6438IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F535x, and four female) MSP430F533x MSP-TS430PZ5x100 100-pin PZ MSP430F543x, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430BT5190, 2 x MSP430F5438IPZ and four female) MSP430SL5438A SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 15 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 www.ti.com Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx (continued) Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment MSP-TS430PZ100USB 100-pin PZ MSP430F665x, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F663x, 2 x MSP430F6638IPZ and four female) MSP430F563x MSP430F677x, MSP430F676x, Four PCB 1x26-pin headers (two male MSP-TS430PEU128 128-pin PEU MSP430F674x, 2 x MSP430F67791IPEU and two female) and four PCB 1x38-pin (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F677x1, headers (two male and two female) MSP430F676x1, MSP430F674x1 See the device data sheets for device specifications. Device errata can be found in the respective device product folder on the web provided as a PDF document. Depending on the device, errata may also be found in the device bug database at www.ti.com/sc/cgi-bin/buglist.cgi. 1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 • One READ ME FIRST document • One legal notice • Two target socket module MSP-EM430F5137RF900: Two EM430F5137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which is soldered a CC430F5137 device in a 48-pin RGZ package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present on the PCB MSP-EM430F6137RF900: Two EM430F6137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which is soldered a CC430F6137 device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present on the PCB MSP-EM430F6147RF900: Two EM430F6147RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which is soldered a CC430F6147 device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present on the PCB • Two CC430EM battery packs • Four AAA batteries • Two 868- or 915-MHz antennas • Two 32.768-kHz crystals • 18 PCB 2×4-pin headers 1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430PIF tools: 1. Use the 25-conductor cable to connect the FET interface module to the parallel port of the PC. The necessary driver for accessing the PC parallel port is installed automatically during CCS or IAR Embedded Workbench installation. Note that a restart is required after the CCS or IAR Embedded Workbench installation for the driver to become active. 2. Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the parallel-port debug interface module to a target board, such as an MSP-TS430xxx target socket module. Module schematics and PCBs are shown in Appendix B. 16 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF 1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430UIF tool: 1. Install the IDE (CCS or IAR) you plan to use before connecting USB-FET interface to PC. The IDE installation installs drivers automatically. 2. Use the USB cable to connect the USB-FET interface module to a USB port on the PC. The USB FET should be recognized, as the USB device driver is installed automatically. If the driver has not been installed yet, the install wizard starts. Follow the prompts and point the wizard to the driver files. The default location for CCS is c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_CDC or c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_FET_XP_XX, depending of firmware version of the tool. The default location for IAR Embedded Workbench is \Embedded Workbench x.x\ 430\drivers\TIUSBFET\eZ430-UART or \Embedded Workbench x.x\ 430\drivers\, depending of firmware version of the tool. The USB driver is installed automatically. Detailed driver installation instructions can be found in Appendix C. 3. After connecting to a PC, the USB FET performs a self-test during which the red LED may flash for approximately two seconds. If the self-test passes successfully, the green LED stays on. 4. Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the USB-FET interface module to a target board, such as an MSP-TS430xxx target socket module. 5. Ensure that the MSP430 device is securely seated in the socket, and that its pin 1 (indicated with a circular indentation on the top surface) aligns with the "1" mark on the PCB. 6. Compared to the parallel-port debug interface, the USB FET has additional features including JTAG security fuse blow and adjustable target VCC (1.8 V to 3.6 V). Supply the module with up to 60 mA. 1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSPEXP430F5529 To install eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSP-EXP430F5529 tools follow instructions 1 and 2 of Section 1.15 1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900, EM430Fx137RF900 Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430Uxx and MSP-TS430xxx tools: 1. Follow instructions 1 and 2 of Section 1.15 2. Connect the MSP-FET430PIF or MSP-FET430UIF debug interface to the appropriate port of the PC. Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the FET interface module to the supplied target socket module. 3. Ensure that the MSP430 device is securely seated in the socket and that its pin 1 (indicated with a circular indentation on the top surface) aligns with the "1" mark on the PCB. 4. Ensure that the two jumpers (LED and VCC) near the 2×7-pin male connector are in place. Illustrations of the target socket modules and their parts are found in Appendix B. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 17 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Important MSP430 Documents on the Web www.ti.com 1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web The primary sources of MSP430 information are the device-specific data sheet and user's guide. The MSP430 web site (www.ti.com/msp430) contains the most recent version of these documents. PDF documents describing the CCS tools (CCS IDE, the assembler, the C compiler, the linker, and the librarian) are in the msp430\documentation folder. A Code Composer Studio specific Wiki page (FAQ) is available, and the Texas Instruments E2E Community support forums for the MSP430 and Code Composer Studio v5 provide additional help besides the product help and Welcome page. PDF documents describing the IAR tools (Workbench C-SPY, the assembler, the C compiler, the linker, and the librarian) are in the common\doc and 430\doc folders. Supplements to the documents (that is, the latest information) are available in HTML format in the same directories. A IAR specific Wiki Page is also available. 18 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Chapter 2 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming This chapter presents signal requirements for in-circuit programming of the MSP430. Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page 2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging ............................ 20 2.2 External Power .................................................................................................. 24 2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL) ..................................................................................... 24 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 19 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging www.ti.com 2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging MSP-FET430PIF, MSP-FET430UIF, MSP-GANG, MSP-GANG430, MSP-PRGS430 With the proper connections, the debugger and an FET hardware JTAG interface (such as the MSPFET430PIF and MSP-FET430UIF) can be used to program and debug code on the target board. In addition, the connections also support the MSP-GANG430 or MSP-PRGS430 production programmers, thus providing an easy way to program prototype boards, if desired. Figure 2-1 shows the connections between the 14-pin FET interface module connector and the target device required to support in-system programming and debugging for 4-wire JTAG communication. Figure 2-2 shows the connections for 2-wire JTAG mode (Spy-Bi-Wire). The 4-wire JTAG mode is supported on most MSP430 devices, except devices with low pin counts (for example, MSP430G2230). The 2-wire JTAG mode is available on selected devices only. See the Code Composer Studio for MSP430 User's Guide (SLAU157) or IAR Embedded Workbench Version 3+ for MSP430 User's Guide (SLAU138) for information on which interface method can be used on which device. The connections for the FET interface module and the MSP-GANG, MSP-GANG430, or MSP-PRGS430 are identical. Both the FET interface module and MSP-GANG430 can supply VCC to the target board (through pin 2). In addition, the FET interface module, MSP-GANG, and MSP-GANG430 have a VCCsense feature that, if used, requires an alternate connection (pin 4 instead of pin 2). The VCC-sense feature senses the local VCC present on the target board (that is, a battery or other local power supply) and adjusts the output signals accordingly. If the target board is to be powered by a local VCC, then the connection to pin 4 on the JTAG should be made, and not the connection to pin 2. This uses the VCCsense feature and prevents any contention that might occur if the local on-board VCC were connected to the VCC supplied from the FET interface module, MSP-GANG or the MSP-GANG430. If the VCC-sense feature is not necessary (that is, if the target board is to be powered from the FET interface module, MSPGANG, or MSP-GANG430), the VCC connection is made to pin 2 on the JTAG header, and no connection is made to pin 4. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show a jumper block that supports both scenarios of supplying VCC to the target board. If this flexibility is not required, the desired VCC connections may be hard-wired to eliminate the jumper block. Pins 2 and 4 must not be connected at the same time. Note that in 4-wire JTAG communication mode (see Figure 2-1), the connection of the target RST signal to the JTAG connector is optional when using devices that support only 4-wire JTAG communication mode. However, when using devices that support 2-wire JTAG communication mode in 4-wire JTAG mode, the RST connection must be made. The MSP430 development tools and device programmers perform a target reset by issuing a JTAG command to gain control over the device. However, if this is unsuccessful, the RST signal of the JTAG connector may be used by the development tool or device programmer as an additional way to assert a device reset. 20 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 TDO/TDI TDI/VPP TMS TCK GND TEST/VPP JTAG VCC TOOL VCC TARGET J1 (see Note A) J2 (see Note A) VCC R1 47 k (see Note B) W C2 10 μF C3 0.1 μF VCC/AVCC/DVCC RST/NMI TDO/TDI TDI/VPP TMS TCK TEST/VPP (see Note C) V /AV /DV SS SS SS MSP430Fxxx C1 10 nF/2.2 nF (see Notes B and E) RST (see Note D) Important to connect www.ti.com Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging A If a local target power supply is used, make connection J1. If power from the debug or programming adapter is used, make connection J2. B The configuration of R1 and C1 for the RST/NMI pin depends on the device family. See the respective MSP430 family user's guide for the recommended configuration. C The TEST pin is available only on MSP430 family members with multiplexed JTAG pins. See the device-specific data sheet to determine if this pin is available. D The connection to the JTAG connector RST pin is optional when using a device that supports only 4-wire JTAG communication mode, and it is not required for device programming or debugging. However, this connection is required when using a device that supports 2-wire JTAG communication mode in 4-wire JTAG mode. E When using a device that supports 2-wire JTAG communication in 4-wire JTAG mode, the upper limit for C1 should not exceed 2.2 nF. This applies to both TI FET interface modules (LPT and USB FET). Figure 2-1. Signal Connections for 4-Wire JTAG Communication SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 21 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 TEST/SBWTCK MSP430Fxxx RST/NMI/SBWTDIO TDO/TDI TCK GND TEST/VPP JTAG VCC TOOL VCC TARGET 330! R2 J1 (see Note A) J2 (see Note A) Important to connect VCC/AVCC/DVCC V /AV /DV SS SS SS R1 47 k! See Note B C1 2.2 nF See Note B VCC C2 10 μF C3 0.1 μF Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging www.ti.com A If a local target power supply is used, make connection J1. If power from the debug or programming adapter is used, make connection J2. B The device RST/NMI/SBWTDIO pin is used in 2-wire mode for bidirectional communication with the device during JTAG access, and any capacitance that is attached to this signal may affect the ability to establish a connection with the device. The upper limit for C1 is 2.2 nF when using current TI tools. C R2 protects the JTAG debug interface TCK signal from the JTAG security fuse blow voltage that is supplied by the TEST/VPP pin during the fuse blow process. If fuse blow functionality is not needed, R2 is not required (populate 0 Ω) and do not connect TEST/VPP to TEST/SBWTCK. Figure 2-2. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F2xx, MSP430G2xx, and MSP430F4xx Devices 22 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 TEST/SBWTCK MSP430Fxxx RST/NMI/SBWTDIO TDO/TDI TCK GND JTAG R1 47 k! See Note B VCC TOOL VCC TARGET C1 2.2 nF See Note B J1 (see Note A) J2 (see Note A) Important to connect VCC/AVCC/DVCC V /AV /DV SS SS SS VCC C2 10 μF C3 0.1 μF www.ti.com Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging A Make connection J1 if a local target power supply is used, or make connection J2 if the target is powered from the debug or programming adapter. B The device RST/NMI/SBWTDIO pin is used in 2-wire mode for bidirectional communication with the device during JTAG access, and any capacitance that is attached to this signal may affect the ability to establish a connection with the device. The upper limit for C1 is 2.2 nF when using current TI tools. Figure 2-3. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F5xx and MSP430F6xx Devices SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 23 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated External Power www.ti.com 2.2 External Power The MSP-FET430UIF can supply targets with up to 60 mA through pin 2 of the 14-pin connector. Note that the target should not consume more than 60 mA, even as a peak current, as it may violate the USB specification. For example, if the target board has a capacitor on VCC more than 10 μF, it may cause inrush current during capacitor charging that may exceed 60 mA. In this case, the current should be limited by the design of the target board, or an external power supply should be used. The VCC for the target can be selected between 1.8 V and 3.6 V in steps of 0.1 V. Alternatively, the target can be supplied externally. In this case, the external voltage should be connected to pin 4 of the 14-pin connector. The MSP-FET430UIF then adjusts the level of the JTAG signals to external VCC automatically. Only pin 2 (MSP-FET430UIF supplies target) or pin 4 (target is externally supplied) must be connected; not both at the same time. When a target socket module is powered from an external supply, the external supply powers the device on the target socket module and any user circuitry connected to the target socket module, and the FET interface module continues to be powered from the PC through the parallel port. If the externally supplied voltage differs from that of the FET interface module, the target socket module must be modified so that the externally supplied voltage is routed to the FET interface module (so that it may adjust its output voltage levels accordingly). See the target socket module schematics in Appendix B. The PC parallel port can source a limited amount of current. Because of the ultra-low-power requirement of the MSP430, a standalone FET does not exceed the available current. However, if additional circuitry is added to the tool, this current limit could be exceeded. In this case, external power can be supplied to the tool through connections provided on the target socket modules. See the schematics and pictorials of the target socket modules in Appendix B to locate the external power connectors. Note that the MSPFET430PIF is not recommended for new design. 2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL) The JTAG pins provide access to the memory of the MSP430 and CC430 devices. On some devices, these pins are shared with the device port pins, and this sharing of pins can complicate a design (or sharing may not be possible). As an alternative to using the JTAG pins, most MSP430Fxxx devices contain a program (a "bootstrap loader") that permits the flash memory to be erased and programmed using a reduced set of signals. The MSP430 Programming Via the Bootstrap Loader User's Guide (SLAU319) describes this interface. See the MSP430 web site for the application reports and a list of MSP430 BSL tool developers. TI suggests that MSP430Fxxx customers design their circuits with the BSL in mind (that is, TI suggests providing access to these signals by, for example, a header). See FAQ Hardware #10 for a second alternative to sharing the JTAG and port pins. 24 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Appendix A SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues This appendix presents solutions to frequently asked questions regarding the MSP-FET430 hardware. Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page A.1 Hardware FAQs ................................................................................................. 26 A.2 Known Issues ................................................................................................... 28 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues 25 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Hardware FAQs www.ti.com A.1 Hardware FAQs 1. MSP430F22xx Target Socket Module (MSP-TS430DA38) – Important Information Due to the large capacitive coupling introduced by the device socket between the adjacent signals XIN/P2.6 (socket pin 6) and RST/SBWTDIO (socket pin 7), in-system debugging can disturb the LFXT1 low-frequency crystal oscillator operation (ACLK). This behavior applies only to the Spy-Bi-Wire (2-wire) JTAG configuration and only to the period while a debug session is active. Workarounds: • Use the 4-wire JTAG mode debug configuration instead of the Spy-Bi-Wire (2-wire) JTAG configuration. This can be achieved by placing jumpers JP4 through JP9 accordingly. • Use the debugger option "Run Free" that can be selected from the Advanced Run drop-down menu (at top of Debug View). This prevents the debugger from accessing the MSP430 device while the application is running. Note that, in this mode, a manual halt is required to see if a breakpoint was hit. See the IDE documentation for more information on this feature. • Use an external clock source to drive XIN directly. 2. With current interface hardware and software, there is a weakness when adapting target boards that are powered externally. This leads to an accidental fuse check in the MSP430 device. This is valid for PIF and UIF but is seen most often on the UIF. A solution is being developed. Workarounds: • Connect the RST/NMI pin to the JTAG header (pin 11). LPT and USB tools are able to pull the RST line, which also resets the device internal fuse logic. • Use the debugger option "Release JTAG On Go" that can be selected from the IDE drop-down menu. This prevents the debugger from accessing the MCU while the application is running. Note that in this mode, a manual halt is required to see if a breakpoint was hit. See the IDE documentation for more information on this feature. • Use an external clock source to drive XIN directly. 3. The 14-conductor cable that connects the FET interface module and the target socket module must not exceed 8 inches (20 centimeters) in length. 4. The signal assignment on the 14-conductor cable is identical for the parallel port interface and the USB FET. 5. To use the on-chip ADC voltage references, the capacitor must be installed on the target socket module. See the schematic of the target socket module to populate the capacitor according to the data sheet of the device. 6. To use the charge pump on the devices with LCD+ Module, the capacitor must be installed on the target socket module. See the schematic of the target socket module to populate the capacitor according to the data sheet of the device. 7. Crystals or resonators Q1 and Q2 (if applicable) are not provided on the target socket module. For MSP430 devices that contain user-selectable loading capacitors, see the device and crystal data sheets for the value of capacitance. 8. Crystals or resonators have no effect upon the operation of the tool and the CCS debugger or C-SPY (as any required clocking and timing is derived from the internal DCO and FLL). 9. On devices with multiplexed port or JTAG pins, to use these pin in their port capability: For CCS: "Run Free" (in Run pulldown menu at top of Debug View) must be selected. For C-SPY: "Release JTAG On Go" must be selected. 10. As an alternative to sharing the JTAG and port pins (on low pin count devices), consider using an MSP430 device that is a "superset" of the smaller device. A very powerful feature of the MSP430 is that the family members are code and architecturally compatible, so code developed on one device (for example, one without shared JTAG and port pins) ports effortlessly to another (assuming an equivalent set of peripherals). 26 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Hardware FAQs 11. Information memory may not be blank (erased to 0xFF) when the device is delivered from TI. Customers should erase the information memory before its first use. Main memory of packaged devices is blank when the device is delivered from TI. 12. The device current is higher then expected. The device current measurement may not be accurate with the debugger connected to the device. For accurate measurement, disconnect the debugger. Additionally some unused pins of the device should be terminated. See the Connection of Unused Pins table in the device's family user's guide. 13. The following ZIF sockets are used in the FET tools and target socket modules: • 8-pin device (D package): Yamaichi IC369-0082 • 14-pin device (PW package): Enplas OTS-14-065-01 • 14-pin package for 'L092 (PW package): Yamaichi IC189-0142-146 • 24-pin package (PW package): Enplas OTS-24(28)-0.65-02 • 28-pin device (DW package): Wells-CTI 652 D028 • 28-pin device (PW package): Enplas OTS-28-0.65-01 • 38-pin device (DA package): Yamaichi IC189-0382-037 • 40-pin device (RHA package): Enplas QFN-40B-0.5-01 • 40-pin device (RSB package): Enplas QFN-40B-0.4 • 48-pin device (RGZ package): Yamaichi QFN11T048-008 A101121-001 • 48-pin device (DL package): Yamaichi IC51-0482-1163 • 64-pin device (PM package): Yamaichi IC51-0644-807 • 64-pin device (RGC package): Yamaichi QFN11T064-006 • 80-pin device (PN package): Yamaichi IC201-0804-014 • 100-pin device (PZ package): Yamaichi IC201-1004-008 • 128-pin device (PEU package): Yamaichi IC500-1284-009P Enplas: www.enplas.com Wells-CTI: www.wellscti.com Yamaichi: www.yamaichi.us SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues 27 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Known Issues www.ti.com A.2 Known Issues MSP-FET430UIF Current detection algorithm of the UIF firmware Problem Description If high current is detected, the ICC monitor algorithm stays in a loop of frequently switching on and off the target power supply. This power switching puts some MSP430 devices such as the MSP430F5438 in a state that requires a power cycle to return the device to JTAG control. A side issue is that if the UIF firmware has entered this switch on and switch off loop, it is not possible to turn off the power supply to the target by calling MSP430_VCC(0). A power cycle is required to remove the device from this state. Solution IAR KickStart and Code Composer Essentials that have the MSP430.dll version 2.04.00.003 and higher do not show this problem. Update the software development tool to this version or higher to update the MSP-FET430UIF firmware. MSP-FET430PIF Some PCs do not supply 5 V through the parallel port Problem Description Device identification problems with modern PCs, because the parallel port often does not deliver 5 V as was common with earlier hardware. 1. When connected to a laptop, the test signal is clamped to 2.5 V. 2. When the external VCC becomes less than 3 V, up to 10 mA is flowing in the adapter through pin 4 (sense). Solution Measure the voltage level of the parallel port. If it is too low, provide external 5 V to the VCC pads of the interface. The jumper on a the target socket must be switched to external power. 28 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Appendix B SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware This appendix contains information relating to the FET hardware, including schematics, PCB pictorials, and bills of materials (BOMs). All other tools, such as the eZ430 series, are described in separate productspecific user's guides. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 29 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Appendix B www.ti.com Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page B.1 MSP-TS430D8 ................................................................................................... 31 B.2 MSP-TS430PW14 ............................................................................................... 34 B.3 MSP-TS430L092 ................................................................................................ 37 B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable ............................................................................. 40 B.5 MSP-TS430PW24 ............................................................................................... 43 B.6 MSP-TS430DW28 ............................................................................................... 46 B.7 MSP-TS430PW28 ............................................................................................... 49 B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A ............................................................................................. 52 B.9 MSP-TS430DA38 ............................................................................................... 55 B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0 .......................................................................................... 58 B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40 ............................................................................................. 61 B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A ........................................................................................... 64 B.13 MSP-TS430DL48 ................................................................................................ 67 B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B ........................................................................................... 70 B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C ........................................................................................... 73 B.16 MSP-TS430PM64 ............................................................................................... 76 B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A ............................................................................................. 79 B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B ........................................................................................... 82 B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C ........................................................................................... 85 B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB ....................................................................................... 89 B.21 MSP-TS430PN80 ............................................................................................... 93 B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A ............................................................................................. 96 B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB ......................................................................................... 99 B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100 ............................................................................................ 103 B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A .......................................................................................... 106 B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B .......................................................................................... 109 B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C .......................................................................................... 112 B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100 ......................................................................................... 115 B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB ...................................................................................... 118 B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128 .......................................................................................... 122 B.31 EM430F5137RF900 ........................................................................................... 125 B.32 EM430F6137RF900 ........................................................................................... 129 B.33 EM430F6147RF900 ........................................................................................... 133 B.34 MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................................... 137 B.35 MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................................... 139 30 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated GND 100nF 330R 10uF/10V 47K 2.2nF GND 330R GND GND green FE4L FE4H GND Ext_PWR Socket: YAMAICHI Type: IC369-0082 Vcc ext int to measure supply current DNP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 SBW C5 R3 C7 R5 C8 1 2 3 J3 1 2 J4 1 2 J6 1 2 3 J5 R2 D1 1 2 3 4 J1 5 6 7 8 J2 DVCC 1 DVSS 8 P1.2/TA1/A2 2 P1.5/TA0/A5/SCLK 3 P1.6/TA1/A6/SDO/SCL 4 TST/SBWTCK 7 RST/SBWTDIO 6 P1.7/A7/SDI/SDA 5 U1 MSP-TS430D8 GND VCC RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO SBWTCK VCC430 TST/SBWTCK TST/SBWTCK TST/SBWTCK P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 P1.2 Date: 28.07.201111:03:35 Sheet: /11 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430D8 + 1.0 MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Board www.ti.com MSP-TS430D8 B.1 MSP-TS430D8 Figure B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 31 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP3 to "ext" Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED D1 LED connected to P1.2 Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device 14 pin connector for debugging only in Spy-Bi-Wire mode (4 Wire JTAG not available) MSP-TS430D8 www.ti.com Figure B-2. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, PCB 32 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430D8 Table B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 J4, J6 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 2 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2 3 SBW 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND 4 J3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 5 C8 1 2.2nF, CSMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 292 6 C7 1 10uF, 10V, 1210ELKO 478-3875-1-ND 7 R5 1 47K, 0805 541-47000ATR-ND 8 C5 1 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND 9 R2, R3 2 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND 10 J1, J2 2 4-pin header, TH SAM1029-04-ND DNP: headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 10,1 J1, J2 1 4-pin socket, TH SAM1029-04-ND DNP: receptacles enclosed with kit. 11 U1 1 SO8 Socket: Type IC369-0082 Manuf.: Yamaichi 12 D1 1 red, LED 0603 13 MSP430 2 MSP430x "DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI" 14 PCB 1 50,0mmx44,5mm MSP-TS430D8 Rev. 1.0 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 33 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 12pF 12pF GND 100nF 330R 10uF/10V 47K 2.2nF GND 330R 100nF GND GND GND green Ext_PWR Socket: ENPLAS Type: OTS-14-065 Vcc ext int to measure supply current DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP JTAG -> SBW -> JTAG-Mode selection: 4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers J7 to J12 to position 2-3 2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers J7 to J12 to position 2-1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG C2 C1 C5 R3 C7 R5 C8 1 2 3 J3 Q1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J1 1 2 J4 1 2 J6 J5 1 2 3 R2 C3 J7 1 2 3 J8 1 2 3 J9 1 2 3 J10 1 2 3 J11 1 2 3 J12 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 13 12 11 D1 P1.0 P1.3 P1.2 P1.1 XOUT XOUT GND XIN XIN VCC RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK VCC430 P1.4/TCK P1.4/TCK P1.5/TMS P1.5/TMS P1.6/TDI P1.6/TDI P1.7/TDO P1.7/TDO TDO/SBWTDIO RST/NMI TMS TDI Date: 7/16/2007 8:22:36 AM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430PW14 + 2.0 MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Board MSP-TS430PW14 www.ti.com B.2 MSP-TS430PW14 Figure B-3. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, Schematic 34 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper J4 Open to disconnect LED Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper J6 Open to measure current Connector J3 External power connector Jumper J5 to 'ext' LED connected to P1.0 Jumpers J7 to J12 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire Mode. Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode. www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW14 Figure B-4. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 35 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PW14 www.ti.com Table B-2. MSP-TS430PW14 Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size 511-1463-2-ND B 3 C3, C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND DNP: C3 4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 6 J1, J2 0 7-pin header, TH solder SAM1029-07-ND : Header SAM1213-07-ND : Receptacle J3, J5, J7, Place jumpers on headers J5, J7, J8, 7 J8, J9, J10, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND J9, J10, J11, J12; Pos 1-2 J11, J12 8 J4, J6 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J5, J7-J12; Pos 1-2 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 13 R2, R3 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: OTS-14-0.65-01 Manuf.: Enplas 17 PCB 1 56 x 53 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm For example, 3M 18 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2013IPW DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI 36 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092 B.3 MSP-TS430L092 Figure B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 37 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430L092 www.ti.com Settings of the MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Figure B-6 shows the PCB layout of the MSP-TS430L092 target socket. The following pinning is recommended: • JP1 is write enable for the EPROM. If this is not set, the EPROM can only be read. • JP2 and JP3 connect device supply with boost converter. They can be opened to measure device current consumption. For default operation, they should be closed. Figure B-6. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, PCB 38 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092 Table B-3. MSP-TS430L092 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 2 330nF, SMD0603 2 C5 1 100n, SMD0603 3 C6 1 10u, SMD0805 4 C10 1 100n, SMD0603 5 EEPROM1 1 M95512 SO08 (SO8) ST Micro M95160R Digikey: 497-8688-1-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7 J1, J2 2 7-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. SAM1213-07-ND : Header SAM1035-07-ND : Receptacle 8 J3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 9 J4, J5 2 FE4L, FE4H 4 pol. Stiftreihe DNP; Keep vias free of solder. 11 J13 1 MICRO_STECKV_10 Reichelt: MicroMaTch- Connector: MM FL 10G 12 JP1, JP2,JP3 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 15 L1 1 33uH, SMD0806 LQH2MCN330K02L Farnell: 151-5557 16 LED1, LED4 2 LEDCHIPLED_0603 Farnell: 1686065 17 Q2 1 BC817-16LT1SMD BC817-16LT1SMD SOT23-BEC 18 R0, R6, R7 3 2K7, SMD0603 19 R1 1 1k, SMD0603 20 R2 1 47k, SMD0603 21 R4,R5, R8, 6 10k, SMD0603 R10, RC, RD 22 RA 1 3.9k, SMD0603 23 RB 1 6.8k, SMD0603 24 U1 1 14 Pin Socket - IC189-0142- Manuf. Yamaichi 146 22 MSP430 2 MSP430L092PWR DNP: Enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 39 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable www.ti.com B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Figure B-7. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, Schematic 40 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Figure B-8 shows the PCB layout for the Active Cable. The following pinning is possible: • JP1 has two jumpers (Jumper 1 and Jumper 2) that can be set as shown in Table B-4. Table B-4. MSP-TS430L092 JP1 Settings Jumper 1 Jumper 2 Description Off Off The active cable has no power and does not function. Off On The active cable receives power from target socket. For this option, the target socket must have its own power supply. On Off The active cable receives power from the JTAG connector. The JTAG connector powers the active cable and the target socket. For On On this option, the target socket must not have its own power source, as this would cause a not defined state. • JP2 is for reset. For the standard MSP-TS430L092, this jumper must be set. It sets the reset pin to high and can also control it. Without this jumper on the MSP-TS430L092, reset is set to zero. Figure B-8. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 41 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable www.ti.com Table B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C3, C5, 4 100nF, SMD0603 C6 2 C2, C4 2 1uF, SMD0805 3 R1, R10 2 10K, SMD0603 4 R2 1 4K7, SMD0603 5 R5, R6, R7, 4 100, SMD0603 R9 6 R8 1 680k, SMD0603 7 R11, R15 2 1K, SMD0603 8 R12 0 SMD0603 DNP 9 R13 0 SMD0603 DNP 10 R14 1 0, SMD0603 11 IC1 1 SN74AUC1G04DBVR Manu: TI 12 IC2, IC3, IC4 3 SN74AUC2G125DCTR Manu: TI 13 J2 1 MICRO_STECKV_10 Reichelt: MicroMaTch- Connector: MM FL 10G 14 JP1 1 2x2 Header JP2Q Put jumper on Position 1 and 2. Do not mix direction. 15 JP2 1 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 16 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 17 Q1 1 BC817-25LT1SMD, SOT23- Digi-Key: BC817- BEC 25LT1GOSCT-ND 18 U1, U2 2 TLVH431IDBVR SOT23-5 Manu: TI 42 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW24 B.5 MSP-TS430PW24 Figure B-9. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 43 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumpers JP4 to JP9 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode MSP-TS430PW24 www.ti.com Figure B-10. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, PCB 44 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW24 Table B-6. MSP-TS430PW24 Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 3 C3, C7 2 10uF, 10V, SMD0805 4 C4, C6, C8 3 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND "SAM1029-07- DNP: Headers and receptacles 6 J1, J2 0 12-pin header, TH NDSAM1213-07-ND" enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. (Header & Receptacle) J5, JP1, 7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9 JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1 JP8, JP9 8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 7 an 8 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 11 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: keep vias free of solder 12 R1, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 13 R5, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP R5, R6 R8, R9, 14 R4 1 47k Ohm, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 15 U1 1 Socket: OTS 24(28)- Manuf.: Enplas 065-02-00 16 PCB 1 68.5 x 61 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 17 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 18 MSP430 2 MSP430AFE2xx DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 45 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated ML14 LED3 12pF 12pF GND GND 100nF 560R ML10 JP1Q JP1Q 10uF/10V 50K 10nF 0R 0R 0R - - 0R - U1 SOCK28DW F123 FE14H FE14L 0R GND remove R8 and add R9 (0 Ohm) If external supply voltage: remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm) SMD-Footprint Socket: Yamaichi 2.0 MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket DW28 Type: IC189-0282-042 If external supply voltage: R1, C1, C2 not assembled not assembled 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG D1 C2 C1 C5 R3 BOOTST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 J5 J4 1 2 C7 R5 C8 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 TST 1 VCC 2 P2.5 3 VSS 4 XOUT 5 XIN 6 RST 7 P2.0 8 P2.1 9 P2.2 10 P2.3 19 P2.4 20 P1.0 21 P1.1 22 P1.2 23 P1.3 24 P1.4 25 P1.5 26 P1.6 27 P1.7 28 P3.0 11 P3.1 12 P3.2 13 P3.3 14 P3.4 15 P3.5 16 P3.6 17 P3.7 18 U2 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 J2 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R2 1 2 3 J3 Q1 QUARZ3 P1.0 P1.0 P1.3 P1.3 P1.2 P1.2 P1.1 P1.1 RST/NMI RST/NMI RST/NMI RST/NMI RST/NMI TCK TCK TCK TMS TMS TMS TDI TDI TDI TDO TDO TDO XOUT XOUT VCC GND GND GND P2.3 P2.3 P2.4 P2.4 XIN XIN P2.5 P2.5 P2.2 P2.2 P2.1 P2.1 P2.0 P2.0 TST/VPP TST/VPP TST/VPP P3.0 P3.0 P3.1 P3.1 P3.2 P3.2 P3.3 P3.3 P3.7 P3.7 P3.6 P3.6 P3.5 P3.5 P3.4 P3.4 VCC430 Ext_PWR Date: 11/14/2006 1:26:04 PM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430DW28 + VCC430 MSP-TS430DW28 www.ti.com B.6 MSP-TS430DW28 Figure B-11. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic 46 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper J4 Open to disconnect LED Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper J5 Open to measure current Connector J3 External power connector Remove R8 and jumper R9 LED connected to P1.0 www.ti.com MSP-TS430DW28 Figure B-12. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 47 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430DW28 www.ti.com Table B-7. MSP-TS430DW28 Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2, Cover holes while soldering 2 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 3 C7 1 10uF, 10V Tantal Elko B 4 C8 1 10nF SMD0805 5 D1 1 LED3 T1 3mm yellow RS: 228-4991 Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K 6 Q1 0 QUARZ, Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Cover holes while soldering 12.5pF DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 7 J1, J2 2 14-pin header, TH male solder. : Header : Receptacle DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 7.1 2 14-pin header, TH solder. female : Header : Receptacle 8 J3 1 3-Pin Connector, male 9 J4, J5 2 2-Pin Connector, male With jumper 10 BOOTST 0 ML10, 10-Pin Conn., m RS: 482-115 DNP, Cover holes while soldering 11 JTAG 1 ML14, 14-Pin Conn., m RS: 482-121 R1, R2, 12 R6, R7, 4 0R, SMD0805 DNP: R1, R2, R9, R10 R8,R9, R10, R11 13 R3 1 560R, SMD0805 14 R5 1 47K, SMD0805 15 U1 1 SOP28DW socket Yamaichi: IC189-0282- 042 16 U2 0 TSSOP DNP 48 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 12pF 12pF GND GND 100nF 330R 10uF/10V - 0R GND GND green 2.2nF 47k GND 0R 0R 330R MSP430F12xx If external supply voltage: remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm) 3.1 MSP-TS430PW28: OTS-28-0.65-01 Socket: Enplas Vcc int ext Target Socket Board for MSP430's in PW28 package DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP JTAG -> SBW -> JTAG-Mode selection: 4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-3 2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 1-2 DNP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG C2 C1 C4 R1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BOOTST C3 R2 R3 1 2 3 J5 JP1 1 2 3 JP2 1 2 1 2 JP3 D1 C5 R4 JP4 1 2 3 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 1 2 3 JP9 1 2 3 R5 R6 1 2 Q1 R7 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 U1 TST 1 VCC 2 P2.5 3 VSS 4 XOUT 5 XIN 6 RST 7 P2.0 8 P2.1 9 P2.2 10 P2.3 19 P2.4 20 P1.0 21 P1.1 22 P1.2 23 P1.3 24 P1.4 25 P1.5 26 P1.6 27 P1.7 28 P3.0 11 P3.1 12 P3.2 13 P3.3 14 P3.4 15 P3.5 16 P3.6 17 P3.7 18 P1.0 P1.0 RST/NMI TMS TDI VCC GND GND VCC430 VCC430 P2.0 P1.1 P1.1 P3.3 P3.2 P3.1 P3.0 P2.2 P2.2 XIN/P2.6 XIN/P2.6 XOUT/P2.7 XOUT/P2.7 P2.1 RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7 P2.3 P2.4 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4/TCK P1.4/TCK P1.5/TMS P1.5/TMS P1.6/TDI P1.6/TDI P1.7/TDO P1.7/TDO TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK P2.5 TCK/SBWTCK TDO/SBWTDIO XTLGND Ext_PWR + www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28 B.7 MSP-TS430PW28 Figure B-13. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 49 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED LED D1 connected to P5.1 Jumper JP1 1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface 2-3 (ext): External Power Supply Jumper JP4 to JP9: Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode Orient Pin 1 of Device MSP-TS430PW28 www.ti.com Figure B-14. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, PCB 50 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28 Table B-8. MSP-TS430PW28 Bill of Materials(1) Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 , Cover holes while soldering 2 C3 1 10uF, 10V Tantal Elko B 3 C4 1 100nF, SMD0805 4 C5 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP 5 D1 1 LED green SMD0603 Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Cover holes and 6 Q1 0 QUARZ, Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = neighboring holes while 12.5pF soldering DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 7 J1, J2 2 14-pin header, TH male kit.Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with 7.1 2 14-pin header, TH female kit.Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle 8 J5, IP1 1 3-Pin Connector , male JP1, JP4, 8a JP5, JP6, 7 3-Pin Connector , male Jumper on Pos 1-2 JP7, JP8, JP9 9 JP2, JP3 2 2-Pin Connector , male with Jumper 10 BOOTST 0 ML10, 10-Pin Conn. , m RS: 482-115 DNP: Cover holes while soldering 11 JTAG 1 ML14, 14-Pin Conn. , m RS: 482-121 12 R1, R7 2 330R, SMD0805 12 R2, R3, R5, 0 0R, SMD0805 DNP R6 14 R4 1 47K, SMD0805 15 U1 1 SOP28PW socket Enplas: OTS-28-0.65-01 (1) PCB 66 x 79 mm, two layers; Rubber stand off, four pieces SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 51 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated JTAG Mode selection: 4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers J4 to J9 to position 2-3 2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers J4 to J9 to position 2-1 MSP-TS430PW28A www.ti.com B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A Figure B-15. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, Schematic 52 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED D1 LED connected to P1.0 Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumpers JP4 to JP9 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28A Figure B-16. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, PCB (Red) SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 53 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PW28A www.ti.com Table B-9. MSP-TS430PW28A Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 3 C3 1 10uF, 10V, SMD0805 4 C4, C6, 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 6 J1, J2 0 14-pin header, TH enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder: (Header & Receptacle) J5, JP1, 7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9 JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1 JP8, JP9 8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 7 an 8 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 11 BOOTST 0 DNP Keep vias free of solder Micro Crystal MS3V 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 13 R1, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 14 R2, R3,R5, 0 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP R2, R3,R5, R6 R6, 15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: OTS-28-0.65-01 Manuf.: Enplas 17 PCB 1 63.5 x 64.8 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 18 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 19 MSP430 2 MSP430G2553IPW28 DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI 54 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 12pF 12pF GND GND 100nF 560R 10uF/10V 47k 10nF - 0R GND MSP430F2274IDA GND 330R GND yellow If external supply voltage: remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm) IC189-0382-037 Socket: 4-wire JTAG: 2-wire "SpyBiWire": JTAG-Mode selection: Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-3 Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-1 JTAG -> SBW -> Yamaichi DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG C2 C1 C5 R3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BOOTST C7 R5 C8 R10 R11 1 2 3 J3 Q1 TEST/SBWTCK 1 P3.5 26 P3.6 27 P1.4/TCK 35 RST/SBWDAT 7 DVCC 2 DVSS 4 P4.7 24 P3.7 28 AVSS 15 AVCC 16 P3.0 11 P3.1 12 P3.2 13 P3.3 14 P4.0 17 P4.1 18 P4.2 19 P3.4 25 P2.5 3 P2.4 30 P2.3 29 P2.2 10 P2.1 9 P2.0 8 P1.5/TMS 36 P1.6/TDI 37 P1.7/TDO 38 P2.7 5 P2.6 6 P4.6 23 P4.5 22 P4.4 21 P4.3 20 P1.0 31 P1.1 32 P1.2 33 P1.3 34 U1 JP1 1 2 3 JP2 1 2 1 2 JP3 1 2 3 JP4 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 1 2 3 R1 JP9 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 J1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 20 J2 D1 P1.0 P1.0 RST/NMI TMS TDI VCC GND GND GND VCC430 VCC430 VCC430 TCK/SBWTCK TDO/SBWTDIO TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK P2.5 P2.0 P2.1 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P1.7/TDO P1.7/TDO P1.6/TDI P1.6/TDI P1.5/TMS P1.5/TMS P1.4/TCK P1.4/TCK P1.3 P1.2 P1.1 P1.1 P2.4 P2.3 P3.7 P3.6 P3.5 P3.4 P4.7 P4.6 P4.5 P4.4 P4.3 P2.7/XOUT P2.7/XOUT P2.6/XIN P2.6/XIN RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO P2.2 P2.2 Ext_PWR Date: 6/18/2008 11:04:56 AM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430DA38 + 1.3 MSP-TS430DA38: Vcc int ext Target Socket Board for MSP430F2247IDA www.ti.com MSP-TS430DA38 B.9 MSP-TS430DA38 Figure B-17. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 55 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Orient pin 1 of MSP430 device LED connected to P1.0 Connector J3 External power connector Jumper JP1 to 'ext' Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Jumpers JP4 to JP9 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire Mode, Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG Mode MSP-TS430DA38 www.ti.com Figure B-18. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, PCB 56 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430DA38 Table B-10. MSP-TS430DA38 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with 6 J1, J2 0 19-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-19-ND : Header SAM1213-19-ND : Receptacle "J3, JP1, Place jumpers on headers 7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP1, JP4,JP5, JP6, JP7, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9; Pos 1-2 JP8, JP9" 8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1 - JP9; Pos 1- 2 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 13 R1, R3 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 14 R10, R11 0 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP 15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: IC189-0382--037 Manuf.: Yamaichi 17 PCB 1 67 x 66 mm 2 layers 18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2274IDA DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 57 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430QFN23x0 www.ti.com B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Figure B-19. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, Schematic 58 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated LED connected to P1.0 Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to 'ext' Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED Jumper JP2 Open to measure current www.ti.com MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Figure B-20. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 59 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430QFN23x0 www.ti.com Table B-11. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C3 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C4 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C5 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with 6 J1, J2, J3, 0 10-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1034-10-ND : Header SAM1212-10-ND : Receptacle 7 J5, JP1 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on header JP1; Pos 1-2. 8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 13 R1 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 14 R2, R3 0 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP 15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: QFN-40B-0.5-01 Manuf.: Enplas 17 PCB 1 79 x 66 mm 2 layers 18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2370IRHA DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI 60 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RSB40 B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40 Figure B-21. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 61 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumpers JP4 to JP9 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" MSP-TS430RSB40 www.ti.com Figure B-22. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, PCB 62 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RSB40 Table B-12. MSP-TS430RSB40 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 2 C3, C7, C10, 3 10uF, 10V, SMD 0805 445-1371-1-ND DNP C12 C12 3 C4, C6, C8, 3 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP C11 C11 4 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 10-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7.1 4 10-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle JP1, JP4,JP5, Jumper: 1-2 on JP1, JP10; 2- 8 JP6, JP7, 9 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 3 on JP4-JP9 JP8, JP9, J5, JP10 9 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP. Keep vias free of solder 12 U1 1 QFN-40B-0.4_ Enplas ENPLAS_SOCKET Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of 13 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, 15 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 16 R1,R7 2 330R SMD0805 R2, R3, R5, 17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0R SMD0805 DNP R2, R3, R5, R6 R10 18 R4 1 47k SMD0805 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F5132 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI 20 Rubber stand 4 select appropriate; for apply to corners at bottom off example, Buerklin: 20H1724 side SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 63 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RHA40A www.ti.com B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A Figure B-23. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, Schematic 64 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumpers JP4 to JP9 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP3 Open to disconnect LED Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device www.ti.com MSP-TS430RHA40A Figure B-24. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 65 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RHA40A www.ti.com Table B-13. MSP-TS430RHA40A Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 2 C5 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP C12 3 C3, C7 2 10uF, 10V, SMD0805 5 DNP C11 4 C4, C6 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 7 J1, J2, J3, 4 10-pin header, TH solder. J4 : Header : Receptacle DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 7.1 4 10-pin header, TH solder. : Header : Receptacle J5, JP1, 8 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9; JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1 JP8, JP9 9 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 10 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 8 an 9 11 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 12 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, DNP. Keep vias free of solder TH 13 U1 1 Socket: QFN-40B-0.5-01 Manuf.: Enplas Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 15 R1,R7 2 330R SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R2, R3, 16 R5, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP:R2, R3, R5, R6 R8, R9, 17 R4 1 47k SMD0805 18 PCB 1 79 x 66 mm 2 layers Rubber select appropriate; for 19 stand off 4 example, Buerklin: apply to corners at bottom side 20H1724 20 MSP430 2 MSP430N5736IRHA DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI 66 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated ML14 LED3 12pF 12pF GND GND 100nF 560R ML10 JP1Q JP1Q 10uF/10V 47K 10nF 0R 0R GND 0R 0R 10uF/10V GND IC51-1387.KS-15186 100nF 1.3 MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket DL48 Q1, C1, C2 not assembled 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG D1 C2 C1 C5 R3 BOOTST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 J5 J4 1 2 C7 R5 C8 R6 R7 1 2 3 J3 Q1 QUARZ3 J2 1 3 5 2 4 6 7 9 8 10 11 13 15 12 14 16 17 19 18 20 21 23 22 24 1 3 5 2 4 6 7 9 8 10 11 13 15 12 14 16 17 19 18 20 21 23 22 24 J1 R12 R4 JP1 1 2 3 1 2 3 JP2 C4 U1 TDO/TDI 1 TDI/TCLK 2 TMS 3 TCK 4 RST/NMI 5 DVCC 6 DVSS 7 XIN 8 XOUT 9 AVSS 10 AVCC 11 VREF+ 12 P6.0 13 P6.1 14 P6.2 15 P6.3 16 P6.4 17 P6.5 18 P6.6 19 P6.7 20 P2.5 39 P2.4 40 P2.3 41 P2.2 42 P2.1 43 P2.0 44 COM0 45 P5.2 46 P5.3 47 P5.4 48 LCDREF 29 LCDCAP 30 P5.1 31 P5.0 32 P5.5 33 P5.6 34 P5.7 35 S5 36 P2.7 37 P2.6 38 P1.7 21 P1.6 22 P1.5 23 P1.4 24 P1.0 28 P1.1 27 P1.2 26 P1.3 25 C3 P1.0 P1.0 RST/NMI RST/NMI RST/NMI TCK TCK TCK TMS TMS TDI TDI TDO TDO XOUT XOUT GND GND GND XIN XIN BSL_TX VCC BSL_RX Ext_PWR Date: 11/14/2006 1:24:44 PM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430DL48 + + Vcc ext int int ext Vcc www.ti.com MSP-TS430DL48 B.13 MSP-TS430DL48 Figure B-25. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 67 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper J4 Open to disconnect LED LED connected to P1.0 Orient pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper J5 Open to measure current Connector J3 External power connector Jumper JP1 to ‘ext’ MSP-TS430DL48 www.ti.com Figure B-26. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, PCB 68 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430DL48 Table B-14. MSP-TS430DL48 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C4, C7 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C3, C5 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND 5 D1 1 yellow LED, TH, 3mm, T1 511-1251-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 6 J1, J2 0 24-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. SAM1034-12-ND : Header SAM1212-12-ND : Receptacle 7 J3, JP1, JP2 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on header JP1; Pos 1-2. DNP: JP2 8 J4, J5 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, J4, J5 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 13 R3 1 560 Ω, SMD0805 541-560ATR-ND 14 R4, R6, R7, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R7 R12 15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: IC51-1387 KS- Manuf.: Yamaichi 15186 17 PCB 1 58 x 66 mm 2 layers 18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F4270IDL DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 69 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGZ48B www.ti.com B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B Figure B-27. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, Schematic 70 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48B Figure B-28. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 71 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGZ48B www.ti.com Table B-15. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP 3 C6, C7, 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805 C12 4 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14 5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 7 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-12-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 8 J4 0 12-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-12- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder: 9 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 10 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10 11 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 12 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 10and Pos. 11 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R 15 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 16 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134 Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Ar 17 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 t_Detail.cfm?ART_ART NUM=70.08.121 18 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, R6, 19 R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12 R9,R10, R11, R12 20 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 21 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T048- Manuf.: Yamaichi 008_A101121_RGZ48 22 PCB 1 81 x 76 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 23 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 24 MSP430 2 MSP430F5342IRGZ DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI 72 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated DNP DNP DNP GND GND 100nF 330R 0R - GND GND 47k 1.1nF GND 0R 0R 0R 1uF/10V QUARZ5 1uF/10V 100nF green DNP yellow (DNP) DNP red (DNP) 0R GND DNP DNP 0R 0R QUARZ5 EVQ11 0R DNP DNP If external supply voltage: remove R3 and add R2 (0 Ohm) 1.3 Ext_PWR MSP-TS430RGZ48C Vcc int ext Target Socket Board for MSP430FR58xx, FR59xx IRGZ DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP JTAG -> SBW -> JTAG-Mode selection: 4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers JP3 to JP8 to position 2-3 2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers JP3 to JP8 to position 1-2 connection by via DNP DNP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG C2 C1 C4 R1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BOOTST R3 R2 1 2 3 J2 J1 1 2 3 JP1 1 2 1 2 JP9 R4 C5 1 2 3 JP3 1 2 3 JP4 1 2 3 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 R5 R6 R7 C3 Q1 C7 C6 D1 R10 1 2 JP10 D2 R11 1 2 JP11 D3 R12 JP2 1 2 C8 C9 R9 R8 Q2 SV4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SV1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SV2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SV3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 1_P1.0 2 2_P1.1 3 3_P1.2 4 4_P3.0 5 5_P3.1 6 6_P3.2 7 7_P3.3 8 8_P4.7 9 9_P1.3 10 10_P1.4 11 11_P1.5 12 12_PJ.0_TDO 13 13_PJ.1_TDI 14 14_PJ.2_TMS 15 15_PJ.3/TCK 16 16_P4.0 17 17_P4.1 18 18_P4.2 19 19_P4.3 20 20_P2.5 21 21_P2.6 22 22_TEST/SBWTCK 23 23_RST/SBWTDIO 24 24_P2.0 25_P2.1 25 26_P2.2 26 27_P3.4 27 28_P3.5 28 29_P3.6 29 30_P3.7 30 31_P1.6 31 32_P1.7 32 33_P4.4 33 34_P4.5 34 35_P4.6 35 36_DVSS 36 37_DVCC 37 38_P2.7 38 39_P2.3 39 40_P2.4 40 41_AVSS 41 42_HFXIN 42 43_HFXOUT 43 44_AVSS 44 45_LFXIN 45 46_LFXOUT 46 47_AVSS 47 48_AVCC 48 U1 SW1 R13 TP1TP2 SW2 R14 P1.0 P1.0 RST/NMI TMS TDI VCC GND P1.1 P1.1 RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO RST/SBWTDIO TCK/SBWTCK TDO/SBWTDIO PJ.0/TDO PJ.0/TDO PJ.2/TMS PJ.2/TMS PJ.3/TCK PJ.3/TCK PJ.1/TDI PJ.1/TDI P1.2 P1.2 P2.0 P2.0 P2.1 P2.1 P1.3 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 AVCC AVCC AVSS AVSS AVSS AVSS LFXOUT LFXIN LFGND HFGND HFXOUT HFXIN P2.4 P2.3 P2.7 DVCC DVCC DVCC DVCC DVSS DVSS P4.6 P4.5 P4.4 P1.7 P1.6 P3.7 P3.6 P3.5 P3.4 P2.2 P2.6 P2.5 P4.3 P4.2 P4.1 P4.0 P4.7 P3.3 P3.2 P3.1 P3.0 TEST/SBWTCK1 TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48C B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C Figure B-29. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 73 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGZ48C www.ti.com Figure B-30. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, PCB Table B-16. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Revision History Revision Comments 1.2 Initial release LFOSC pins swapped at SV1 (9-10). 1.3 HFOSC pins swapped at SV1 (6-7). BOOTST pin 4 now directly connected to the device RST/SBWTDIO pin. 74 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48C Table B-17. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Bill of Materials Number Pos Ref Des Per Description DigiKey Part Number Comment Board 1 SV1, SV2, SV3, 4 12-pin header, TH DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. SV4 Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-12-ND : Header : Receptacle 1.1 SV1, SV2, SV3, 4 12-pin receptable, TH DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. SV4 Keep vias free of solder. : Header SAM1213-12-ND : Receptacle 2 JP1, JP2, JP9 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 3 JP10, JP11 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND DNP 4 J1, JP3, JP4, JP5, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP6, JP7, JP8 5 J2 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 6 JP1, JP2, JP9, J1, 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP9, J1, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP7, JP8 JP6, JP7, JP8 7 R2, R3, R5, R6, 9 DNP, 0805 DNP R8, R9, R10, R11, R14 8 R12, R13, R7 3 0R, 0805 541-000ATR-ND 9 C5 1 1.1nF, CSMD0805 490-1623-2-ND 10 C3, C7 2 1uF, 10V, CSMD0805 490-1702-2-ND 11 R4 1 47k, 0805 541-47000ATR-ND 12 C4, C6 2 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND 13 R1 1 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND 14 C1, C2, C8, C9 4 DNP, CSMD0805 DNP 15 SW1, SW2 2 EVQ-11L05R P8079STB-ND DNP, Lacon: 1251459 16 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder 17 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 18 Q1 1 DNP: MS3V-TR1 (32768kHz, depends on application Micro Crystal, DNP, enclosed in kit, keep vias 20ppm, 12.5pF) free of solder 19 Q2 1 DNP, Christal depends on application DNP, keep vias free of solder 20 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T048-008 Manuf.: Yamaichi A101121-001 20.1 U1 1 MSP430 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI. 21 D1 1 green LED, DIODE0805 P516TR-ND 22 D3 1 red (DNP), DIODE0805 DNP 23 D2 1 yellow (DNP), DIODE0805 DNP 24 TP1, TP2 2 Testpoint DNP, keep pads free of solder 25 Rubber stand off 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom side 26 PCB 1 79.6 x 91.0 mm MSP-TS430RGZ48C 2 layers, black solder mask Rev. 1.2 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 75 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated ML14 LED3 0R 12pF 12pF 12pF 12pF GND GND 0R 100nF 560R ML10 JP1Q JP1Q 10uF/6,3V 10uF/10V 47K 10nF 0R 0R 0R - - 0R - 0R 0R FE16-1-1 FE16-1-2 FE16-1-3 FE16-1-4 PWR3 GNDGND - MSP64PM not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled enhancement reserved for future JTAG 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 D1 R2 C2 C1 C3 C4 R1 C5 R3 BOOTST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J7 1 2 J6 1 2 C6 C7 R5 C8 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J1 J2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 J4 J5 1 2 3 R4 Q1 LFXTCLK XTCLK U2 DVCC 2 3 4 5 6 7 XIN XOUT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 TDO TDI TMS TCK RST 59 60 61 AVSS DVSS AVCC RST/NMI TCK TMS TDI TDO VCC Date: 3/14/2006 10:46:30 AM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430PM64 + + 1 MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket PM64 Yamaichi IC51-0644-807 Socket: 1.2 for F14x and F41x Open J6 if LCD is connected If external supply voltage: remove R8 and add R9 (0 Ohm) If external supply voltage: remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm) For BSL usage add: R6 R7 R13 R14 MSP430F14x : 0 0 open open MSP430F41x : open open 0 0 MSP-TS430PM64 www.ti.com B.16 MSP-TS430PM64 NOTE: Connections between the JTAG header and pins XOUT and XIN are no longer required and should not be made. Figure B-31. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, Schematic 76 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connection Remove R8 and jumper R9 LED connected to pin 12 Jumper J6 Open to disconnect LED Jumper J7 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64 Figure B-32. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 77 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PM64 www.ti.com Table B-18. MSP-TS430PM64 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 1.1 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec. 2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND DNP: C6 3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 7 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 16-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-16-ND : Header SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 9 J6, J7 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 11 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7 12 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 13 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 14 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 15 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, R6, R7, R8, DNP: R4, R6, R7, R9, R10, 16 R9, R10, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND R11, R12, R13, R14 R11, R12, R13, R14 17 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 18 U1 1 Socket: IC51-0644-807 Manuf.: Yamaichi 19 PCB 1 78 x 75 mm 2 layers 20 Rubber 4 select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side 21 MSP430 22 MSP430F2619IPM DNP: Enclosed with kit MSP430F417IPM supplied by TI 78 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 0R 12pF 12pF GND GND 0R 100nF 330R 10uF/6.3V 0R 0R 0R 0R PWR3 GND 47k 2.2nF 330R GND GND 100nF GND 0R 0R MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket DNP Yamaichi IC51-0644-807 Socket: DNP 1.1 for F4152 Open JP1 if LCD is connected JTAG -> SBW -> DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP Vcc ext int TEST/SBWTCK RST/SBWTDIO P7.0/TDO P7.1/TDI P7.2/TMS P7.3/TCK ADD LCD-CAP! DNP DNP JTAG 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 R2 C2 C1 R1 C5 R3 BOOTST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 C6 R10 R11 R13 R14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J2 J3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 J4 J5 1 2 3 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 10 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 1 2 Q1 R4 C3 1 2 3 JP4 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 1 2 3 R6 JP9 1 2 3 1 2 JP1 JP2 1 2 JP3 1 2 3 D1 C4 R5 R7 RST/NMI TMS TDI VCC GND XTLGND TCK/SBWTCK TDO/SBWTDIO VCC430 VCC430 VCC430 P5.1 P5.1 AVCC AVCC AVSS AVSS P1.0 P1.1 XIN XOUT A A A B B B C C D D E E F F Date: 3/29/2011 3:07:02 PM Sheet: 1/1 REV: TITLE: Document Number: MSP-TS430PM64A + TEST/SBWTCK RST/SBWTDIO If supplied locally: populate R10 (0R), remove R11 If supplied by interface: populate R11 (0R), remove R10 www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64A B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A Figure B-33. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 79 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to measure current Jumper JP1 Open to disconnect LED LED D1 connected to P5.1 Jumper JP3 1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface 2-3 (ext): External Power Supply Jumper JP4 to JP9: Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode Orient Pin 1 of Device MSP-TS430PM64A www.ti.com Figure B-34. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, PCB 80 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64A Table B-19. MSP-TS430PM64A Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2, 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C3 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP 3 C6, 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 4 C4, C5 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 6 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 16-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-16-ND : Header SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle J5, JP3, JP4, 7 JP5, JP6, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP7, JP8, JP9 8 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 13 R3, R6 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R5, 14 R7, R9, R10, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R5, R7, R9, R10, R11, R11, R13, R13, R14 R14 15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: IC51-0644-807 Manuf.: Yamaichi 17 PCB 1 78 x 75 mm 4 layers 18 Rubber stand 4 select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom off side 19 MSP430 2 MSP430F4152IPM DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 81 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGC64B www.ti.com B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B Figure B-35. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, Schematic 82 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP3 to "ext" Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode D1 LED connected to P1.0 If the system should be supplied via LDOI (J6), close JP4 and set JP3 to external Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64B Figure B-36. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 83 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGC64B www.ti.com Table B-20. MSP-TS430RGC64B Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP 3 C6, C7, C10 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805 C5, C11, 4 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C15 5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 7 C16 1 4.7uF, SMD0805 8 C17 1 220nF, SMD0805 9 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-16-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 10 J4 0 16-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-16- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder: 11 J5 , J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, JP6, 12 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place jumpers on JP8, JP9, pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10 13 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4 14 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 12 and Pos. 13 15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R 17 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 18 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134 Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art 19 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 _Detail.cfm?ART_ARTNU M=70.08.121 20 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 21 R6, R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12 R9,R10, R11, R12 22 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 23 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T064-006- Manuf.: Yamaichi N-HSP 24 PCB 1 85 x 76 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 25 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 26 D3,D4 27 MSP430 2 MSP430F5310 RGC DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI 84 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64C B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C The MSP-TS430RGC64C target board has been designed with the option to operate with the target device DVIO input voltage supplied via header J6 (see Figure B-37). This development platform does not supply the 1.8-V DVIO rail on board and it MUST be provided by external power supply for proper device operation. For correct JTAG connection, programming, and debug operation, it is important to follow this procedure: 1. Make sure that the VCC and DVIO voltage supplies are OFF and that the power rails are fully discharged to 0 V. 2. Enable the 1.8-V external DVIO power supply. 3. Enable the 1.8-V to 3.6-V VCC power supply (alternatively, this supply can be provided from the MSPFET430UIF JTAG debugger interface). 4. Connect the MSP-FET430UIF JTAG connector to the target board. 5. Start the debug session using IAR or CCS IDE. For more information on debugging the MSP4and MSP430F525x, see the device-specific data sheets (MSP430F522x: SLAS718; MSP430F525x: SLAS903) and Designing with MSP430F522x and MSP430F521x Devices (SLAA558). For debugging of devices (MSP430F524x and MSP430F523x) without use of the DVIO power domain, short JP4 with the jumper. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 85 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1.1 MSP-TS430RGC64C TI Friesing Tools MSP430 1 1 12/14/10 S.G. 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D A B C D Design: Appr.: Rev.: Comment: Drawing#: Revision: File: Page: Size: Title of Schematic of Mentor Pads Logic V9 Date: Name: 1 2 3 4 5 6 MSP-TS430RGC64C.sch <-- SBW <-- JTAG ext int VCC DVIO Power Circle BSL 1 P6.0/CB0/A0 2 P6.1/CB1/A1 3 P6.2/CB2/A2 4 P6.3/CB3/A3 5 P6.4/CB4/A4 6 P6.5/CB5/A5 7 P6.6/CB6/A6 8 P6.7/CB7/A7 9 P5.0/A8/VEREF+ 10 P5.1/A9/VEREF- 11 AVCC 12 P5.4/XIN 13 P5.5/XOUT 14 AVSS 15 DVCC 16 DVSS 17 VCORE 18 P1.0/TA0CLK/ACLK 19 P1.1/TA0.0 20 P1.2/TA0.1 21 P1.3/TA0.2 22 P1.4/TA0.3 23 P1.5/TA0.4 24 P1.6/TA1CLK/CBOUT 25 P1.7/TA1.0 26 P2.0/TA1.1 27 P2.1/TA1.2 28 P2.2/TA2CLK/SMCLK 29 P2.3/TA2.0 30 P2.4/TA2.1 31 P2.5/TA2.2 32 P2.6/RTCCLK/DMAE0 P2.7/UCB0STE/UCA0CLK 33 P3.0/UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA 34 P3.1/UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL 35 P3.2/UCB0CLK/UCA0STE 36 P3.3/UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO 37 P3.4/UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI 38 DVSS 39 DVIO 40 P4.0/PM_UCB1STE 41 P4.1/PM_UCB1SIMO 42 P4.2/PM_UCB1SOMI 43 P4.3/PM_UCB1CLK 44 P4.4/PM_UCA1TXD 45 P4.5/PM_UCA1RXD 46 P4.6/PM_NONE 47 P4.7/PM_NONE 48 49 P7.0/TB0.0 50 P7.1/TB0.1 51 P7.2/TB0.2 52 P7.3/TB0.3 53 P7.4/TB0.4 54 P7.5/TB0.5 55 BSLEN 56 RST/NMI 57 P5.2/XT2IN 58 P5.3/XT2OUT 59 TEST/SBWTCK 60 PJ.0/TDO 61 PJ.1/TDI/TCLK 62 PJ.2/TMS 63 PJ.3/TCK 64 RSTDVCC/SBWTDIO 65 THERMAL_1 66 THERMAL_2 67 THERMAL_3 68 THERMAL_4 69 THERMAL_5 70 THERMAL_6 71 THERMAL_7 72 THERMAL_8 U1 MSP430F5229 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 JTAG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 BOOTST CN-ML10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J4 1 2 3 JP5 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 JP6 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 JP7 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 JP8 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 JP9 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 JP10 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 3 J5 PINHEAD_1X3 R7 330R 1 2 3 JP3 C10 10uF C14 100nF C5 10uF C6 100nF R1 0R R2 0R R6 0R R8 0R C1 12pF C2 12pF C7 10uF C13 100nF 1 2 JP2 R3 330R 1 2 D1 ??? R4 0R C9 470nF R5 47K C8 2.2nF R11 0R R12 0R C16 4.7uF tbd C3 tbd C4 R9 0R R10 0R C15 100nF 1 2 3 J6 PINHEAD_1X3 1 2 JP4 PINHEAD_1X2 D3 Q2 QUARZ_4PIN 26MHz/ASX53 Q1 1 2 JP1 PINHEAD_1X2 SHC1 SHORTCUT2 GND GND GND GND XTLGND VCORE GND GND DVCC DVCC GND XTLGND2 GND GND DVCC GND RST/NMI TCK TMS TDI TDO RSTDVCC_SBWTDIO TDO RST/NMI TCK C TCK M TMS I TDI O TDO DVCC P1.2/TA0.1 P1.1/TA0.0 TEST/SBWTCK C M I O DVCC P1.1/TA0.0 P1.2/TA0.1 RSTDVCC_SBWTDIO TEST/SBWTCK AVSS MSP-TS430RGC64C www.ti.com Figure B-37. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, Schematic 86 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector for DVCC. Set jumper JP3 to "ext". IMPORTANT NOTE: Rev1.0 of the board does not have connection from pin 4 of BOOTST to pin 64 of MCU. To use BSL, these pins should be connected by a wire. Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED. D1 LED connected to P1.0 Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumpers JP5 to JP10 -2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode. Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode. Close 1 Jumper JP4 For F524x devices, close. For F522x, F523x and F525x devices, close only if one power supply is used for VCC and DVIO, and if VCC is not higher then 1.98 V. Otherwise. supply DVIO over J6. Do not close if VCC > 1.98 V, as it may damage the chip. Ÿ Ÿ Connector J6 External power connector to supply DVIO www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64C Figure B-38. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 87 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGC64C www.ti.com Table B-21. MSP-TS430RGC64C Bill of Materials Item Qty Reference Value Description Comment Supplier No. 1 0 C1, C2 12pF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DNP C1 C2 2 0 C3, C4 tbd CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DNP C3 C4 4 3 C5, C7, C10 10uF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 5 5 C8 C6 C13-15 100nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DigiKey: 311-1245-2-ND 5 5 C8 2.2nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 6 1 C9 470nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DigiKey: 478-1403-2-ND 7 1 C16 4.7uF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 8 1 D1 Green LED LED, SMD, 0805 DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with 9 4 J1-J4 16-pin header Pin header 1x16: Grid: 100mil kit. Keep vias free of (2.54 mm) solder. : Header SAM1029-16-ND : Receptacle SAM1213-16-ND 10 2 J5, J6 3-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x3: Grid: 100mil SAM1035-03-ND (2.54 mm) 11 JP5, JP6, JP7, 3-pin header, male, TH Pinheader 1x3: Grid: 100mil place jumpers on pins 2-3 SAM1035-03-ND JP8, JP9, JP10 (2.54 mm) 12 JP3 3-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x3: Grid: 100mil place jumper on pins 1-2 SAM1035-03-ND (2.54 mm) 13 JP1, JP2, JP4 2-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x2; Grid: 100mil place jumper on header SAM1035-02-ND (2.54 mm) Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, 14 10 Jumper JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 15-38-1024-ND JP9, JP10 15 1 JTAG 2x7Pin,Wanne Header, THD, Male 2x7 Pin, HRP14H-ND Wanne, 100mil spacing 16 0 BOOTST 2x5Pin,Wanne Header, THD, Male 2x5 Pin, DNP Wanne, 100mil spacing 17 1 Q1 26MHz/ASX53 CRYSTAL, SMD, 5x3MM, Only Kit. 26MHz 18 0 Q2 26MHz/ASX53 CRYSTAL, SMD, 5x3MM, 300-8219-1-ND 26MHz 19 1 D3 LL103A DIODE, SMD, SOD123, Buerklin: 24S3406 Schottky 20 2 R3, R7 330 Ohm, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND 21 1 R5 47k Ohm, SMD0805 RES, SMD, 0805, 1/8W, x% 541-47000ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, 22 R6, R8, R9, 0 Ohm, SMD0805 RES, SMD, 0805, 1/8W, x% R11,R12 541-000ATR-ND R10, R11, R12 23 1 U1 Socket: QFN11T064-006-N- Manuf.: Yamaichi HSP 24 2 MSP430 MSP430F5229IRGCR IC, MCU, SMD, 9.15x9.15mm Thermal Pad with Socket 25 4 Rubber stand Rubber stand off apply to corners at bottom Buerklin: 20H1724 off side 26 1 PCB 84 x 76 mm 84 x 76 mm 88 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64USB B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately 0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V. Figure B-39. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 89 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGC64USB www.ti.com Figure B-40. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, PCB 90 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64USB Table B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805 2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14 3.1 C10, C12 0 10uF, SMD0805 DNP: C10, C12 4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 16-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-16-ND : Header SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP5, JP6, 9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP9, JP10 10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header JP4 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2 Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, 12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = Keep vias free of solder" 12.5pF 15 Q2 1 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: 78D134 16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 17 R6, R8, R9, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R9, R12 R12 18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500 18 R11 1 1M Ω, SMD0805 18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 19 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T064-006 Manuf.: Yamaichi 20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers 21 Rubber stand 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom off side 22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5509 RGC DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_De 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 tail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM=70.0 8.121 27 C33 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074 28 C35 1 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102 29 C36 1 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102 30 C38 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074 31 C39 1 4u7 SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2086 32 C40 1 0.1u SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2068 33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 91 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430RGC64USB www.ti.com Table B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials (continued) Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI 36 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP 37 LED1 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP 38 LED2 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9868 DNP 39 LED3 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9841 DNP 40 R13, R15, 0 470R Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16 41 R33 1 1k4 / 1k5 Buerklin: 07E612 42 R34 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444 43 R35 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444 44 R36 1 33k Buerklin: 07E740 45 S1 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP 46 S2 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP 46 S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND 47 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885 92 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80 B.21 MSP-TS430PN80 NOTE: For MSP430F47x and MSP430FG47x devices: Connect pins 7 and 10 (GND) externally to DVSS (see data sheet). Connect load capacitance on Vref pin 60 when SD16 is used (see data sheet). For use of BSL: connect pin 1 of BOOST to pin 58 of U1 and pin 3 of BOOST to pin 57 of U1. Figure B-41. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 93 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connection Remove R8 and jumper R9 LED connected to pin 12 Jumper J6 Open to disconnect LED Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device MSP-TS430PN80 www.ti.com Figure B-42. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, PCB 94 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80 Table B-23. MSP-TS430PN80 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 1.1 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec. 2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND 5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 6 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-20-ND : Header SAM1213-20-ND : Receptacle 7 J5, JP1 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 8 J6, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, JP2, JP1/Pos1- 2 10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 13 R3 1 560 Ω, SMD0805 541-560ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, DNP: R4, R6, R7, R10, R11, 14 R6, R7, R10, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND R12 R11, R12 15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 16 U1 1 Socket: IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi 17 PCB 1 77 x 77 mm 2 layers 18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side 19 MSP430 2 MSP430FG439IPN DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 95 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PN80A www.ti.com B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A Figure B-43. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, Schematic 96 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP3 to "ext" Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED If the system should be supplied via LDOI (J6), close JP4 and set JP3 to external www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80A Figure B-44. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 97 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PN80A www.ti.com Table B-24. MSP-TS430PN80A Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP 3 C6, C7, 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805 DNP C10 C10, C12 C5, C11, 4 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C15 5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 7 C16 1 4.7uF, SMD0805 8 C17 1 220nF, SMD0805 9 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-20-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 10 J4 0 20-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-20- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder: 11 J5 , J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 12 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10 13 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4 14 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 12 and Pos. 13 15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R 17 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder 12.5pF 18 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134 Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Ar 19 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 t_Detail.cfm?ART_ART NUM=70.08.121 20 D3,D4 2 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406 21 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, R6, 22 R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12 R9,R10, R11, R12 23 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 24 U1 1 Socket:IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi 25 PCB 1 77 x 91 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 26 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 27 MSP430 2 MSP430F5329IPN DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI 98 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80USB B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately 0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V. NOTE: R11 should be populated. Figure B-45. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 99 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP3 1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG debug interface 2-3 (ext): External power supply Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP3 to ‘ext’ USB Connector BSL invoke button S3 Jumper JP4 Close for USB bus powered device Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Jumper JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi- Wire mode. Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode. MSP-TS430PN80USB www.ti.com Figure B-46. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, PCB 100 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80USB Table B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805 2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14 3.1 C10, C12 0 10uF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12 4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: headers and 7 J1, J2, J3, 4 20-pin header, TH SAM1029-20-ND receptacles enclosed with J4 kit. Keep vias free of solder. DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of 7.1 4 20-pin header, TH solder. SAM1213-20-ND : Header : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP5, JP6, 9 JP7, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP8,JP9, JP10 10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4 1 SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper only on one pin 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2 Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, 12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 15 Q2 1 Crystal "Q2: 4MHzBuerklin: 78D134" 16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 17 R6, R8, R9, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R9, R12 R12 18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500 18 R11 0 1M Ω, SMD0805 DNP 18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 19 U1 1 Socket:IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi 20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers 21 Rubber 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 Apply to corners at bottom standoff side 22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5529 DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_ 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 Detail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM =70.08.121 27 C33 1 220n Buerklin: 53D2074 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 101 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PN80USB www.ti.com Table B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials (continued) Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 28 C35 1 10p Buerklin: 56D102 29 C36 1 10p Buerklin: 56D102 30 C38 1 220n Buerklin: 53D2074 31 C39 1 4u7 Buerklin: 53D2086 32 C40 1 0.1u Buerklin: 53D2068 33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406 34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI 36 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP 37 LED1 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP 38 LED2 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9868 DNP 39 LED3 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9841 DNP 40 R13, R15, 0 470R Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16 41 R33 1 1k4 Buerklin: 07E612 42 R34 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444 43 R35 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444 44 R36 1 33k Buerklin: 07E740 45 S1 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP 46 S2 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP 46 S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND 47 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885 102 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100 B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100 NOTE: Connections between the JTAG header and pins XOUT and XIN are no longer required and should not be made. Figure B-47. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 103 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connection Remove R8 and jumper R9 LED connected to pin 12 Jumper J6 Open to disconnect LED Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumper J7 Open to measure current MSP-TS430PZ100 www.ti.com Figure B-48. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, PCB 104 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100 Table B-26. MSP-TS430PZ100 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP DNP: Only 1b C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 recommendation. Check your crystal spec. 2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND DNP: C6 3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND 4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 yellow LED, TH, 3mm, T1 511-1251-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 7 J1, J2, J3, 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1029-25-ND : Header SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 9 J6, J7 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 10 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7 11 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 12 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V- DNP: Keep vias free of 13 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal T1K 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 14 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 15 R8, R9, R10, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R9, R10, R12 R11, R12 16 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 17 U1 1 Socket: IC201-1004-008 or Manuf.: Yamaichi IC357-1004-53N 18 PCB 1 82 x 90 mm 2 layers 19 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side 20 MSP430 2 MSP430FG4619IPZ DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 105 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PZ100A www.ti.com B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A Figure B-49. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, Schematic 106 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED LED D1 connected to P5.1 Jumper JP3 1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface 2-3 (ext): External Power Supply Orient Pin 1 of Device www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100A Figure B-50. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 107 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PZ100A www.ti.com Table B-27. MSP-TS430PZ100A Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP DNP: Only 1b C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 recommendation. Check your crystal spec. 2 C7, C9 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND 3 C5, C11, 3 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C14 4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1358-1-ND 5 C6 0 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND DNP 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 67-1553-1-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles enclosed with 7 J1, J2, J3, 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1029-25-ND : Header SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND pPlace jumper on header 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2 12 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V- DNP: Keep vias free of 15 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal T1K 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 16 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 17 R6, R7, R8, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R7, R8, R9, R9, R10, R10, R11, R12 R11, R12 18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 19 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi 20 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 4 layers 21 Rubber 4 Select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side 22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5438IPZ DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI 108 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100B B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B Figure B-51. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 109 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode JP11, JP12, JP13 Connect 1-2 to connect AUXVCCx with DVCC or drive AUXVCCx externally D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED MSP-TS430PZ100B www.ti.com Figure B-52. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, PCB 110 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100B Table B-28. MSP-TS430PZ100B Bill of Materials Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP C4, C5, 2 C6 , C7, 6 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C8, C9 3 C10, C26 2 470 nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 4 C11, C12 1 10 uF / 6.3 V SMD0805 C12 DNP C13, C14, 5 C16, C18, 6 4.7 uF SMD0805 C19, C29 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-25-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 7 J4 0 25-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-25- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder: 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 9 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10 10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4 11 JP11, 3 4-pin header, male, TH place jumper on header 1-2 JP12, JP13 12 13 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 9 and Pos. 10 and Pos. 11 15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH 16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH 17 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder 21 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, 22 R4, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R10, R11 R8, R10, R11 23 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 24 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi 25 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 2 layers Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 26 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302 27 MSP430 2 MSP430F6733IPZ DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 111 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP 0R 12pF 12pF 47pF 47pF GND 0R 100nF 330R 10uF/6.3V 10uF/6.3V 2.2nF PWR3 GND GND GND 0R GND 330R 47K 100nF 100nF P516TR-ND 470nF 100nF 100nF 0R 0R 0R 0R GND VCC 100nF GND 100nF 100nF GND 100nF LL103A GND 4.7n HCTC_XTL_4 HCTC_XTL_4 HCTC_XTL_4 HCTC_XTL_4 GND 0R 0R GND GND GND 4.7uF GND 100nF 220nF GND VCC LL103A 1.1 MSP430: Target-Socket MSP-TS430PZ100C Socket: Yamaichi IC201-1004-008 LFXTCLK <- SBW <- JTAG Vcc int ext DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP BSL-Rx BSL-Tx DNP 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG R2 C2 C1 C3 C4 C5 R1 R3 C6 C7 C8 1 2 3 J5 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 64 63 62 61 44 43 42 41 37 38 39 40 17 18 19 20 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 U1 QFP100PZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 J1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 J2 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 J3 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 J4 1 JP1 2 1 JP2 2 R4 1 2 3 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 1 2 3 JP9 1 2 3 R7 JP10 R5 C11 C12 D1 C9 C13 C10 R6 R8 R9 R12 1 2 3 JP3 C17 C18 C19 C14 D3 C16 1 2 3 JP11 4 1 2 Q1G$1 3 4 Q1G$2 2 1 Q2G$1 4 3 Q2G$2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BOOTST R10 R11 C15 C20 C21 1 JP4 2 D4 1 2 3 J6 TMS TMS TDI TDI TDO TDO TDO XOUT VCC GND GND GND XIN P1.0 DVCC1 DVCC1 DVCC1 DVCC1 DVCC1 DVCC1 AVCC XT2OUT AVSS AVSS AVSS M M I I O O XT2IN RST/NMI RST/NMI TCK TCK TCK C C TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK RST RST RST XTLGND2 XTLGND1 PU.0 PU.1 P1.6 P1.7 P8.0 P8.1 P8.2 VBAK VBAT VBAT VBAT P1.1 P1.1 P1.2 P1.2 LDOI LDOI LDOO LDOO BSL Interface LDOI/LDOO Interface + + Note: If the system should be supplied via LDOI (J6) close JP4 and set JP3 to external MSP-TS430PZ100C www.ti.com B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C Figure B-53. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, Schematic 112 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP3 to "ext" If the system should be supplied via LDOI (J6), close JP4 and set JP3 to external Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED D1 LED connected to P1.0 Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode LDOI/LDOO 14 1 2 GND GND VCC 1 5 10 1 5 2 25 0 26 30 3540 45 50 75 70 65 60 55 51 100 95 90 85 80 76 1 2 3 123 123 123 123 123 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 10 1 2 1 2 3 1 SBW JTAG Vcc int ext GND VBAT DVCC JTAG R2 C2 C1 C3 C4 R1 C5 R3 + C6 + C7 C8 J5 U1 J1 J2 J3 J4 JP1 JP2 R4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 R7 R5 C11 C12 D1 C9 C13 C10 R6 R8 R9 R12 JP3 C17 C18 C19 C14 D3 C16 JP11 Q1 Q2 BOOTST R10 R11 C15 C20 C21 JP4 D4 J6 www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100C Figure B-54. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 113 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PZ100C www.ti.com Table B-29. MSP-TS430PZ100C Bill of Materials Number Pos. Ref Des Per Description Digi-Key Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: C3, C4 2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND C5, C11, 3 C13, C14, 6 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C19, C20 3.1 C10, C12, 0 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12,C18, C17 C18,17 4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 292 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND J1, J2, J3, DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed 7 J4 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1029-25-ND with kit. Keep vias free of solder. DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed 7.1 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1213-25-ND with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 8 J5, J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP5, JP6, 9 JP7, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP8,JP9, JP10 10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 10.1 JP4 1 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2 12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 14 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder 15 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder 16 Q2 1 Crystal DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 17 R3, R7 2 330 Ohm, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 18 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 R10, R11, R12 19 R5 1 47k Ohm, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 20 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi 21 PCB 1 79.5 x 99.5 mm MSP-TS430PZ100C 2 layers Rev 1.0 22 Rubber 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom side stand off 23 MSP430 2 MSP430F643x DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI. 24 C16 1 4.7 nF SMD0603 Buerklin 53 D 2042 26 D3, D4 2 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406 27 JP11 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumper on Pin 1 and Pin 2 28 C15 1 4.7 uF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 2430 29 C21 1 220nF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 2381 114 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ5x100 B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Figure B-55. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 115 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Connector J5 External power connector Jumper J3 to ‘ext’ Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode. Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode. Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP3 1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG debug interface 2-3 (ext): External power supply MSP-TS430PZ5x100 www.ti.com Figure B-56. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, PCB 116 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Table B-30. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP 1b C3, C4 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec. 2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND C5, C10, 3 C11, C12, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C12, C14 C13, C14 4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 67-1553-1-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 25-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder. SAM1029-25-ND : Header SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP5, JP6, 9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP9, JP10 10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2 12 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on JP1, JP2, JP3, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 15 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11, R10, R11, R12 R12 18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 19 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi 20 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 2 layers 21 Rubber 4 Select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side 22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5438IPZ DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 117 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PZ100USB www.ti.com B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately 0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V. Figure B-57. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, Schematic 118 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100USB Figure B-58. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 119 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PZ100USB www.ti.com Table B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805 2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND C5, C11, 3 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C19 3.1 C10, C12, 0 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12,C18, C17 C18, C17 4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND 6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1029-25-ND Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit. 7.1 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1213-25-ND Keep vias free of solder. : Header : Receptacle 8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP5, JP6, 9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP9, JP10 10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header JP4 11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2 Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, 12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF 15 Q2 1 Crystal Q2: 4MHz, Buerklin: 78D134 16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND R1, R2, R4, 17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R12 R12 18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500 18 R11 1 1M Ω, SMD0603 not existing in Rev 1.0 18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND 19 U1 1 Socket:IC201-1004-008 Manuf.: Yamaichi 20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers 21 Rubber stand 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom off side 22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5529 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_De 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 tail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM=70.0 8.121 24 C16 1 4.7 nF SMD0603 27 C33 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074 28 C35, C36 2 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102 120 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100USB Table B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials (continued) Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 30 C38 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074 31 C39 1 4u7 SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2086 32 C40 1 0.1u SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2068 33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406 34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI 35 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP 36 LED1, LED2, 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP LED3 37 R13, R15, 0 470R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16 38 R33 1 1k4 / 1k5 SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E612 39 R34 1 27R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E444 40 R35 1 27R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E444 41 R36 1 33k SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E740 42 S1, S2, S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND DNP S1 and S2. (Only S3) 43 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885 44 JP11 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND place jumper only on Pin 1 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 121 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 0R 12pF 12pF GND GND 0R 100nF 330R 2.2nF 0R 0R PWR3 GND 330R 47K 0R 0R 100nF 4.7uF GND GND 100nF 470nF 0R QUARZ5 100nF 10uF/6,3V 10uF/6,3V 100nF 4.7uF 4.7uF 100nF 4.7uF 4.7uF 4.7uF 470nF FE04-1 VCC GND GND 100nF 4.7uF GND GND GND GND GND VCC1 VCC1 VCC1 VCC1 VCC1 GND GND GND GND GND GND AVSS AVSS DVCC AVCC GND VCC VCC GND MSP430: Target-Socket MSP-TS430PEU128 for F6779 Petersen 1080/1/001/01.1 DNP LFXTCLK DNP <- SBW <- JTAG DNP Vcc int ext DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DNP DVDSYS 1.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 J1 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 J2 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 J3 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 J4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 12 14 8 10 JTAG R2 C2 C1 R1 C5 R3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BOOTST C3 R10 R11 J5 1 2 3 1 2 JP1 JP2 1 2 1 2 3 JP5 1 2 3 JP6 1 2 3 JP7 1 2 3 JP8 1 2 3 JP9 1 2 3 JP10 R7 R5 D1 R6 R8 C6 C29 C7 C10 R4 Q1 JP12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 JP11 JP131 2 3 4 C4 C11 C12 C8 C13 C14 C9 C16 C19 C18 C26 1 2 JP4 JP3 1 2 3 4 C15 C17 TP1 TP2 IC1 MSP430F677XIPEU# XIN 1 XOUT 2 AUXVCC3 3 RTCCAP1 4 RTCCAP0 5 P1.5/SMCLK/CB0/A5 6 P1.4/MCLK/SDCLK/CB1/A4 7 P1.3/ADC10CLK/TACLK/RTCCLK/A3 8 P1.2/ACLK/TA3.1/A2 9 P1.1/TA2.1/VEREF+/A1 10 P1.0/TA1.1/TA0.0/VEREF-/A0 11 P2.4/PM_TA2.0 12 P2.5/PM_UCB0SOMI/PM_UCB0SCL 13 P2.6/PM_USB0SIMO/PM_UCB0SDA 14 P2.7/PM_UCB0CLK 15 P3.0/PM_UCA0RXD/PM_UCA0SOMI 16 P3.1/PM_UCA0TXD/PM_UCA0SIMO 17 P3.2/PM_UCA0CLK 18 P3.3/PM_UCA1CLK 19 P3.4/PM_UCA1RXD/PM_UCA1SOMI 20 P3.5/PM_UCA1TXD/PM_UCA1SIMO 21 COM0 22 COM1 23 P1.6/COM2 24 P1.7/COM3 25 P5.0/COM4 26 P5.1/COM5 27 P5.2/COM6 28 P5.3/COM7 29 LCDCAP/R33 30 P5.4/SDCLK/R23 31 P5.5/SD0DIO/LCDREF/R13 32 P5.6/SD1DIO/R03 33 P5.7/SD2DIO/CB2 34 P6.0/SD3DIO 35 P3.6/PM_UCA2RXD/PM_UCA2SOMI 36 P3.7/PM_UCA2TXD/PM_UCA2SIMO 37 P4.0/PM_UCA2CLK 38 P4.1/PM_UCA3RXD/PM_UCA3SOMI 39 P4.2/PM_UCA3TXD/PM_UCA3SIMO 40 P4.3/PM_UCA3CLK 41 P4.4/PM_UCB1SOMI/PM_UCB1SCL 42 P4.5/PM_UCB1SIMO/PM_UCB1SDA 43 P4.6/PM_UCB1CLK 44 P4.7/PM_TA3.0 45 P6.1/SD4DIO/S39 46 P6.2/SD5DIO/S38 47 P6.3/SD6DIO/S37 48 P6.4/S36 49 P6.5/S35 50 P6.6/S34 51 P6.7/S33 52 P7.0/S32 53 P7.1/S31 54 P7.2/S30 55 P7.3/S29 56 P7.4/S28 57 P7.5/S27 58 P7.6/S26 59 P7.7/S25 60 P8.0/S24 61 P8.1/S23 62 P8.2/S22 63 P8.3/S21 64 P8.4/S20 65 P8.5/S19 66 P8.6/S18 67 P8.7/S17 68 DVSYS 69 DVSS2 70 P9.0/S16 71 P9.1/S15 72 P9.2/S14 73 P9.3/S13 74 P9.4/S12 75 P9.5/S11 76 P9.6/S10 77 P9.7/S9 78 P10.0/S8 79 P10.1/S7 80 P10.2/S6 81 P10.3/S5 82 P10.4/S4 83 P10.5/S3 84 P10.6/S2 85 P10.7/S1 86 P11.0/S0 87 P11.1/TA3.1/CB3 88 P11.2/TA1.1 89 P11.3/TA2.1 90 P11.4/CBOUT 91 P11.5/TACLK/RTCCLK 92 P2.0/PM_TA0.0 93 P2.1/PM_TA0.1 94 P2.2/PM_TA0.2 95 P2.3/PM_TA1.0 96 TEST/SBWTCK 97 PJ.0/TDO 98 PJ.1/TDI/TCLK 99 PJ.2/TMS 100 PJ.3/TCK 101 ~RST/NMI/SBWTDIO 102 SD0P0 103 SD0N0 104 SD1P0 105 SD1N0 106 SD2P0 107 SD2N0 108 SD3P0 109 SD3N0 110 VASYS2 111 AVSS2 112 VREF 113 SD4P0 114 SD4N0 115 SD5P0 116 SD5N0 117 SD6P0 118 SD6N0 119 AVSS1 120 AVCC 121 VASYS1 122 AUXVCC2 123 AUXVCC1 124 VDSYS 125 DVCC 126 DVSS1 127 VCORE 128 P1.0 P1.0 P2.0 P2.0 P2.1 P2.1 SD0P0 SD0N0 SD1P0 SD1N0 SD2P0 SD2N0 SD3P0 SD3N0 SD4P0 SD4N0 SD5P0 SD5N0 SD6P0 SD6N0 VASYS1/2 VASYS1/2 VASYS1/2 VASYS1/2 TMS TMS TDI TDI TDO TDO TDO XOUT GND GND XIN DVCC AVCC DVDSYS DVDSYS DVDSYS DVDSYS AVSS AVSS PJ.2 PJ.2 PJ.1 PJ.1 PJ.0 PJ.0 RST/NMI RST/NMI TCK TCK TCK PJ.3 PJ.3 TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK TEST/SBWTCK RST RST RST RST LCDCAP LCDCAP VREF VREF VEREF+ VEREF+ VCORE AUXVCC2 AUXVCC2 AUXVCC1 AUXVCC1 AUXVCC3 AUXVCC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Titel: Datum: Bearb.: Seite 1/1 MSP-TS430PEU128 22.05.2012 09:37:33 A3 A B C D E F G H I A B C D E F G H I File: Dok: Rev.: MSP-TS430PEU128 www.ti.com B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128 Figure B-59. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, Schematic 122 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated 1 P1.0 SBW JTAG DVDSYS ext int MSP-TS430PEU128 Rev. 1.1 RoHS DVCC AUXVCC GND AUXVCC1 AUXVCC2 AUXVCC3 GND GND RST/NMI TCK TDI TDO TEST/SBWTCK TMS 1 25 5 10 15 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 64 65 90 70 75 80 85 95 100 128 125 120 115 110 105 14 1 2 10 1 2 GND GND VCC 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1234 1234 1 J1 J2 J3 J4 JTAG R2 C2 C1 R1 C5 R3 BOOTST C3 R10 R11 J5 JP1 JP2 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 R7 R5 D1 R6 R8 C6 C29 C7 C10 R4 JP12 JP11 JP13 C4 C11 C12 C8 C13 C14 C9 C16 C19 C18 C26 JP4 JP3 C15 C17 TP1 TP2 IC1 Connector J5 External power connector Jumper JP1 to "ext" Jumper JP1 Open to measure current Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device Jumpers JP5 to JP10 Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode JP11, JP12, JP13 Connect 1-2 to connect AUXVCCx with DVCC or drive AUXVCCx externally D1 LED connected to P1.0 Jumper JP2 Open to disconnect LED www.ti.com MSP-TS430PEU128 Figure B-60. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, PCB NOTE: The MSP-TS430PEU128 Rev 1.1 ships with the following modifications: • R7 value is changed to 0 Ω instead of 330 Ω. • JTAG pin 8 is connected only to JP5 pin 3, and not to pin 2. • JP5 pin 2 is connected to IC1 pin 97. • BOOTST pin 7 is connected to IC1 pin 97. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 123 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-TS430PEU128 www.ti.com Table B-32. MSP-TS430PEU128 Bill of Materials Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board 1 PCB 1 94x119.4mm, 4 layers MSP-TS430PEU128 4 layers, green solder mask Rev. 1.1 2 D1 1 green LED, DIODE0805 516-1434-1-ND 3 JP1, JP2, JP4 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header 4 JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2 (SBW) JP9, JP10 5 JP11, JP12, JP13 3 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2 (AVCC=VCC) 6 JP3 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2 JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, Jumper WM4592-ND 7 JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 13 JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12, JP13 8 R1, R2, R4, R6, R8 5 0R, 0805 541-0.0ATR-ND 9 R10, R11 2 0R, 0805 541-0.0ATR-ND DNP 10 C3 1 2.2nF, CSMD0805 490-1628-2-ND DNP 11 C13, C14, C16, 7 4.7uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 587-1302-2-ND C17, C18, C19, C29 12 C11 1 10uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 445-1372-2-ND 13 C12 1 10uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 445-1372-2-ND DNP 14 C1, C2 2 12pF, CSMD0805 490-5531-2-ND DNP 15 R5 1 47K, 0805 311-47KARTR-ND 16 C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, 6 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C15 17 C9 1 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP 18 R3, R7 2 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND 19 C10, C26 2 470nF, CSMD0805 587-1282-2-ND 20 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder 21 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND 22 IC1 Socket 1 Socket: IC500-1284-009P Manuf. Yamaichi 23 IC1 2 MSP430F67791IPEU DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI 24 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 25 Q1 1 Crystal: MS3V-T1R 32.768kHz DNP: Crystal enclosed with kit. Keep vias 12.5pF ±20ppm free of solder 26 TP1, TP2 2 Test point DNP, keep vias free of solder 27 J2,J4 2 26-pin header, TH SAM1029-26-ND DNP: Headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 28 J2,J4 2 26-pin receptable, TH SAM1213-26-ND DNP: Receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 29 J1, J3 2 38-pin header, TH SAM1029-38-ND DNP: Headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 30 J1, J3 2 38-pin receptable, TH SAM1213-38-ND DNP: Receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. 31 Rubber feet 4 Rubber feet Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to bottom side corners 124 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Power Management VCC01 = external VCC Vdd = DVCC Vdda1 = AVDD_RF / AVCC_RF Vdda2 = AVCC Port connectors CON1 .. CON3 = Port1 .. Port3 of cc430 CON4 = spare CON5 = 1: XIN 2: XOUT CON6 = Vdd, GND, Vcore, COM0, LCDCAP CON7 = Vdda1, Vdda2, GND, AGND CON8 = JTAG_BASE (JTAG Port) CON9 = Vdd, GND, AGND (May be addedclose to therespective pins to reduce emissions at 5GHz toel vel required byETSI) www.ti.com EM430F5137RF900 B.31 EM430F5137RF900 Figure B-61. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 125 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated JTAG connector External power connector CON12 GND GND VCC Open to disconnect LEDs jumper JP5/JP10 LED D2 (red) connected to P3.6 via JP10 LED D1 (green) connected to P1.0 via JP5 RF - Crystal Q1 26 MHz RF - Signal SMA Reset button S1 Push-button S2 connected to P1.7 Jumper JP1 Close JTAG position to debug in JTAG mode Jumper JP2 Close EXT for external supply Close INT for JTAG supply Close SBW position to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Jumper JP1 Spy-Bi-Wire mode Footprint for 32kHz crystal Use 0 resistor for R431/R441 to make XIN/XOUT available on connector port5 ! Open to measure current jumper JP3 EM430F5137RF900 www.ti.com Figure B-62. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, PCB The battery pack that is included with the EM430F5137RF900 kit may be connected to CON12. Ensure correct battery insertion regarding the polarity as indicated in battery holder. 126 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com EM430F5137RF900 Table B-33. EM430F5137RF900 Bill of Materials Item Reference No. per Description Value Manufacturer's Part Manufacturer Comment Board Number 1 Q1 1 ( CUSTOMER SUPPLY ) CRYSTAL, 26M ASX-531(CS) AKER SMT, 4P, 26MHz ELECTRONIC C1-C5, C082, C222, C271, CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 16V, 2 C281, C311, 14 10%, 0.1uF 0.1uF 0402YC104KAT2A AVX C321, C341, C412, C452 3 C071 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 0.47uF 0603YD474KAT2A AVX 0.47uF, 16V, 10%, X5R 4 R401 1 RES0402, 47.0K 47kΩ CRCW04024702F10 DALE 0 5 CON11 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 14P, 2X7, 09 18 514 6323 HARTING 25.4x9.2x9.45mm 6 CON10 0 HEADER, THU, MALE, 10P, 2X5, 09 18 510 6323 HARTING DNP 20.32x9.2x9.45mm 7 D1 1 LED, SMT, 0603, GREEN, 2.1V active APT1608MGC KINGBRIGHT 8 D2 1 LED, SMT, 0603, RED, 2.0V active APT1608EC KINGBRIGHT 9 Q3 0 UNINSTALLED CRYSTAL, SMT, 3P, 32.768k MS1V-T1K (UN) MICRO DNP MS1V (Customer Supply) CRYSTAL 10 CON12 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 3P, 1x3, 22-03-5035 MOLEX 9.9x4.9x5.9mm 11 C251, C261 2 50V, 5%, 27pF 27pF GRM36COG270J50 MURATA 12 L341 1 FERRITE, SMT, 0402, 1.0kΩ, 250mA 1kΩ BLM15HG102SN1D MURATA 13 C293 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 100pF GRM1555C1H101JZ MURATA 100pF, 50V, 0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 01 14 L304 1 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 2.2nH, 0.1nH, 0.0022uH LQP15MN2N2B02 MURATA 220mA, 500MHz 15 L303, L305 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 15nH, 2%, 0.015uH LQW15AN15NG00 MURATA 450mA, 250MHz 16 L292, L302 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 18nH, 2%, 0.018uH LQW15AN18NG00 MURATA 370mA, 250MHz 17 C291 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 1pF GRM1555C1H1R0W MURATA 1pF, 50V, 0.05pF, C0G(NP0) Z01 18 C303 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 8.2pF GRM1555C1H8R2W MURATA 8.2pF, 50V, 0.05pF, C0G(NP0) Z01 19 C292, C301- 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 1.5pF GRM1555C1H1R5W MURATA C302, C304 1.5pF, 50V, 0.05pF, C0G(NP0) Z01 20 L291, L301 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 12nH, 2%, 0.012uH LQW15AN12NG00 MURATA 500mA, 250MHz C282, C312, CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, GRM1555C1H2R0B 21 C351, C361, 5 2pF, 50V, 0.1pF, C0G 2.0pF Z01 Murata C371 22 L1 1 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 6.2nH, 0.1nH, 6.2nH LQP15MN6N2B02 Murata 130mA, 500MHz 23 S1-S2 2 ULTRA-SMALL TACTILE SWITCH, SMT, B3U-1000P OMRON 2P, SPST-NO, 1.2x3x2.5mm, 0.05A, 12V R4-R5, R051, UNINSTALLED RESISTOR/JUMPER, 24 R061, R431, 0 SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 5%, 1/16W 0Ω ERJ-2GE0R00X PANASONIC DNP R441 24a R7 1 RESISTOR/JUMPER, SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 0Ω ERJ-2GE0R00X PANASONIC 5%, 1/16W 25 R2-R3, R6 3 RESISTOR, SMT, 0402, THICK FILM, 330Ω ERJ-2GEJ331 PANASONIC 5%, 1/16W, 330 26 C431, C441 0 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 12pF, 12pF ECJ-0EC1H120J PANASONIC 50V, 5%, NPO 27 C401 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 2200pF, 0.0022uF ECJ-0EB1H222K PANASONIC 50V, 10%, X7R 28 R331 1 RESISTOR, SMT, THICK FILM, 56K, 56kΩ ERJ-2GEJ563 PANASONIC 1/16W, 5% 29 C081, C221, 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 10uF ECJ-1VB0J106M PANASONIC C411, C451 10uF, 6.3V, 20%, X5R SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 127 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated EM430F5137RF900 www.ti.com Table B-33. EM430F5137RF900 Bill of Materials (continued) Item Reference No. per Description Value Manufacturer's Part Manufacturer Comment Board Number 30 R1 1 RESISTOR/JUMPER, SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 0Ω ERJ-2GE0R00X PANASONIC 5%, 1/16W 31 C041 0 UNINSTALLED CAP CERAMIC 4.7UF 4.7uF ECJ-1VB0J475K Panasonic DNP 6.3V X5R 0603 32 X1 1 SMA STRIGHT JACK, SMT 32K10A-40ML5 ROSENBERGER 33 Q2 0 Crystal, SMT, 32.768 kHz 32.768k MS3V-T1R Micro Crystal DNP 34 U1 1 DUT, SMT, PQFP, RGZ-48, 0.5mmLS, CC430F52x1 TI 7.15x7.15x1mm, THRM.PAD 35 JP1 1 Pin Connector 2x4pin 61300821121 WUERTH 36 CON1-CON9 0 Pin Connector 2x4pin 61300821121 WUERTH DNP 37 JP2 1 Pin Connector 1x3pin 61300311121 WUERTH 38 JP3, JP5, 3 Pin Connector 1x2pin 61300211121 WUERTH JP10 38a JP7, CON13 0 Pin Connector 1x2pin 61300211121 WUERTH DNP 39 JP4 1 Pin Connector 2x2pin 61300421121 WUERTH DNP 40 JP1a 1 Pin Connector 2x3pin 61300621121 WUERTH 128 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Power Management VCC01 = external VCC Vdd = DVCC Vdda1 = AVDD_RF / AVCC_RF Vdda2 = AVCC Port connectors CON1 .. CON5 = Port1 .. Port5 of cc430 CON6 = Vdd, GND, Vcore, COM0, LCDCAP CON7 = Vdda1, Vdda2, GND, AGND CON8 = JTAG_BASE (JTAG Port) CON9 = Vdd, GND, AGND (May beaddedcol se to therespective pins to reduce emissions at 5GHz to el vel required by ETSI) www.ti.com EM430F6137RF900 B.32 EM430F6137RF900 Figure B-63. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 129 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated JTAG connector External power connector CON12 GND GND VCC Open to disconnect LEDs jumper JP5/JP10 LED D2 (red) connected to P3.6 via JP10 LED D1 (green) connected to P1.0 via JP5 RF - Crystal Q1 26 MHz RF - Signal SMA Reset button S1 Push-button S2 connected to P1.7 Jumper JP1 Close JTAG position to debug in JTAG mode Jumper JP2 Close EXT for external supply Close INT for JTAG supply Close SBW position to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode Jumper JP1 Spy-Bi-Wire mode Footprint for 32kHz crystal Use 0 resistor for R541/R551 to makeP5.0/P5.1 available on connector port5 ! Open to measure current jumper JP3 C392 C422 L451 EM430F6137RF900 www.ti.com Figure B-64. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, PCB The battery pack that is included with the EM430F6137RF900 kit may be connected to CON12. Ensure correct battery insertion regarding the polarity as indicated in battery holder. 130 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com EM430F6137RF900 Table B-34. EM430F6137RF900 Bill of Materials No. Pos. Ref Des per Description Part No. Manufacturer Board 1 Q1 1 ( CUSTOMER SUPPLY ) CRYSTAL, SMT, ASX-531(CS) AKER 4P, 26MHz ELECTRONIC C1-C5, C112, C252, C381, CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 16V, 10%, 2 C391, C421, 14 0.1uF 0402YC104KAT2A AVX C431, C451, C522, C562 3 C101 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 0.47uF, 0603YD474KAT2A AVX 16V, 10%, X5R 4 R511 1 RES0402, 47.0K CRCW04024702F100 DALE 5 CON11 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 14P, 2X7, 09 18 514 6323 HARTING 25.4x9.2x9.45mm, 90deg 7 D1 1 LED, SMT, 0603, GREEN, 2.1V APT1608MGC KINGBRIGHT 8 D2 1 LED, SMT, 0603, RED, 2.0V APT1608EC KINGBRIGHT 10 CON12 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 3P, 1x3, 22-03-5035 MOLEX 9.9x4.9x5.9mm 11 C361, C371 2 50V, ±5%, 27pF GRM36COG270J50 MURATA 12 L451 1 FERRITE, SMT, 0402, 1.0kΩ, 250mA BLM15HG102SN1D MURATA 13 C403 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 100pF, GRM1555C1H101JZ01 MURATA 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 14 L414 1 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 2.2nH, ±0.2nH, LQW15AN2N2C10 MURATA 1000mA, 250MHz 15 L413, L415 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 15nH, ±5%, 460mA, LQW15AN15NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 16 L402, L412 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 18nH, ±5%, 370mA, LQW15AN18NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 17 C401 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 1pF, 50V, GJM1555C1H1R0CB01D MURATA ±0.25pF, NP0 18 C413 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 8.2pF, GRM1555C1H8R2CZ01 MURATA 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 19 C402, C411- 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 1.5pF, GRM1555C1H1R5CZ01 MURATA C412, C414 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 20 L401, L411 2 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 12nH, ±5%, 500mA, LQW15AN12NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 21 C46-C48, 5 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 2.0pF, GRM1555C1H2R0CZ01 Murata C392, C422 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 22 L1 1 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 6.2nH, ±0.1nH, LQW15AN6N2D00 Murata 700mA, 250MHz 23 S1-S2 2 ULTRA-SMALL TACTILE SWITCH, SMT, 2P, B3U-1000P OMRON SPST-NO, 1.2x3x2.5mm, 0.05A, 12V 24 R7 1 RESISTOR/JUMPER, SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 5%, ERJ-2GE0R00X (UN) PANASONIC 1/16W 25 R2-R3, R6 3 RESISTOR, SMT, 0402, THICK FILM, 5%, ERJ-2GEJ331 PANASONIC 1/16W, 330 27 C511 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 2200pF, ECJ-0EB1H222K PANASONIC 50V, 10%, X7R 28 C111, C251, 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 10uF, ECJ-1VB0J106M PANASONIC C521, C561 6.3V, 20%, X5R 28a C041 1 CAP CERAMIC 4.7UF 6.3V X5R 0603 ECJ-1VB0J475M PANASONIC 29 R441 1 RESISTOR, SMT, THICK FILM, 56K, 1/16W, ERJ-2RKF5602 PANASONIC 1% 30 R1 1 RESISTOR/JUMPER, SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 5%, ERJ-2GE0R00X PANASONIC 1/16W 31 X1 1 SMA STRIGHT JACK, SMT 32K10A-40ML5 ROSENBERGER SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 131 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated EM430F6137RF900 www.ti.com Table B-34. EM430F6137RF900 Bill of Materials (continued) No. Pos. Ref Des per Description Part No. Manufacturer Board 33 U1 1 DUT, SMT, PQFP, RGC-64, 0.5mmLS, CC430F6137 TI 9.15x9.15x1mm, THRM.PAD 34 JP1 1 Pin Connector 2x4pin 61300821121 WUERTH 35 JP2 1 Pin Connector 1x3pin 61300311121 WUERTH 36a JP3, JP5, JP10 3 Pin Connector 1x2pin 61300211121 WUERTH 38 JP1a 1 Pin Connector 2x3pin 61300621121 WUERTH 132 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com EM430F6147RF900 B.33 EM430F6147RF900 Figure B-65. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 133 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated EM430F6147RF900 www.ti.com Figure B-66. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, PCB The battery pack which comes with the EM430F6147RF900 kit may be connected to CON12. Ensure correct battery insertion regarding the polarity as indicated in battery holder. 134 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com EM430F6147RF900 Table B-35. EM430F6147RF900 Bill of Materials No. Pos. Ref Des per Description Part No. Manufacturer Board 1 Q1 1 ( CUSTOMER SUPPLY ) CRYSTAL, SMT, ASX-531(CS) AKER 4P, 26MHz ELECTRONIC C1-5 C112 C252 C381 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 16V, 10%, 2 C391 C421 14 0.1uF 0402YC104KAT2A AVX C431 C451 C522 C562 3 C101 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 0.47uF, 0603YD474KAT2A AVX 16V, 10%, X5R 4 R511 1 RES0402, 47.0K CRCW04024702F100 DALE 5 CON11 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 14P, 2X7, 09 18 514 6323 HARTING 25.4x9.2x9.45mm, 90deg 7 D1 1 LED, SMT, 0603, GREEN, 2.1V APT1608MGC KINGBRIGHT 8 D2 1 LED, SMT, 0603, RED, 2.0V APT1608EC KINGBRIGHT 10 CON12 1 HEADER, THU, MALE, 3P, 1x3, 22-03-5035 MOLEX 9.9x4.9x5.9mm 11 C361, C371 2 50V, ±5%, 27pF GRM36COG270J50 MURATA 12 L451 1 Inductor, SMD, 0402, 12nH, 5%, 370mA LQW15AN12NJ00 MURATA 13 C403 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 100pF, GRM1555C1H101JZ01 MURATA 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 14 L414 1 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 2.2nH, ±0.2nH, LQW15AN2N2C10 MURATA 1000mA, 250MHz 15 L413 1 Inductor, SMD, 0402, 15nH, 5%, 370mA, LQW15AN15NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 15 L415 1 INDUCTOR,SMT,0402,15nH,±5%,460mA,250 LQW15AN15NJ00 MURATA MHz 16 L402, L412 2 Inductor, SMD, 0402, 18nH, 5%, 460mA, LQW15AN18NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 17 C401 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 1pF, 50V, GJM1555C1H1R0CB01D MURATA ±0.25pF, NP0 18 C413 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 8.2pF, GRM1555C1H8R2CZ01 MURATA 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 19 C402, C411- 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 1.5pF, GRM1555C1H1R5CZ01 MURATA C412, C414 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 20 L1, L401, L411 3 INDUCTOR, SMT, 0402, 12nH, ±5%, 500mA, LQW15AN12NJ00 MURATA 250MHz 21 C46-C48, 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CERAMIC, 2.0pF, GRM1555C1H2R0CZ01 MURATA C392 50V, ±0.25pF, C0G(NP0) 22 L2 1 Inductor, SMD, 0805, 2.2uH, 20%, 600mA, LQM21PN2R2MC0 MURATA 50MHz 23 S1-S2 2 ULTRA-SMALL TACTILE SWITCH, SMT, 2P, B3U-1000P OMRON SPST-NO, 1.2x3x2.5mm, 0.05A, 12V 24 R1, R7, R551, 4 RESISTOR/JUMPER, SMT, 0402, 0 Ω, 5%, ERJ-2GE0R00X (UN) PANASONIC R554 1/16W 25 R2-R3, R6 3 RESISTOR, SMT, 0402, THICK FILM, 5%, ERJ-2GEJ331 PANASONIC 1/16W, 330 27 C511 1 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0402, CER, 2200pF, ECJ-0EB1H222K PANASONIC 50V, 10%, X7R 28 C111, C251, 4 CAPACITOR, SMT, 0603, CERAMIC, 1uF, ECJ-1VB0J105K PANASONIC C521, C561 6.3V, 20%, X5R 28a C041 1 CAP CERAMIC 4.7UF 6.3V X5R 0603 ECJ-1VB0J475M PANASONIC 29 R441 1 RESISTOR, SMT, THICK FILM, 56K, 1/16W, ERJ-2RKF5602 PANASONIC 1% 30 X1 1 SMA STRIGHT JACK, SMT 32K10A-40ML5 ROSENBERGER SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 135 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated EM430F6147RF900 www.ti.com Table B-35. EM430F6147RF900 Bill of Materials (continued) No. Pos. Ref Des per Description Part No. Manufacturer Board 31 U1 1 DUT, SMT, PQFP, RGC-64, 0.5mmLS, CC430F6147 TI 9.15x9.15x1mm, THRM.PAD 33 U2 1 IC, Step Down Converter with Bypass Mode TPS62370 TI for Low Power Wireless 34 JP1 1 Pin Connector 2x4pin 61300821121 WUERTH 35 JP2, JP6, JP8 3 Pin Connector 1x3pin 61300311121 WUERTH 36a JP3, JP5, JP9, 4 Pin Connector 1x2pin 61300211121 WUERTH JP10 38 JP1a 1 Pin Connector 2x3pin 61300621121 WUERTH 38 C7 1 Capacitor, Ceramic, 1206, 16V, X5R, 20% GRM31CR61C226ME15L MURATA 38 C8-9 2 CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0402, 2.2uF, X5R GRM155R60J225ME15D MURATA 38 C041 1 CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0603, 4.7uF, 16V, 10%, MURATA X5R 136 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-FET430PIF B.34 MSP-FET430PIF Figure B-67. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, Schematic SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 137 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-FET430PIF www.ti.com Figure B-68. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, PCB 138 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-FET430UIF B.35 MSP-FET430UIF Figure B-69. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (1 of 4) SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 139 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-FET430UIF www.ti.com Figure B-70. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (2 of 4) 140 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-FET430UIF Figure B-71. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (3 of 4) SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 141 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-FET430UIF www.ti.com Figure B-72. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (4 of 4) 142 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com MSP-FET430UIF Figure B-73. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, PCB SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 143 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated MSP-FET430UIF www.ti.com B.35.1 MSP-FET430UIF Revision History Revision 1.3 • Initial released hardware version Assembly change on 1.3 (May 2005) • R29, R51, R42, R21, R22, R74: value changed from 330R to 100R Changes 1.3 to 1.4 (Aug 2005) • J5: VBUS and RESET additionally connected • R29, R51, R42, R21, R22, R74: value changed from 330R to 100R • U1, U7: F1612 can reset TUSB3410; R44 = 0R added • TARGET-CON.: pins 6, 10, 12, 13, 14 disconnected from GND • Firmware-upgrade option through BSL: R49, R52, R53, R54 added; R49, R52 are currently DNP • Pullups on TCK and TMS: R78, R79 added • U2: Changed from SN74LVC1G125DBV to SN74LVC1G07DBV NOTE: Using a locally powered target board with hardware revision 1.4 Using an MSP-FET430UIF interface hardware revision 1.4 with populated R62 in conjunction with a locally powered target board is not possible. In this case, the target device RESET signal is pulled down by the FET tool. It is recommended to remove R62 to eliminate this restriction. This component is located close to the 14-pin connector on the MSP-FET430UIF PCB. See the schematic and PCB drawings in this document for the exact location of this component. Assembly change on 1.4a (January 2006) • R62: not populated 144 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Appendix C SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware Installation Guide This section describes the hardware installation process of the following USB debug interfaces on a PC running Windows XP: • MSP-FET430UIF • eZ430-F2013 • eZ430-RF2500 • eZ430-Chronos • eZ430-RF2780 • eZ430-RF2560 • MSP-WDSxx "Metawatch" • LaunchPad (MSP-EXP430G2) • MSP-EXP430FR5739 • MSP-EXP430F5529 The installation procedure for other supported versions of Windows is very similar and, therefore, not shown here. Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page C.1 Hardware Installation ....................................................................................... 146 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware Installation Guide 145 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Hardware Installation www.ti.com C.1 Hardware Installation Table C-1 shows the USB VIDs and PIDs used in MSP430 tools. Table C-1. USB VIDs and PIDs Used in MSP430 Tools Tool USB VID USB PID INF File Name eZ430-F2013 0x0451 0xF430 usbuart3410.inf eZ430-RF2500 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf eZ430-RF2780 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf eZ430-RF2560 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf MSP-WDSxx "Metawatch" 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf eZ430-Chronos 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf MSP-FET430UIF(1) 0x2047 0x0010 msp430tools.inf LaunchPad (MSP-EXP430G2) 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf MSP-EXP430FR5739 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf MSP-EXP430F5529 0x0451 0xF432 430CDC.inf (1) The older MSP-FET430UIF used with IAR versions before v5.20.x and CCS versions before v5.1 has VID 0x0451 and PID 0xF430. With the firmware update, it is updated to the 0x2047 and 0x0010, respectively. 1. Before connecting of the USB Debug Interface with a USB cable to a USB port of the PC the one of IDEs (CCS or IAR) should be installed. The IDE installation isntalls also drivers for USB Debug Interfaces without user interaction. After IDE installation the USB Debug Interface can be connected and will be ready to work within few seconds. 2. The driver can be also installed manually. After plug in the USB Debug Interface to USB port of the PC the Hardware Wizard starts automatically and opens the "Found New Hardware Wizard" window. 3. Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)" (see Figure C-1). Figure C-1. Windows XP Hardware Wizard 146 Hardware Installation Guide SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Hardware Installation 4. Browse to the folder where the driver information files are located (see Figure C-2). For CCS, the default folder is: c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_CDC, or c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_FET_XP_XX, or c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_eZ-RF depending of firmware version of the tool. For IAR Embedded Workbench, the default folder is: \Embedded Workbench x.x\ 430\drivers\TIUSBFET\eZ430-UART, or \Embedded Workbench x.x\ 430\drivers\. Figure C-2. Windows XP Driver Location Selection Folder 5. The Wizard generates a message that an appropriate driver has been found. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware Installation Guide 147 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Hardware Installation www.ti.com 6. The wizard installs the driver files. 7. The wizard shows a message that it has finished the installation of the software USB Debug Interface. 8. The USB debug interface is installed and ready to use. The Device Manager lists a new entry as shown in Figure C-3, Figure C-4, or Figure C-5. Figure C-3. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface using VID/PID 0x2047/0x0010 148 Hardware Installation Guide SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Hardware Installation Figure C-4. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF430 SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware Installation Guide 149 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated Hardware Installation www.ti.com Figure C-5. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF432 150 Hardware Installation Guide SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated www.ti.com Document Revision History Document Revision History Version Changes SLAU278 Initial release SLAU278A Updated USB driver installation according to CCE v3.1 SR1 and CCS v4. SLAU278B Added information about MSP-FET430U80USB, MSP-TS430PN80USB, and eZ430-Chronos. SLAU278C Added bills of materials and updated some PCBs in Appendix B. Added information about MSP-TS430DA38, MSP-TS430DL48, MSP-TS430PW14, MSP-TS430PW28. SLAU278D Added information about MSP-TS430L092, MSP-TS430RSB40, MSP-TS430RGC64USB, MSP-TS430PZ100USB, MSPFET430F5137RF900 SLAU278E Added jumper information for MSP-TS430L092 PCBs to Appendix B. Added new supported devices in Chapter 1. Added information about MSP-TS430PW24, MSP-TS430PW28A, MSP-TS430RHA40A, MSP-TS430RGZ48B, MSPSLAU278F TS430RGC64B, MSP-TS430PN80A, and MSP-TS430PZ100B. Updated MSP-TS430RSB40 schematics SLAU278G Added information for MSP-TS430PZ100C SLAU278H Added information for MSP-TS430D8 and MSP-TS430RGC64C Updated Table 1-1. Replaced Figure 2-2. SLAU278I Added Figure 2-3. Replaced Figure B-37 and Figure B-67. Added Table C-1. Editorial changes throughout. SLAU278J Added EM430F6147RF900 Section B.33. Added battery pack connection information to all EM430Fx1x7RF900 kits. SLAU278K Added information for MSP-TS430RGZ48C and MSP-TS430PEU128. Updated Figure B-38. SLAU278L Changed descriptions in Section B.19 and Section B.30. Changed Figure B-60. SLAU278M Added information for MSP430G2x44 and MSP430G2x55 in Table 1-2. SLAU278N Updated Table 1-1. Updated Section 2.3. Changed Table 1-1 and Table 1-2 for MSP430TCH5E. Changed Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-3. SLAU278O Changed FAQ 12 in Section A.1. Changed Figure B-47, Figure B-49, and Figure B-69 through Figure B-73. Added information about F523x, F524x, and F525x to Table 1-2 and Section B.19. SLAU278P Changed Figure B-38. Added BSL information to note on Figure B-41. Figure B-15, Corrected JTAG mode selection jumpers (J4 to J7). SLAU278Q Section B.19, In last sentence, corrected jumper (JP4). Removed "RF Emission Testing" section. NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version. SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Revision History 151 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated EVALUATION BOARD/KIT/MODULE (EVM) ADDITIONAL TERMS Texas Instruments (TI) provides the enclosed Evaluation Board/Kit/Module (EVM) under the following conditions: The user assumes all responsibility and liability for proper and safe handling of the goods. Further, the user indemnifies TI from all claims arising from the handling or use of the goods. Should this evaluation board/kit not meet the specifications indicated in the User’s Guide, the board/kit may be returned within 30 days from the date of delivery for a full refund. THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY MADE BY SELLER TO BUYER AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT OF THE INDEMNITY SET FORTH ABOVE, NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Please read the User's Guide and, specifically, the Warnings and Restrictions notice in the User's Guide prior to handling the product. This notice contains important safety information about temperatures and voltages. For additional information on TI's environmental and/or safety programs, please visit www.ti.com/esh or contact TI. No license is granted under any patent right or other intellectual property right of TI covering or relating to any machine, process, or combination in which such TI products or services might be or are used. TI currently deals with a variety of customers for products, and therefore our arrangement with the user is not exclusive. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance, customer product design, software performance, or infringement of patents or services described herein. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE INFORMATION As noted in the EVM User’s Guide and/or EVM itself, this EVM and/or accompanying hardware may or may not be subject to the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) rules. For EVMs not subject to the above rules, this evaluation board/kit/module is intended for use for ENGINEERING DEVELOPMENT, DEMONSTRATION OR EVALUATION PURPOSES ONLY and is not considered by TI to be a finished end product fit for general consumer use. It generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and has not been tested for compliance with the limits of computing devices pursuant to part 15 of FCC or ICES-003 rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against radio frequency interference. Operation of the equipment may cause interference with radio communications, in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct this interference. General Statement for EVMs including a radio User Power/Frequency Use Obligations: This radio is intended for development/professional use only in legally allocated frequency and power limits. Any use of radio frequencies and/or power availability of this EVM and its development application(s) must comply with local laws governing radio spectrum allocation and power limits for this evaluation module. It is the user’s sole responsibility to only operate this radio in legally acceptable frequency space and within legally mandated power limitations. Any exceptions to this are strictly prohibited and unauthorized by Texas Instruments unless user has obtained appropriate experimental/development licenses from local regulatory authorities, which is responsibility of user including its acceptable authorization. For EVMs annotated as FCC – FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION Part 15 Compliant Caution This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. FCC Interference Statement for Class A EVM devices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Interference Statement for Class B EVM devices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. For EVMs annotated as IC – INDUSTRY CANADA Compliant This Class A or B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Concerning EVMs including radio transmitters This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Concerning EVMs including detachable antennas Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed in the user guide with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A ou B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Les changements ou les modifications pas expressément approuvés par la partie responsable de la conformité ont pu vider l’autorité de l'utilisateur pour actionner l'équipement. Concernant les EVMs avec appareils radio Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Concernant les EVMs avec antennes détachables Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante. Le présent émetteur radio a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés dans le manuel d’usage et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur. SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER 【Important Notice for Users of EVMs for RF Products in Japan】 This development kit is NOT certified as Confirming to Technical Regulations of Radio Law of Japan If you use this product in Japan, you are required by Radio Law of Japan to follow the instructions below with respect to this product: 1. Use this product in a shielded room or any other test facility as defined in the notification #173 issued by Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications on March 28, 2006, based on Sub-section 1.1 of Article 6 of the Ministry’s Rule for Enforcement of Radio Law of Japan, 2. Use this product only after you obtained the license of Test Radio Station as provided in Radio Law of Japan with respect to this product, or 3. Use of this product only after you obtained the Technical Regulations Conformity Certification as provided in Radio Law of Japan with respect to this product. Also, please do not transfer this product, unless you give the same notice above to the transferee. Please note that if you could not follow the instructions above, you will be subject to penalties of Radio Law of Japan. Texas Instruments Japan Limited (address) 24-1, Nishi-Shinjuku 6 chome, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo, Japan http://www.tij.co.jp 【無線電波を送信する製品の開発キットをお使いになる際の注意事項】 本開発キットは技術基準適合証明を受けておりません。 本製品のご使用に際しては、電波法遵守のため、以下のいずれかの措置を取っていただく必要がありますのでご注意ください。 1. 電波法施行規則第6条第1項第1号に基づく平成18年3月28日総務省告示第173号で定められた電波暗室等の試験設備でご使用いただく。 2. 実験局の免許を取得後ご使用いただく。 3. 技術基準適合証明を取得後ご使用いただく。 なお、本製品は、上記の「ご使用にあたっての注意」を譲渡先、移転先に通知しない限り、譲渡、移転できないものとします。    上記を遵守頂けない場合は、電波法の罰則が適用される可能性があることをご留意ください。 日本テキサス・インスツルメンツ株式会社 東京都新宿区西新宿6丁目24番1号 西新宿三井ビル http://www.tij.co.jp SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER SPACER EVALUATION BOARD/KIT/MODULE (EVM) WARNINGS, RESTRICTIONS AND DISCLAIMERS For Feasibility Evaluation Only, in Laboratory/Development Environments. Unless otherwise indicated, this EVM is not a finished electrical equipment and not intended for consumer use. It is intended solely for use for preliminary feasibility evaluation in laboratory/development environments by technically qualified electronics experts who are familiar with the dangers and application risks associated with handling electrical mechanical components, systems and subsystems. It should not be used as all or part of a finished end product. Your Sole Responsibility and Risk. You acknowledge, represent and agree that: 1. You have unique knowledge concerning Federal, State and local regulatory requirements (including but not limited to Food and Drug Administration regulations, if applicable) which relate to your products and which relate to your use (and/or that of your employees, affiliates, contractors or designees) of the EVM for evaluation, testing and other purposes. 2. You have full and exclusive responsibility to assure the safety and compliance of your products with all such laws and other applicable regulatory requirements, and also to assure the safety of any activities to be conducted by you and/or your employees, affiliates, contractors or designees, using the EVM. Further, you are responsible to assure that any interfaces (electronic and/or mechanical) between the EVM and any human body are designed with suitable isolation and means to safely limit accessible leakage currents to minimize the risk of electrical shock hazard. 3. Since the EVM is not a completed product, it may not meet all applicable regulatory and safety compliance standards (such as UL, CSA, VDE, CE, RoHS and WEEE) which may normally be associated with similar items. You assume full responsibility to determine and/or assure compliance with any such standards and related certifications as may be applicable. You will employ reasonable safeguards to ensure that your use of the EVM will not result in any property damage, injury or death, even if the EVM should fail to perform as described or expected. 4. You will take care of proper disposal and recycling of the EVM’s electronic components and packing materials. Certain Instructions. It is important to operate this EVM within TI’s recommended specifications and environmental considerations per the user guidelines. Exceeding the specified EVM ratings (including but not limited to input and output voltage, current, power, and environmental ranges) may cause property damage, personal injury or death. If there are questions concerning these ratings please contact a TI field representative prior to connecting interface electronics including input power and intended loads. Any loads applied outside of the specified output range may result in unintended and/or inaccurate operation and/or possible permanent damage to the EVM and/or interface electronics. Please consult the EVM User's Guide prior to connecting any load to the EVM output. If there is uncertainty as to the load specification, please contact a TI field representative. During normal operation, some circuit components may have case temperatures greater than 60°C as long as the input and output are maintained at a normal ambient operating temperature. These components include but are not limited to linear regulators, switching transistors, pass transistors, and current sense resistors which can be identified using the EVM schematic located in the EVM User's Guide. When placing measurement probes near these devices during normal operation, please be aware that these devices may be very warm to the touch. As with all electronic evaluation tools, only qualified personnel knowledgeable in electronic measurement and diagnostics normally found in development environments should use these EVMs. Agreement to Defend, Indemnify and Hold Harmless. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold TI, its licensors and their representatives harmless from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, expenses, costs and liabilities (collectively, "Claims") arising out of or in connection with any use of the EVM that is not in accordance with the terms of the agreement. This obligation shall apply whether Claims arise under law of tort or contract or any other legal theory, and even if the EVM fails to perform as described or expected. Safety-Critical or Life-Critical Applications. If you intend to evaluate the components for possible use in safety critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, such as devices which are classified as FDA Class III or similar classification, then you must specifically notify TI of such intent and enter into a separate Assurance and Indemnity Agreement. Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of any TI components in safety-critical applications. In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms. No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use. Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949. Products Applications Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video RFID www.ti-rfid.com OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 SmartRF™ is a trademark of Texas Instruments SmartRF06 Evaluation Board User’s Guide User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 3/32 Table of Contents 4.1 INSTALLING SMARTRF STUDIO AND USB DRIVERS ................................................................ 7 4.1.1 SmartRF Studio ................................................................................................................. 7 4.1.2 FTDI USB driver ................................................................................................................ 7 5.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ........................................................................................... 11 6.1 XDS100V3 EMULATOR ...................................................................................................... 13 6.1.1 UART back channel ........................................................................................................ 14 6.2 POWER SOURCES ............................................................................................................. 14 6.2.1 USB Power ...................................................................................................................... 15 6.2.2 Battery Power .................................................................................................................. 15 6.2.3 External Power Supply .................................................................................................... 16 6.3 POWER DOMAINS .............................................................................................................. 17 6.3.1 XDS Domain ................................................................................................................... 17 6.3.2 EM Domain...................................................................................................................... 17 6.3.3 3.3 V Domain .................................................................................................................. 18 6.4 LCD ................................................................................................................................. 18 6.5 MICRO SD CARD SLOT ...................................................................................................... 19 6.6 ACCELEROMETER .............................................................................................................. 19 6.7 AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR .................................................................................................... 20 6.8 BUTTONS .......................................................................................................................... 20 6.9 LEDS ............................................................................................................................... 21 6.9.1 General Purpose LEDs ................................................................................................... 21 6.9.2 XDS100v3 Emulator LEDs .............................................................................................. 21 6.10 EM CONNECTORS ............................................................................................................. 21 6.11 BREAKOUT HEADERS AND JUMPERS ................................................................................... 23 6.11.1 I/O Breakout Headers ..................................................................................................... 23 6.11.2 XDS100v3 Emulator Bypass Headers ............................................................................ 24 6.11.3 20-pin ARM JTAG Header .............................................................................................. 25 6.11.4 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug Header ................................................................................. 26 6.12 CURRENT MEASUREMENT .................................................................................................. 27 6.12.1 High-side current sensing ............................................................................................... 27 6.12.2 Current Measurement Jumper ........................................................................................ 27 7.1 20-PIN ARM JTAG HEADER .............................................................................................. 29 7.2 10-PIN ARM CORTEX DEBUG HEADER ............................................................................... 29 7.3 CUSTOM STRAPPING ......................................................................................................... 30 List of Figures Figure 1 – Driver install: a) Update driver, b) Specify path to FTDI drivers..................................... 8 Figure 2 – Driver install: a) VCP loaded and b) drivers successfully installed ................................ 8 Figure 3 – SmartRF06EB (rev. 1.2.1) with EM connected ............................................................ 10 Figure 4 – SmartRF06EB architecture .......................................................................................... 12 Figure 5 – SmartRF06EB revision 1.2.1 front side ........................................................................ 13 Figure 6 – SmartRF06EB revision 1.2.1 reverse side ................................................................... 13 Figure 7 – Jumper mounted on J5 to enable the UART back channel ......................................... 14 Figure 8 – Main power switch (P501) and source selection switch (P502) ................................... 15 Figure 9 – SmartRF06EB power selection switch (P502) in “USB” position ................................. 15 Figure 10 – SmartRF06EB power source selection switch (P502) in “BAT” position ................... 16 Figure 11 – SmartRF06EB external power supply header (J501) ................................................ 16 Figure 12 – Power domain overview of SmartRF06EB ................................................................. 17 Figure 13 – Mount a jumper on J502 to bypass EM domain voltage regulator ............................. 18 Figure 14 – Simplified schematic of Ambient Light Sensor setup ................................................. 20 Figure 15 – SmartRF06EB EM connectors RF1 and RF2 ............................................................ 21 User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 4/32 Figure 16 – SmartRF06EB I/O breakout overview ........................................................................ 23 Figure 17 – XDS100v3 Emulator Bypass Header (P408) ............................................................. 24 Figure 18 – 20-pin ARM JTAG header (P409) .............................................................................. 25 Figure 19 – 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header (P410) ................................................................. 26 Figure 20 – Simplified schematic of high-side current sensing setup ........................................... 27 Figure 21 – Measuring current consumption using jumper J503 .................................................. 27 Figure 22 – Simplified connection diagram for different debugging scenarios ............................. 28 Figure 23 – Debugging external target using SmartRF06EB ........................................................ 29 Figure 24 – ARM JTAG header (P409) with strapping to debug external target .......................... 30 List of Tables Table 1 – SmartRF06EB features ................................................................................................... 5 Table 2 – Supply voltage: Recommended operating conditions and absolute max. ratings ........ 11 Table 3 – Temperature: Recommended operating conditions and storage temperatures ........... 11 Table 4 – UART Back channel signal connections ....................................................................... 14 Table 5 – Power domain overview of SmartRF06EB .................................................................... 17 Table 6 – LCD signal connections ................................................................................................. 19 Table 7 – Micro SD Card signal connections ................................................................................ 19 Table 8 – Accelerometer signal connections ................................................................................. 20 Table 9 – Ambient Light Sensor signal connections ..................................................................... 20 Table 10 – Button signal connections ........................................................................................... 20 Table 11 – General purpose LED signal connections ................................................................... 21 Table 12 – EM connector RF1 pin-out........................................................................................... 22 Table 13 – EM connector RF2 pin-out........................................................................................... 22 Table 14 – SmartRF06EB I/O breakout overview ......................................................................... 24 Table 15 – 20-pin ARM JTAG header pin-out (P409) ................................................................... 25 Table 16 – 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header pin-out (P410) ...................................................... 26 Table 17 – Debugging external target: Minimum strapping (cJTAG support) ............................... 30 Table 18 – Debugging external target: Optional strapping ............................................................ 30 User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 5/32 1 Introduction The SmartRF06 Evaluation Board (SmartRF06EB or simply EB) is the motherboard in development kits for Low Power RF ARM Cortex®-M based System on Chips from Texas Instruments. The board has a wide range of features, listed in Table 1 below. Component Description TI XDS100v3 Emulator cJTAG and JTAG emulator for easy programming and debugging of SoCs on Evaluation Modules or external targets. High-speed USB 2.0 interface Easy plug and play access to full SoC control using SmartRF™ Studio PC software. Integrated serial port over USB enables communication between the SoC via the UART back channel. 64x128 pixels serial LCD Big LCD display for demo use and user interface development. LEDs Four general purpose LEDs for demo use or debugging. Micro SD card slot External flash for extra storage, over-the-air upgrades and more. Buttons Five push-buttons for demo use and user interfacing. Accelerometer Three-axis highly configurable digital accelerometer for application development and demo use. Light Sensor Ambient Light Sensor for application development and demo use. Current measurement Current sense amplifier for high side current measurements. Breakout pins Easy access to SoC GPIO pins for quick and easy debugging. Table 1 – SmartRF06EB features 2 About this manual This manual contains reference information about the SmartRF06EB. Chapter 4 will give a quick introduction on how to get started with the SmartRF06EB. It describes how to install SmartRF™ Studio to get the required USB drivers for the evaluation board. Chapter 5 briefly explains how the EB can be used throughout a project’s development cycle. Chapter 6 gives an overview of the various features and functionality provided by the board. A troubleshooting guide is found in chapter 8 and Appendix A contains the schematics for SmartRF06EB revision 1.2.1. The PC tools SmartRF™ Studio and SmartRF™ Flash Programmer have their own user manual. See chapter 9 for references to relevant documents and web pages. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 6/32 3 Acronyms and Abbreviations ALS Ambient Light Sensor cJTAG Compact JTAG (IEEE 1149.7) CW Continuous Wave DK Development Kit EB Evaluation Board EM Evaluation Module FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array I/O Input/Output JTAG Joint Test Action Group (IEEE 1149.1) LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LPRF Low Power RF MCU Micro Controller MISO Master In, Slave Out (SPI signal) MOSI Master Out, Slave In (SPI signal) NA Not Applicable / Not Available NC Not Connected RF Radio Frequency RTS Request to Send RX Receive SoC System on Chip SPI Serial Peripheral Interface TI Texas Instruments TP Test Point TX Transmit UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit USB Universal Serial Bus VCP Virtual COM Port User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 7/32 4 Getting Started Before connecting the SmartRF06EB to the PC via the USB cable, it is highly recommended to perform the steps described below. 4.1 Installing SmartRF Studio and USB drivers Before your PC can communicate with the SmartRF06EB over USB, you will need to install the USB drivers for the EB. The latest SmartRF Studio installer [1] includes USB drivers both for Windows x86 and Windows x64 platforms. After you have downloaded SmartRF Studio from the web, extract the zip-file, run the installer and follow the instructions. Select the complete installation to include the SmartRF Studio program, the SmartRF Studio documentation and the necessary drivers needed to communicate with the SmartRF06EB. 4.1.1 SmartRF Studio SmartRF Studio is a PC application developed for configuration and evaluation of many RF-IC products from Texas Instruments. The application is designed for use with SmartRF Evaluation Boards, such as SmartRF06EB, and runs on Microsoft Windows operating systems. SmartRF Studio lets you explore and experiment with the RF-ICs as it gives full overview and access to the devices’ registers to configure the radio and has a control interface for simple radio operation from the PC. This means that SmartRF Studio will help radio system designers to easily evaluate the RF-IC at an early stage in the design process. It also offers a flexible code export function of radio register settings for software developers. The latest version of SmartRF Studio can be downloaded from the Texas Instruments website [1], where you will also find a complete user manual. 4.1.2 FTDI USB driver SmartRF PC software such as SmartRF Studio uses a proprietary USB driver from FTDI [2] to communicate with SmartRF06 evaluation boards. Connect your SmartRF06EB to the computer with a USB cable and turn it on. If you did a complete install of SmartRF Studio, Windows will recognize the device automatically and the SmartRF06EB is ready for use! 4.1.2.1 Install FTDI USB driver manually in Windows If the SmartRF06EB was not properly recognized after plugging it into your PC, try the following steps to install the necessary USB drivers. The steps described are for Microsoft Windows 7, but are very similar to those in Windows XP and Windows Vista. It is assumed that you have already downloaded and installed the latest version of SmartRF Studio 7 [1]. Open the Windows Device Manager and right click on the first “Texas Instruments XDS100v3” found under “Other devices” as shown in Figure 1a. Select “Update Driver Software…” and, in the appearing dialog, browse to \Drivers\ftdi as shown in Figure 1b. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 8/32 a) b) Figure 1 – Driver install: a) Update driver, b) Specify path to FTDI drivers Press Next and wait for the driver to be installed. The selected device should now appear in the Device Manager as “TI XDS100v3 Channel x” (x = A or B) as seen in Figure 2b. Repeat the above steps for the second “Texas Instruments XDS100v3” listed under “Other devices”. 4.1.2.1.1 Enable XDS100v3 UART back channel on Windows If you have both “TI XDS100v3 Channel A” and “TI XDS100v3 Channel B” listed under Universal Serial Bus Controllers, you can proceed. Right click on “TI XDS100v3 Channel B” and select Properties. Under the Advanced tab, make sure “Load VCP” is checked as shown in Figure 2a. A “USB Serial Port” may be listed under “Other devices”, as seen in Figure 1a. Follow the same steps as for the “Texas Instruments XDS100v3” devices to install the VCP driver. When the drivers from \Drivers\ftdi is properly installed, you should see the USB Serial Port device be listed under “Ports (COM & LPT)” as shown in Figure 2b. The SmartRF06EB drivers are now installed correctly. Figure 2 – Driver install: a) VCP loaded and b) drivers successfully installed User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 9/32 4.1.2.2 Install XSD100v3 UART back channel on Linux The ports on SmartRF06EB will typically be mounted as ttyUSB0 or ttyUSB1. The UART back channel is normally mounted as ttyUSB1. 1. Download the Linux drivers from [2]. 2. Untar the ftdi_sio.tar.gz file on your Linux system. 3. Connect the SmartRF06EB to your system. 4. Install driver a. Verify the USB Product ID (PID) and Vendor ID (VID). The TI XDS100v3 USB VID is 0x0403 and the PID is 0xA6D1, but if you wish to find the PID using a terminal window/shell, use > lsusb | grep -i future b. Install driver using modprobe In a terminal window/shell, navigate to the ftdi_sio folder and run > sudo modprobe ftdi_sio vendor=0x403 product=0xA6D1 SmartRF06EB should now be correctly mounted. The above steps have been tested on Fedora and Ubuntu distributions. If the above steps failed, try uninstalling ‘brltty’ prior to step 5 (technical note TN_101, [2]). > sudo apt-get remove brltty User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 10/32 5 Using the SmartRF06 Evaluation Board The SmartRF06EB is a flexible test and development platform that works together with RF Evaluation Modules from Texas Instruments. An Evaluation Module (EM) is a small RF module with RF chip, balun, matching filter, SMA antenna connector and I/O connectors. The modules can be plugged into the SmartRF06EB which lets the PC take direct control of the RF device on the EM over the USB interface. SmartRF06EB currently supports: - CC2538EM SmartRF06EB is included in e.g. the CC2538 development kit. Figure 3 – SmartRF06EB (rev. 1.2.1) with EM connected The PC software that controls the SmartRF06EB + EM is SmartRF Studio. Studio can be used to perform several RF tests and measurements, e.g. to set up a CW signal and send/receive packets. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 11/32 The EB+EM can be of great help during the whole development cycle for a new RF product. - Perform comparative studies. Compare results obtained with EB+EM with results from your own system. - Perform basic functional tests of your own hardware by connecting the radio on your board to SmartRF06EB. SmartRF Studio can be used to exercise the radio. - Verify your own software with known good RF hardware, by simply connecting your own microcontroller to an EM via the EB. Test the send function by transmitting packets from your SW and receive with another board using SmartRF Studio. Then transmit using SmartRF Studio and receive with your own software. - Develop code for your SoC and use the SmartRF06EB as a standalone board without PC tools. The SmartRF06EB can also be used as a debugger interface to the SoCs from IAR Embedded workbench for ARM or Code Composer Studio from Texas Instruments. For details on how to use the SmartRF06EB to debug external targets, see chapter 7. 5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings The minimum and maximum operating supply voltages and absolute maximum ratings for the active components onboard the SmartRF06EB are summarized in Table 2. Table 3 lists the recommended operating temperature and storage temperature ratings. Please refer to the respective component’s datasheet for further details. Component Operating voltage Absolute max. rating Min. [V] Max. [V] Min. [V] Max. [V] XDS100v3 Emulator1 [4] +1.8 +3.6 -0.3 +3.75 LCD [5] +3.0 +3.3 -0.3 +3.6 Accelerometer [6] +1.62 +3.6 -0.3 +4.25 Ambient light sensor [7] +2.32 +5.5 NA +6 Table 2 – Supply voltage: Recommended operating conditions and absolute max. ratings Component Operating temperature Storage temperature Min. [˚C] Max. [˚C] Min. [˚C] Max. [˚C] XDS100v3 Emulator [4] -20 +70 -50 +110 LCD [5] -20 +70 -30 +80 Accelerometer [6] -40 +85 -50 +150 Ambient light sensor [7] -40 +85 -40 +85 Table 3 – Temperature: Recommended operating conditions and storage temperatures 1 The XDS100v3 Emulator is USB powered. Values refer to the supply and I/O pin voltages of the connected target. 2 Recommended minimum operating voltage. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 12/32 6 SmartRF06 Evaluation Board Overview SmartRF06EB acts as the motherboard in development kits for ARM® Cortex™ based Low Power RF SoCs from Texas Instruments. The board has several user interfaces and connections to external interfaces, allowing fast prototyping and testing of both software and hardware. An overview of the SmartRF06EB architecture is found in Figure 4. The board layout is found in Figure 5 and Figure 6, while the schematics are located in Appendix A. This chapter will give an overview of the general architecture of the board and describe the available I/O. The following sub-sections will explain the I/O in more detail. Pin connections between the EM and the evaluation board I/O can be found in section 6.10. EM Domain (1.8 – 3.6 V) XDS Domain 3.3 V Domain EM Connectors Light Sensor Buttons LEDs Accelerometer XDS100v3 Emulator XDS LEDs Level shifter SD Card Reader Load switch 20-pin ARM JTAG Header Bypass Header UART back channel Level shifter 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug Header (c)JTAG USB I/O breakout headers 3.3 V Domain Enable LCD I/O Breakout Headers Figure 4 – SmartRF06EB architecture User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 13/32 EM current measurement testpoint and jumper XDS bypass header 20-pin ARM JTAG Header General purpose buttons UART back channel breakout XDS LEDs 10-pin ARM Cortex Header EM I/O breakout Main power switch Power source selection switch External power supply connector EM reset button Regulator bypass jumper Micro SD card slot LCD Accelerometer LEDs Ambient Light Sensor EM connectors UART back channel enable Jumper Figure 5 – SmartRF06EB revision 1.2.1 front side 1.5 V AAA Alkaline Battery holder XDS100v3 Emulator 1.5 V AAA Alkaline Battery holder CR2032 coin cell battery holder Figure 6 – SmartRF06EB revision 1.2.1 reverse side 6.1 XDS100v3 Emulator The XDS100v3 Emulator from Texas Instruments has cJTAG and regular JTAG support. cJTAG is a 2-pin extension to regular 4-pin JTAG. The XDS100v3 consists of a USB to JTAG chip from FTDI [2] and an FPGA to convert JTAG instructions to cJTAG format. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 14/32 In addition to regular debugging capabilities using cJTAG or JTAG, the XDS100v3 Emulator supports a UART backchannel over a USB Virtual COM Port (VCP) to the PC. The UART back channel supports flow control, 8-N-1 format and data rates up to 12Mbaud. Please see the XDS100v3 emulator product page [4] for detailed information about the emulator. The XDS100v3 Emulator is powered over USB and is switched on as long as the USB cable is connected to the SmartRF06EB and the main power switch (S501) is in the ON position. The XDS100v3 Emulator supports targets with operating voltages between 1.8 V and 3.6. The min (max) operating temperature is -20 (+70) ˚C. 6.1.1 UART back channel The mounted EM can be connected to the PC via the XDS100v3 Emulator’s UART back channel. When connected to a PC, the XDS100v3 is enumerated as a Virtual COM Port (VCP) over USB. The driver used is a royalty free VCP driver from FTDI, available for e.g. Microsoft Windows, Linux and Max OS X. The UART back channel gives the mounted EM access to a four pin UART interface, supporting 8-N-1 format at data rates up to 12 Mbaud. To enable the SmartRF06EB UART back channel the “Enable UART over XDS100v3” jumper (J5), located on the lower right side of the EB, must be mounted (Figure 7). Table 4 shows an overview of the I/O signals related to UART Back Channel. Figure 7 – Jumper mounted on J5 to enable the UART back channel Signal name Description Probe header EM pin RF1.7_UART_RX UART Receive (EM data in) EM_UART_RX (P412.2) RF1.7 RF1.9_UART_TX UART Transmit (EM data out) EM_UART_TX (P412.3) RF1.9 RF1.3_UART_CTS UART Clear To Send signal EM_UART_CTS (P412.4) RF1.3 RF2.18_UART_RTS UART Request To Send signal EM_UART_RTS (P412.5) RF2.18 Table 4 – UART Back channel signal connections 6.2 Power Sources There are three ways to power the SmartRF06EB; batteries, USB bus and external power supply. The power source can be selected using the power source selection switch (S502) seen in Figure 8. The XDS100v3 Emulator can only be powered over USB. The main power supply switch (S501) cuts power to the SmartRF06EB. Never connect batteries and an external power source to the SmartRF06EB at the same time! Doing so may lead to excessive currents that may damage the batteries or cause onboard components to break. The CR2032 coin cell battery is in particular very sensitive to reverse currents (charging) and must never be combined with other power sources (AAA batteries or an external power source). User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 15/32 Figure 8 – Main power switch (P501) and source selection switch (P502) 6.2.1 USB Power When the SmartRF06EB is connected to a PC via a USB cable, it can draw power from the USB bus. The onboard voltage regulator supplies approximately 3.3 V to the mounted EM and the EB peripherals. To power the mounted EM and the EB peripherals from the USB bus, the power source selection switch (S502) should be in “USB” position (Figure 9). The maximum current consumption is limited by the regulator to 1500 mA3. Figure 9 – SmartRF06EB power selection switch (P502) in “USB” position 6.2.2 Battery Power The SmartRF06EB can be powered using two 1.5 V AAA alkaline batteries or a 3 V CR2032 coin cell battery. The battery holders for the AAA batteries and the CR2032 coin cell battery are located on the reverse side of the PCB. To power the mounted EM and the EB peripherals using batteries, the power source selection switch (S502) should be in “BAT” position (Figure 10). When battery powered, the EM power domain is by default regulated to 2.1 V. The voltage regulator may be bypassed by mounting a jumper on J502. See section 6.3.2 for more details. Do not power the SmartRF06EB using two 1.5 V AAA batteries and a 3 V CR2032 coin cell battery at the same time. Doing so may lead to excessive currents that may damage the batteries or cause onboard components to break. 3 Note that most USB power sources are limited to 500 mA. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 16/32 Figure 10 – SmartRF06EB power source selection switch (P502) in “BAT” position 6.2.3 External Power Supply The SmartRF06EB can be powered using an external power supply. To power the mounted EM and the EB peripherals using an external power supply, the power source selection switch (S502) should be in “BAT” position (Figure 10 in section 6.2.2). The external supply’s ground should be connected to the SmartRF06EB ground, e.g. to the ground pad in the top left corner of the EB. Connect the positive supply connector to the external power header J501 (Figure 11). The applied voltage must be in the range from 2.1 V to 3.6 V and limited to max 1.5 A. When powered by an external power supply, the EM power domain is by default regulated to 2.1 V. The voltage regulator may be bypassed by mounting a jumper on J502. See section 6.3.2 for more details. There is a risk of damaging the onboard components if the applied voltage on the external power connector/header is lower than -0.3 V or higher than 3.6 V (combined absolute maximum ratings for onboard components). See section 5.1 for further information. Figure 11 – SmartRF06EB external power supply header (J501) User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 17/32 6.3 Power Domains The SmartRF06EB is divided into three power domains, described in detail in the following sections. The SmartRF06EB components, and what power domain they belong to, is shown in Figure 12 and Table 5 below. XDS domain (3.3 V) XDS100v3, XDS LEDs EM domain (1.8 - 3.6 V) ACC, ALS, keys, LEDs 3.3 V domain (3.3 V) LCD, SD card Power sources USB, batteries, external supply Level shifters Level shifters Mounted EM Figure 12 – Power domain overview of SmartRF06EB Component Power domain Power source Evaluation Module EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external General Purpose LEDs EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external Accelerometer EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external Ambient Light Sensor EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external Current measurement MSP MCU EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external LEDs EM domain (LO_VDD) USB, battery, external XDS100v3 Emulator XDS domain USB XDS100v3 LEDs XDS domain USB SD Card Slot 3.3 V domain (HI_VDD) Same as EM domain LCD 3.3 V domain (HI_VDD) Same as EM domain Table 5 – Power domain overview of SmartRF06EB 6.3.1 XDS Domain The XDS100v3 Emulator (see section 6.1) onboard the SmartRF06EB is in the XDS domain. The XDS domain is powered over USB. The USB voltage supply (+5 V) is down-converted to +3.3 V and +1.5 V for the different components of the XDS100v3 Emulator. The SmartRF06EB must be connected to e.g. a PC over USB for the XDS domain to be powered up. The domain is turned on/off by the SmartRF06EB main power switch. 6.3.2 EM Domain The mounted EM board and most of the SmartRF06EB peripherals are powered in the EM domain and signals in this domain (accessible by the EM), are prefixed “LV_” in the schematics. Table 5 lists the EB peripherals that are powered in the EM domain. The domain is turned on/off by the SmartRF06EB power switch. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 18/32 The EM domain may be powered using various power sources; USB powered (regulated to 3.3 V), battery powered (regulated to 2.1 V or unregulated) and using an external power supply (regulated to 2.1 V or unregulated). When battery powered or powered by an external source, the EM power domain is by default regulated to 2.1 V using a step down converter. The step down converter may be bypassed by mounting a jumper on J502 (Figure 13), powering the EM domain directly from the source. When J502 is not mounted, the EM power domain is regulated to 2.1 V. The maximum current consumption of the EM power domain is then limited by the regulator to 410 mA. Figure 13 – Mount a jumper on J502 to bypass EM domain voltage regulator 6.3.3 3.3 V Domain The 3.3 V domain is a sub domain of the EM domain. The 3.3 V domain is regulated to 3.3 V using a buck-boost converter, irrespective of the source powering the EM domain. Signals in the 3.3V domain (controlled by the EM) are prefixed “HV_” for High Voltage in the schematics. Two EB peripherals are in the 3.3 V domain, the LCD and the SD card slot, as listed in Table 5. These peripherals are connected to the EM domain via level shifters U401 and U402. The 3.3 V domain may be switched on (off) completely by the mounted EM board by pulling signal LV_3.3V_EN to a logical 1 (0). See Table 14 in section 6.11.1 for details about the mapping between the EM and signals onboard the SmartRF06EB. 6.4 LCD The SmartRF06EB comes with a 128x64 pixels display from Electronic Assembly (DOGM128E-6) [4]. The LCD display is available to mounted EM via a SPI interface, enabling software development of user interfaces and demo use. Table 6 shows an overview of the I/O signals related to the LCD. The recommended operating condition for the LCD display is a supply voltage between 3.0 V and 3.3 V. The LCD display is powered from the 3.3 V power domain (HI_VDD). The min (max) operating temperature is -20 (+70) ˚C. The LCD connector on SmartRF06EB is very tight to ensure proper contact between the EM and the LCD. Be extremely cautious when removing the LCD to avoid the display from breaking. NOTE: Mounting a jumper on J502 will not have any effect if the SmartRF06EB is powered over USB (when the power source selection switch, S502, is in “USB” position). User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 19/32 Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_3.3V_EN 3.3 V domain enable signal4 RF1.15 (P407.1) RF1.15 LV_LCD_MODE LCD mode signal RF1.11 (P406.7) RF1.11 ¯L¯V¯_¯L¯C¯D¯_¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ LCD reset signal (active low) RF1.13 (P406.9) RF1.13 ¯L¯V¯_¯L¯C¯D¯_¯C¯¯S LCD Chip Select (active low) RF1.17 (P407.3) RF1.17 LV_SPI_SCK SPI Clock RF1.16_SCK (P407.2) RF1.16 LV_SPI_MOSI SPI MOSI (LCD input) RF1.18_MOSI (P407.4) RF1.18 Table 6 – LCD signal connections 6.5 Micro SD Card Slot The SmartRF06EB has a micro SD card slot for connecting external SD/MMC flash devices (flash device not included). A connected flash device is available to the mounted EM via a SPI interface, giving it access to extra flash, enabling over-the-air upgrades and more. Table 8 shows an overview of I/O signals related to the micro SD card slot. The micro SD card is powered from the 3.3 V power domain (HI_VDD). Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_3.3V_EN 3.3 V domain enable signal4 RF1.15 (P407.1) RF1.15 ¯L¯V¯_¯S¯D¯C¯¯A¯R¯D¯_¯C¯¯S SD card Chip Select (active low) RF2.12 (P411.1) RF2.12 LV_SPI_SCK SPI Clock RF1.16_SCK (P407.2) RF1.16 LV_SPI_MOSI SPI MOSI (SD card input) RF1.18_MOSI (P407.4) RF1.18 LV_SPI_MISO SPI MISO (SD card output) RF1.20_MISO (P407.5) RF1.20 Table 7 – Micro SD Card signal connections 6.6 Accelerometer The SmartRF06EB is equipped with a BMA250 digital accelerometer from Bosch Sensortech [6]. The accelerometer is available to the mounted EM via an SPI interface and has two dedicated interrupt lines. The accelerometer is suitable for application development, prototyping and demo use. Table 8 shows an overview of I/O signals related to the accelerometer. The recommended operating condition for the accelerometer is a supply voltage between 1.62 V and 3.6 V. The min (max) operating temperature is -40 (+85) ˚C. Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_ACC_PWR Acc. power enable signal RF2.8 (P407.8) RF2.8 LV_ACC_INT1 Acc. interrupt signal RF2.16 (P411.5) RF2.16 LV_ACC_INT2 Acc. interrupt signal RF2.14 (P411.3) RF2.14 ¯L¯V¯_¯A¯C¯C¯¯¯C¯S¯ Acc. Chip Select (active low) RF2.10 (P407.9) RF2.10 LV_SPI_SCK SPI Clock RF1.16_SCK (P407.2) RF1.16 LV_SPI_MOSI SPI MOSI (acc. input) RF1.18_MOSI (P407.4) RF1.18 4 The LCD and SD card are both powered in the 3.3 V domain and cannot be powered on/off individually. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 20/32 LV_SPI_MISO SPI MISO (acc. output) RF1.20_MISO (P407.5) RF1.20 Table 8 – Accelerometer signal connections 6.7 Ambient Light Sensor The SmartRF06EB has an analog SFH 5711 ambient light sensor (ALS) from Osram [7] that is available for the mounted EM via the EM connectors, enabling quick application development for demo use and prototyping. Figure 14 and Table 9 shows an overview of I/O signals related to the ambient light sensor. The recommended operating condition for the ambient light sensor is a supply voltage between 2.3 V and 5.5 V. The min (max) operating temperature is -40 (+85) ˚C. Ambient Light Sensor LV_ALS_OUT LV_ALS_PWR 22 kOhm Figure 14 – Simplified schematic of Ambient Light Sensor setup Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_ALS_PWR ALS power enable signal RF2.6 (P407.7) RF2.6 LV_ALS_OUT ALS output signal (analog) RF2.5 (P411.6) RF2.5 Table 9 – Ambient Light Sensor signal connections 6.8 Buttons There are 6 buttons on the SmartRF06EB. Status of the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN and SELECT buttons are available to the mounted EM. These buttons are intended for user interfacing and development of demo applications. The EM RESET button resets the mounted EM by pulling its reset line low (¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯). Table 10 shows an overview of I/O signals related to the buttons. Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_BTN_LEFT Left button (active low) RF1.6 (P406.4) RF1.6 LV_BTN_RIGHT Right button (active low) RF1.8 (P406.5) RF1.8 LV_BTN_UP Up button (active low) RF1.10 (P406.6) RF1.10 LV_BTN_DOWN Down button (active low) RF1.12 (P406.8) RF1.12 LV_BTN_SELECT Select button (active low) RF1.14 (P406.10) RF1.14 ¯L¯V¯_¯B¯T¯N¯_¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ EM reset button (active low) ¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ (P411.4) RF2.15 Table 10 – Button signal connections User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 21/32 6.9 LEDs 6.9.1 General Purpose LEDs The four LEDs D601, D602, D603, D604 can be controlled from the mounted EM and are suitable for demo use and debugging. The LEDs are active high. Table 11 shows an overview of I/O signals related to the LEDs. Signal name Description Probe header EM pin LV_LED_1 LED 1 (red) RF2.11 (P407.10) RF2.11 LV_LED_2 LED 2 (yellow) RF2.13 (P411.2) RF2.13 LV_LED_3 LED 3 (green) RF1.2 (P406.1) RF1.2 LV_LED_4 LED 4 (red-orange) RF1.4 (P406.2) RF1.4 Table 11 – General purpose LED signal connections 6.9.2 XDS100v3 Emulator LEDs The XDS100v3 emulator has two LEDs to indicate its status, D2 and D4. The LEDs are located on the top side of the SmartRF06EB. LED D2 is lit whenever the XDS100v3 Emulator is powered, while LED D4 (ADVANCED MODE) is lit when the XDS100v3 is in an active cJTAG debug state. 6.10 EM Connectors The EM connectors, shown in Figure 15, are used for connecting an EM board to the SmartRF06EB. The connectors RF1 and RF2 are the main interface and are designed to inhibit incorrect mounting of the EM board. The pin-out of the EM connectors is given in Table 12 and Table 13. Figure 15 – SmartRF06EB EM connectors RF1 and RF2 User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 22/32 EM pin Signal name Description Probe header Breakout header RF1.1 GND Ground RF1.2 RF1.2 GPIO signal to EM board P406.1 P403.1-2 RF1.3 RF1.3_UART_CTS UART back channel / GPIO P412.4 P408.15-16 RF1.4 RF1.4 GPIO signal to EM board P406.2 P403.3-4 RF1.5 RF1.5 GPIO signal to EM board P406.3 P403.5-6 RF1.6 RF1.6 GPIO signal to EM board P406.4 P403.7-8 RF1.7 RF1.7_UART_RX UART back channel (EM RX) P412.2 P408.11-12 RF1.8 RF1.8 GPIO signal to EM board P406.5 P403.9-10 RF1.9 RF1.9_UART_TX UART back channel (EM TX) P412.3 P408.13-14 RF1.10 RF1.10 GPIO signal to EM board P406.6 P403.11-12 RF1.11 RF1.11 GPIO signal to EM board P406.7 P403.13-14 RF1.12 RF1.12 GPIO signal to EM board P406.8 P403.15-16 RF1.13 RF1.13 GPIO signal to EM board P406.9 P403.17-18 RF1.14 RF1.14 GPIO signal to EM board P406.10 P403.19-20 RF1.15 RF1.15 GPIO signal to EM board P407.1 P404.1-2 RF1.16 RF1.16_SPI_SCK EM SPI Clock P407.2 P404.3-4 RF1.17 RF1.17 GPIO signal to EM board P407.3 P404.5-6 RF1.18 RF1.18_SPI_MOSI EM SPI MOSI P407.4 P404.7-8 RF1.19 GND Ground RF1.20 RF1.20_SPI_MISO EM SPI MISO P407.5 P404.9-10 Table 12 – EM connector RF1 pin-out EM pin Signal name Description Probe header Breakout header RF2.1 RF2.1_JTAG_TCK JTAG Test Clock P409.9 P408.1-2 RF2.2 GND Ground RF2.3 RF_VDD2 EM power TP10 J503.1-2 RF2.4 RF2.4_JTAG_TMS JTAG Test Mode Select P409.7 P408.3-4 RF2.5 RF2.5 GPIO signal to EM board P407.6 P404.11-12 RF2.6 RF2.6 GPIO signal to EM board P407.7 P404.13-14 RF2.7 RF_VDD1 EM power TP10 J503.1-2 RF2.8 RF2.8 GPIO signal to EM board P407.8 P404.15-16 RF2.9 RF_VDD1 EM power TP10 J503.1-2 RF2.10 RF2.10 GPIO signal to EM board P407.9 P404.17-18 RF2.11 RF2.11 GPIO signal to EM board P407.10 P404.19-20 RF2.12 RF2.12 GPIO signal to EM board P411.1 P405.1-2 RF2.13 RF2.13 GPIO signal to EM board P411.2 P405.3-4 RF2.14 RF2.14 GPIO signal to EM board P411.3 P405.5-6 RF2.15 ¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ EM reset signal (active low) P411.4 P405.7-8 RF2.16 RF2.16 GPIO signal to EM board P411.5 P405.9-10 RF2.17 RF2.17_JTAG_TDI GPIO / JTAG Test Data In P409.5 P408.5-6 RF2.18 RF2.18_UART_RTS GPIO / UART Back Channel P412.5 P408.17-18 RF2.19 RF2.19_JTAG_TDO GPIO / JTAG Test Data Out P409.13 P408.7-8 RF2.20 GND Ground Table 13 – EM connector RF2 pin-out User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 23/32 6.11 Breakout Headers and Jumpers The SmartRF06EB has several breakout headers, giving access to all EM connector pins. An overview of the SmartRF06EB I/O breakout headers is given in Figure 16. Probe headers P406, P407, P411 and P412 give access to the I/O signals of the mounted EM. Breakout headers P403, P404 and P405 allow the user to map any EM I/O signal to any peripheral on the SmartRF06EB. The XDS bypass header (P408) makes it possible to disconnect the XDS100v3 Emulator onboard the EB from the EM. Using the 20-pin ARM JTAG header (P409) or the 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug Header (P410), it is possible to debug external targets using the onboard emulator. Evaluation Module Peripheral probe headers P406, P407, P411 I/O breakout headers P403, P404, P405 SmartRF06EB peripherals ACC, ALS, keys, LCD, LED, SD card XDS bypass header P408 XDS100v3 Emulator 20-pin ARM-JTAG Debug Header P409 10-pin Cortex Debug Header P410 UART back channel probe header P412 Figure 16 – SmartRF06EB I/O breakout overview 6.11.1 I/O Breakout Headers The I/O breakout headers on SmartRF06EB consist of pin connectors P406, P407, P411 and P412. P406, P407 and P411 are located at the top left side of SmartRF06EB. All EM signals available on these probe headers can be connected to or disconnected from SmartRF06EB peripherals using jumpers on headers P403, P404, P405. Probe header P412 is located near the bottom right corner of the SmartRF06EB. The signals available on P412 are connected to the XDS100v3 Emulator’s UART back channel using jumpers on header P408. The I/O breakout mapping between the SmartRF06EB and the mounted EM is given in Table 14. The leftmost column in the below table refers to the silk print seen on the SmartRF06EB. The rightmost column shows the corresponding CC2538 I/O pad on CC2538EM. NOTE: By default, all jumpers are mounted on P403, P404, P405 and P408. The default configuration is assumed in this user’s guide unless otherwise stated. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 24/32 Probe header Silk print EB signal name EM connector CC2538EM I/O P406 RF1.2 LV_LED_3 RF1.2 PC2 RF1.4 LV_LED_4 RF1.4 PC3 RF1.5 NC RF1.5 PB1 RF1.6 LV_BTN_LEFT RF1.6 PC4 RF1.8 LV_BTN_RIGHT RF1.8 PC5 RF1.10 LV_BTN_UP RF1.10 PC6 RF1.11 LV_LCD_MODE RF1.11 PB2 RF1.12 LV_BTN_DOWN RF1.12 PC7 RF1.13 ¯L¯V¯_¯L¯C¯D¯_¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ RF1.13 PB3 RF1.14 LV_BTN_SELECT RF1.14 PA3 P407 RF1.15 LV_3.3V_EN RF1.15 PB4 RF1.16_SCK LV_SPI_SCK RF1.16 PA2 RF1.17 ¯L¯V¯_¯L¯C¯D¯_¯C¯¯S RF1.17 PB5 RF1.18_MOSI LV_SPI_MOSI RF1.18 PA4 RF1.20_MISO LV_SPI_MISO RF1.20 PA5 RF2.5 LV_ALS_OUT RF2.5 PA6 RF2.6 LV_ALS_PWR RF2.6 PA7 RF2.8 LV_ACC_PWR RF2.8 PD4 RF2.10 ¯L¯V¯_¯A¯C¯C¯¯¯C¯S¯ RF2.10 PD5 RF2.11 LV_LED_1 RF2.11 PC0 P411 RF2.12 ¯L¯V¯_¯S¯D¯C¯¯A¯R¯D¯_¯C¯¯S RF2.12 PD0 RF2.13 LV_LED_2 RF2.13 PC1 RF2.14 LV_ACC_INT2 RF2.14 PD1 RF2.15_RESET ¯L¯V¯_¯B¯T¯N¯_¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ RF2.15 nRESET RF2.16 LV_ACC_INT1 RF2.16 PD2 P412 EM_UART_RX RF1.7_UART_RX RF1.7 PA0 EM_UART_TX RF1.9_UART_TX RF1.9 PA1 EM_UART_CTS RF1.3_UART_CTS RF1.3 PB0 EM_UART_RTS RF2.18_UART_RTS RF2.18 PD3 Table 14 – SmartRF06EB I/O breakout overview 6.11.2 XDS100v3 Emulator Bypass Headers The XDS100v3 Emulator bypass header, P408, is by default mounted with jumpers (Figure 17), connecting the XDS100v3 Emulator to a mounted EM or external target. By removing the jumpers on P408, the XDS100v3 Emulator may be disconnected from the target. Figure 17 – XDS100v3 Emulator Bypass Header (P408) User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 25/32 6.11.3 20-pin ARM JTAG Header The SmartRF06EB comes with a standard 20-pin ARM JTAG header [8] (Figure 18), enabling the user to debug an external target using the XDS100v3 Emulator. The pin-out of the ARM JTAG header is given in Table 15. Chapter 7 has more information on how to debug an external target using the XDS100v3 Emulator onboard the SmartRF06EB. Figure 18 – 20-pin ARM JTAG header (P409) Pin Signal Description EB signal name XDS bypass header P409.1 VTRef Voltage reference VDD_SENSE P408.19-20 P409.2 VSupply Voltage supply NC P409.3 nTRST Test Reset NC P409.4 GND Ground GND P409.5 TDI Test Data In RF2.17_JTAG_TDI P408.5-6 P409.6 GND Ground GND P409.7 TMS Test Mode Select RF2.4_JTAG_TMS P408.3-4 P409.8 GND Ground GND P409.9 TCK Test Clock RF2.1_JTAG_TCK P408.1-2 P409.10 GND Ground GND P409.11 RTCK Return Clock NC P409.12 GND Ground GND P409.13 TDO Test Data Out RF2.19_JTAG_TDO P408.7-8 P409.14 GND Ground GND P409.15 nSRST System Reset ¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ P408.9-10 P409.16 GND Ground GND P409.17 DBGRQ Debug Request NC P409.18 GND Ground GND P409.19 DBGACK Debug Acknowledge NC P409.20 GND Ground GND Table 15 – 20-pin ARM JTAG header pin-out (P409) User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 26/32 6.11.4 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug Header The SmartRF06EB comes with a standard 10-pin ARM Cortex debug header [8] (Figure 19), enabling the user to debug an external target using the XDS100v3 Emulator. The ARM Cortex debug header is located near the right hand edge of the EB. The header pin-out is given in Table 16. Chapter 7 has more information on how to debug an external target using the XDS100v3 Emulator onboard the SmartRF06EB. Figure 19 – 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header (P410) Pin Signal Description EB signal name XDS bypass header P410.1 VCC Voltage reference VDD_SENSE P408.19-20 P410.2 TMS Test Mode Select RF2.4_JTAG_TMS P408.3-4 P410.3 GND Ground GND P410.4 TCK Test Clock RF2.1_JTAG_TCK P408.1-2 P410.5 GND Ground GND P410.6 TDO Test Data Out RF2.19_JTAG_TDO P408.7-8 P410.7 KEY Key NC P410.8 TDI Test Data In RF2.17_JTAG_TDI P408.5-6 P410.9 GNDDetect Ground detect GND P410.10 nRESET System Reset ¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ P408.9-10 Table 16 – 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header pin-out (P410) User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 27/32 6.12 Current Measurement The SmartRF06EB provides two options for easy measurements of the current consumption of a mounted EM. The following sections describe these two options in detail. 6.12.1 High-side current sensing The SmartRF06EB comes with a current sensing unit for measuring the current consumption of the mounted EM (Figure 20). The current sensing setup is “high-side”, that is, it measures the current going to the mounted EM. The current is converted to a voltage, available at the CURMEAS_OUTPUT test point (TP11), located near the right edge of the SmartRF06EB. Using the SmartRF06EB together with for example an oscilloscope makes it easy to measure the EM current consumption as a function of time. The relationship between the voltage measured at CURMEAS_OUTPUT, VCURMEAS, and the EM current consumption, IEM, is given by Equation 1 below. 15 V I CURMEAS EM (1) G = 100 0.15 Ohm To EM IEM VCURMEAS Figure 20 – Simplified schematic of high-side current sensing setup 6.12.2 Current Measurement Jumper SmartRF06EB has a current measurement header, J503, for easy measurement of EM current consumption. Header J503 is located on the upper right hand side of the EB. By replacing the jumper with an ammeter, as shown in Figure 21, the current consumption of the mounted EM can be measured. Figure 21 – Measuring current consumption using jumper J503 User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 28/32 7 Debugging an external target using SmartRF06EB You can easily use XDS100v3 Emulator onboard the SmartRF06EB to debug an external target. It is in this chapter assumed that the target is self-powered. When debugging an external, self-powered target using SmartRF06EB, make sure to remove the jumper from the current measurement header (J503) as shown in the second scenario of Figure 22. In this scenario, the onboard XDS100v3 senses the target voltage of the external target. In the left side scenario of the same figure, the XDS100v3 senses the target voltage of the EB’s EM domain. Having a jumper mounted on header J503 when debugging an external target will cause a conflict between the EB’s EM domain supply voltage and the target’s supply voltage. This may result in excess currents, damaging the onboard components of the SmartRF06EB or the target board. In Figure 22, the right hand side scenario shows how it is possible to debug an EM mounted on the SmartRF06EB using an external debugger. In this scenario, all the jumpers must be removed from the SmartRF06EB header P408 to avoid signaling conflicts between the onboard XDS100v3 Emulator and the external debugger. XDS100v3 06EB XDS + EM EM (EM domain) XDS100v3 06EB XDS + external target Ext. target (Target VDD) EM (EM domain) XDS100v3 External debugger + EM External debugger EM (EM domain) P408 (jumpers on) P408 (jumpers off) J503 (mounted) J503 (mounted) J503 (not mounted) Current measurement jumper XDS bypass header P408 (jumpers on) Debug header P409/P410 P409/P410 Figure 22 – Simplified connection diagram for different debugging scenarios User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 29/32 7.1 20-pin ARM JTAG Header The SmartRF06EB has a standard 20-pin ARM JTAG header mounted on the right hand side (P409). Make sure all the jumpers on the XDS bypass header (P408) are mounted and that the jumper is removed from header J503. Connect the external board to the 20-pin ARM JTAG header (P409) using a 20-pin flat cable as seen in Figure 23. Make sure pin 1 on P409 matches pin 1 on the external target. See sections 6.11.3 and 6.11.2 for more info about the 20-pin ARM JTAG header and the XDS bypass header, respectively. Figure 23 – Debugging external target using SmartRF06EB 7.2 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug Header The SmartRF06EB has a standard 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header mounted on the right hand side (P410). Make sure all the jumpers on the XDS bypass header (P408) are mounted and that the jumper is removed from header J503. Connect the external board to the 10-pin ARM JTAG header using a 10-pin flat cable. Make sure pin 1 on P410 matches pin 1 on the external target See sections 6.11.4 and 6.11.2 for more info about the 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug header and the XDS bypass header, respectively. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 30/32 7.3 Custom Strapping If the external board does not have a 20-pin ARM JTAG connector nor a 10-pin ARM Cortex connector, the needed signals may be strapped from the onboard XDS100v3 Emulator to the external target board. Make sure all the jumpers on the XDS bypass header (P408) are mounted and that the jumper is removed from header J503. Table 17 shows the signals that must be strapped between the SmartRF06EB and the target board. Table 18 shows additional signals that are optional or needed for debugging using 4-pin JTAG. Figure 24 shows where the signals listed in Table 17 and Table 18 can be found on the 20-pin ARM JTAG header. EB Signal Name EB Breakout Description VDD_SENSE P409.1 Target voltage supply GND P409.4 Common ground for EB and external board RF2.1_JTAG_TCK P409.9 Test Clock RF2.4_JTAG_TMS P409.7 Test Mode Select Table 17 – Debugging external target: Minimum strapping (cJTAG support) EB Signal Name EB Breakout Description RF2.17_JTAG_TDI P409.5 Test Data In (optional for cJTAG) RF2.19_JTAG_TDO P409.13 Test Data Out (optional for cJTAG) ¯R¯F¯2¯.1¯5¯¯R¯¯E¯S¯E¯T¯ P409.15 Target reset signal (optional) Table 18 – Debugging external target: Optional strapping VDD_SENSE RF2.17_JTAG_TDI RF2.4_JTAG_TMS RF2.1_JTAG_TCK RF2.19_JTAG_TDO GND 2-pin cJTAG 4-pin JTAG Optional + RF2.15_RESET Figure 24 – ARM JTAG header (P409) with strapping to debug external target User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 31/32 8 Frequently Asked Questions Q1 Nothing happens when I power up the evaluation board. Why? A1 Make sure you have a power source connected to the EB. Verify that the power source selection switch (S502) is set correctly according to your power source. When powering the EB from either batteries or an external power source, S502 should be in “BAT” position. When powering the EB over USB, the switch should be in “USB” position. Also, make sure the EM current measurement jumper (J503) is short circuited. Q2 Why are there two JTAG connectors on the SmartRF06EB, which one should I use? A2 The SmartRF06EB comes with two different standard debug connectors, the 20-pin ARM JTAG connector (P409) and the compact 10-pin ARM Cortex debug connector (P410). These debug connectors are there to more easily debug external targets without the need of customized strapping. For more details on how to debug external targets using the SmartRF06EB, see chapter 7. Q3 Can I use the SmartRF06EB to debug an 8051 SoC such as CC2530? A3 No, you cannot debug an 8051 SoC using the SmartRF06EB. Q4 When connecting my SmartRF06EB to my PC, no serial port appears. Why? A4 It may be that the virtual COM port on the SmartRF06EB’s XDS100 channel B hasn’t been enabled. Section 4.1.2.1.1 describes how to enable the Vritual COM Port in the USB driver. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Page 32/32 9 References [1] SmartRF Studio Product Page http://www.ti.com/tool/smartrftm-studio [2] FTDI USB Driver Page http://www.ftdichip.com [3] SmartRF Flash Programmer Product Page http://www.ti.com/tool/flash-programmer [4] XDS100 Emulator Product Page http://processors.wiki.ti.com/index.php/XDS100 [5] Electronic Assembly DOGM128-6 Datasheet http://www.lcd-module.com/eng/pdf/grafik/dogm128e.pdf [6] Bosch Sensortec BMA250 Datasheet http://ae-bst.resource.bosch.com/media/products/dokumente/bma250/bst-bma250- ds002-05.pdf [7] Osram SFH 5711 http://www.osram-os.com [8] Cortex-M Debug Connectors http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.faqs/attached/13634/cortex_debu g_connectors.pdf 10 Document History Revision Date Description/Changes SWRU321A 2013-05-21 Minor fixes to Figure 4. Fixed incorrect EM mapping in Table 11. Added steps for installing SmartRF06EB on Linux. SWRU321 2012-09-07 Initial version. User’s Guide SWRU321A – May 2013 Appendix A Schematics SmartRF06EB 1.2.1 LOW VOLTAGE PERIPHERALS XDS100v3 - FPGA XDS100v3 - FTDI EM INTERFACE/ LEVEL SHIFTERS POWER SUPPLY HIGH VOLTAGE PERIPHERALS 1 FM2 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm 1 FM4 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm H2 HOLE_3 H3 HOLE_3 1 FM5 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm H1 HOLE_3 1 FM6 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm 1 FM1 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm H4 HOLE_3 1 FM3 FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm TP13 TESTPOINT_PAD TP12 TESTPOINT_PAD ISSUED 1(7) SmartRF06EB - Top Level SCALE SHEET DWG NO. REV. DWG COMPANY NAME SIZE FSCM NO. CONTRACT NO. Texas Instruments A3 DRAWN 13/07/12 13/07/12 12/07/12 MAW 1.2.1 APPROVALS DATE CHECKED PRG_TDO EXT_SELECT ADV_MODE V_USB V_USB RESET_N VCCPLF T_TVD VTARGET UART_EN_N P3.3VXDS P1.8V P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS +1.5V P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS 1 2 3 4 STANDBY VDD OUTPUT ASDM GND O1 ASDM 100.000MHZ 1 2 3 Q1 BC846 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 INA+ INAOUTA OUTB V+ INB+ OPA2363 INBVENA ENB U6 OPA2363 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 GND GND GND GND GND UART_EN_N GND VCCPLF CLK_100M P1.5V P3.3VXDS RESET_N DTSA_BYP CBL_DIS EMU1 POD_RLS P3.3VXDS TVD CLK_FAIL SRST_OUT RTCK EMU0 EMU_EN TRST TMS TDO TDI TCK P1.5V P3.3VXDS SUSPEND ALT_FUNC PRG_TCK PRG_TMS PRG_TDI PRG_TDO PRG_TCK PRG_TDI PRG_TMS P3.3VXDS P3.3VXDS PRG_TDO PRG_TRST P3.3VXDS VTARGET P1.5V VTARGET PWRGOOD VTARGET P1.5V ADV_MODE EXT_SELECT T_DIS VTARGET IO32RSB0 GBC0/IO35RSB0 IO13RSB0 GAA0/IO00RSB0 GBC1/IO36RSB0 IO15RSB0 GAA1/IO01RSB0 GAC1/IO05RSB0 GBB0/IO37RSB0 IO19RSB0 GNDQ GBA2/IO41RSB0 GBA0/IO39RSB0 GBB1/IO38RSB0 GBA1/IO40RSB0 GCC2/IO59RSB0 GBB2/IO43RSB0 GDC1/IO61RSB0 IO09RSB0 GCC1/IO51RSB0 GDC0/IO62RSB0 GCC0/IO52RSB0 VMV0 GDA1/IO65RSB0 VCCIB0 GAB1/IO03RSB0 GCA1/IO55RSB0 TDO VCC GBC2/IO45RSB0 VCC VJTAG VCC VCCIB1 VCC IO11RSB0 VMV1 NC GCA0/IO56RSB0 TMS GAC0/IO04RSB0 TRST GDA2/